GE Fanuc Automation

CIMPLICITY® Monitoring and Control Products

CIMPLICITY HMI
for Windows NT and Windows 95

Base System
User’s Manual

GFK-1180F October 1997

 GFL-002

Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents, temperatures, or other
conditions that could cause personal injury exist in the equipment or may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a Warning notice is used.

Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of publication. While efforts have been made to be accurate,
the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software, not to provide
for every possible contingency in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described
herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of
notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation of warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory with respect to, and assumes
no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or usefulness of the information contained herein. No
warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply.

CIMPLICITY is a registered trademark of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

Windows, Windows NT, and Windows 95 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation
DEC, AlphaServer and AlphaStation are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation

This manual was produced using Doc-To-Help®, by WexTech Systems, Inc.

Copyright 1995-1997 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All rights reserved
Preface

What This Manual Is For

This manual provides the information needed to correctly install, configure and
maintain CIMPLICITY software for process monitoring and supervisory control
applications. Use the manual in conjunction with whatever documentation
accompanies the specific computer hardware and monitoring devices at your facility..

Who This Manual Is For

This manual is intended for CIMPLICITY software users who should already have a
basic working knowledge of the facility environment - devices, computer hardware,
and networks - and of the Microsoft for Windows NT operating system.

How This Manual Is Organized

This manual is composed of the sections described below.
Chapter 1. Introduction: Describes the CIMPLICITY Base System functionality,
and shows you how to install the software and start or stop projects.
Chapter 2. Using CIMPLICITY Software: Discusses the program groups and
configuration cabinets used by CIMPLICITY software, and how to manage projects.
Chapter 3. Using CIMPLICITY Configuration Windows: Describes how to use
the Configuration window menus and toolbars. It also shows you how to use the
standard functions and Browser utilities.
Chapter 4. Point Configuration: Explains how to configure points for data
collection.
Chapter 5. Device Configuration: Explains how to configure devices.
Chapter 6. Resource Configuration: Explains how to configure resources.
Chapter 7. Port Configuration: Explains how to configure ports.
Chapter 8. Alarm Class Configuration: Explains how to configure alarm classes.
Chapter 9. Alarm String Configuration: Explains how to configure alarm strings.
Chapter 10. Alarm Configuration: Explains how to configure alarms.

GFK-1180 iii
 Chapter 11. Alarm Audio Support: Shows you how to configure audible alarms.
Chapter 12. Alarm Blocking: Shows you how to implement hierarchical alarm
blocking.
Chapter 13. Alarm Printer Configuration: Shows you how to configure a printer
to record alarm messages.
Chapter 14. Role Configuration: Explains how to configure roles.
Chapter 15. User Configuration: Explains how to configure users.
Chapter 16. Database Logger: Discusses the Database Logger option and how to
configure tables and reports.
Chapter 17. Client Configuration: Shows you how to configure default logins for
CIMPLICITY HMI Viewers on client computers.
Chapter 18: Using CIMPLICITY HMI with CIMPLICITY Control: Shows
you how to import variables from a Control folder into points in an HMI project.
Chapter 19. Configuration Import/Export: Documents the Import/Export utility.
Chapter 20. Using the Alarm Viewer: Documents how to use Alarm Viewer to
configure and display alarm information.
Chapter 21. Using CimView: Explains the features of the graphic screen viewer.
Chapter 22. Using the Point Control Panel Shows you how to use the Point
Control Panel to display point information.
Chapter 23. Using the CIMPLICITY to Windows Server (DDE): Discusses how
to use CWSERV with third-party software such as Microsoft Excel spreadsheets.
Chapter 24. System Utilities: Describes the Show Users and Program Control
features of the System Utilities option.
Chapter 25. Resolving Problems: Discusses how to use the Status Log Viewer and
system log files to find an resolve problems.
Chapter 26. System Management: Discusses system management functions such
as changing global parameters and logical names, and how to remove CIMPLICITY
software from a computer.
Chapter 27. Managing Database Logging: Discusses the installation of ODBC
and Oracle drivers and data sources, how to manage the database for SQL Server,
how to control database disconnect recovery, and how to use the global parameters
for the Database Logger
Chapter 28. Security Features: Discusses the Login Password, Role Privileges,
Setpoint Security, Setpoint Password and Security Audit Trail.
Chapter 29. Using OEM Key: Shows you how to use the OEM key to temporarily
convert a Runtime license to a Development license
Chapter 30. Remote Projects, Point Bridge and Enterprise Server: Discusses
how to configure remote projects, point bridges to remote projects and enterprise
server projects.
Chapter 31. Site Wide Installation: Shows you how to use the Microsoft Systems
Management Server (SMS) for site-wide installations of CIMPLICITY HMI
software.

iv CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180

 Chapter 32. Using CIMPLICITY HMI with Remote Access: Shows you how to
use the Remote Access features of Windows NT and Windows 95 to let users with
CIMPLICITY HMI Viewer software access project data through modems.
Chapter 33. CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway: Shows you how to use this
feature to let users access your CIMPLICITY HMI data over the Internet.

We Welcome Your Comments and Suggestions

At GE Fanuc Automation, we strive to produce quality technical documentation.
After you have used this manual, please take a few moments to complete and return
the Reader’s Comment Card located on the next page.

GFK-1180 Contents v
Contents
Introduction 1-1
About CIMPLICITY HMI Products ...................................................................................... 1-1
What You Receive ................................................................................................................. 1-1
System Architecture ............................................................................................................... 1-2
System Recommendations...................................................................................................... 1-3
For Windows NT on Intel Processors ...................................................................... 1-3
For Windows NT on DEC Alpha Processors........................................................... 1-3
For Windows 95 on Intel Processors ....................................................................... 1-4
Contacting Your Distributor................................................................................................... 1-4
Customer Support................................................................................................................... 1-4
Using the CIMPLICITY Startup Window.............................................................................. 1-5
Installing CIMPLICITY HMI Software ................................................................................. 1-6
Using a Local CD-ROM Drive ................................................................................ 1-6
Using a Shared CD-ROM Drive .............................................................................. 1-7
CIMPLICITY HMI Installation ............................................................................... 1-8
Creating and Loading Floppy Disk Installations .................................................................. 1-12
Command Format .................................................................................................. 1-12
Creating a Floppy Distribution............................................................................... 1-13
Creating A Replacement Floppy ............................................................................ 1-13
Installing CIMPLICITY HMI Software From A Floppy Distribution ................... 1-14
Registering CIMPLICITY HMI Software............................................................................ 1-15
Running the Registration Program ......................................................................... 1-15
Calling for Registration.......................................................................................... 1-16
Entering the Authorization Code............................................................................ 1-17
Running Without Authorization............................................................................. 1-17
Adding A New Option ........................................................................................... 1-18
Upgrading CIMPLICITY software ........................................................................ 1-18
Transferring Licenses ........................................................................................................... 1-20
Network Transfer ................................................................................................... 1-20
Diskette Transfer.................................................................................................... 1-20
Removing CIMPLICITY HMI Software.............................................................................. 1-21
From Windows 95.................................................................................................. 1-21
From Windows NT ................................................................................................ 1-21
Running the Demo Project ................................................................................................... 1-22
Creating A New Project ....................................................................................................... 1-22
Placing Programs or Documents On A Windows 95 Desktop ............................................. 1-23
Placing Programs or Documents In The Windows 95 Start Menu ....................................... 1-23
Starting A Project................................................................................................................. 1-24
Starting a Project with Out of Date Configuration ................................................. 1-24
Stopping A Project ............................................................................................................... 1-25
Using A Viewer.................................................................................................................... 1-26
Example - Displaying A Point On A Viewer ......................................................... 1-26

GFK-1180 vii
 Using CIMPLICITY Software 2-1
Creating A New Project.......................................................................................................... 2-1
New Project Options ................................................................................................ 2-1
Opening a Project ................................................................................................................... 2-3
Configuration Cabinet Toolbar Buttons ................................................................... 2-4
Configuration Cabinet Shortcut Keys....................................................................... 2-4
Setting Project Properties ....................................................................................................... 2-5
Using the Project Wizard ....................................................................................................... 2-7
CIMPLICITY Project Wizard Step 1 of 3 ............................................................... 2-7
CIMPLICITY Project Wizard Step 2 of 3 ............................................................... 2-8
CIMPLICITY Project Wizard Step 3 of 3 ............................................................. 2-10
Installing A Project............................................................................................................... 2-11
Setting CIMPLICITY Options ............................................................................................. 2-12
Setting CIMPLICITY Project Options................................................................... 2-12
Setting Startup Options .......................................................................................... 2-14
Starting CimView Screens Automatically on Windows 95 .................................... 2-16
What’s Running .................................................................................................................... 2-21
How Configuration Updates Are Handled............................................................................ 2-22
Dynamic Update..................................................................................................... 2-22
Logging In ............................................................................................................................ 2-24
Copying A Project to Diskette.............................................................................................. 2-25
CIMPLICITY Command Line Options................................................................................ 2-26

Using the Browsers 3-1

About Browsers...................................................................................................................... 3-1
Browser Menu Options........................................................................................................... 3-3
The File Menu.......................................................................................................... 3-3
The View Menu ....................................................................................................... 3-3
Filtering the Display List........................................................................................................ 3-3
Using Wildcards....................................................................................................... 3-4
Sorting the Display List.......................................................................................................... 3-4
Using the Auto Browser ......................................................................................................... 3-4
Configuring Display Attributes .............................................................................................. 3-5
Adding an Attribute to the Display List ................................................................... 3-6
Removing an Attribute from the Display List .......................................................... 3-6
Reordering Attributes in the Display List................................................................. 3-6

Point Configuration 4-1

About Points........................................................................................................................... 4-1
Naming Points ........................................................................................................................ 4-2
Reserved Words ....................................................................................................... 4-2
Reserved Characters................................................................................................. 4-2
Selecting A Point Class .......................................................................................................... 4-3
Analog Point Types.................................................................................................. 4-3
Boolean Point Types ................................................................................................ 4-4
Text Point Types ...................................................................................................... 4-4
APPL Point Types.................................................................................................... 4-4

viii CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Device Point Data Collection ................................................................................................. 4-5
On Scan.................................................................................................................... 4-5
On Change ............................................................................................................... 4-5
On Demand On Scan................................................................................................ 4-5
On Demand On Change ........................................................................................... 4-5
Unsolicited ............................................................................................................... 4-5
Poll Once ................................................................................................................. 4-5
Virtual Point Calculation Types ............................................................................................. 4-6
Using the Expression Editor .................................................................................... 4-6
Global Points ......................................................................................................... 4-12
Equation Points ...................................................................................................... 4-13
Delta Accum Points ............................................................................................... 4-15
Value Accum Points............................................................................................... 4-18
Average Points ....................................................................................................... 4-20
Max Capture Points................................................................................................ 4-22
Min Capture Points ................................................................................................ 4-24
Timer/Counter Points............................................................................................. 4-26
Histogram Points.................................................................................................... 4-28
Trans-High Accum Points...................................................................................... 4-31
Equation w/Override Points ................................................................................... 4-33
Run-time Notes for Virtual Points........................................................................................ 4-35
Using Array Points ............................................................................................................... 4-35
Numbering Array Elements.................................................................................... 4-35
Calculating Array Limits........................................................................................ 4-36
Configuring Diagnostic Points ............................................................................................. 4-37
Creating a Diagnostic Point ................................................................................... 4-37
Using the Trigger Function .................................................................................................. 4-39
Trigger Point Update Criteria ................................................................................ 4-39
Example 1 - Device Point Interval Trigger ............................................................ 4-41
Example 2 - Efficiency........................................................................................... 4-41
Example 3 - Virtual Point Interval Trigger ............................................................ 4-42
Types of Alarming................................................................................................................ 4-43
Absolute Alarming ................................................................................................. 4-43
On Update Alarming.............................................................................................. 4-43
Rate of Change Alarming....................................................................................... 4-44
Deviation Alarming................................................................................................ 4-44
Types of Data Conversion.................................................................................................... 4-45
Linear Conversion.................................................................................................. 4-45
Custom Conversion................................................................................................ 4-46
Configuring Points ............................................................................................................... 4-47
Display Attributes .................................................................................................. 4-48
Setting Run-Time Point Properties....................................................................................... 4-51
Set Point Security................................................................................................... 4-51
Set Point Password................................................................................................. 4-52
Creating A New Point .......................................................................................................... 4-53
Defining Point Properties ..................................................................................................... 4-54
General Properties.................................................................................................. 4-55
Device Properties................................................................................................... 4-59
Virtual Properties................................................................................................... 4-64
View Properties...................................................................................................... 4-68
Conversion Properties............................................................................................ 4-70
Alarm Properties .................................................................................................... 4-72
Alarm Routing Properties ...................................................................................... 4-75
Alarm Option Properties ........................................................................................ 4-77

GFK-1180 Contents ix
 Device Configuration 5-1
About Devices ........................................................................................................................ 5-1
Configuring Devices............................................................................................................... 5-1
Creating A New Device ........................................................................................... 5-3
Device General Properties ....................................................................................... 5-4
Device-Specific Properties....................................................................................... 5-5
Modifying A Device................................................................................................. 5-5

Resource Configuration 6-1

About Resources..................................................................................................................... 6-1
Configuring Resources ........................................................................................................... 6-1
Creating A New Resource ...................................................................................................... 6-3
Resource Definition ................................................................................................. 6-3

Port Configuration 7-1

About Ports............................................................................................................................. 7-1
Configuring Ports ................................................................................................................... 7-1
Creating A New Port .............................................................................................................. 7-3
Port General Properties ............................................................................................ 7-4
Port-Specific Properties ........................................................................................... 7-4
Changing A Port’s Protocol .................................................................................................... 7-5

Alarm Class Configuration 8-1

About Alarm Classes ............................................................................................................ .. 8-1
Configuring Alarm Classes..................................................................................................... 8-1
Creating A New Alarm Class ................................................................................... 8-3
Audio Support.......................................................................................................... 8-4
Alarm Class Color Assignments............................................................................................. 8-5
Mapping Alarm Class Colors in RGB.DAT ........................................................................... 8-6

Alarm String Configuration 9-1

About Alarm Strings............................................................................................................... 9-1
Configuring Alarm Strings ..................................................................................................... 9-2
Creating A New Alarm String Index ........................................................................ 9-3

Alarm Configuration 10-1

About Alarms ....................................................................................................................... 10-1
Alarm Message Variable Run-time Parameters.................................................................... 10-1
Standard Alarms ................................................................................................................... 10-2
Configuring Alarms.............................................................................................................. 10-4
Creating A New Alarm Definition ......................................................................... 10-5
Alarm Definition Properties for Non-Point Alarms ............................................... 10-6
Alarm Definition Properties for Point Alarms ....................................................... 10-7
Alarm Routing Properties..................................................................................... 10-10
Alarm Options Properties..................................................................................... 10-12

x CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180

 Using Alarm Audio Support 11-1
About Alarm Audio Support ................................................................................................ 11-1
About Prioritizing Alarms...................................................................................... 11-1
Configuring Alarm Audio Support....................................................................................... 11-3
About Alarm Sound Manager .............................................................................................. 11-5
Using the Alarm Sound Manager ......................................................................................... 11-5
Projects Properties ................................................................................................. 11-7
Option Properties ................................................................................................... 11-9
Startup Properties................................................................................................. 11-10

Alarm Blocking Configuration 12-1

About Alarm Blocking ......................................................................................................... 12-1
Assigning Alarms................................................................................................... 12-2
Choosing Blocking Modes..................................................................................... 12-2
Assigning Alarm Priorities..................................................................................... 12-2
Alarm Blocking Rules............................................................................................ 12-3
Configuring Alarm Blocking................................................................................................ 12-4
Creating an Alarm Block Group ............................................................................ 12-5
Adding an Alarm.................................................................................................... 12-6
Removing an Alarm ............................................................................................... 12-6
Modifying an Alarm............................................................................................... 12-6
Modifying an Alarm Block Group ......................................................................... 12-7

Alarm Printer Configuration 13-1

About Alarm Printer Configuration...................................................................................... 13-1
Adding an Alarm Printer ...................................................................................................... 13-2
Alarm Printer Properties....................................................................................................... 13-3
General Properties.................................................................................................. 13-3
Layout Properties ................................................................................................... 13-5
Date/Time Format.................................................................................................. 13-6
More about Redundant Alarm Printers................................................................................. 13-8
Additional Steps for Serial Printers...................................................................................... 13-9
Modifying the Size of the Alarm Queue............................................................................. 13-10
Choosing Delete and Acknowledge Times......................................................................... 13-10

Role Configuration 14-1

About Roles.......................................................................................................................... 14-1
Configuring Roles ................................................................................................................ 14-2
Creating A New Role ........................................................................................................... 14-3
Role Properties....................................................................................................... 14-3

User Configuration 15-1

About Users.......................................................................................................................... 15-1
Configuring Users ................................................................................................................ 15-1
Setting Run-Time User Properties........................................................................................ 15-3
What Happens at Run-Time................................................................................... 15-3
Creating a New User ............................................................................................................ 15-4
User General Properties ......................................................................................... 15-5
User Resource Properties....................................................................................... 15-7

GFK-1180 Contents xi
 Database Logger 16-1
About the Database Logger .................................................................................................. 16-1
Types of Log Files Available ............................................................................................... 16-1
Alarm Logging ....................................................................................................... 16-2
Event Logging........................................................................................................ 16-2
Data Logging.......................................................................................................... 16-3
Group Logging....................................................................................................... 16-3
Application Logging .............................................................................................. 16-3
Creating Tables .................................................................................................................... 16-4
Microsoft Access Note........................................................................................... 16-4
Using Wildcards in Search Strings ....................................................................................... 16-4
Table Characteristics ............................................................................................................ 16-5
Column Definitions ................................................................................................ 16-5
Key Definitions ...................................................................................................... 16-6
Entering from Point Configuration ....................................................................................... 16-7
Point Logging......................................................................................................... 16-7
Alarm Logging ....................................................................................................... 16-9
Using the Table Browser...................................................................................... 16-10
Starting from Your Project’s Configuration Cabinet .......................................................... 16-12
Database Logger Window Menu Options ............................................................ 16-13
Using the Window Pop-Up Menu ........................................................................ 16-14
Database Logger Toolbar Buttons ....................................................................... 16-15
Database Logger Shortcut Keys ........................................................................... 16-15
Creating A New Table........................................................................................................ 16-16
Table Properties ................................................................................................................. 16-17
Default Logging Conditions for the ALARM_LOG Table .................................. 16-18
Logging Conditions for Group and Data Tables .................................................. 16-19
Logging Attributes for ALARM_LOG, EVENT_LOG and Application Tables . 16-22
Logging Attributes for Group and Data Tables.................................................... 16-23
Maintenance Events for All Tables ...................................................................... 16-24
Maintenance Actions for All Tables .................................................................... 16-26
Logging Properties for All Tables........................................................................ 16-28
Filtering the Table List ....................................................................................................... 16-30
Copying a Table ................................................................................................................. 16-30
Renaming A Table.............................................................................................................. 16-31
Deleting A Table ................................................................................................................ 16-31
Reconciling a Table............................................................................................................ 16-32
Creating Uncreated Database Fields .................................................................... 16-33
Removing Unused Microsoft Access Fields......................................................... 16-33
Removing Unused SQL Server and Oracle Fields ............................................... 16-33
Database Logger Properties................................................................................................ 16-34
Parameters............................................................................................................ 16-34
Alarm and Point Logging ..................................................................................... 16-36
Displaying A Table ............................................................................................................ 16-39
Table Menu Options............................................................................................. 16-40
Using The Window Pop-Up Menu....................................................................... 16-41
Table Toolbar Buttons ......................................................................................... 16-42
Adding Points to A Table................................................................................................... 16-42
Removing Points from A Table.......................................................................................... 16-42
Editing Point Logging Properties ....................................................................................... 16-42
Group Table Point Properties............................................................................... 16-43
Data Table Point Properties ................................................................................. 16-44
Alarm Log Table Point Properties ....................................................................... 16-47
Filtering the Point List........................................................................................................ 16-48

xii CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Filtering the Alarm or Event List ....................................................................................... 16-48
Reporting............................................................................................................................ 16-49
Notes on Installing Microsoft Excel..................................................................... 16-49
Installing the Sample Reports .............................................................................. 16-50
Alarm Report...................................................................................................................... 16-51
Setting Alarm Report Parameters......................................................................... 16-52
Generating an Alarm Report ................................................................................ 16-53
Clearing the Alarm Error Log .............................................................................. 16-53
Data Report ........................................................................................................................ 16-54
Setting Data Report Parameters ........................................................................... 16-55
Generating A Data Report.................................................................................... 16-56
Clearing the Data Error Log................................................................................. 16-56
Trend Report ...................................................................................................................... 16-57
Setting Trend Report Parameters ......................................................................... 16-58
Generating A Trend Report.................................................................................. 16-59
Clearing the Trend Error Log............................................................................... 16-59
Printing Reports Automatically .......................................................................................... 16-60
Modifying the CIMPLICITY Service for Automatic Printing ............................. 16-60
Creating a Script .................................................................................................. 16-61
Triggering an Automatic Report .......................................................................... 16-62

Client Configuration 17-1

About Client Configuration.................................................................................................. 17-1
Using Client Configuration .................................................................................................. 17-1
Creating A New Client ......................................................................................................... 17-2
Client Properties .................................................................................................... 17-3

Using CIMPLICITY HMI with CIMPLICITY Control 18-1

About CIMPLICITY HMI and CIMPLICITY Control........................................................ 18-1
Supported Device Protocols................................................................................................. 18-2
Device Properties................................................................................................... 18-2
Associating Folders with Devices .......................................................................... 18-5
Import Process...................................................................................................................... 18-7
Import Rules......................................................................................................................... 18-7
Resolving Point Conflicts..................................................................................................... 18-9
New Point Conflicts ............................................................................................. 18-10
Incorrect Information Conflict ............................................................................. 18-11
Remote Configuration ........................................................................................................ 18-12
Example ............................................................................................................... 18-12

Configuration Import/Export 19-1

Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 19-1
Import/Export Data File Format........................................................................................... 19-2
Sample Data File.................................................................................................... 19-2
Editing CSV Files in Notepad................................................................................ 19-3
Editing CSV Files in Excel .................................................................................... 19-3
Import/Export Configuration Files ....................................................................................... 19-4
Import Field Defaults (ie_deflds.cfg)..................................................................... 19-4
Export Field Formats (ie_formats.cfg)................................................................... 19-5
Import/Export Log File ........................................................................................................ 19-6
Import/Export Log File Name................................................................................ 19-6
Import/Export Log File Format.............................................................................. 19-6

GFK-1180 Contents xiii

 Importing Configuration Data .............................................................................................. 19-7
Import Procedure ................................................................................................... 19-7
Importing in Dynamic Mode.................................................................................. 19-8
Importing Additional Roles.................................................................................... 19-9
Exporting Configuration Data ............................................................................................ 19-10
Export Procedure ................................................................................................. 19-10
Deleting Configuration Data .............................................................................................. 19-12
Specifying Wildcards for Delete .......................................................................... 19-12
Import/Export Field Names................................................................................................ 19-13
Required Fields .................................................................................................... 19-13
Optional Fields..................................................................................................... 19-13
Logicmaster 90 Support ..................................................................................................... 19-33
Supported Field Names ........................................................................................ 19-33
Sample Logicmaster File...................................................................................... 19-33

Using the Alarm Viewer 20-1

About the Alarm Viewer ...................................................................................................... 20-1
Configuring an Alarm Viewer OCX in CimEdit .................................................................. 20-2
Configuring Alarm Viewer Control Properties..................................................................... 20-3
Fields...................................................................................................................... 20-4
Buttons ................................................................................................................... 20-6
Projects .................................................................................................................. 20-9
Display/Sort ......................................................................................................... 20-10
Count Layout........................................................................................................ 20-12
Date Format ......................................................................................................... 20-14
Fonts..................................................................................................................... 20-16
Colors................................................................................................................... 20-17
Viewing the Alarm Viewer OCX List ................................................................................ 20-18
Selecting Alarms .................................................................................................. 20-18
Configuring Alarm Viewer Methods .................................................................................. 20-19
Naming an Alarm Viewer Control ....................................................................... 20-23
Creating an Invoke Method Action ...................................................................... 20-23
Configuring a Stand-Alone Alarm Viewer ......................................................................... 20-24
Alarm Viewer Menus ........................................................................................... 20-25
Alarm Viewer Toolbar Buttons............................................................................ 20-27
Alarm Viewer Shortcut Keys ............................................................................... 20-27
Configuring an Alarm View ............................................................................................... 20-28
Defining the Alarm Count Layout........................................................................ 20-28
Defining the Alarm List Layout ........................................................................... 20-31
Saving the Layout................................................................................................. 20-41
Creating Custom Buttons.................................................................................................... 20-42
Example ............................................................................................................... 20-43
Logging In to the Alarm Viewer......................................................................................... 20-44
Viewing the Alarm List ...................................................................................................... 20-45
Selecting Alarms .................................................................................................. 20-45
Using the Alarm List Buttons ............................................................................................. 20-45
Changing the Setup Parameters............................................................................ 20-46
Refreshing the Alarm List .................................................................................... 20-46
Toggling Between Lists ....................................................................................... 20-46
Displaying User Help ........................................................................................... 20-46
Viewing the Alarm Stack ..................................................................................... 20-47
Viewing Alarm Comments................................................................................... 20-47
Viewing the Alarm’s CimView Screen................................................................. 20-47
Acknowledging an Alarm..................................................................................... 20-48

xiv CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Resetting an Alarm............................................................................................... 20-48
Deleting an Alarm................................................................................................ 20-48
Acknowledging and Resetting an Alarm.............................................................. 20-49
Acknowledging the First Alarm ........................................................................... 20-49
Acknowledging All Alarms.................................................................................. 20-49
Filtering Alarms ................................................................................................................. 20-50
Loading an Alarm Viewer Filter for Display ....................................................... 20-51
Modifying the Current Alarm Viewer Filter ........................................................ 20-51
Saving the Current Alarm Viewer Filter .............................................................. 20-54
Creating A New Alarm Viewer Filter .................................................................. 20-54
Deleting an Alarm Viewer Filter from the List .................................................... 20-54
Declaring a Default Alarm Viewer Filter ............................................................. 20-54
Printing Alarms .................................................................................................................. 20-55
Copying Alarms ................................................................................................................. 20-55
Installing an Alarm Viewer Screen..................................................................................... 20-56
Installing A Screen from Alarm Viewer............................................................... 20-56
Installing an Alarm Viewer Screen from the File Manager.................................. 20-57
Command Line Options ..................................................................................................... 20-57

Using CimView 21-1

About CimView ................................................................................................................... 21-1
Getting Started ..................................................................................................................... 21-1
Window Components ........................................................................................................... 21-2
CimView Menus .................................................................................................... 21-4
Using the Control Menu......................................................................................... 21-7
Using the Window Pop-Up Menu.......................................................................... 21-8
CimView Toolbar Buttons ..................................................................................... 21-8
CimView Shortcut Keys......................................................................................... 21-9
Displaying A CimView Screen .......................................................................................... 21-10
Selecting Action Objects .................................................................................................... 21-11
Executing the Procedure ...................................................................................... 21-12
Executing Slider Setpoints ................................................................................... 21-12
In-Place Edit Setpoint Actions ............................................................................. 21-13
Setting CimView Window Options .................................................................................... 21-14
Displaying CimView Help Information.............................................................................. 21-15
Displaying CimView Screen Help ....................................................................... 21-15
Displaying CimView Object Help ....................................................................... 21-16
Displaying CimView Screen Properties ............................................................................. 21-16
Displaying CimView Object Properties ............................................................................. 21-17
CimView Command Line Options ..................................................................................... 21-17
OLE Controls in CimView................................................................................................. 21-20

Using the Point Control Panel 22-1

About the Point Control Panel.............................................................................................. 22-1
Getting Started ..................................................................................................................... 22-1
Displaying Points ................................................................................................... 22-2
Displaying Point Properties ................................................................................... 22-3
Changing Font Colors ............................................................................................ 22-5
Saving A Point Control Panel Document............................................................... 22-6

GFK-1180 Contents xv
 Using the CIMPLICITY To Windows Server (DDE) 23-1
About The CIMPLICITY To Windows Server .................................................................... 23-1
Command Syntax for CWSERV .......................................................................................... 23-1
Microsoft Excel Example....................................................................................... 23-2
Point Topic Attributes .......................................................................................................... 23-3
Using CWSERV with Microsoft Excel ................................................................................ 23-6
Displaying Point Data ............................................................................................ 23-6
Starting CWSERV ................................................................................................. 23-7
Modifying Point Data............................................................................................. 23-8
Sample Spreadsheets and Macros ........................................................................ 23-10
Command Syntax for System Topic ................................................................................... 23-12
Formats ................................................................................................................ 23-12
System Items ........................................................................................................ 23-12
Topics .................................................................................................................. 23-12
Help...................................................................................................................... 23-13
Error Messages................................................................................................................... 23-14
Remote Access of CWSERV on Windows NT .................................................................. 23-14
Creating a DDE Share.......................................................................................... 23-14
Referencing CWSERV from a Networked NT Client.......................................... 23-15

System Utilities 24-1

About System Utilities.......................................................................................................... 24-1
Using Show Users ................................................................................................................ 24-2
Starting Show Users ............................................................................................... 24-2
Show Users Menu Options..................................................................................... 24-3
Show Users Toolbar Buttons ................................................................................. 24-5
Show Users Shortcut Keys ..................................................................................... 24-5
Changing View Options ......................................................................................... 24-6
Opening A Project in Show Users.......................................................................... 24-6
Searching for User Information.............................................................................. 24-8
Closing A Project View in Show Users.................................................................. 24-8
Using the Login Panel .......................................................................................................... 24-9
Starting the Login Panel......................................................................................... 24-9
Login Panel Menu Options .................................................................................. 24-10
Login Panel Toolbar Buttons ............................................................................... 24-11
Login Panel Shortcut Keys................................................................................... 24-11
Logging out of a Project....................................................................................... 24-12
Logging in to a Project......................................................................................... 24-12
Changing Password .............................................................................................. 24-13
Managing Saved Logins....................................................................................... 24-14
Using Program Control....................................................................................................... 24-16
Starting Program Control ..................................................................................... 24-16
Using CIMPLICITY Program Control................................................................. 24-17
Orderly Startup and Shutdown ............................................................................. 24-18
CIMPLICITY HMI Processes ............................................................................. 24-19
Starting A Halted Process .................................................................................... 24-19
Stopping A Running Process................................................................................ 24-20
Starting All Halted Processes............................................................................... 24-20
Stopping All Running Processes .......................................................................... 24-21
Refreshing the Process List .................................................................................. 24-21
Releasing the Connection..................................................................................... 24-21
Exiting Program Control ...................................................................................... 24-21

xvi CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Resolving Problems 25-1
About CIMPLICITY HMI Log Files ................................................................................... 25-1
System Log Files.................................................................................................... 25-1
Project Log Files.................................................................................................... 25-1
Viewing Log Files.................................................................................................. 25-1
Using the Status Log Viewer................................................................................................ 25-2
Which Status Log File Gets Displayed .................................................................. 25-3
Status Log Viewer Menu Options .......................................................................... 25-4
Status Log Viewer Toolbar Buttons....................................................................... 25-5
Status Log Viewer Shortcut Keys .......................................................................... 25-5
Selecting a Status Log to View............................................................................................. 25-6
Displaying Status Log Message Details ............................................................................... 25-7
Saving the Status Log as a Text File .................................................................................... 25-8
Printing the Status Log File.................................................................................................. 25-9
Selecting a Status Log Printer ............................................................................................ 25-10
Filtering the Status Log Messages...................................................................................... 25-11
Finding Status Log Messages ............................................................................................. 25-12
Finding the Next Status Log Message.................................................................. 25-13
Process Names in Status Log ............................................................................... 25-13
Checking System Output and Error Files ........................................................................... 25-14
Checking Process Output and Error Files........................................................................... 25-14
Backup Process Log Files .................................................................................... 25-15

System Management 26-1

About System Management.................................................................................................. 26-1
Global Parameters ................................................................................................................ 26-1
Editing the File....................................................................................................... 26-1
Parameters Modified through Configuration Functions ......................................... 26-2
Parameters Modified for All Projects .................................................................... 26-4
Parameters Modified Per Project ........................................................................... 26-6
Parameters for Device Communications .............................................................. 26-19
Sample File .......................................................................................................... 26-20
Logical Names.................................................................................................................... 26-21
Editing the File..................................................................................................... 26-22
Base System Logical Name Descriptions............................................................. 26-23
Deleting Login Information................................................................................................ 26-23
Removing Registry Information ......................................................................................... 26-24
Removing Windows 95 Registry Information...................................................... 26-24
Removing Windows NT Registry Information .................................................... 26-25

Managing Database Logging 27-1

About Managing Database Logging..................................................................................... 27-1
ODBC Configuration ........................................................................................................... 27-2
ODBC Drivers ....................................................................................................... 27-2
ODBC Data Sources .............................................................................................. 27-2
Moving Projects..................................................................................................... 27-3
About Custom Data Sources .................................................................................. 27-3
Configuring Microsoft Access Data Sources ......................................................... 27-4
Installing SQL Server............................................................................................. 27-4
Configuring Additional SQL Server Data Sources ................................................ 27-7

GFK-1180 Contents xvii

 Oracle Configuration ............................................................................................................ 27-8
Requirements ......................................................................................................... 27-8
Using Oracle with CIMPLICITY HMI .................................................................. 27-8
Database Management for SQL Server ................................................................................ 27-9
Configuring Additional Locks................................................................................ 27-9
Handling the Transaction Log.............................................................................. 27-10
Creating Tables .................................................................................................................. 27-11
Microsoft Access Note......................................................................................... 27-11
Table Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 27-11
Column Definitions .............................................................................................. 27-11
Key Definitions .................................................................................................... 27-12
Database Disconnect Recovery .......................................................................................... 27-13
Reconnect Wait Period......................................................................................... 27-13
Store and Forward................................................................................................ 27-13
Database Logger Global Parameters .................................................................................. 27-16
DB_ENABLE_TRANSACTIONS ...................................................................... 27-16
DB_TIME_FORMAT.......................................................................................... 27-17
DB_DEBUG ........................................................................................................ 27-17

Security Features 28-1

About CIMPLICITY Security Features................................................................................ 28-1
Login Password...................................................................................................... 28-1
Role Privileges ....................................................................................................... 28-2
Setpoint Security .................................................................................................... 28-2
Setpoint Password .................................................................................................. 28-2
Security Audit Trail................................................................................................ 28-3

Using the OEM Key 29-1

About OEM Key .................................................................................................................. 29-1
Running OEM Key............................................................................................................... 29-1
CIMPLICITY License Agreement ......................................................................... 29-2
Stopping Running Projects..................................................................................... 29-3
Starting OEM Key.................................................................................................. 29-4
Terminating OEM Key........................................................................................... 29-4

Remote Projects, Enterprise Server and Point Bridge 30-1

Remote Projects................................................................................................................ .... 30-1
Creating A New Remote Project ............................................................................ 30-2
Configuring Point Bridge Points .......................................................................................... 30-5
Point Bridge Point Configuration Details .............................................................. 30-5

Site Wide Installation 31-1

Introduction to Site Wide Installation .................................................................................. 31-1
About Microsoft System Management Server (SMS) .......................................................... 31-2
How Client Package Distribution Works ............................................................... 31-3
CIMPLICITY HMI Site Wide Installation Procedure.......................................................... 31-5
Creating the Application Source Directory ............................................................ 31-5
Creating SMS Package for CIMPLICITY HMI installation .................................. 31-7
Creating Job for CIMPLICITY HMI Installation .................................................. 31-8

xviii CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Using CIMPLICITY HMI with Remote Access 32-1
About Remote Access .......................................................................................................... 32 -1
About the Examples in this Document................................................................... 32-2
Before You Start .................................................................................................................. 32-3
Server Setup (Windows NT) ................................................................................................ 32-4
Installing the Remote Access Service .................................................................... 32-4
Further Configuration for the Server...................................................................... 32-7
Client Setup (Windows NT)................................................................................................. 32-9
Installing the Remote Access Service .................................................................... 32-9
Further Configuration for the Viewer .................................................................. 32-10
Client Setup (Windows 95) ................................................................................................ 32-11
Configuring the HOSTS Files ............................................................................................ 32-13
Testing the Connection....................................................................................................... 32-14
Ping ...................................................................................................................... 32-14
Configuring CIMPLICITY Options on the Server ............................................................. 32-14
Accessing a CIMPLICITY HMI Project from a Client...................................................... 32-15
Browsing for a Point ............................................................................................ 32-15
Opening a CimView Screen................................................................................. 32-15

CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway 33-1

About the CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway...................................................................... 33-1
Installing the CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway................................................................. 33-1
Web Server Requirements ..................................................................................... 33-2
Installation Procedure ............................................................................................ 33-2
More about CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway Components ................................ 33-3
Project Setup ........................................................................................................................ 33-3
Testing the Connections ....................................................................................................... 33-4
Validating Project Connections ............................................................................. 33-4
Validating Web Connections ................................................................................. 33-4
Troubleshooting and Error Messages................................................................................... 33-6
Troubleshooting Custom HTML Pages ................................................................. 33-6
Error Messages ...................................................................................................... 33-6
CIMPLICITY HMI Web Data Control ................................................................................ 33-8
Caption (Read/Write Property) .............................................................................. 33-8
DiagException (Read-Only Property) .................................................................... 33-8
DiagRawRequest (Read-Only Property) ................................................................ 33-8
DiagRawResponse (Read-Only Property).............................................................. 33-8
PointGet (Method) ................................................................................................. 33-9
PointSet (Method)................................................................................................ 33-10
We Welcome Your Comments and Suggestions ........................................................................v

Index i

GFK-1180 Contents xix

Introduction

About CIMPLICITY HMI Products

Welcome to GE Fanuc’s CIMPLICITY® HMI for Microsoft Windows NT® and
Windows® 95 product. The CD-ROM you received contains all the software for your
product, plus all the documentation you need to install, configure, and maintain your
CIMPLICITY HMI product software.
This chapter gives you detailed information on installing your CIMPLICITY HMI
software, and provides you with instructions for running the Demo program, and
starting and stopping a project.

What You Receive

You should receive a CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95
distribution CD-ROM and Liner Notes. In addition to software, the CD-ROM
contains on-line copies of all documentation and an electronic book reader.
If you purchased a licensed system, you should also receive:
• CIMPLICITY HMI Software License agreement.
• Licenses for the Base System, Communication Enablers and Options
you purchased.
• An Important Product Information document for the current software
release.
• If you purchased it, optional documentation.
If you believe that items may be missing from your shipment, contact your
distributor.

GFK-1180 1-1
System Architecture
CIMPLICITY HMI software is scalable from a Human Machine Interface to a fully
networked Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition system. The networking
capabilities inherent at all levels within the product line let you achieve levels of
integration that virtually eliminate redundant configuration within a network.

•Status Monitoring and Control

•Graphics Configuration
•Viewer Options Available
•Connects to Server
Viewer
•Status Monitoring and Control
•Graphics Configuration
•Data Collection
•Server Options Available
Ethernet •Connects to Viewer
CIMPLICITY TouchStation

Q R S
1 2 3
T U V
4 5 6
W X Y
7 8 9
+ Z (SP)
Server
- 0 .
DelKeypad
Can

Ctrl
FN
A B C D E F G H

Communication Protocols
F1 F2 F3 Function
F4 F5 Keys
F6 F7 F8 Alt
I J K L M N O P
F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 Glide Point

GE Fanuc

available for a wide variety of

Industrial controllers
Device Communications
Industrial
Controllers
GE Fanuc

CIMPLICITY HMI is based on a client server architecture consisting of Servers and

Viewers. Servers are responsible for the collection and distribution of data. Viewers
connect into Servers and have full access to the collected data for viewing and
control actions.
Servers and Viewers can be easily networked together to seamlessly share data
without the need to replicate your point database from node to node. For example,
points are configured once and only once on a server. Screens can be developed and
stored in a single location on the network and accessed by any other CIMPLICITY
HMI display on the network.
Servers can be licensed to collect data from 75, 150, 300, 700 or an unlimited
number of device points. Exempted from the point count are virtual points, which
reside only in the computer and points collected by another server. This I/O count
architecture satisfies customers with small single node systems, and leverages
CIMPLICITY HMI’s strong client / server architecture for multi-node systems.
CIMPLICITY HMI provides the flexibility to build a larger system through multiple
smaller nodes without forcing you to purchase large and expensive server hardware
to service multiple users

1-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
System Recommendations
Your system must meet the following minimum requirements in order to successfully
install and run CIMPLICITY HMI software.
You should also check the Important Product Information document shipped with
your release for any last-minute changes to these recommendations.
Note

CIMPLICITY HMI Server and Viewer software may be run on Microsoft Windows
95, Microsoft Windows NT Workstation, or Microsoft Windows NT Server
software. However, Microsoft Windows NT Workstation imposes a limit of 10
network connections. Due to this limitation, the number of remote client/server and
device communication connections may be limited. If you require connections to
multiple devices and/or multiple remote nodes, you should purchase Microsoft
Windows Server for these applications.

For Windows NT on Intel Processors


You will need a Pentium class PC (we recommend 90 MHz or better), a VGA
monitor (Graphics Accelerator recommended), and access to a CD-ROM drive.
Depending on the system type, you will also need the following:
System Operating Recommended Recommended
Type System RAM Free Hard Disk
Server Windows NT Server 40 MB 250 MB
Version 4.0
Viewer Windows NT Workstation 32 MB 120 MB
Version 4.0
If you plan to support third party drivers such as Data Highway Plus and Modbus
Plus, you will need an ISA bus.
If you plan to network to other PCs or use the Series 90 TCP/IP driver, you will also
need an Ethernet adapter.

For Windows NT on DEC Alpha Processors

You will need a DEC AlphaStation™ 200 (4/166) or 2100 AlphaServer™ A500MP,
a VGA monitor, and access to a CD-ROM drive. Depending on the system type, you
will also need the following:
System Operating Recommended Recommended
Type System RAM Free Hard Disk
Server Windows NT Server 64 MB 300 MB
Version 4.0
Viewer Windows NT Workstation 40 MB 150 MB
Version 4.0
If you plan to network to other PCs or use the Series 90 TCP/IP driver, you will also
need an Ethernet adapter.

GFK-1180 Introduction 1-3

 For Windows 95 on Intel Processors
You will need a Pentium class PC (we recommend 90 MHz or better), a VGA
monitor (Graphics Accelerator recommended), and access to a CD-ROM drive.
Depending on the system type, you will also need the following:
System Operating Recommended Recommended
Type System RAM Free Hard Disk
Server Windows 95 Version 4.0 32 MB 250 MB
Viewer Windows 95 Version 4.0 32 MB 120 MB
If you plan to network to other PCs or use the Series 90 TCP/IP driver, you will also
need an Ethernet adapter.

Contacting Your Distributor

For more information about purchasing GE Fanuc products, call your distributor.
You can call the GE Fanuc Information Centers at the following numbers for the
location of your nearest GE Fanuc sales representative authorized distributor:
USA and Canada (800) 648-2001
Europe (352) 727979-1
Asia Pacific (65) 566-4919
Latin America (610) 437-7932
Mexico (800) 989-1244

Customer Support
GE Fanuc takes pride in the high quality of the CIMPLICITY software. Great
emphasis has been placed on ensuring the quality of this system throughout
development and testing. In spite of this, from time to time you may encounter
problems or deficiencies in the software or documentation.
If your CIMPLICITY software system is under warranty or is covered by a valid
support contract, you may report problems to the CIMPLICITY Technical Support
Hotline at one of the following numbers:
USA and Canada (800) GE-FANUC or (800) 433-2682
All others (804) 978-6036
The CIMPLICITY Hotline is available from 8 A.M. to 8 P.M. Eastern time, Monday
through Friday, except for regularly scheduled holidays.

1-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Using the CIMPLICITY Startup Window
Whenever you run setup.bat from your CIMPLICITY HMI CD, the CIMPLICITY
HMI Setup window opens.

You can use this window to:

• Install CIMPLICITY HMI software.
• Install CIMPLICITY Web Gateway software.
• Look at the Readme file.
• Install the Documentation Reader.
• Browse the on-line documentation.
• Go directly to the CIMPLICITY HMI Technical Support site on the
Internet.

GFK-1180 Introduction 1-5

Installing CIMPLICITY HMI Software
Before you start, please do the following:
• Make sure that your computer name is correctly sized.
q If you plan to run CIMPLICITY HMI software on networked
computers, the computer name must be less than or equal to nine
(9) characters.
q If you plan to run CIMPLICITY HMI software on a non-networked
computer, the computer name must be less than or equal to 15
characters.
• To verify that your computer name is correctly sized:
q For Windows NT systems, use the Network Settings option
under the Control Panel.
q For Windows 95 systems, use the Network option under the
Control Panel.
• If you are installing a CIMPLICITY HMI Viewer on a Windows 95
computer, and you want to be able to browse remote nodes, you must
enter the local computer name into the hosts file in your Windows
directory (for example, C:\windows\hosts).
• Make sure you have the licenses for the Base System, Communication
Enablers, and Options you purchased handy. You will need them to
register your software when installation is complete
Note
If you are installing a Demo version of this software, you will not need
these licenses.
• Check the Important Product Information document shipped with your
release for any last-minute changes, or special operation notes about the
installation procedure.

Using a Local CD-ROM Drive

To install CIMPLICITY software from a local CD-ROM drive, first place the
CIMPLICITY HMI Distribution CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
• If you are installing on a Windows 95 system with Plug and Play, the
installation procedure starts automatically. Otherwise, open the
Windows Explorer, select the CD-ROM drive, then select setup.bat
on the CIMPLICITY HMI Distribution CD. If you are installing from a
network share, first connect the share as a network drive, then run
setup.bat from that drive.
• If you are installing on a Windows NT system, select the CD-ROM
drive, then select setup.bat on the CIMPLICITY HMI Distribution
CD.

1-6 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Using a Shared CD-ROM Drive
On the computer with the CD-ROM drive, do the following:
1. Open My Computer.
2. Select the CD-ROM drive.
3. Click the right mouse button and select Sharing... from the pop-up
menu.
4. On the Sharing property page for the drive, select Shared As.
5. Enter a name in the Share Name field.
6. Select OK.
On the computer where you want to install CIMPLICITY HMI software:
1. Open My Computer.
2. Click on the Map Network Drive button in the Toolbar.
3. Select a Drive.
4. Specify a path to the shared CD-ROM.
5. Select OK.
You can now open the shared drive and select setup.bat on the CIMPLICITY HMI
Distribution CD.

GFK-1180 Introduction 1-7

 CIMPLICITY HMI Installation
After you select setup.bat on the distribution CD, the CIMPLICITY HMI Setup
window displays. Select Install CIMPLICITY HMI from the list of options. The
installation procedure checks your computer. After it completes its checks, it
displays a series of dialog boxes that guide you through the rest of the installation.

Welcome
The CIMPLICITY HMI System Setup screen opens with the Welcome dialog.

If you want to cancel the installation, select Cancel. Otherwise, select Next to
proceed to the next dialog box.

Software Evaluation License Agreement

Read the software license agreement carefully. If you accept its terms, select Yes. If
not, select No. If you select No, the installation terminates.

1-8 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 CIMPLICITY System Product Options

Select the option you want to install. The options list will be built, and the Change
Destination Location dialog opens.

Change Destination Location

Select the directory where you want to install CIMPLICITY HMI software. You can
select Browse...and browse for a directory, or you can use the default directory
(C:\CIMPLICITY\HMI). After you have chosen a directory, select Next to
continue with the installation.

GFK-1180 Introduction 1-9

 Options

Select the components you want to install for this product option.
Some components in the Components list have more than one option available.
When you select one of these components, its options are displayed in the right-hand
list box. You can select the options you want to install for each of these components.
When you are through, select Next to continue with the installation.

Choose Program Group

Select a Program Folder for CIMPLICITY HMI software (the default is

CIMPLICITY\HMI), and select Next. The file transfer from CD-ROM to the
directory you specified begins.

1-10 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Registration

When installation is complete, you are given an opportunity to register your

CIMPLICITY HMI software.
After you install your software, you have a four day grace period to register it.
During this grace period, you will have full access to the base system and all
communication enablers and options you installed. If you have not licensed your
software by the end of the grace period, your system becomes unlicensed and you
have restricted functionality. For more information on the restrictions, see Running
Without Authorization.
After you register your software, or if you select No from the Registration dialog
box, the Setup Complete dialog box opens.

Setup Complete

For CIMPLICITY HMI software to function correctly, you will need to reboot your
computer. The Setup Complete dialog box gives you the opportunity to reboot your
computer immediately.

GFK-1180 Introduction 1-11

Creating and Loading Floppy Disk Installations
You can use the DSK2FLPY utility to create a floppy disk distribution of
CIMPLICITY HMI software from the CD-ROM distribution. You can also use this
utility to create a replacement floppy for one of the diskettes.
Important

You can only create distributions for the platform you are on. For
example, if you are on an Intel PC, you can only create Intel distributions.

Before you start, make sure that you have enough pre-formatted diskettes to create
the distribution. To find out how many you need:
1. Insert the CIMPLICITY HMI Distribution CD in its drive.
2. Use the File Manager to locate the I386 (if you are on an Intel PC) or
ALPHA (if you are on a DEC Alpha PC).
3. You will see a number of files named DISKn.ID. The number of files
equals the number of diskettes you will need to create the release (for
example, if you see DISK1.ID through DISK17.ID, you will need 17
diskettes for your floppy distribution).

Command Format
The full command format for the DSK2FLPY utility is:
DSK2FLPY [-n<disk_no>] [-t<target_drive>] [?]
The optional arguments are
Argument Description
-n Use this argument to create a specific disk from the CIMPLICITY
Distribution CD-ROM, where <disk_no> is the disk number you
want to create.
This is useful if you find you have a bad floppy, and want to re-
create it. For example, if you find that the fifth diskette is bad, enter
the command DSK2FLPY -n5 to create a new copy.
-t The default target floppy drive is A:. Use this argument if your
floppy drive is not A:.
For example, if your floppy drive is B:, enter the command
DSK2FLPY -tB:.
? Use this argument to access Help for the DSK2FLPY utility.

1-12 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Creating a Floppy Distribution
To create a floppy distribution:
1. Insert the CIMPLICITY HMI Distribution CD in its drive.
2. Use the Explorer to locate DSK2FLPY.EXE in the appropriate
directory on the CD.
• For Intel processors, the directory is I386.
• For DEC Alpha processors, the directory is ALPHA.
3. Open a Command Prompt window.

4. In the Command Prompt window, go to the directory (I386 or ALPHA)

on the CD.
5. Type DSK2FLPY.
If you need to enter additional arguments (such as the target floppy
drive), include them on the Command Line.
6. Follow the instructions in the Command Prompt window. You wil be
prompted to insert each diskette. Don’t forget to mark the diskette with
its sequence number before inserting it in the floppy.

Creating A Replacement Floppy

You can use the DSK2FLPY program to create a replacement floppy diskette if one
of your distribution diskettes is bad. To create a single floppy:
1. Insert the CIMPLICITY HMI Distribution CD in its drive.
2. Use the Explorer to locate DSK2FLPY.EXE in the appropriate
directory on the CD.
• For Intel processors, the directory is I386.
• For DEC Alpha processors, the directory is ALPHA.
3. Open a Command Prompt window.
4. In the Command Prompt window, go to the directory (I386 or ALPHA)
on the CD.
5. Type DSK2FLPY -n<disk_no> and press Enter.
For example: DSK2FLPY -n5 creates a new copy of the fifth floppy
disk.
6. Follow the instructions in the Command Prompt window..

GFK-1180 Introduction 1-13

 Installing CIMPLICITY HMI Software From A Floppy
Distribution
To install CIMPLICITY HMI software from a floppy distribution:
1. Make sure you have the correct distribution (Intel or Alpha) for your
target platform.
2. Insert the first diskette in the floppy drive.
3. Use the Explorer to locate setup.exe on the diskette.
4. Run setup.exe. You will be prompted to insert the rest of the
diskettes as they are needed.
Note

If you think a diskette is not in the correct sequence, you can verify its order by
displaying the diskette contents in the File Manager. You should find a file named
DISK<n> where <n> is the sequence number of the diskette.

1-14 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Registering CIMPLICITY HMI Software
If you purchased a licensed CIMPLICITY HMI system, you will need to register
your software in order to access its full functionality.
Note

If you do not register your software, or you are running a Demo system, see Running
Without Authorization for a description of the restricted functionality.

Before you start, please make sure you have the licenses for the Base System,
Communication Enablers and Options you purchased handy.
You need to do the following to register your system:
• Run the Registration Program and register your user information and
serial numbers.
• Call GE Fanuc to get an Authorization Code.
• Run the Registration Program again and enter your Authorization Code.

Running the Registration Program

To register your software:
1. Select the Registration icon in the CIMPLICITY HMI program group
to begin the CIMPLICITY HMI registration procedure.
2. In the Registration Instructions dialog box:

• To register your software, click the New Registration radio

button.
• To transfer your CIMPICITY HMI license from another computer
to this one, click Transfer Authorization.
Select Next to continue with registration.
3. When you register your CIMPLICITY HMI software, you are also
agreeing to certain terms and conditions as displayed in the Registration
License Agreement dialog box.
If you agree to these terms and conditions, select Yes to continue with
registration.
4. In the Registration User Information dialog box, enter your name,
address, telephone number and fax number. You also need to furnish
this information to GE Fanuc when you request your System
Authorization Code.
After you enter the information, select Next to continue with
registration.
5. In the Registration Serial Numbers dialog box, enter the serial number
for your base system, then enter the serial numbers for your options and
version upgrades.

GFK-1180 Introduction 1-15

 After you enter the information, select Next to continue with
registration.
6. The Registration Authorization dialog box displays the user
information, base serial number and System Key Code you need to give
GE Fanuc.
You can fax or telephone GE Fanuc with your registration information.
Select Print Registration to get a printed copy of your user
information, base serial number and System Key Code. You can then
fax this information to GE Fanuc.
If you call GE Fanuc, you need to have your user information, base
serial number and System Key Code at hand when you place the call.
If you have received your Authorization Code, select Next to continue
with registration.
If you do not have an Authorization Code, select Quit to exit
registration. You can re-enter the Registration program after you
receive the Authorization Code from GE Fanuc and complete
registration at that time.

Calling for Registration

Use one of these numbers to reach GE Fanuc to get your Authorization Code:
Fax: (518) 464-4581
Telephone: (518) 464-4619
Faxes and telephone calls are processed between 8 A.M. and 5 P.M. Eastern time,
Monday through Friday, except for regularly scheduled holidays. Faxes and calls
received after hours, on weekends, or holidays are processed as soon as possible on
the following business day.
If you telephone, please be prepared to provide GE Fanuc with the following
information:
• Your user information
• CIMPLICITY HMI serial numbers
• The System Key Code generated during the registration procedure
Write down your Authorization Code when you receive it from GE Fanuc.

1-16 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Entering the Authorization Code
To enter your Authorization Code:
1. Select the Registration icon in the CIMPLICITY HMI program group
to restart the CIMPLICITY HIM Registration procedure.
2. On the Registration Instructions dialog box, make sure the New
Registration radio button is selected and then select Next.
3. On the License Agreement dialog box, select Yes.
4. On the Registration Serial Numbers dialog box, select Next.
5. On the Registration Authorization dialog box, select Next.
6. On the Registration System Authorization Code dialog box, enter the
Authorization Code you received from GE Fanuc, and then select Next
to conntinue with registration.
7. On the Registration Finish dialog box, select OK to terminate the
Registration program.
You now have successfully registered your CIMPLICITY HMI software. You will
now have full access to the Base System and all the options you installed and
registered.

Running Without Authorization

You can run CIMPLICITY HMI software without a license for the purpose of
demonstrating or testing CIMPLICITY HMI software. You will be able to:
• Run the CIMPLICITY Demo project or any other existing project for
two (2) hours.
• Create and view screens using CimEdit and CimView.
The following run-time restrictions also apply:
• You cannot create, modify, copy or delete points in any project.
• On an unlicensed Server or Viewer node, you cannot communicate with
CIMPLICITY applications on other computers.
• An unlicensed device communications enabler (devcomm) will run for
only two hours regardless of whether the base system has been licensed
or not.

GFK-1180 Introduction 1-17

 Adding A New Option
If you have an installed system and are adding a new product option, do the
following:
1. Run Setup.bat on the CIMPLICITY HMI distribution CD-ROM.
2. Select Install CIMPLICITY HMI.
3. In the Options dialog box, select the options you want to add to your
installation.
4. When the installation completes, reboot your computer.
To register the new product options:
1. Run the Registration program in the CIMPLICITY program group.
2. Enter the serial number for each new option.
You do not need to call GE Fanuc to register your CIMPLICITY HMI software
options.

Upgrading CIMPLICITY software

There are two types of CIMPLICITY HMI upgrades - functional and version. A
functional upgrade lets you upgrade a CIMPLICITY HMI system to a higher device
I/O count, from a runtime to a development system or from a Viewer to a Server. A
version upgrade lets you upgrade to the latest version of software.

Functional Upgrades
CIMPLICITY HMI systems are available with a choice of device I/O counts (50, 75,
150, 300, 700 and unlimited) for both Development and Run-time systems.
You can make any of the following functional upgrades:
• From a lower to a higher point device I/O count
• From a Run-time to a Development system
• From a Viewer to a Server
Contact your distributor for complete information on placing a functional upgrade
order.
To register the upgrade:
1. In the CIMPLICITY Registration Serial Numbers dialog box, select
Change and enter the applicable serial number for the base system you
are registering.
2. Contact GE Fanuc with the new base serial number and System Key
Code to obtain a new System Authorization Code.
3. Enter the new System Authorization Code in the CIMPLICITY
Registration System Authorization Code dialog box.
If you want add additional options, you do not need to contact GE Fanuc. Simply
enter a valid serial number for each option you have purchased and want to enable.

1-18 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Version Upgrades
A Version Upgrade takes an older CIMPLICITY HMI system and upgrades it to the
current version. Contact your distributor for complete information on ordering a
Version Upgrade. Note the following:
• If your current installation is in the 90 day warranty period, the Version
Upgrade is provided free of charge.
• If your current version is out of the 90 day warranty period, you must
purchase the Version Upgrade.

Installing Upgrade Licenses

When you purchase the upgrade, you will be sent an upgrade license. Use the
Registration program to add the license to your current set of installed licenses.
If you are upgrading from v3.0 of CIMPLICITY HMI software, you do not need to
contact GE Fanuc for a new System Authorization Code. Simply add your upgrade
serial number where indicated in the CIMPLICITY Registration Serial Numbers
dialog box.
If you are upgrading from a version prior to v3.0, you must contact GE Fanuc for a
new System Authorization Code after you add your upgrade serial number where
indicated in the CIMPLICITY Registration Serial Numbers dialog box. Be sure to
provide the following information:
• The serial number for your original license
• The serial number for your upgrade license
• The serial numbers for any other CIMPLICITY HMI product options in
use on the system you are upgrading
• The new System Key Code generated by Registration
After you receive a new Authorization Code from GE Fanuc, run the Registration
program and enter the new code to activate the license.

GFK-1180 Introduction 1-19

Transferring Licenses
You may transfer CIMPLICITY HMI software licenses to another computer without
contacting GE Fanuc for a new System Authorization Code. The Registration
program provides utilities that let you transfer your system licenses, key code, and
authorization codes to another computer via diskette. If you are running Microsoft
Windows NT on both computers, you may transfer the licenses over the network.
CIMPLICITY HMI software must be installed on your target computer before you
transfer the licenses.
Important

You must transfer the entire registration (all licenses). Once you
complete the transfer, your source computer becomes an unauthorized
system. If you wish to continue to run fully functional CIMPLICITY
software on the source computer, contact your distributor to purchase
additional licenses.

Network Transfer
Important

Both computers have to be running Microsoft Windows NT for you to

do a network transfer of licenses.

To transfer licenses over a network, do the following:

1. Make sure that you can write to the Windows directory of the target
computer.
2. On the source computer, map the root directory of the target computer
as a network drive.
3. Run the Registration program on the source computer (the one that is
authorized).
4. In the CIMPLICITY Registration Transfer dialog box, select Transfer
via Network.
5. In the Open dialog box, select the Cim.exe file from the WINNT40
directory, then select OK.
When Registration completes, the target system is registered to run CIMPLICITY
HMI software, and the source system is no longer registered.

Diskette Transfer
To transfer licenses via diskette, do the following:
1. Run the Registration program on the target computer (the one that is not
yet authorized).
2. Insert a formatted diskette into the floppy drive on the target computer,
and select Register the Diskette in the CIMPLICITY Registration
Transfer Using Floppy Diskette dialog box, then select Next.

1-20 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 3. Remove the diskette from the target computer and insert it into the
floppy drive on the source computer (the one that is authorized).
4. Run the Registration program on the source computer.
5. In the CIMPLICITY Registration Transfer Using Floppy Diskette
dialog box, select Authorize the Diskette, then select Next.
Remember, after this step completes, CIMPLICITY HMI software is no
longer registered on the source computer.
6. Remove the diskette from the source computer and insert it into the
floppy drive on the target computer.
7. Run the Registration program on the target computer.
8. In the CIMPLICITY Registration Transfer Using Floppy Diskette
dialog box, select and select Authorize the system from the
Authorized diskette, the select Next.
When the utility completes, the target computer is registered to run CIMPLICITY
HMI software.

Removing CIMPLICITY HMI Software

The instructions for removing CIMPLICITY HMI software from Windows 95 and
Windows NT systems are below.
Note

Before you remove CIMPLICITY HMI software from your computer, you should
save any projects that you don’t want to lose. You can save them on diskette, or in a
non-CIMPLICITY directory.

From Windows 95
Perform the following steps to remove CIMPLICITY HMI software from a Windows
95 computer:
1. Use the Add/Remove applet on the Control Panel to remove
CIMPLICITY HMI software.
2. Reboot your computer.

From Windows NT
Perform the following steps to remove CIMPLICITY HMI software from a Windows
NT computer:
1. From the Start menu, open the Control Panel.
2. Open the Add/Remove Programs icon.
3. Select CIMPLICITY HMI from the list of programs, then select
Add/Remove.
4. After the software is removed, reboot your computer.

GFK-1180 Introduction 1-21

Running the Demo Project
A Demo project that showcases the features of CIMPLICITY HMI software is
automatically loaded with your installation unless you select otherwise. To start the
Demo project:
1. From the Start menu, select CIMPLICITY HMI.
2. In the CIMPLICITY HMI menu, select Start Demo.
When the Select CIMPLICITY Project dialog opens:
1. Select the CIMPDEMO project.
2. Select Start. The Starting CIMPDEMO dialog opens and displays the
status of the CIMPLICITY processes as they start.
3. Wait for the CIMPLICITY Login dialog to be displayed.
4. Enter ADMINISTRATOR in the Username input field OK.
5. When the mainmenu screen opens, select any topic to proceed.

Creating A New Project

To create a new project:
1. Select the New Project icon in the CIMPLICITY HMI program group.
The New Project dialog box opens.
2. Enter the new project name and subdirectory, choose the options and
protocols available for the project, select the project path, then select
Create.... The Project Properties dialog box opens.
3. Enable broadcasting and select OK. The CIMPLICITY Project Wizard
- Step 1 of 3 dialog box opens.
At this point, you can use the CIMPLICITY Project Wizard to quickly set up ports,
devices, and points for your project, or you can close the Project Wizard and use the
icons in your project’s Configuration cabinet to configure the elements of your
project. You can also configure points, resources, alarm classes, roles, devices, and
port dynamically while in CimEdit.
After you finish using the CIMPLICITY Project Wizard, you can select Install from
the File menu of your project’s Configuration cabinet and install the project icon in
an appropriate program group. All you need to do in future to access the project is to
click its icon.

1-22 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Placing Programs or Documents On A Windows 95
Desktop
To place a program or document on the Desktop, do the following:
1. Use the Explorer to locate the program or file.
2. Click the item to select it.
3. To copy the item, hold the Ctrl key and drag the item onto the desktop.
To move the item, just drag it onto the desktop.
4. Release the Ctrl key if you used it, and the mouse button.

Placing Programs or Documents In The Windows 95

Start Menu
To place a program or document on the Start Menu, do the following:
1. Use the Explorer to locate the program or file.
2. Click the item to select it.
3. To copy the item, hold the Ctrl key and drag the item over the Start
Button on the task bar. To move the item, just drag it over the Start
Button on the task bar.
4. Release the Ctrl key if you used it, and the mouse button.
Note that during installation, the CIMPLICITY HMI icon is placed on the
Start/Programs menu.

GFK-1180 Introduction 1-23

Starting A Project
CIMPLICITY HMI software gives you several mechanisms for starting a project.
You can:
• Open the project’s Configuration cabinet, then click the Start button on
the Toolbar, or select Start from the Project menu.
• Select the Startup Options icon in the CIMPLICITY HMI program
group and select a project to start.
• Select the Startup Options icon in the CIMPLICITY HMI program
group and select a default project to start when your system is booted.
• Open a user document such as CimView, Alarm Viewer or Point
Control Panel that requires a project. If no project is running, the
Select CIMPLICITY Project dialog box opens. You can use the dialog
box to start a project.

Starting a Project with Out of Date Configuration

A CIMPLICITY HMI project keeps two sets of configuration data. Generally:
• Master data is used by the configuration functions.
• Run-time data is used by the running project.
This lets you make configuration changes without affecting a running project. It also
lets you choose when you want to make the configuration data the run-time data.
Note

When you enable Dynamic Configuration, any changes you make take effect
immediately in the running project because you are making changes in both the
Master and Run-time configuration files.

CIMPLICITY HMI software checks for differences between the Master and Runtime
configuration files when it starts the project.

From a Project Start Request

If you start the project from the Configuration cabinet or using the Startup Options
dialog box, the following message displays:

1-24 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 You can do one of the following:
• Select Yes to perform update the run-time configuration files then start
the project.
• Select No to start the project without updating the run-time
configuration files.
• Select Cancel to cancel the project start request.

From a User Document

If you start the project from a user document, a message similar to the following
displays:

You can do one of the following:

• Select Yes to start the project and open the document without updating
the configuration data.
• Select No to open the document without starting the project.

Stopping A Project
If you want to stop a CIMPLICITY HMI project, do the following:
1. Open the project’s Configuration cabinet. Note that the Stop button is
enabled, and the Start button is disabled.
2. Click the Stop button on the Toolbar, or select Stop from the Project
menu.
3. Select OK when you are asked to "Select OK to terminate
CIMPLICITY on this node".
After the project stops, the Configuration cabinet redisplays. Note that the Start
button is now enabled, and the Stop button is disabled.
You can also use the Startup Options item in the CIMPLICITY HMI menu to stop a
project. To do this:
1. Select Startup Options from the CIMPLICITY HMI menu. The
CIMPLICITY Startup Options dialog box opens, and the currently
running project is displayed in the Running Project field.
2. Select Halt.
3. Select OK when you are asked to "Select OK to terminate
CIMPLICITY on this node".

GFK-1180 Introduction 1-25

Using A Viewer
The CIMPLICITY HMI Viewer option lets you create and view CimView screens,
perform setpoints, acknowledge alarms, or import CIMPLICITY data from servers to
applications on your Viewer.
In addition, if you have installed and licensed a Viewer Development System, you
may create and configure projects on other Servers in your network.

Example - Displaying A Point On A Viewer

For example, you can do the following to create a CimView screen that displays a
point value from a project on your Server node.
1. Select the CimEdit icon in your CIMPLICITY HMI program group.
2. Create a Text object. The dialog box for the object properties opens.
3. Move the cursor to the Expression field in the Display Value input
box.
4. Hold down the right mouse button to open the shortcut menu and select
Browse. The Select A Point dialog box will open.
5. Select the project your Server node is currently running.
6. Select Browse. The Login dialog box will open.
7. Log in to the Server node. The Login dialog box closes, and the Select
A Point dialog box displays the points defined for the current project on
the Server node.
8. Select the Point ID you want to display.
9. Select OK. The Select A Point dialog box closes and the screen
redisplays.
At this point, you can use the Test button on the Toolbar to display the CimView
screen, or you can save the screen and display it using CimView. In either case, the
Text object you created displays the current value of the Point ID on the Server node
project that you selected.

1-26 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Using CIMPLICITY Software

Creating A New Project

To create a new local or remote project, select the New Project icon in the
CIMPLICITY HMI menu.
The project creation procedure displays a series of dialog boxes that let you:
• Select the project type, name, and path.
• Set project properties.
• Use the project wizard to do initial configuration of ports, devices, and
points for the new project.
When the creation procedure is complete, select Install from the File menu to install
the project in a folder.
New Project Options
When you create a new project, the New Project dialog box opens.

GFK-1180 2-1
 Enter information in the following fields to create a new project:
Project Type Select the type of project you want to create.
The type of project you can create is controlled by the
product option you have installed. For example, if you
have installed the HMI Server option, then you can only
create HMI Server base projects.
Project Name Enter the project name in this field.
New Subdirectory The project name you enter will also be used as the
default subdirectory name for the project.
If you want to use another name for your subdirectory,
enter it in this field.
Options You can select the options you want to be available in
this project from the list of all installed options. Set the
check box for each option you want to select.
Protocols You can select the protocols you want to be available in
this project from the list of all installed protocols. Set
the check box for each protocol you want to select.
Project Path Use the Drives and Directory input fields to select a
directory path for the project directory you are creating.
If you want to create the project on another disk in your
network, select Network... to define the network path.
When you have entered your information, select Create... to create the new project
or select Cancel to cancel the create request.
When you select Create..., the Configuration cabinet for the project is created, and
the Project Properties dialog box opens to display the Options properties.

2-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Opening a Project
When you select a CIMPLICITY project’s shortcut menu option from the Start
menu, the CIMPLICITY Configuration cabinet for the project opens.

You can use the menu options in the Configuration cabinet to create a new project,
open a project, delete a project, display project settings, start/stop a project, update
project configuration, open the Project Wizard, enable/disable the Toolbar and Status
bar, enable/disable dynamic configuration update, open an MS-DOS window, display
status logs, start configuration functions, and display Help information.
You can use the icons in the Configuration cabinet to start configuration functions
for your project. For example, to start Point Configuration, double-click the Points
icon.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY Software 2-3

 Configuration Cabinet Toolbar Buttons
The Toolbar buttons available to you are:
New Creates a new project.

Open Opens another project in this window.

Copy Project Copies the current project to a new project.

Dynamic Enables/disables dynamic configuration

updates.
Stop Stops the running project.

Run Runs the stopped project.

Configuration Update Updates run-time configuration data.

Settings Changes project settings.

Project Wizard Runs the Project Wizard.

Configuration Cabinet Shortcut Keys

You can also use various combinations of keystrokes in the Configuration cabinet to
perform commonly used functions:
Ctrl+N Creates a new project.
Ctrl+O Opens another project in this window.
Ctrl+C Copies the current project to a new project.
Ctrl+R Runs the stopped project.
Ctrl+W Runs the Project Wizard.
Ctrl+L Displays the Status Log for the project.
Alt+Spacebar Displays the Control Menu.
Alt+F4 Closes the project window.
Ctrl+Esc Displays the system Task List window.

2-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Setting Project Properties
The Project Properties dialog box opens when you:
• Create a new project, and you select Create... from the New Project
dialog box.
• Select Properties... from the Project menu for a project.
• Click the Settings button on the project Toolbar.
Use the Project Properties dialog box to choose or change general properties and
options for a project.
After you have modified the properties, you can select OK to accept the
modifications, or select Cancel to close the Project Properties dialog box without
accepting any changes.

General Properties

The General properties you can change are:

Project Type If you want to change the project type, enter the new
type in this field. Use the drop-down list button to the
right of the input field to display the list of currently
available project types and select the one you want.
Project Name If you want to change the project name, enter the new
name in this field.
Options Select the options you want for this project from the list
of available options. Set the check box to select an
option. Otherwise, clear the check box.
Protocols Select the device communication protocols you want to
use for this project from the list of available protocols.
Set the check box to select an option. Otherwise, clear
the check box.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY Software 2-5

 Options Properties

The Options properties you can change are:

Enable project broadcast Set this box if you want to broadcast the project
name on the network.
When you broadcast the project name, users on
other nodes that request point data can use the
project name in fully qualified points. Otherwise,
they can only use the node name in fully qualified
points.
Computer name Select the computer the project is to run on when
the project is started.
For all installations, you may run the project on
your computer.
Startup timeout Enter the number of minutes to wait for the
project to start.
The default is 10 minutes.

2-6 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Using the Project Wizard
The Project Wizard dialog box opens when you:
• Create a new project, and you select OK from the Program Groups
dialog box.
• Select Project Wizard... from the Project menu for a project.
• Click the Project Wizard button on the project Toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+W in the project.
You can use the Project Wizard to define ports, devices, and points for a project.

CIMPLICITY Project Wizard Step 1 of 3

The CIMPLICITY Project Wizard Step 1 of 3 dialog box lets you select the
communication protocols you wish to attach to ports on the computer for this project.

Use this dialog box to:

• Add new ports.
• Remove a currently configured port.
• Modify the protocol information for a port.
• Select Next to move to the next page of the Project Wizard.
• Select Close to close the Project Wizard and make no further changes.
• Select Finish to close the Project Wizard and accept all changes.

Adding A New Port

To add a new port to the project configuration:
1. Select the protocol you want to select from the Available Protocols
list.
2. Select Add->.
The New Port dialog box opens for the port you are adding. For more information
on adding a port, see Creating A New Port.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY Software 2-7

 Removing A Port
Note
You will not be allowed to delete a port unless all points and devices for that port
have been deleted.
To remove a currently configured port from the project configuration:
1. Select the port you want to delete from the Configured Ports list.
2. Select Remove. You will be asked if you want to delete the selected
object.
3. Select Yes to delete the port.

Modifying A Port
To modify a currently configured port:
1. Select the port you want to modify from the Configured Ports list.
2. Select Modify.
The Port Properties dialog box for the selected port opens. For more information on
modifying port properties, see the Port Properties for the particular protocol you
selected.

CIMPLICITY Project Wizard Step 2 of 3

The CIMPLICITY Project Wizard Step 2 of 3 dialog box lets you select the devices
you wish to attach to ports for this project.

Use this dialog box to:

• Add new devices.
• Remove a currently configured device.
• Modify the protocol information for a device.
• Select Next to move to the next page of the Project Wizard.
• Select Back to move to the previous page of the Project Wizard.
• Select Close to close the Project Wizard and make no further changes.
• Select Finish to close the Project Wizard and accept all changes.

2-8 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Adding A New Device
To add a new device to the project configuration:
1. Select the port you want to select from the Available Protocols list.
2. Select Add->.
The New Device dialog box opens for the device you are adding. For more
information on adding a device, see Creating A New Device.

Removing A Device
Note
You will not be allowed to delete a device unless all points for that device have been
deleted.
To remove a currently configured device from the project configuration:
1. Select the device you want to delete from the Configured Devices
list.
2. Select Remove. You will be asked if you want to delete the selected
object.
3. Select Yes to delete the device.

Modifying A Device
To modify a currently configured device for the project:
1. Select the port you want to modify from the Configured Ports list.
2. Select Modify.
The Device Properties dialog box for the selected device opens. For more
information on modifying device properties, see the Device Properties for the
particular protocol you selected.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY Software 2-9

 CIMPLICITY Project Wizard Step 3 of 3
The CIMPLICITY Project Wizard Step 3 of 3 dialog box lets you configure points for
devices that you have configured for this project.

Use this dialog box to:

• Add new points.
• Remove a currently configured point.
• Modify the properties for a point.
• Select Back to move to the previous page of the Project Wizard.
• Select Close to close the Project Wizard and make no further changes.
• Select Finish to close the Project Wizard and accept all changes.
Adding A New Point
To add a new point to the project configuration:
1. Select the device you want to select from the Available Devices list.
2. Select Add->.
The New Point dialog box opens for the point you are adding. For more information
on adding a device, see Creating A New Point.
Removing A Point
To remove a currently configured point from the project configuration:
1. Select the point you want to delete from the Configured Points list.
2. Select Remove. You will be asked if you want to delete the selected
object.
3. Select Yes to delete the point.
Modifying A Point
To modify a currently configured point for the project:
1. Select the point you want to modify from the Configured Ports list.
2. Select Modify.
The Point Properties dialog box for the selected point opens. For more information
on modifying point properties, see Creating A New Point.

2-10 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Installing A Project
Once you create a project, you will want to install it in a folder for easy access. In
the Configuration cabinet for your project:
1. Select the File menu.
2. Select Install.
The Create Shortcut dialog box opens and lets you select the folder where you want
to install the shortcut to the project.

Select the folder where you want to place the shortcut. You can also use the New
Folder... button to create a new folder for the shortcut.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY Software 2-11

Setting CIMPLICITY Options
To configure CIMPLICITY options, or to start or stop projects, select the
CIMPLICITY Options menu item from the CIMPLICITY HMI menu.
The CIMPLICITY Options dialog box opens.
Use this dialog box to:
• Halt a currently running project on your Server.
• Start a project on your Server.
• Start a project as a Viewer.
• Select a default project to be run on your Server.
You can also:
• Display the currently running projects on Servers in your network.
• Halt a currently running project on a Server in your network.
• Start a project on a Server in your network (subject to restrictions).

Setting CIMPLICITY Project Options

Use the Projects property page to display, start, and stop projects on a computer.

2-12 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
CIMPLICITY software supports When you open the CIMPLICITY Projects dialog box, it is connected to your
running multiple projects on a single
computer and shows you the currently running projects as well as the projects
computer.
available for running.
You can:
• Start as a Viewer.
• Connect to another computer in your network
• Stop a running project
• Add projects to the list of projects
• Start projects in the Projects list.

Start as a Viewer
To start as a Viewer, select Start Viewer.

Connecting to Another Computer

Important

You can only connect to a project on a remote computer in Windows NT.

You can display the projects currently running on any Server in your network. To do
this:
1. Click the drop-down list button to the right of the Computer Name
field.
2. Select the computer you want to connect to from the list of computers
that are currently running CIMPLICITY software.
If the computer name does not appear in the list, you can type it in the
Computer Name field (the computer name is not visible if no
projects are running).
3. Select Connect.
The projects that are currently running on that computer are displayed in the
Running Projects field.

Stop a Running Project

You may stop any project that is currently running the computer to which you are
currently connected.
To halt a running project:
1. Select the project in the Running projects list.
2. Select Stop. A confirmation dialog box opens.
3. Select Yes to confirm that you want to proceed with the shutdown.
After the project is halted, the project is removed from the Running projects list.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY Software 2-13

 Add a Project to the Projects List
You may add projects to the Projects list. To do this:
1. Select Add. The Open dialog box opens.
2. Use the Open dialog box to search for the project (.gef) file you want.
When you find it, select OK.
The project you select is added to the Projects list.

Start a Project in the Projects List

To start a project in the Projects list:
1. Select the project.
2. Select Start.
3. Verify that you want to start the project.
The project you select is started. When startup is complete, the project name is listed
in the Running projects list.

Setting Startup Options

Use the Startup Options property page to

• Set the network options for the computer.
• Select projects to start when the computer starts.

2-14 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Network Options
You can select one of the following options:
Stand alone Select this option if you do not want to connect to other
projects in your enterprise, and you do not want other
projects in your enterprise to connect to this project.
Accept connections Select this option if you want to connect to other projects
in your enterprise and you want other projects to connect
to this project.

System Boot Options

The projects in this list are projects on your computer’s local drive that you want to
start when the computer boots.
To add a project to the list, select Add. The CIMPLICITY Default Project dialog
box opens.

Use this dialog box to browse for projects to add to the list of projects to be started at
system boot. When you locate a project, select OK to add it to the list and close the
CIMPLICITY Default Project dialog box. Select Cancel to close the dialog box
without selecting a project.
To delete a project from the list, select the project, and then select Delete. The
project is removed from the list.
You can also select the one of the following:
None Select this option if you do not want any of the projects in the
list to start at system boot.
Start as viewer Select this option if you want to start a Viewer (that is, only
start the Router) on this computer when the computer reboots.
Start at boot Select this option if you want to projects in the list to start
when the computer boots. If there are no projects in the list,
only the Router starts.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY Software 2-15

 Starting CimView Screens Automatically on
Windows 95
On a Windows 95 computer, you can configure a CIMPLICITY HMI project to
automatically start at system boot and display an initial CimView screen. To do this
you will need to:
• Disable the Microsoft Network Login prompt
• Set the CIMPLICITY startup options to start a project and load an
initial CimView screen.

Disabling the Microsoft Network Login Prompt

To disable the Microsoft Network Login prompt:
1. Log on to Windows 95 with a User ID that is identical to the
CIMPLICITY User ID. For example, if your CIMPLICITY project is
configured for the user ADMINISTRATOR, log in to Windows 95 as
ADMINISTRATOR.
2. Open the Control Panel and select the Passwords icon. The Passwords
Properties dialog box opens.

2-16 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 3. Select Change Windows Password. The Change Windows
Password dialog box opens.

4. Enter the old Password (or leave it blank if you never entered a
password). Leave the New Password and Confirm New
Password fields blank, and select OK. The Change Windows
Password dialog box closes.
5. Select OK to close the Passwords Properties dialog box.
6. Select the Network icon in the Control Panel. The Network properties
dialog box opens.

7. In the Primary Network Logon field, select Windows Logon.

G. Select OK. You are prompted to reboot your system so that changes
will take effect. After you have rebooted, you will no longer be
prompted to log on.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY Software 2-17

 Setting CIMPLICITY Startup Options
Select CIMPLICITY Options from the CIMPLICITY shortcut menu. The
CIMPLICITY Options dialog box opens.
1. Select the Startup Options page.

2. In the Network Options box, select whether you want to start a stand-
alone project, or accept connections from other projects in your
enterprise.
3. In the System boot options box:
A. Make sure the project(s) you want to start at system boot are listed.
Select Add to browse for projects and add them to the list.
B. On Windows 95 computers, you can select CimView to set a
default CimView screen that opens at startup and define its display
options.
Note
On Windows NT computers, put a shortcut to the CimView screen
in your Start Menu folder for each screen you want to open at
startup. You can enter the startup options for the screen in the
shortcut’s command line.

2-18 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 The Dialog dialog box opens.

C. Enter the starting CimView screen in the Screen field. You can
also select Browse to the right of this field to search for the screen
you want.
D. Set the Start at boot field if you want the CimView screen to be
started automatically when the system boots.
E. Set the following check boxes as needed to define the screen’s
startup options:
Always Maximized
This option always maximizes the initial window to fill
the user’s terminal screen.
The user cannot resize the primary window, and the
window will not rise to the top when a user clicks on it
(this prevents it from obscuring other windows on the
terminal screen).
No Exit
This option does not let the user exit the primary
CimView window.
The Exit menu item is removed from the File menu,
and the Close menu item and Alt+F4 shortcut key are
removed from the Control menu. In addition, the
Close Screen action is ignored in the primary
window.
Keypad
This option opens the popup keypad whenever the user
needs to enter data for Variable setpoints.
This option is required for systems with no keyboard or
keypad.
Zoom to Best Fit
This option sizes the CimView screen to best fit the
window in which it is displayed.
No Menu/Title
This option removes the Menu and Title bars from the
primary CimView window and all subsequent
windows.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY Software 2-19

 No Open
This option prevents users from opening CimView
screens not explicitly identified in Open Screen or
Overlay Screen procedures.
Open and Open Window menu items are removed
from the File menu and the File Open toolbar button
is disabled.
No Resize
This option prevents users from resizing CimView
windows that are displayed.
Captive Mode
This option displays the primary CimView window in
captive state. When the use opens this CimView
screen, the Explorer shuts down. Other screens are
displayed on top of the primary window and the user
will not be able to go below the primary window.
Touch Active
Keeps CimView screens currently being displayed
swapped in. Without this flag, only documents in the
cache are touched periodically to keep them swapped
into memory.
Touch Dynamic
Keeps CimView screens with many dynamic objects
swapped into memory.
Touch Static
Keeps CimView screens with many static objects
swapped into memory.
For more information about these options, see the CIMPLICITY
HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 CimEdit Operation Manual
(GFK-1396).
F. If you want to pre-load the screen cache with selected files, enter the
name of the cache file in the Cache File field. You can also select
Browse to the right of this field to search for the cache file you want.
G. Select OK to save your changes and return to the CIMPLICITY Options
dialog box, or select Cancel to close the Dialog dialog box and return
to the CIMPLICITY Options dialog box without making any changes.
H. Select OK to save the startup options and close the CIMPLICITY
Options dialog box.

2-20 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
What’s Running
A CIMPLICITY project has two layers of programs:
• User Application
• Resident Process
The User Application layer consists of the Alarm Viewer, CimView, CimEdit,
and CWSERV programs. These programs are started by user request and remain
running until the user exits them.
The Resident Process layer consists of a set of programs that are started when you
start your CIMPLICITY project, and that remain running until your CIMPLICITY
project is shut down.
If you are on a Server, the Resident Process layer consists of such programs as the
Router, device drivers, Point Management, Point Data Logger, Alarm Management
Resident Process, and the Point Bridge.
If you are on a Viewer, the only process running in the Resident Process layer is the
Router.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY Software 2-21

How Configuration Updates Are Handled
CIMPLICITY software configuration information is held in files in the project’s
master and data directories. Run-time functions use information from
configuration files in the data directory, while configuration functions use
information in the master directory.
By separating run-time and configuration information in this manner, you can modify
your configuration information while CIMPLICITY software is running, and update
your run-time system as appropriate.
There are times, however, when you want to update configuration information and
have the updated information immediately available to the run-time system. In
CIMPLICITY software, you have the option to update your run-time system by using
the Dynamic Update option.
When Dynamic mode is unavailable, or disabled, all configuration updates are made
to files in the project’s master directory. When configuration data is updated, the
new entries are immediately available to other configuration functions, but they are
not normally available to run-time functions. In order to update your run-time
configuration, you must:
1. Shutdown your project.
2. Select Configuration Update from the Project menu for the project
or click the Configuration Update button on the Toolbar. Note that
the menu option and Toolbar button are disabled if the project is
running.
3. Restart your project.

Dynamic Update
The Dynamic Update option is available only if your user role has been assigned that
option.
If you have permission to use Dynamic Update, you can enable or disable Dynamic
Update from your project, or from individual configuration functions by either of the
following methods:
• Clicking the Dynamic toolbar button.
• Selecting Dynamic from the Tools menu.
In addition, when you enable Dynamic Update, "DYNAMIC" is displayed on the
Status Bar so that you are aware that it is enabled. Once you enable Dynamic
Update, changes made by configuration functions that support this option are put into
effect immediately. Any changes made to configuration data while Dynamic Mode
was disabled are not put into effect until the Configuration Update procedure is
invoked.
You should also be aware that the configuration procedures listed below have
restricted functionality in Dynamic Update mode.

2-22 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Point Configuration
If you are modifying a point in Dynamic Update mode, you cannot change:
• The point type
• The device for a Device point
• The number of array elements
• The calculation type for a Virtual point
• The service for a Virtual point

Device Configuration
In Dynamic Update mode, you may only modify the Enable/Disable state of a device.

Port Configuration
In Dynamic Update mode, you may only modify:
• Base scan rate
• Enable/Disable state of the port
• Retry count

Resource Configuration
You cannot create or modify resources in Dynamic Update mode.

Alarm Class Configuration

You cannot create or modify Alarm Classes in Dynamic Update mode.

Alarm String Configuration

You cannot create or modify Alarm Strings in Dynamic Update mode.

Alarm Printer Configuration

You cannot create or modify Alarm Log Printers in Dynamic Update mode.

Role Configuration
You cannot create or modify Roles in Dynamic Update mode.

Remote Projects
You cannot create or modify remote projects in Dynamic Update mode.

Database Logger
Changes to Database Logger configuration will be accepted while in Dynamic
Update mode, but changes to the running system will not be made dynamically.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY Software 2-23

Logging In
Two levels of logins are available when you use CIMPLICITY software.
1. The Microsoft Windows NT or Windows 95 login screen that is
presented when you start your computer.
2. The CIMPLICITY login screen that is presented when you select a
CIMPLICITY user application (Alarm Viewer, CimEdit, CimView,
or CWSERV) document.
You have a great deal of flexibility in determining when and how users will log in to
CIMPLICITY software. The basic rules are:
• On a Server, if you define a CIMPLICITY username and password that
match the username and password users enter when they log in to
Microsoft Windows NT or Windows 95, whenever users log in to
Microsoft Windows NT or Windows 95, they are automatically logged
in to CIMPLICITY software.
• If you do not do the above, users will be presented with a CIMPLICITY
User Login dialog box when they select their first CIMPLICITY user
application (Alarm Viewer, CimEdit, CimView, or CWSERV).
• After a user exits all open CIMPLICITY applications, the login remains
active for a certain period of time (determined by the CIMPLICITY
system manager). If a user opens a CIMPLICITY application during
this period of time, the user will not need to log in and the previous
username and password remain active. If a user opens a CIMPLICITY
application after this period of time expires, the user will have to log in
again.
• If a user is displaying a CimView screen that has points from remote
projects, the user will have to log in to each of those projects unless you
define common usernames across all projects.
• If a user opens a CIMPLICITY application for a project where a
Remote Project has been defined and the username and password
information are available for users as well as resident processes, the
user will automatically be logged in.
When you log in to CIMPLICITY software, you will be asked for a username and
password, and whether you want to save the username and password for future
logins. If you are on a Viewer, and are connecting to a project on another
CIMPLICITY for Windows NT computer in your network, you will also be asked if
you want to automatically connect to the selected project whenever the Viewer is
rebooted.
If you set the Save Username + Password check box, whenever you select any
documents in the project, you will automatically be logged in to the project with the
saved username and password.
If you set the Reconnect at Startup check box, you are automatically connected
to the project used by the document whenever CIMPLICITY software is started on
your computer.

2-24 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Copying A Project to Diskette
Each CIMPLICITY HMI project has several subdirectories associated with it. The
standard project subdirectories are:
alarm_help If you are creating operator Help files for alarms, put them in this
directory.
arc If you are using the Database Logger option, archive files are put
in this directory.
data All the run-time configuration files reside in this directory.
lock The project lock file resides in this directory.
log All status log files, and program error files reside in this directory.
master All the master copies of configuration files reside in this
directory.
screens All CimView screens reside in this directory by default.
scripts All Basic Control Engine scripts for this project reside in this
directory by default.
To make a backup copy of your project on a diskette, do the following:
Note

If you are backing up a running project, there is a file that is locked when the project
is running. This file will not be copied, and an error message to that effect will be
displayed. You may ignore the message and continue the backup, as the file is
created whenever a CIMPLICITY HMI project is started.

1. Using the Windows Explorer, locate the project directory for the
project you want to back up.
2. To save space on your diskette, you should delete all log files from the
project’s \log directory before making the backup.
If the project is running, some files in this directory may be locked and
will not be deleted.
3. Copy the project’s directory to the diskette.
This method works well for small projects. For large projects, consider zipping the
project and saving the zipped file or backing up the project directories to tape rather
than diskette.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY Software 2-25

CIMPLICITY Command Line Options
You can use the STARTUP.EXE command to start and stop local and remote
projects from a command prompt.
The command format is
startup.exe [<option>]
where the options are:
/help or -help or /? or -? to display help information for this command line option.

/start <project> or -start <project> to start a project on the local computer.

/stop <project> or -stop <project> to stop a project on the local computer.
Important

The /rstart and /rstop options only work on Windows NT

/rstart <project> or -rstart <project> <computer> to start a project on a

remote computer. For example:
startup.exe /rstart z:projects\cimpdemo\cimpdemo.gef alnt04

/rstop <project> or -rstop <project< <computer> to stop a project on a remote

computer. For example:
startup.exe /rstop z:projects\cimpdemo\cimpdemo.gef alnt04

2-26 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Using CIMPLICITY Configuration
Windows

Invoking a Configuration Function

To invoke a configuration function, double-click its icon in your project’s
Configuration Cabinet.
If you have selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the Search
dialog box for the function opens. Select the filtering criteria you want, and then
select OK to open the function’s Configuration window with the filtered list of items
for the function.
If you have not selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the
function’s Configuration window opens with a list of all configured items for that
function.

Configuration Toolbar Buttons

The Toolbar buttons available to you are:
New Item Creates a new item.

Copy Item Copies information for the selected item to a new item.

Delete Deletes the selected item.

Modify Displays and modifies the properties for the selected

item.
Search Searches for a filtered list of items.

Attributes Displays and modifies the attributes for the

Configuration window.
Dynamic Enables or disables dynamic configuration update.

List Displays the list of items.

Details Displays the list of items along with their attributes.

GFK-1180 3-1
Configuration Menu Options
You can use the menu options to create new items, modify, copy, or delete existing
items, toggle the Status Bar display, filter the item list, change the list display
attributes, toggle dynamic updates, and access Help.

File Menu
The File menu functions are:
New Creates an item for this function.
Exit Exits the configuration function

Edit Menu
The Edit menu functions are:
Modify Displays and modifies the properties for the selected item.
Delete Deletes the selected item.
Copy Copies the information for the selected item to a new item.
Rename Renames the selected item. This menu item may be disabled for
some configuration functions
Setup Opens the function’s Properties dialog box. This menu item may be
disabled for some configuration functions

View Menu
The View menu functions are:
Toolbar Enables/disables the display of the Toolbar.
Status Bar Enables/disables the display of the Status bar.
Search... Filters the item list.
Attributes... Displays and modifies the attributes for the Configuration window.
Options... Selects options from the Options dialog box.
List Displays the list of items.
Details Displays the list of items along with their attributes.

Tools Menu
The Tools menu functions are:

Dynamic Enables/disables dynamic configuration updates. This menu item

may be disabled for some configuration functions.

Help Menu
The Help menu functions are:

About Configuration Displays the current version number for the

configuration program.

3-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Base System User’s Manual GFK-1180
Using the Window Pop-Up Menu
The Window Pop-up Menu is available on selected input fields when you create or
modify an item. Use one of the following methods to access this menu:
• Position the cursor in the input field and click the right mouse button.
• Click the Pop-up Menu button to the right of the input field. The
button looks like this: .
If a field does not have a Pop-up Menu button, the right mouse button will not work.
The menu functions are:
New... Displays the dialog for creating a new item.
Edit... Displays the dialog box for editing the current item.
Browse... Displays the dialog box for selecting a new item from the
current set.
Recent items The bottom list contains the ten (10) most recently used
items for the current field.
Any new item you select or enter in the field moves to the
top of the list.
Before you use any items, the first ten items in the
configuration data are listed.

Configuration Shortcut Keys

You can use various combinations of keystrokes in the Configuration window to
perform commonly used functions. The following are the more commonly used ones
that are available for your use:
Ctrl+N Creates a new item.
Ctrl+M Modifies the selected item.
Ctrl+D Deletes the selected item.
Ctrl+C Copies the selected item.
Ctrl+S Filters the item list.
Ctrl+A Displays and modifies the attributes for the Configuration window.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY Configuration Windows 3-3

Changing Configuration Display Attributes
To change the number of items and their display order on the Configuration window,
you can do one of the following:
• Select Attributes... on the View menu.
• Click the Attributes button.
• Press Ctrl+A.
The Configure Display Attributes dialog box opens.

There are two list boxes in this dialog box:

• The Available Attributes box lists the attributes that are not
currently being displayed.
• The Display Attributes box lists the attributes that are currently
being displayed, and the order in which they are displayed.
You can:
• Add attributes from the Available Attributes list to the Display
Attributes list.
• Remove attributes from the Display Attributes list to the Available
Attributes list.
• Reorder the Display Attributes list.
When you are through modifying the display attributes, select OK to close the dialog
box and update the display on the Configuration window, or select Cancel to close
the dialog box without implementing any changes.

Adding an Attribute to the Display List

To add an attribute to the display list:
1. Select the attribute in the Available Attributes box.
2. Select Add.
The attribute is placed on the Display Attributes list just after the currently
highlighted attribute on that list.

3-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Base System User’s Manual GFK-1180

The first item on the Display
Attributes list cannot be removed.
Changing Startup Options
GFK-1180
Removing an Attribute from the Display List
To remove an attribute from the display list:
1. Select the attribute in the Display Attributes list.
2. Select Remove.
The attribute is placed on the Available Attributes list.
Reordering Attributes in the Display Attributes List
To reorder an attribute in the Display Attributes list:
1. Select the attribute.
2. Select Move Up to move the attribute toward the front of the list.
3. Select Move Down to move the attributes toward the end of the list.
To display and modify the options for this configuration function, select Options...
from the View menu. After you initiate the request, the Options dialog box opens.
You can use this dialog box to enable and disable the following options:
Display search criteria at startup
If you set this check box, the Search dialog box opens whenever
you start this configuration function. You can use the Search
dialog box to filter the list of items prior to displaying it.
If you clear this check box, the Configuration window opens
with all defined items whenever you start this function
Edit Auto Complete
This check box changes the functionality of all input fields that
use the Pop-up menu button - - in any CIMPLICITY
application on your computer.
If you set this check box, the application tries to automatically
complete the name for you as you type in the field.
If you clear this check box, no item matching is performed.
When you are through, select OK to close the dialog box and save your changes, or
select Cancel to close the dialog box without implementing any changes.
Using CIMPLICITY Configuration Windows 3-5
Using Auto Complete
If the input field uses the Pop-up menu button - - and you enable the Edit
AutoComplete startup option, CIMPLICITY software tries to match you input to
existing items and complete the item name for you as you type in the field. In
addition, you can use the up and down arrows to scroll through the list of items that
match the characters you have already typed in the field.
Note
The Auto Complete feature does not work when you are entering a remote Point ID.
For example, when you type F in an empty Resource ID field, the first Resource
ID that starts with F, appears in the field. In this case, the first Resource ID is
FACTORY.

As you continue to type, the software continues to match the item name.
For example, if you type I after the F in the Resource ID field, the first Resource
ID that starts with FI appears in the field. In this case, the first Resource ID that
matches FI is FIXTURES.

You can also use the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through a list of all items
that match your current input.
For example, if you press the down arrow, the next Resource ID that starts with FI
appears in the field. In this case, it is FIXTURE_1. If you press the up arrow,
FIXTURES redisplays in the field.

When you reach the end of the list of matches, the down arrow key wraps to the
starting item in the list. Similarly, when you reach the start of the list, the up arrow
wraps to the ending item in the list.

Modifying an Item
To modify an item, you can double-click the item.
Alternatively, you can select the item, then do one of the following:
• Select Modify from the Edit menu.
• Click Modify Item on the Toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+M.
After you initiate the request, the Definition dialog box for the configuration function
opens. The properties contain the current configuration information for the selected
item. You can modify any properties that are not disabled (grayed out).
Select OK to close the Definition dialog box and modify the information for the
selected item.
Select Cancel to close the Definition dialog box without modifying the item.

3-6 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Base System User’s Manual GFK-1180
Copying an Item
To copy an item, select it, and then do one of the following:
• Select Copy from the Edit menu.
• Click Copy Item on the Toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+C.
After you initiate the request, the Copy dialog box for the item opens.

Enter a new item ID in the Destination field and select OK to create a new time
with the same characteristics as the selected one.
Select Cancel to close the Copy dialog box without making a copy of the selected
item.

Deleting an Item
To delete an item, select it, then do one of the following:
• Select Delete from the Edit menu.
• Click Delete Item on the Toolbar.
• Press Del.
After you initiate the request, the Delete Selected Item dialog box opens.

Select OK to close the dialog box and delete the selected item. The list of items in
the Configuration window automatically updates.
Select Cancel to close the dialog box without deleting the selected item.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY Configuration Windows 3-7

Filtering the Item list
The Configure window can contain many items. You can use the Search function
to quickly find a specific item or subset of items.
To initiate a search, do one of the following:
• Select Search... from the View menu.
• Click Search on the Toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+S.
After you initiate the request, the Search dialog box for the configuration function
opens.

You can filter the list by any combination of the fields listed in this dialog box.
You can also use the following wildcards in any of the fields:
* Use this wildcard to search for any number of characters at this point in the
string. For example, if you want to display a list of alarms that start with "M"
and end with "X", enter M*X in the Alarm ID field.
? Use this wildcard to search for any character in this place in the string. For
example, if you want to display the list of alarms that are three characters
long, and whose first character is "M" and third character is "X", enter M?X
in the Alarm ID field.
Note

There are no implied wildcards. If you do not include or terminate your search string
with an asterisk, only those items that match your request exactly will be returned.

Select Close to close the dialog box and do no further filtering.

Select OK to display the filtered list you requested and close the dialog box.

3-8 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Base System User’s Manual GFK-1180
About Browsers
You will find the Browser button - - to the right of certain input fields on your
configuration window and dialog boxes. When you click this button, you invoke a
Browser for that particular entity. A Browser let you search the list of entities and
select the one you want for your configuration.
Currently, the CIMPLICITY configuration functions let you access the Browsers for
the following entities:
• Point ID
• Resource
• Device
• Point Type
• Class ID
• Role ID
When you click the Browser button, the Select dialog for the particular Browser
opens. If the Auto Browse option is set for the configuration function, the display
list will initially show you all of the entities available for the Browser.
You can use the input fields in the dialog to tailor the display list to your needs by
asking the Browser to search for and display an individual entity or subset of entities.
You may also be able to access other Browsers from this dialog. For example, from
the Select A Point dialog box for the Point Browser, you can access the Browsers for
Device ID, Resource, and Point Type.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY Configuration Windows 3-9

 You can resize the width of the fields in the display area. To do this:
1. Move your cursor to the vertical line between the two field identifier
buttons. The cursor will change to a vertical line with horizontal
arrows.
2. Hold down the left mouse key and move the cursor to the left or right to
resize the two display fields.
Once you have located the entity you want in the display list, you can
Double-click the entity to select it
Alternatively, you can:
1. Select the entity.
2. Select OK.
The Browser closes and the selected entity is put in the input field on your
configuration dialog box.
To close the Browser without making any changes to the input field, select Cancel.

Browser Menu Options

You can use the menu options to close the dialog box, change the list display
attributes, and toggle dynamic browsing.

File Menu
The File menu functions are:

Exit Closes the dialog box.

View Menu
The View menu functions are:
Attributes Opens the Configure Display Attributes dialog.

Auto Browse Enables/disables automatic browsing of the database when you

open the Browser.

Filtering the Display List

The Browser dialog can contain many entities. You can use the input fields and the
Browse button to quickly find a specific entity or subset of entities.
To initiate filtering:
1. Enter a full or partial entity name in one or more of the input fields.
You can use the * and ? wildcards in any input field.
2. Some input fields may also let you access other Browsers to select their
entity name. These Browsers have the same functionality as the current
Browser.
3. Select Browse to display your filtered list.

3-10 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Base System User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Using Wildcards
You can use the following wildcards:
* Use this wildcard to search for any number of characters at this point in the
string. For example, if you want to display the list of points that start with
"M" and end with "X", enter M*X in the Point ID field.
? Use this wildcard to search for any character in this place in the string. For
example, if you want to display the list of points whose names are three
characters long, and whose first character is "M" and third character is "X",
enter M?X in the Point ID field.
Note

There are no implied wildcards. If you do not include or terminate your search string
with an asterisk, only those items that match your request exactly will be returned.

Sorting the Display List

The list is initially sorted alphanumerically in ascending order by the fixed display
attribute. You can do additional sorting:
• You can click one of the field identifier buttons at the top of the list to
re-sort the list by the field you select.
• You can double-click one of the field identifier buttons to re-sort the
list in descending order.

Using the Auto Browser

When the Auto Browser is enabled, all of the entities currently in the database are
automatically displayed when you open the Browser. You can search through the
list of entities for the one you want, or you can enter filter information and select
Browse to display a subset of entities.
When the Auto Browser is disabled, no entities are displayed. You must enter
filter information and select Browse to display a list of entities.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY Configuration Windows 3-11

Point Configuration

About Points
A main feature of CIMPLICITY HMI software is its ability to collect point data from
devices such as programmable controllers and distribute this data to CimView
screens, Alarm Viewer screens, alarm printers, logging tables, and optional
CIMPLICITY HMI software functions. The collection and distribution of point data
is handled by the Point Management subsystem. Its primary functions are:
• Updating the point database as point values change.
• Generating point alarms when limits are exceeded.
• Making point data available to other CIMPLICITY HMI and third party
software functions.
• Synthesize new point values by arithmetically combining other points.
Two types of points can be configured - Device points and Virtual points.
• Device points are points that are read from and/or written to devices.
• Virtual points are points that do not directly originate from devices.
There are two types of virtual points:
• Global points are points whose values are generated by an
application such as CimView. These values are shared by multiple
CIMPLICITY HMI software applications.
• Calculated points are points that are generated from arithmetic or
logical expressions that modify or combine one or more device points.
These values may then be shared by multiple CIMPLICITY HMI
software applications.
Point configuration defines where a point originates, how the data is collected, what
constitutes an alarm state, how the point should be displayed, and how the raw point
data is converted into engineering units.

GFK-1180 4-1
Naming Points
You will need to give each point you create in your project a unique Point ID. This
identifier may be up to 32 characters long. You may use any combination of upper-
case letters and numbers to create a Point ID. You may also use special characters in
a Point ID. There are however, some reserved words and reserved characters. If you
use reserved words or characters for a Point ID:
• When you include a Point ID that contains reserved words or special
characters in an expression or equation, you must enclose the Point ID
in single quotes.
• File names for Alarm Help files will be difficult to correlate to Point
IDs. These file names are usually automatically generated by
CIMPLICITY software and are based on the Point/Alarm ID.

Reserved Words
The following are reserved words in CIMPLICITY software. You should not use
these words for Point IDs:
A1 A2 AH1
AH2 AL AL1
AL2 ALARM ALARM_HIGH
ALARM_LOW ALARM_NOT_ACKED ANA
AND BAND BNOT
BOR BXOR EQ
EU_CONV GE GT
LE LT NE
NOT OR SQR
WARNING WARNING_HIGH WARNING_LOW
XOR
If, however, you do use a reserved word for a Point ID and you include such a Point
ID in a point expression or equation, you must enclose the Point ID in single quotes.

Reserved Characters
You cannot use a space (blank) or the following characters in a Point ID:
| $
If you attempt to do so, you will receive an error message.
The following characters are permitted. However, avoid using them as they can be
misinterpreted by the Expression Editor and other software:
+- * ? \ [ ]
You may use any other special character (such as @, #, %, etc.) on the keyboard in
your Point ID. However, if you include such a Point ID in a point expression or
equation, you must enclose the Point ID in single quotes. The only exception to this
rule is the underscore character ( _ ). You do not need to enclose the Point ID in
single quotes if you use the underscore.

4-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 You may start a Point ID with a number (0-9). However, if you include such a Point
ID in a point expression or equation, you must enclose the Point ID in single quotes.
Note
Although they are allowed, do not use brackets ( [ ] ) in Point ID names. CimView,
Trends and the Event Manager assume that this specifies an array element.

Selecting A Point Class

You can select one of four Point Class types when you create a point. The class
that you select will determine the set of Point Types that you can select from on the
Point Properties - General dialog box. The four Point Classes are:
Analog Use this type for all integer and floating points.
Boolean Use this type for all Boolean points.
Text Use this type for text points.
APPL Use this type for application-specific points.

Analog Point Types

When you select the Analog Point Class, you can choose one of the following types
for the point:
3D_BCD Positive BCD values ranging from 0 to 999.
4D_BCD Positive BCD values ranging from 0 to 9999.
DINT Integers ranging from -2,147,483,648 to + 2,147,483,647.
INT Integers ranging from -32,768 to +32,767.
REAL Floating point numbers.
SINT Integers ranging from -128 to +127
UDINT Unsigned integers ranging from 0 to 4,294,967,295.
UINT Unsigned integers ranging from 0 to 65,535.
USINT Unsigned integers ranging from 0 to 255.
Availability of a particular point type will depend on the communications protocol
and device. See the CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Device
Communications Manual (GFK-1181) for details on what point types are supported
for your particular device and protocol.
Values read from or written to a device point will be forced into the specified type.
For example, reading a SINT point value from a 16-bit register will truncate the high
order byte, and the sign will not be maintained. Writing an INT point to an 8-bit
register will do the same.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-3

 Boolean Point Types
When you select the Boolean Point Class, you can choose:
BOOL A one digit Boolean point with a value of 0 or 1.
BYTE An 8-bit array of Boolean points.
WORD A 16-bit array of Boolean points.
DWORD A 32-bit array of Boolean points.

Text Point Types

When you select the Text Point Class, you can choose:
STRING A one-character alphanumeric.
STRING_20 A 20-character alphanumeric string.
STRING_8 An 8-character alphanumeric string.
STRING_80 An 80-character alphanumeric string.

APPL Point Types

BITSTRING_8 8-bit string.
BITSTRING_16 16-bit string.
BITSTRING_32 32-bit string.
OCTETSTRING_2 2-byte string.
The availability of a particular point type will depend on the CIMPLICITY platform,
communications protocol and device you are using. See the CIMPLICITY HMI for
Windows NT and Windows 95 Device Communications Manual (GFK-1181) for
details on what point types are supported for your particular device and protocol.

4-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Device Point Data Collection
Device point data can be read in one of the following modes:

On Scan
Data is collected for the point at a regular interval. This interval is equal to the base
scan rate for the point on which the device is located multiplied by the scan rate for
the point.
The point’s value is updated at the point’s scan interval, whether or not the value
changes.

On Change
Data is collected for the point at a regular interval. This interval is equal to the base
scan rate for the point on which the device is located multiplied by the scan rate for
the point.
The point’s value is only updated when changes. This is the default update criteria.

On Demand On Scan
Data is collected from the point whenever the point’s value is needed by an
application.
The point’s value is updated at the point’s scan interval, whether or not the value
changes.

On Demand On Change
Data is collected from the point whenever the point’s value is needed by an
application.
The point’s value is updated whenever its value changes.

Unsolicited
Data is distributed for the point whenever the device communications enabler notifies
CIMPLICITY Point Management that the point’s value has changed.
This mode is only valid if the device is capable of sending unsolicited updates of
point values and the device communications protocol supports it. See the
CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Device Communication
Manual (GFK-1181) for more information.

Poll Once
The point’s value is polled once when the device communications enabler starts up.
Thereafter, it may be updated by unsolicited data from the device or by Poll After
Setpoint.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-5

Virtual Point Calculation Types
When you define a virtual point, you can select a calculation type from the following
list:
• Global
• Equation
• Delta Accum
• Value Accum
• Average
• Max Capture
• Min Capture
• Timer/Counter
• Histogram
• Trans-High Accum
• Equation w/Override
Each calculation type will cause the virtual point to behave in a specific manner.
If the calculation type supports and expression, you can use the Expression Editor
to create the expression.

Using the Expression Editor

An expression can be up to 300 Whenever you are asked to enter an expression, you can click the button to the
characters long.
right of the Expression input field or select Edit Expression from the Pop-up
menu, and the Edit Expression dialog opens.

4-6 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Double click an operation to select it. The operation is put at the current cursor
position in the input box. If the operation requires an argument, the cursor is
positioned for you to type the argument.
You can also:
• Select Point IDs... to access the Select A Point Browser.
• Select Edit Point… to edit the properties for a Point ID you have
selected in the input box.
• Select New Point… to create a new Point ID.
The operations are divided into the following areas:
• Arithmetic operations
• Alarm functions
• Bitwise operations
• Logical operations
• Relational operations
• Scientific operations
In addition to these operations, Point Configuration also supports the EU_CONV
function.

EU_CONV Function
By default, if a device point uses linear or custom conversion, the virtual point
equation uses the raw value for the point unless you do one of the following:
• Use the EU_CONV function in the expression whenever you reference
a device Point ID.
For example, if you have a device point called DEVICE_POINT with a
raw value of 1000 and an engineering units value of 100, then the
expression DEVICE_POINT / 10 yields 100, while
EU_CONV(DEVICE_POINT) / 10 yields 10.
• Set the Global Parameter PTMDP_DO_EU_CONV to "1".
If you do this, whenever a device Point ID is used in a virtual point
expression, it’s engineering units value is used, whether or not you
invoke the EU_CONV function.
For example, the expression DEVICE_POINT / 10 in the above
example yields 10 rather than 100 when this parameter is set.
Note
In CimView expressions, point values are always converted to engineering units in
expressions, whether EU_CONV is used or not in the expression.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-7

 Arithmetic Operations
Arithmetic operations supported by the Expression Editor are:
+ Addition
- Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division
SQR Takes the square root of the point’s raw value.
The format for this operation is SQR (<point id>)
ABS Takes the absolute value of an expression.
The format for this operation is ABS (expr).
For example, ABS (-2.6) return 2.6.
MIN Returns the minimum value of two expressions.
Format is (expr1) MIN (expr2).
For example, 3 MIN 4 returns 3.
MAX Returns the maximum value of two expressions.
Format is (expr1) MAX (expr2).
For example, 3 MAX 4 returns 4.
MOD Returns the modulus value of an expression.
Format is (expr1) MOD (expr2).
For example, 9 MOD 8 returns a value of 1.
RND Rounds a floating-point expression to the nearest integer.
Format is RND (expr).
For example, RND (2.6) returns a value of 3.
TRUNC Truncates a floating-point expression to its integer value.
Format is TRUNC (expr).
For example, TRUNC (2.6) returns a value of 2.
FLR Rounds a floating-point expression to the nearest integer that is smaller
than the expression.
Format is FLR (expr).
For example, FLR (2.6) returns a value of 2.
CEIL Rounds a floating-point expression to the nearest integer that is larger
than the expression.
Format is CEIL (expr).
For example, CEIL (2.3) returns a value of 3.

4-8 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Logical Operations
Logical operations supported by the Expression Editor are:
AND Performs a logical AND of two Boolean expressions.
Format is <expr1> AND <expr2>.
OR Performs a logical OR of two Boolean expressions.
Format is <expr1> OR <expr2>.
NOT Performs a logical NOT of one Boolean expressions.
Format is NOT <expr1>.
XOR Performs a logical XOR of two Boolean expressions.
Format is <expr1> XOR <expr2>.
IF (expr1) THEN (expr2) ELSE (expr3) or (expr1) ? (expr2) : (expr3)
Performs a logical If A is TRUE, then B, else C.
expr1 must be a Boolean expression.

Bitwise Operations
Bitwise operations supported by the Expression Editor are:
BAND Performs a bitwise AND of two expressions.
Format is <expr1> BAND <expr2>.
BOR Performs a bitwise OR of two expressions.
Format is <expr1> BOR <expr2>.
BNOT Performs a bitwise NOT of one expressions.
Format is BNOT <expr1>.
BXOR Performs a bitwise XOR of two expressions.
Format is <expr1> BXOR <expr2>.
SHL Performs a binary left shift on an expression.
Format is (expr1) SHL (expr2).
For example, 2 SHL 1 returns a value of 4.
SHR Performs a binary right shift on an expression.
Format is (expr1) SHR (expr2).
For example, 2 SHR 1 returns a value of 1.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-9

 Relational Operations
Relational operations supported by the Expression Editor are:
LT Less Than (or below)
GT Greater Than (or above)
EQ Equal To
LE Less Than or Equal To
GE Greater Than or Equal To
NE Not Equal To

Alarm Functions
Alarm functions supported by the Expression Editor are:
AL
Returns True if the point is in any Alarm or Warning state.
Format is AL(<point id>)
A1 or WARNING
Returns True if the point is in a Warning High or Warning Low
state.
Format is A1(<point id>)
A2 or ALARM
Returns True if the point is in an Alarm High or Alarm Low state.
Format is A2(<point id>)
AH1 or WARNING_HIGH
Returns True if the point is in a Warning High state.
Format is AH1(<point id>)
AH2 or ALARM_HIGH
Returns True if the point is in an Alarm High state.
Format is AH2(<point id>)
AL1or WARNING_LOW
Returns True if the point is in a Warning Low state.
Format is AL1(<point id>)
AL2 or ALARM_LOW
Returns True if the point is in an Alarm Low state.
Format is AL2(<point id>)
ANA or ALARM_NOT_ACKED
Returns True if the point is in alarm and the alarm has not been
acknowledged.
Format is ANA(<point id>)

4-10 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Scientific Operations
The scientific operations supported by the Expression Editor are:
SIN Returns the sine (angle in radians) of an expression.
Format is SIN (expr)
COS Returns the cosine (angle in radians) value of an expression.
Format is COS (expr)
TAN Returns the tangent (angle in radians) of an expression.
Format is TAN (expr)
ASIN Returns the Arc Sine (angle in radians) value of an expression.
Format is ASIN (expr)
ACOS Returns the Arc Cosine (angle in radians) value of an expression.
Format is ACOS (expr)
ATAN Returns the Arc Tangent (angle in radians) value of an expression.
Format is ATAN (expr)
EXP Returns the exponential (ex) value of an expression where x is the
expression.
Format is EXP (expr)
LOG Returns the natural logarithm (base e) of an expression.
Format is LOG (expr)
LOG10 Returns the base 10 logarithm of an expression.
Format is LOG10 (expr)
X^Y Raise a value to a power.
The format for this operation is <value> ^ (<power>).

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-11

 Global Points
A Global point can be updated by:
• Setpoint functions
• CIMPLICITY software applications
• Custom applications that use the Point Management API
When you select the Global Calculation Type, the Virtual properties are:

You cannot define a Reset Point, Trigger Point, Equation, Variance,

Rollover, Start Time, or Interval for a Global point. You can define an initial
value for the point in Startup Condition.

Startup Condition for Global Point

Select the source for the initial value of the point when the project is started. You
can choose one of the following:
Not Applicable No startup condition is defined.
Saved Use the value saved when the project was last normally
shutdown.
Init Use the constant entered in the Init Value field.
Saved or Init Use the saved value if there is one; otherwise use the constant
entered in the Init Value field.
If you do not select a Startup Condition, the point’s value is unavailable until a
user performs a setpoint, or an application sets the point’s value.

4-12 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Equation Points
An Equation point uses the expression you specify in the Equation field to update
the point’s value.
When you select the Equation Calculation Type, the Virtual properties are:

You can define a Reset Point, Trigger Point and an Equation for an Equation
point. You can also define an initial value for the point in Startup Condition.

Equation for Equation Point

Enter the expression that calculates the value of the Equation point. The expression
may contain one or more Point IDs along with constant values, operations and
functions.
You must observe the following rules when defining an equation:
• Avoid introducing loops (circular references between
points) in your equations.
A simple example of what to avoid is:
VIRTUAL_PT1 = DEVICE_PT + VIRTUAL_PT2

VIRTUAL_PT2 = DEVICE_PT + VIRTUAL_PT1

Although this will not cause CIMPLICITY software to fail, it will cause
the Virtual Point Processor to always have work to do. This causes all
available computer time to be consumed, which adversely impacts
system performance.
• Use proper formatting for array points.
An example of the correct format is:
VIRTUAL_PT1 = DEVICE_PT[0] / 2.0

• Use proper formatting for Point IDs with reserved words.

Point IDs that are reserved words, or contain spaces, arithmetic
operators, parentheses, or that begin with a non-alphabetic character
must be placed in single quotes when used in an equation. For
example:
VIRTUAL_PT2 = ’DEVICE_PT:0’ * ’WARNING_LOW’

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-13

 Trigger Point for Equation Point
If you define a Trigger Point, the value of the Equation point is updated whenever
the value of the Trigger Point is updated.
If you do not define a Trigger Point, the value of the Equation point is updated
whenever one of the source points in the Equation field is updated.

Reset Point for Equation Point

Enter the Point ID of that point that will cause the Equation point value to be reset.
At run-time, the value of the Equation point is reset as follows:
• If the Trigger Point is not defined:
• If the current value of the Equation is available, and no Init
Value is defined, the value of the Equation point is reset to the
current value.
• If the current value of the Equation is unavailable and an Init
Value is defined, the value of the Equation point is reset to the
Init Value.
• If the current value of the Equation is available and an Init Value
is defined, the value of the Equation point is reset to the current
value.
• If the current value of the Equation is unavailable and no Init
Value is defined, the value of the Equation point is reset to zero
(0).
• If the Trigger Point is defined:
• If an Init Value is defined, the value of the Equation point is
reset to the Init Value.
• If an Init Value is not defined, the value of the Equation point is
reset to zero (0).

Startup Condition for Equation Point

Select the source for the initial value of the point when the project is started. You
can choose one of the following:
Not Applicable No startup condition is defined.
Saved Use the value saved when the project was last normally
shutdown.
Init Use the constant entered in the Init Value field.
Saved or Init Use the saved value if there is one; otherwise use the constant
entered in the Init Value field.

4-14 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Delta Accum Points
A Delta Accum point adds the difference between the current and previous values
of the expression that you specify in the Equation field to the current value of the
Delta Accum point. Delta accumulation is always calculated as follows:
If the previous value is less than the current value
Delta Accum = Delta Accum + (current value - previous value)
Else
Delta Accum = Delta Accum + (rollover value + 1) -
previous value + current value

The first Delta Accum update occurs after the first two expression updates are
received.
Delta values continue to be added until a Reset Condition is reached.
Use a Delta Accum point to capture the accumulation of positive increments in a
source point. A decrement in the source point value is also considered to be an
incremental delta. For example, a Delta Accum configured with a Rollover value
of 1000 receives a change from 100 to 999. Based on the formula described above,
the current value of the Delta Accum point is 899. The source point then changes
from 999 to 20. Based on the formula, the current delta is then (1000 + 1) - 999 + 20
= 22.
When you select the Delta Accum Calculation Type, the Virtual properties are:

You can define a Reset Point, Trigger Point, Equation, Variance, and
Rollover for a Delta Accum point. You can also define an initial value for the
point in Startup Condition.

Using Delta Accum Arrays

When you configure an array point as a Delta Accum point:
• The first element of the array adds the difference between the current
and previous values of the source Point ID that you specify in the
Equation field to the current value of the element.
• Each additional element of the array is used to store the delta
accumulator value for a different subgroup of the array.
The point defined in the Safety Point field is used as the selector point and
determines which subgroup element of the array is updated. The selector point must
have a value from 1 to N-1, where N is the number of elements in the array.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-15

 Example
You can use an array Delta Accum point to track counters such as production
counts where you want to track the total number of parts produced in a shift, as well
as the number of parts produced in each hour of the eight-hour shift.
To do this, define a Delta Accum array point called COUNTS with 9 Elements
(one for the total shift count, and one for each hour of the shift). The elements are
defined as follows:
Element Description
COUNTS[0] Shift total production count
COUNTS[1] First hour production count
COUNTS[2] Second hour production count
COUNTS[3] Third hour production count
COUNTS[4] Fourth hour production count
COUNTS[5] Fifth hour production count
COUNTS[6] Sixth hour production count
COUNTS[7] Seventh hour production count
COUNTS[8] Eighth hour production count
Next, define a Safety Point called HOUR, which varies from 1 to 8, depending on the
hour of the shift. This point determines which subgroup element gets updated along
with COUNTS[0]. For example, if HOUR=4, COUNTS[0] and COUNTS[4] are
updated. If HOUR is less than 1 or greater than 8, no elements in the array are
updated.

Equation for Delta Accum Point

Enter an expression that calculates the value of the Delta Accum point. The
expression may contain one Point ID along with constant values, operations, and
functions.
Note
When the equation of a Delta Accum point goes unavailable, and then comes back
as available, the delta between the value right before the point went unavailable and
the value right after it comes back as available is not accumulated.

Trigger Point for Delta Accum Point

Enter the Point ID of the point that will cause the Delta Accum point to be updated
at run-time. The Delta Accum point updates whenever the Trigger Point
changes.
If you do not define a Trigger Point, the Delta Accum point updates whenever the
value of the source point in the Equation field changes.

4-16 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Reset Point for Delta Accum Point
Enter the Point ID of that point that will cause the Delta Accum point value to be
reset.
At run-time, the value of the Delta Accum point is reset as follows:
• If you do not define a Trigger Point:
• If the current value of the Equation is available, and no Init
Value is defined, the value of the Delta Accum point is reset to
zero (0).
• If the current value of the Equation is unavailable and an Init
Value is defined, the value of the Delta Accum point is reset to
the Init value.
• If current value of the Equation is available and an Init Value is
defined, the value of the Delta Accum point is reset to Init value.
• If the current value of the Equation is unavailable and no Init
Value is defined, the value of the Delta Accum point is reset to
zero (0).
• If you define a Trigger Point:
• If an Init Value is defined, the value of the Delta Accum point is
reset to the Init Value.
• If an Init Value is not defined, the value of the Delta Accum
point is reset to zero (0).

Variance for Delta Accum Point

Enter the maximum acceptable delta value that can be added to the Delta Accum
point value. This is a required field.
If the delta value is greater than the Variance value, a Variance Condition occurs.
The Delta Accum point continues counting, but the current delta value is not added
and the system logs the following message to the Status Log with Success status:
Variance value exceeded for accumulator point : <point_id>

Rollover for Delta Accum Point

Enter the maximum acceptable value for the Delta Accum point in this field.
If you do not specify a Rollover value, the size of the data type for the expression is
used as the default Rollover value. For example, if the source point has an INT point
type, the maximum acceptable value for the Delta Accum point is 32767.
When the current value of the source point is less than its previous value and rollover
is used to calculate the Delta Accum value, the following message is logged to the
Status Log with Success status:
Rollover occurred for accumulator point : <point_id>

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-17

 Startup Condition for Delta Accum Point
Select the source for the initial value of the point when the project is started. You
can choose one of the following:
Not Applicable No startup condition is defined.
Saved Use the value saved when the project was last normally
shutdown.
Init Use the constant entered in the Init Value field.
Saved or Init Use the saved value if there is one; otherwise use the constant
entered in the Init Value field.
If you define a Startup Condition, the Delta Accum value is initialized to that
value.
If you do not specify a Startup Condition, the Delta Accum is initialized to zero
(0).

Value Accum Points

A Value Accum point adds the current value of the source Point ID that you specify
in the Equation field to the current value of the Value Accum point.
Values continue to be added until a Reset Condition is reached.
When you select the Value Accum calculation type, the Virtual properties are:

You can define a Reset Point, Trigger Point, and Equation for a Value
Accum point. You can also define an initial value for the point in Startup
Condition.

Equation for Value Accum Point

Enter an expression that calculates the value of the Value Accum point. The
expression may contain one or more Point IDs along with constant values,
operations, and functions.

Trigger Point for Value Accum Point

Enter the Point ID of the point that will cause the Value Accum point to be updated
at run-time. The Value Accum point updates whenever the Trigger Point
changes.
If you do not define a Trigger Point, the Value Accum point updates whenever
the value of the source point in the Equation field changes.

4-18 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Reset Point for Value Accum Point
Enter the Point ID of that point that will cause the Value Accum point value to be
reset.
At run-time, the value of the Value Accum point is reset as follows:
• If you do not define a Trigger Point:
• If the current value of the Equation is available, and no Init
Value is defined, the value of the Value Accum point is reset to
zero (0).
• If the current value of the Equation is unavailable and an Init
Value is defined, the value of the Value Accum point is reset to
the Init Value.
• If both current value of the Equation is available and an Init
Value is defined, the value of the Value Accum point is reset to
the Init Value.
• If the current value of the Equation is unavailable and no Init
Value is defined, the value of the Value Accum point is zero (0).
• If you define a Trigger Point:
• If an Init Value is defined, the value of the Value Accum point
is reset to the Init Value.
• If an Init Value is not defined, the value of the Value Accum
point is reset to zero (0).

Startup Condition for Value Accum Point

Select the source for the initial value of the point when the project is started. You
can choose one of the following:
Not Applicable No startup condition is defined.
Saved Use the value saved when the project was last normally
shutdown (no value is saved if the computer crashes).
Init Use the constant entered in the Init Value field.
Saved or Init Use the saved value if there is one; otherwise use the constant
entered in the Init Value field.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-19

 Average Points
An Average point maintains the average value for the source Point ID that you
specify in the Equation field. This virtual point can be a signed or unsigned integer,
or a floating-point number.
The average is calculated as the accumulation of the deviation from the average point
data, divided by the number of samples taken. The equation is:
average - average + (source - average) / sample_count

The average is calculated as an eight-byte floating-point data type, then the result is
converted into the data type you specify for the Average point.
Note
For integer type points, the resulting data is rounded. This may result in a loss of
accuracy. It is suggested that you use the floating-point type for your Average
point.
When you select the Average calculation type, the Virtual properties are:

You can define a Reset Point, Trigger Point and Equation for an Average
point. You can also define an initial value for the point in Startup Condition.

Equation for Average Point

Enter an expression that calculates the value of the Average point. The expression
may contain one or more Point IDs along with constant values, operations, and
functions.

Trigger Point for Average Point

If you define a Trigger Point, the value of the Average point is updated whenever
the Trigger Point is updated.
If you do not define a Trigger Point, the value of the Average point is updated
whenever the value of the source point in the Equation field is updated.

4-20 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Reset Point for Average Point
Enter the ID of the point that will cause the Average point to be reset.
At run-time, when the Reset Point updates, the value of the Average point is reset
as follows:
• If the Trigger Point is not defined:
• If the current value of the Equation is available and no Init
Value is defined, the Average point is reset to the current value
of the equation.
• If the current value of the Equation is unavailable and an Init
Value is defined, the Average point is reset to the Init Value.
• If the current value of the Equation is available and an Init Value
is defined, the Average point is set to their average.
• If the current value Equation is unavailable and no Init Value is
defined, the Average point value is set to zero (0).
• If the Trigger Point is defined:
• If an Init Value is available, the Average point is reset to the Init
Value.
• If an Init Value is not available, the Average point value is set to
zero (0).

Startup Condition for Average Point

Select the source for the initial value of the point when the project is started. You
can choose one of the following:
Not Applicable No startup condition is defined.
Saved Use the value saved when the project was last normally
shutdown.
Init Use the constant entered in the Init Value field.
Saved or Init Use the saved value if there is one; otherwise use the constant
entered in the Init Value field.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-21

 Max Capture Points
A Max Capture point maintains the maximum encountered point value for the
source Point ID that you specify in the Equation field.
The maximum value is determined by comparing the current source point value with
the value stored in the Max Capture point. If the current value is greater, it is
stored as the new Max Capture point value.
When you select the Max Capture Calculation Type, the Virtual properties are:

You can define a Reset Point, Trigger Point, and Equation for a Max Capture
point. You can also define an initial value for the point in Startup Condition.

Equation for Max Capture Point

Enter an expression that calculates the value of the Max Capture point. The
expression may contain one or more Point IDs along with constant values,
operations, and functions.

Trigger Point for Max Capture Point

If you define a Trigger Point, the value of the Max Capture point is updated
whenever the Trigger Point is updated.
If you do not define a Trigger Point, the value of the Max Capture point is
updated whenever the source point in the Equation field is updated.

Reset Point for Max Capture Point

Enter the ID of the point that will cause the Max Capture point to be reset.
At run-time, when the Reset Point updates, the value of the Max Capture point is
reset as follows:
• If the Trigger Point is not defined:
• If the current value of the Equation is available and no Init
Value is defined, the Max Capture point is reset to the current
value of the Equation.
• If the current value of the Equation is unavailable and the Init
Value is defined, the Max Capture point is reset to the Init
Value.

4-22 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 • If the value of the Equation is available and the Init Value is
defined, the Max Capture point is set to whichever has the
maximum value.
• If the value of the Equation is unavailable and no Init Value is
defined, the Max Capture point value is set to the smallest
possible value for the point type. For example, for INT the value is
-32768.
• If the Trigger Point is defined:
• If the Init Value is defined, the Max Capture point is reset to the
Init Value.
• If no Init Value is defined, the Max Capture point value is set to
the smallest possible value for the point type. For example, for
INT the value is -32768.

Startup Condition for Max Capture Point

Select the source for the initial value of the point when the project is started. You
can choose one of the following:
Not Applicable No startup condition is defined.
Saved Use the value saved when the project was last normally
shutdown.
Init Use the constant entered in the Init Value field.
Saved or Init Use the saved value if there is one; otherwise use the constant
entered in the Init Value field.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-23

 Min Capture Points
A Min Capture point maintains the minimum encountered point value for the
source Point ID that you specify in the Equation field.
The minimum value is determined by comparing the current source point value with
the value stored in the Min Capture point. If the current value is smaller, it is
stored as the new Min Capture point value.
When you select the Min Capture Calculation Type, the Virtual properties are:

You can define a Reset Point, Trigger Point, and Equation for a Min Capture
point. You can also define an initial value for the point in Startup Condition.

Equation for Min Capture Point

Enter an expression that calculates the value of the Min Capture point. The
expression may contain one or more Point IDs along with constant values,
operations, and functions.

Trigger Point for Min Capture Point

If you define a Trigger Point, the value of the Min Capture point is updated
whenever the Trigger Point is updated.
If you do not define a Trigger Point, the value of the Min Capture point is
updated whenever the source point in the Equation field is updated.

Reset Point for Min Capture Point

Enter the ID of the point that will cause the Min Capture point to be reset.
At run-time, when the Reset Point updates, the value of the Min Capture point is
reset as follows:
• If the Trigger Point is not defined:
• If the current value of the Equation is available and an Init Value
is available, the Min Capture point is reset to the current value of
the Equation.
• If the current value of the Equation is unavailable and no Init
Value is defined, the Min Capture point is reset to the Init
Value.

4-24 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 • If the current value of the Equation is available and the Init
Value is defined, the Min Capture point is set to whichever has
the minimum value.
• If the current value of the Equation is unavailable and no Init
Value is defined, the Min Capture point value is set to the
maximum possible value for the point type. For example, for INT
the value is 32767.
• If the Trigger Point is defined:
• If the Init Value is defined, the Min Capture point is reset to the
Init Value.
• If the Init Value is undefined, the Min Capture point value is set
to the maximum possible value for the point type. For example, for
INT the value is 32767.

Startup Condition for Min Capture Point

Select the source for the initial value of the point when the project is started. You
can choose one of the following:
Not Applicable No startup condition is defined.
Saved Use the value saved when the project was last normally
shutdown.
Init Use the constant entered in the Init Value field.
Saved or Init Use the saved value if there is one; otherwise use the constant
entered in the Init Value field.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-25

 Timer/Counter Points
A Timer/Counter point records the following data in three array elements
• A count of the number of times the event has occurred.
• The accumulated duration of all HIGH event occurrences, stored in
seconds.
• The last event time or zero.
This field always contains the time the HIGH event occurred, while the
event expression evaluates to a HIGH state, and zero (0) if the
expression evaluates to a LOW state
Time is stored in the number of seconds since 00:00:00 on January 1,
1970 GMT (Greenwich Mean Time). If you computer’s clock is set for
another time zone, this value is translated accordingly. For example, if
your computer’s clock is set for Eastern Standard Time, the base time is
19:00:00 31 December 1969.
When you create a Timer/Counter point, you must do the following on the General
property page:
• Select a Point Type of UDINT
• Select an array size of 3 Elements
The expression you enter in the Equation field serves as an "edge trigger" for the
event. When the expression evaluates to a value greater than zero (0), the event is
considered to be in its HIGH state and the interval timer you set in the Interval and
Start Time fields starts. At every interval:
• The count field, stored in the first element, is incremented.
• The "last event time", stored in the third array element, is zeroed.
When the expression evaluates to a value equal to or less than zero (0), the event is
considered to be in its LOW state and:
• The duration field, stored in the second element, is incremented by the
duration of the last event. This duration is calculated by subtracting the
start time of the last event from the current system time.
• The "last event time", stored in the third array element, is zeroed.
When you select the Timer/Counter Calculation Type, the Virtual properties are:

4-26 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 You can define a Reset Point, Equation, Start Time, and Interval for a
Timer/Counter point. You can also define an initial value for the point in Startup
Condition.

Equation for Timer/Counter Point

Enter an expression in this field. The expression may contain one or more Point IDs
along with constant values, operations, and functions. This expression serves as the
"edge trigger" for the Timer/Counter.

Reset Point for Timer/Counter Point

Enter the ID of the point that will cause the Timer/Counter point to be reset.
At run-time, when the Reset Point updates, the elements of the Timer/Counter
point are reset to zero (0).

Start Time for Timer/Counter Point

Use this field to enter a base start time for the Interval. The format is hh:mm:ss,
where hh is the hour, mm is the minute, and ss is the second value for the base start
time.
For example, if you want to update the Timer/Counter point every fifteen minutes
on the quarter hour while the Equation expression is in the HIGH state, enter
00:00:00 in this field and 00:15:00 in the Interval field. When the Equation
expression goes HIGH, the values in the Timer/Counter point are updated. After
that, the updates will be done every fifteen minutes on the quarter hour while the
Equation expression remains HIGH.
If you have a large number of Timer/Counter points being updated at a high
frequency, system performance can be adversely affected. You can use Start Time
to distribute their updates to different times and reduce the impact on system
performance
For example, if you have three Timer/Counter points that are updating every 15
seconds, you can define their start times as follows to distribute system load:
ID Start Time
Point1 00:00:00
Point2 00:00:05
Point3 00:00:10

Interval for Timer/Counter Point

Enter the interval at which you want the Timer/Counter point to be updated while
the Equation expression remains HIGH. The format is hh:mm:ss, where hh is
the hour, mm is the minute, and ss is the second value for the interval.
For example, if you want to update the Timer/Counter point every ten minutes,
enter 00:10:00 in this field. When the Equation expression goes HIGH, the values
in the Timer/Counter point are updated. After that, the updates are done every ten
minutes.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-27

 Startup Condition for Timer/Counter Point
Select the source for the initial value of the point when the project is started. You
can choose one of the following:
Not Applicable No startup condition is defined.
Saved Use the value saved when the project was last normally
shutdown.
Init Use the constant entered in the Init Value field.
Saved or Init Use the saved value if there is one; otherwise use the constant
entered in the Init Value field.
The constant you enter in the Init Value field gets stored in all elements of the array
at project startup.

Histogram Points
A Histogram point records the frequency at which the value of the source point,
identified in the Equation field, occurs within specified range intervals. This
information is typically displayed graphically as a histogram.
Each time the source point is updated, the counter whose range encompasses the
source point value is incremented.
You must configure a Histogram point as an array point. The number of elements
in the array will be:
the number of range intervals you desire + 6

The extra six elements are used to maintain the following data
• The minimum of the point values received
• The maximum of the point values received
• The total number of samples received
• The sum of the values of all samples received
• The number of sample values that were less than the lower limit of the
point range (underflow bucket)
• The number of sample values that were greater than the upper limit of
the point range (overflow bucket)
Use the Display Limits fields to specify the lower and upper range values within
which the point values are expected to occur. The range intervals are automatically
calculated based on the Display High and Display Low limits and the number of
Elements you specify.

4-28 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 When you select the Histogram Calculation Type, the Virtual properties are:

You can define a Reset Point, Trigger Point, and Equation for a Histogram
point. You can also define an initial value for the point in Startup Condition.

Example for Histogram Point

A point called CYCLE_TIME is expected to have a value between 50 and 100, and
you want to track the frequency at which values occur within five intervals.
Create a Histogram point called HIST_CYCLE_TIME with:
Display Low 50
Display High 100
Elements 11
Equation CYCLE_TIME
The eleven elements of this point contain the following information, where X is the
number of point value samples:
Element Contents
HIST_CYCLE_TIME[0] X<50 (underflow bucket)
HIST_CYCLE_TIME[1] 60<X≥50
HIST_CYCLE_TIME[2] 70<X≥60
HIST_CYCLE_TIME[3] 80<X≥70
HIST_CYCLE_TIME[4] 90<X≥80
HIST_CYCLE_TIME[5] 100≤X≥90
HIST_CYCLE_TIME[6] 100<X (overflow bucket)
HIST_CYCLE_TIME[7] Number of samples
HIST_CYCLE_TIME[8] Sum of all sample values
HIST_CYCLE_TIME[9] Minimum of the point values received
HIST_CYCLE_TIME[10] Maximum of the point values received

Equation for Histogram Point

Enter an expression that calculates the value of the Histogram point. The
expression may contain one or more Point IDs along with constant values,
operations, and functions.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-29

 Trigger Point for Histogram Point
If you define a Trigger Point, the values of the Histogram point are updated
whenever the Trigger Point is updated.
If you do not define a Trigger Point, the values of the Histogram point are
updated whenever the source point in the Equation field is updated.

Reset Point for Histogram Point

Enter the ID of the point that will cause the Histogram point to be reset.
At run-time, when the Reset Point updates, the values of the Histogram point
array are reset as follows:
• If the Trigger Point is not defined:
• If the current value of the Equation is available and no Init
Value is defined, each array element of the Histogram point is
reset to zero (0).
• If the current value of the Equation is unavailable and an Init
Value is defined, each array element of the Histogram point is
reset to the Init Value.
• If the current value of the Equation is available and an Init
Value is defined, each array element of the Histogram point is
set to Init Value.
• If the current value of the Equation is unavailable and no Init
Value is defined, the Histogram point value is set to zero (0).
• If the Trigger Point is defined:
• If the Init Value is defined, the Histogram point is reset to the
Init Value.
• If the Init Value is undefined, the Histogram point value is set to
zero (0).

Startup Condition for Histogram Point

Select the source for the initial value of the point when the project is started. You
can choose one of the following:
Not Applicable No startup condition is defined.
Saved Use the value saved when the project was last normally
shutdown.
Init Use the constant entered in the Init Value field.
Saved or Init Use the saved value if there is one; otherwise use the constant
entered in the Init Value field.
The constant you enter in the Init Value field gets stored in all elements of the array
at project startup.

4-30 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Trans-High Accum Points
A Trans-High Accum point accumulates the number of times the Equation field
expression’s value transitions from a zero to a non-zero value. While the
CIMPLICITY project is running, this point remembers its latest state, even if the
points it depends on become unavailable.
Determining a transition takes into consideration the calculation type of the equation
and the point type of the Trans-High Accum point. For example:
• If the Trans-High Accum point type is DINT and the equation uses
floating point arithmetic, the result of the calculation is rounded to the
nearest integer. For example, a value of 0.1 is considered to be zero,
and a value of 0.6 is considered to be non-zero.
• If the Trans-High Accum point type is FLOAT and the equation uses
floating point arithmetic, then a transition from 0 to 0.1 is considered to
be a transition from a zero to a non-zero value.
When you select the Trans-High Accum Calculation Type, the Virtual properties
are:

You can define a Reset Point, Trigger Point, and Equation for a Trans-High
Accum point. You can also define an initial value for the point in Startup
Condition.

Reset Point for Trans-High Accum Point

Enter the ID of the point that will cause the Trans-High Accum point to be reset.
At run-time, when the Reset Point updates, the values of the Trans-High Accum
point array are reset as follows:
• If the Trigger Point is not defined:
• If the current value of the Equation is available and no Init
Value is defined, the Trans-High Accum point is reset to zero
(0).
• If the current value of the Equation is unavailable and an Init
Value is defined, the Trans-High Accum point is reset to the
Init Value.
• If the current value of the Equation is available and the Init
Value is defined, the Trans-High Accum point is reset to the
Init Value.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-31

 • If the current value of the Equation is unavailable and no Init
Value is defined, the Trans-High Accum point value is set to
zero (0).
• If the Trigger Point is defined:
• If the Init Value is defined, the Trans-High Accum point is
reset to the Init Value.
• If the Init Value is undefined, the Trans-High Accum point
value is set to zero (0).

Trigger Point for Trans-High Accum Point

If you define a Trigger Point, the value of the Trans-High Accum point is
updated whenever the Trigger Point is updated.
If you do not define a Trigger Point, the value of the Trans-High Accum point is
updated whenever the source point in the Equation field is updated.

Equation for Trans-High Accum Point

Enter the expression to be monitored for transitions. The expression may contain one
or more Point IDs along with constant values, operations and functions.

Startup Condition for Trans-High Accum Point

Select the source for the initial value of the point when the project is started. You
can choose one of the following:
Not Applicable No startup condition is defined.
Saved Use the value saved when the project was last normally
shutdown.
Init Use the constant entered in the Init Value field.
Saved or Init Use the saved value if there is one; otherwise use the constant
entered in the Init Value field.

4-32 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Equation w/Override Points
An Equation w/Override point is similar to an Equation point. It uses the
expression you specify in the Equation field to update the point’s value. In
addition, applications may change the value of an Equation w/Override point.
The changed value remains in effect until one of the source points for the equation
changes and the equation is recalculated, or until an application supplies a new value
for the point.
When you select the Equation w/Override Calculation Type, the Virtual
properties are:

You can define a Reset Point, Trigger Point, and Equation for an Equation
w/Override point. You can also define an initial value for the point in Startup
Condition.

Equation for Equation w/Override Point

Enter the expression that calculates the value of the Equation w/Override point.
The expression may contain one or more Point IDs along with constant values,
operations and functions.
You must observe the following rules when defining an equation:
• Avoid introducing loops (circular references between
points) in your equations.
A simple example of what to avoid is:
VIRTUAL_PT1 = DEVICE_PT + VIRTUAL_PT2
VIRTUAL_PT2 = DEVICE_PT + VIRTUAL_PT1
Although this will not cause CIMPLICITY software to fail, it will cause
the Virtual Point Processor to always have work to do. This causes all
available computer time to be consumed, which adversely impacts
system performance.
• Use proper formatting for array points.
An example of the correct format is:
VIRTUAL_PT1 = DEVICE_PT[0] / 2.0
• Use proper formatting for Point IDs with reserved words.
Point IDs that are reserved words, or contain spaces, arithmetic
operators, parentheses, or that begin with a non-alphabetic character
must be placed in single quotes when used in an equation. For
example:
VIRTUAL_PT2 = ’DEVICE_PT:0’ * ’WARNING_LOW’

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-33

 Trigger Point for Equation w/Override Point
If you define a Trigger Point, the value of the Equation w/Override point is
updated whenever the Trigger Point is updated.
If you do not define a Trigger Point, the value of the Equation w/Override point
is updated whenever the source point in the Equation field is updated.

Reset Point for Equation w/Override Point

Enter the ID of the point that will cause the Equation w/Override point to be reset.
At run-time, when the Reset Point updates, the values of the Equation
w/Override point array are reset as follows:
• If the Trigger Point is not defined:
• If the current value of the Equation is available and no Init
Value is defined, the Equation w/Override point is reset to the
current value.
• If the current value of the Equation is unavailable and an Init
Value is defined, the Equation w/Override point is reset to the
Init Value.
• If the current value of the Equation is available and the Init
Value is defined, the Equation w/Override point is set to the
current value.
• If the current value of the Equation is unavailable and no Init
Value is defined, the Equation w/Override point value is set to
zero (0).
• If the Trigger Point is defined:
• If the Init Value is available, the Equation w/Override point is
reset to the Init Value.
• If the Init Value is unavailable, the Equation w/Override point
value is set to zero (0).

Startup Condition for Equation w/Override Point

Select the source for the initial value of the point when the project is started. You
can choose one of the following:
Not Applicable No startup condition is defined.
Saved Use the value saved when the project was last normally
shutdown (no value is saved if the computer crashes).
Init Use the constant entered in the Init Value field.
Saved or Init Use the saved value if there is one; otherwise use the constant
entered in the Init Value field.

4-34 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Run-time Notes for Virtual Points
Out of range means that the result is
not within the range values specified
by the Point Type for the virtual
point. For example, an INT point
has a range between -32768 and
+32767.
Using Array Points
GFK-1180
If the value entered in a Global point is out of range for the Point Type, the value
is truncated to fit the Point Type.
For Equation and Equation with Override types, when the expression evaluates to
an out of range or overflow condition, the following message is logged to the
Status Log with a Failure status:
Result from expression is out of range. Point <point_id>
The value of the virtual point becomes unavailable and remains that way until the
equation once more evaluates to a valid value.
All other calculation types keep their last available value
CIMPLICITY software has the capability to let you define both single points and
array points. Using array points is one way to provide more efficient data collection.
An array point can represent one instance of several process variables, or several
instances of one process variable.
The information you enter in the Elements field on the General property page
defines an array point, and determines how that array point will be processed by
CIMPLICITY software.
Array points are not supported by all CIMPLICITY software functions. Support for
array points is as follows:
CimEdit You can configure objects to display array elements and use
them for movement or animation
CimView Array elements can be displayed, and can control movement
or animation.
Alarm Viewer Alarms cannot be generated for array points.
Database Logger You can log individual array elements.
Numbering Array Elements
CIMPLICITY software uses the information in the Elements to determine how an
array points should be processed.
For a single point, set Elements to "1".
Point Configuration 4-35
 Calculating Array Limits
The maximum size of an array points depends on the device type being used, the
memory type being addressed, and the type of point. The maximum size of an array
point for each device type is:
Virtual points 512 bytes
CCM2 points 250 bytes
Genius datagram points 128 bytes
SNP points 200 bytes
Series 90 TCP/IP points 950 bytes
Allen-Bradley Communications points 1000 bytes
Data Highway Plus points 1000 bytes
Applicom points 250 bytes
MODBUS RTU points 1000 bytes
MODBUS Plus points 1000 bytes
Mitsubishi A-Series Serial points 1000 bytes
Mitsubishi TCP/IP points 512 bytes
OMRON Host Link points 1000 bytes
The Smarteye and DDE Client protocols do not support array points.
The number of bytes used for each type of point is:
SINT, USINT, BOOL, BYTE 1 byte
INT, UINT, WORD 2 bytes
DINT, UDINT, DWORD 4 bytes
REAL 8 bytes
To calculate the maximum array size for a particular point, divide the maximum array
size by the number of bytes needed for the point type. For example, if you have
defined an Analog point with type INT for a point on an SNP device in Register (16
bit) memory, the maximum array size is 200 bytes divided by 2 bytes per point or
100 elements.
Values read from or written to a device point are forced into the correct type of the
point. This may affect the array size. For example, if you have defined an analog
point with type INT for a point on a CCM2 device in Register memory, the maximum
array size will be 125 elements because each point in the array is put into a separate
16-bit register. Check the appropriate Device Communications documentation for
further information.

4-36 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Configuring Diagnostic Points
The CIMPLICITY HMI device communication enablers contain diagnostic data that
you can use to detect, diagnose, and correct data communication problems.
Standard diagnostic data, available for all enablers, includes:
Transmissions Number of messages sent to the device
Responses Number of responses received from the device
Retries Number of times a message had to be resent
Failures Number of periods of communication failure
Device status Current device state
Each enabler may also provide protocol-specific data.
Note
Diagnostic points are not available for the Point Bridge.
To view diagnostic data, configure device points corresponding to the diagnostic
locations in the enabler. These diagnostic points are like device data points in all
ways, except that they are always available when the enabler is running (points
containing device data are unavailable if communication with the device fails).
Diagnostic points may be scanned at any appropriate multiple of the port’s base scan
rate, displayed in CimView screens, trended, logged, alarmed, etc.
Note
You cannot write to diagnostic points. Always configure them for Read access.

Creating a Diagnostic Point

If the enabler uses custom addressing, do the following to specify a diagnostic point:
1. Set the Diagnostic data check box.
2. Enter the text address of the diagnostic data in the Address field.

Use the following values to configure diagnostic data for devices with custom
addressing:
Address Data Type Description
$TRANSMISSIONS UDINT Number of messages sent
$RESPONSES UDINT Number of messages received
$FAILURES UDINT Number of communication failures
$RETRIES UDINT Number of retries
$DEVICE_DOWN BOOL Device up status
$DEVICE_UP BOOL Device down status

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-37

 If the enabler uses standard addressing, do the following to specify a diagnostic
point:
1. Set the Diagnostic data check box.
2. Select the domain type in the Domain type field.
3. Enter the correct offset for the point in the Domain offset field.
Use the following values to configure diagnostic data for devices with standard
addressing:
Description Data Domain Type Domain
Type Offset
Number of messages sent UDINT Standard Diag. Double Words 0
Number of messages received UDINT Standard Diag. Double Words 1
Number of communication failures UDINT Standard Diag. Double Words 2
Number of retries UDINT Standard Diag. Double Words 3
Device up status BOOL Standard Diagnostic Bits 0
Device down status BOOL Standard Diagnostic Bits 1

4-38 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Using the Trigger Function
The trigger function lets you configure points so that device data is read, or virtual
points are updated only when a trigger (or event) meets a configured condition.
For device points, triggers have the following requirements:
• The trigger point must be a configured device point.
• The trigger point must be on the same port as the points it is triggering.
The points may be on different devices, but the devices must be on the
same port.
For virtual points, the trigger point may be either a device point or a virtual point.
You can use triggers to:
• Coordinate or direct the sampling frequency of device points, or the
calculation frequency of virtual points.
• Make the system more efficient by reducing the amount of data that
needs to be managed by the data collection functions.

Trigger Point Update Criteria

The Update Criteria you choose for the trigger point will determine when triggered
reads take place. You should always use On Scan to ensure that the value of the
trigger point will be read and evaluated at every scan interval. If you choose another
Update Criteria, points activated by the trigger point may not be read at the
frequency you expect.
For example, a digital point (D1) and an analog point (A1) are configured with a scan
rate of 3 seconds. Over a period of 30 seconds, the two point values vary as follows:

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-39

 When the Update Criteria for D1 is set to On Scan, and A1 is configured so that
it is a triggered point that will be read when D1 is HIGH, A1 will be read as follows:

In other words, A1 is read at the 3, 6, 15, 18, and 24 second marks because the value
of D1 was HIGH at those times.
However, when the Update Criteria for D1 is set to On Change, the values for
A1 will vary as follows:

In other words, A1 is read at the 3, 15, and 24 second marks, because they are the
only places where the scanned value of D1 transitions from LOW to HIGH. Note
that any transitions that occur between scans (such as those between the 15 and 18
second marks) do not count.

4-40 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Example 1 - Device Point Interval Trigger
Data needs to be collected from point PLC1 at an interval signaled by a ready bit on
the PLC.
Configure the Trigger Settings and Scan Rate for PLC1 as follows:

At run-time, PLC1 will only be updated while the point PLC1_READY is equal to 1.

Example 2 - Efficiency
Triggering can reduce the amount of data that needs to be managed by the data
collection functions. This will help to improve the efficiency of your CIMPLICITY
system.
For example, for every contiguous sixteen bits of inputs or outputs on a Series 90-70
PLC, you can configure a single analog point that overlaps them. The update criteria
and trigger settings for the analog point would look like this:

The trigger settings and scan rate for each of the digital points should be configured
as follows:

If the trigger point (ANA_INP_20) does not change frequently, this gives a
performance benefit, because the digital points will only be updated when the analog
point changes.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-41

 Example 3 - Virtual Point Interval Trigger
The points WIDGET_ACCUM and NUT_ACCUM accumulate the number of
widgets and nuts made during a shift. Data needs to be captured from these points at
the end of each shift.
To do this configure three virtual points called SHIFT_NUMBER,
WIDGET_COUNT, and NUT_COUNT
On the Virtual property page for SHIFT_NUMBER, select Global for the
Calculation Type. The value in SHIFT_NUMBER changes whenever a shift ends.
The Virtual properties for WIDGET_COUNT are:

WIDGET_COUNT will read the value in WIDGET_ACCUM whenever

SHIFT_NUMBER changes.
The Virtual properties for NUT_COUNT are:

NUT_COUNT will read the value in NUT_ACCUM whenever SHIFT_NUMBER

changes.

4-42 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Types of Alarming
You can define values for Alarm High, Warning High, Warning Low, and Alarm
Low limits for points in the Analog Point Class. CIMPLICITY software supports
four methods for evaluating these alarm limits. The methods are:
Absolute Absolute alarms are used to detect when the value of a point
is too high or too low.
On Update On Update alarms are used to generate an alarm whenever
the point’s value is updated.
Rate of Change Rate of Change alarms can be used to detect either a faster or
slower than expected change in the value of a point.
Deviation Deviation alarms can be used to detect when the value of a
point deviates too far from that of a second point.

Absolute Alarming
If you choose the Absolute alarm criteria, you can define up to four Alarm Values.
Each time the point’s value is updated, its current value is compared with the Alarm
Values. An alarm is generated when the point’s value transitions from one alarm state
to another.
The transitions are:
State Description
Alarm High Point value ≥ Alarm High value.
Warning High Alarm High value > Point value ≥ Warning High value
Normal Warning High value > Point value > Warning Low value
Warning Low Warning Low value ≥ Point value > Alarm Low value
Alarm Low Point value ≤ Alarm Low value
If the point is in normal state, alarms for the point are reset by the Point Manager.

On Update Alarming
If you choose the On Update alarm criteria, you cannot define Alarm Values. Each
time the point’s value is updated, an alarm is generated.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-43

 Rate of Change Alarming
If you choose the Rate of Change alarm criteria, you will need to define Alarm
Values, and the Alarm Delay Interval and units. The point is scanned at its normal
Scan Rate, but is evaluated for alarming at the Alarm Delay rate (also known as
the sample interval).
An alarm is generated when the difference between the current value of the point and
its value at the last sample interval exceeds an alarm limit. The current point is not
evaluated for an alarm condition each time the value changes. An alarm is generated
under these conditions:
• The Alarm High and Warning High limits are used to generate
alarms for faster than expected changes.
• The Alarm Low and Warning Low limits are used to generate alarms
for slower than expected changes.
You can specify positive values in the alarm limits to check for increasing values,
and negative values in the alarm limits to check for decreasing values. Use the
following table as a guide:
Alarm Limit Limit Value Rate of Change Point value is ....
value is ...
Alarm High Positive ≥ Alarm High Increasing too fast
Alarm High Negative ≤ Alarm High Decreasing too fast
Warning High Positive ≥ Warning High Increasing too fast
Warning High Negative ≤ Warning High Decreasing too fast
Warning Low Positive ≤ Warning Low Increasing too slowly
Warning Low Negative ≥ Warning Low Decreasing too slowly
Alarm Low Positive ≤ Alarm Low Increasing too slowly
Alarm Low Negative ≥ Alarm Low Decreasing too slowly

Deviation Alarming
If you choose the Deviation alarm criteria, you will need to define Alarm Values,
and a Deviation Point. The point is scanned at its normal Scan Rate, but is
evaluated for alarming at the Alarm Delay rate (also known as the sample interval).
An alarm is generated when the difference between the current value of the point and
the current value of the Deviation Point exceeds an alarm limit. This difference is
calculated whenever the value of the point or the Deviation Point changes.

4-44 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Types of Data Conversion
You can define Engineering Unit (EU) conversions for points in the Analog Point
Class. CIMPLICITY software supports the following types of conversions:
None No conversion is performed.
Linear The point is converted according to the high and low Raw Limits you
specify on the Conversion page.
Custom The point is converted according to the Custom Expressions you
specify on the Conversion page.
When you specify Linear or Custom conversion, you must enter the values for the
Raw and Converted Limits.

Linear Conversion

When you use Linear conversion, you must enter four values for the Conversion
properties in the Limits box.
• The Raw Limit Low and Raw Limit High values determine the
minimum and maximum raw data values that can be expected for the
point. Values equaling or exceeding these limits are ignored.
• The Conv. Limit Low and Conv. Limit High values are the
maximum and minimum converted values for the point.
These four values are used to calculate the linear conversion for the point. The
conversion formula is:

where:
EU value = the Engineering Units value
RL = Raw Limit Low
RH = Raw Limit High
CL = Conv. Limit Low
CH - Conv. Limit High
Raw value = the value read from the device.
The inverse of this expression is used to convert Setpoint values entered by users to
raw values for downloading to the device.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-45

 Custom Conversion

When you use Custom conversion, you must enter two expressions for the
Conversion properties in the Custom Expressions box.
• The Forward expression is used to convert the raw data to engineering
units.
• The Reverse expression is used to convert setpoint values from
engineering units to raw data.
Use the place holder %P to indicate the point value in the expressions. Valid
operators that you can use are:
Arithmetic operators + - / * ( )
Logical operators AND, NOT, OR, XOR
Bitwise operators BAND, BNOT, BOR, BXOR
Relational operators LT, GT, EQ, LE, GE, NE
For example, if you have a conversion that calls for the raw data to be divided by
10.0, then multiplied by 2.5, the Forward expressions is:
(%P/10.0)*2.5

The Reverse expression for this conversion is:

(%P/2.5)*10.0

Integer vs. Floating Point Engineering Units

Give careful thought to the expression that you enter. The numeric operands you use
in the Forward expression are assumed to be integers unless you include decimal
points in them. Once the expression processor sees an operand with a decimal point,
it will process the rest of the expression using floating-point arithmetic.
For example, if you have a conversion that calls for the raw data to be divided by 2,
then multiplied by 10, you could enter any one of the following expressions:
(%P/2)*10 (%P/2)*10.0
(%P/2.0)*10 (%P/2.0)*10.0
If the raw value for the point is 3, the results of these equations would be:
(3/2)*10 = (1)*10 = 10 Because integer arithmetic was used
(3/2)*10.0 = (1)*10.0 = 10.0 in the first operation of these two
expressions, the operation (3/2) gives
the result 1 instead of 1.5
(3/2.0)*10 = (1.5)*10 = 15.0 Because (3/2.0) is processed using
floating point arithmetic, the rest of
the expression will be processed
using floating point arithmetic, even
thought 10 is entered as an integer
(3/2.0)*10.0 = (1.5)*10.0 = 15.0

4-46 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Configuring Points
To configure points, double-click the Points icon in your project’s Configuration
cabinet.
If you have selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the Point
Search dialog box opens. Select the filtering criteria you want, and then select OK
to open the Configuration - Point window with the filtered list of points.
If you have not selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the
Configuration - Point window opens with a list of all configured points.

The list of points is initially sorted by Point ID. You may click any of the other title
buttons at the top of the list to sort the list by that attribute.
You can use the Menu functions, Toolbar buttons, and shortcut keys to:
• Change Setpoint Security and Password information.
• Create a new point.
• Change the window display attributes.
• Change startup options.
• Modify a point.
• Copy the information for a selected point to a new point.
• Delete a point.
• Display a filtered list of points
Note
The $ROLE and $USER points are system points and cannot be changed or
removed.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-47

 Display Attributes
The Configuration - Point window always displays the following attribute for each
point:
Point ID A name that uniquely identifies each point.
In addition to Point ID, you can choose to display these attributes:
Access Filter Address Address Offset
Alarm High Alarm Low Data Length
Data Type ID Description Device ID
Display Format Display Limits Display Limits High
Display Limits Low Elements Has EU
Point Class Point Origin Point Type
Resource Warning High Warning Low

Access Filter
Shows whether the point is an Enterprise point. If it is, the field contains "E",
otherwise, the field is blank.

Address
For a device point, this field contains the actual starting address of the point within
the device.
See the chapter in the CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Device
Communications Manual (GFK-1181) that pertains to device communications option
you are using for the correct address format to use.

Address Offset
For a device point, this field contains the offset in memory from the first bit of the
point Address that marks the start of the point data.

Alarm High
The high alarm value for the point.

Alarm Low
The low alarm value for the point.

Data Length
The data length associated with the data type chosen.

4-48 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Data Type ID
The point type used for the point. This field can have one of the following values:
0 Boolean type point
1 Integer type point
2 APPL type point
3 Text type point
4 Unsigned 8-bit integer type point
5 Unsigned 16-bit integer type point
6 Unsigned 32-bit integer type point
7 Signed 8-bit integer type point
8 Signed 16-bit integer type point
9 Signed 32-bit integer type point
10 Floating point type point
In addition, see the point’s Point Type attribute, which displays this information in
textual form.

Description
Text that gives users more information about the point.

Device ID
The source of the point data. This field can have one of the following values:
<device name> The name of the device that is supplying the point data.
$GLOBAL Indicates that the point is a Global derived point.
$DERIVED Indicates that the point is a Calculated derived point.

Display Format
The format used when displaying the point in CimView.

Display Limits
The upper and lower limits for horizontal/vertical movement, rotation/fill or
horizontal/vertical scaling in CimView if no limits are set for the expression and this
point is the single point used in the expression.

Display Limits High

The upper limit for horizontal/vertical movement, rotation/fill or horizontal/vertical
scaling in CimView if no limits are set for the expression and this point is the single
point used in the expression.

Display Limits Low

The lower limit for horizontal/vertical movement, rotation/fill or horizontal/vertical
scaling in CimView if no limits are set for the expression and this point is the single
point used in the expression.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-49

 Elements
The number of elements that make up a point. If this field contains a number larger
than one (1), the point is an array point.

Has EU
Identifies whether or not Engineering Units (EU) conversion is being done for the
point. This field can have one of the following values:
0 No EU conversion
1 Linear or custom conversion is enabled

Point Class
Identifies the class selected for the point. This field can have one of the following
values:
0 Analog class
1 Digital class
3 Text class
4 Application class

Point Origin
Identifies the origin of the point. This field can have one of the following values:
0 Calculated derived point
1 Device point
2 Global derived point

Point Type
Identifies the type of point.

Resource
The resource associated with the point.

Warning High
The high warning value for the point.

Warning Low
The low warning value for the point.

4-50 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Setting Run-Time Point Properties
The run-time point properties let you:
• Enable/disable Set Point Security.
• Enable/disable Set Point Password.
To access the run-time point properties, you can do one of the following:
• Click the Points icon in your project’s Configuration cabinet, hold down
the right mouse key and select Setup from the drop-down menu.
• Select Setup from the Edit menu in the Configuration - Point window.
• Press Ctrl+O in the Configuration - Point window.
The Point Properties dialog box opens.

To enable Set Point Security, set the Set Point Security check box.
To enable Set Point Password:
1. Set the Set Point Password check box.
2. Enter the password that will be used to perform setpoint actions in the
Password input field.
3. Re-enter the password in the Confirm Password input field to
confirm it.
Select OK to close the dialog box and save your changes, or select Cancel to close
the dialog box without implementing any changes.

Set Point Security

The Set Point Security option lets you enable or disable Set Point Security for all
users that access your project. If Set Point Security is enabled, a user can perform
setpoints on only those points whose resources are in the user’s view. For example, if
RESOURCE_1 is an authorized resource for USER_X, POINT_A has been defined
for RESOURCE_1, and Set Point Security is enabled, then USER_X can perform
setpoints on POINT_A. However, if RESOURCE_1 is not an authorized resource
for USER_X, and Set Point Security is enabled, USER_X cannot perform setpoints
on POINT_A.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-51

 Set Point Security for an Enterprise Server
If an Enterprise Server project contains the same resources as the provider of a point,
then Setpoint Security for the point is enforced against the resource in the Enterprise
Server project. If the resource is not configured on the Enterprise Server project,
then Setpoint Security for the point is enforced against the remote project’s resource.
You can use the DONT_VERIFY_ESPOINT_FRID global parameter to change this
behavior. If you set this global parameter to "Y", then Setpoint Security for all points
from a given provider are enforced against the resource names configured on the
provider. This means that a setpoint against any of these points with resources not
configured on the Enterprise Server project will always fail (because a resource that
is not configured cannot be in the user’s view).

Set Point Password

CIMPLICITY software users have unrestricted access to the setpoint functions in the
default configuration. The Set Point Password lets you restrict access to the setpoint
functions by specifying a password for it. Users must enter this password in order to
access the setpoint functions at run-time.

4-52 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Creating A New Point
To create a new point, you can do one of the following:
• Select New from the File menu.
• Click New Item on the Toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+N.
After you initiate the request, the New Point dialog box opens. You can create
device and virtual points with this function.

Enter the name of the Point ID, Point Origin, and Point Class for the point you
are creating, then select OK. The system verifies that the point does not already
exist, and that no invalid characters have been used.
If the point information you entered is valid, the Point Definition dialog box for the
new point opens.
Point ID
Enter a unique identifier for the point you are creating. The identifier may be up to
32 characters long. You may use upper-case letters, numbers, and symbols in your
identifier.
See Naming Points for more detailed information.
Point Origin
If you are creating a device point, click the Device Point radio button, and then
enter the name of the device in the Device ID box. You can also:
• Click the Browser button to the right of the input field to browse for
devices.
• Click the Pop-up Menu button to create a new device, edit the currently
selected device, or browse for a device.
If you are creating a virtual point, click the Virtual Point radio button.
Point Class
Click the radio button for the Point Class you want to use for this point.
See Selecting A Point Class for more detailed information.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-53

Defining Point Properties
After you create a new point you can display and change the properties for that point.
These properties include:
General Defines general information about a point - its description,
resource, structure, access, and logging attributes.
Device Defines the device, addressing, triggering, and scanning
information for a device point.
Virtual Defines the Point Manager, calculation type, and startup
conditions for a virtual point.
View Defines the format, display settings and graphic screen for a
point.
Conversion Defines the conversion equation limits for a point.
Alarm Defines alarming information for a point.
Alarm Routing Defines what user roles can see alarms for a point.
Alarm Options Defines the alarm message options for a point.
The properties you will need to define for a point depend on the Point Origin and
Point Class you select in the New Point dialog box. They are:
Point Origin Point Class Properties Available
Device Analog General, Device, View, Conversion, Alarm,
Alarm Routing, Alarm Options
Boolean General, Device, Alarm, Alarm Routing, Alarm
Options
Text General, Device
APPL General, Device, View, Conversion, Alarm,
Alarm Routing, Alarm Options
Virtual Analog General, Virtual, View, Alarm, Alarm Routing,
Alarm Options
Boolean General, Virtual, Alarm, Alarm Routing, Alarm
Options
Text General, Virtual
APPL General, Virtual
Any information that does not apply to a particular point will be grayed out.

4-54 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 General Properties
The General properties let you define the description, Resource ID, data structure,
logging, access and safety point information for the point.

These properties are available for all points. Enter the following information to
define a new point.

Description
You can enter up to 40 characters of descriptive information about the point in this
field.

Resource ID
Enter the Resource ID associated with the point in this field. You can also:
• Click the Browser button to the right of the input field to use the Select
A Resource Browser to select the Resource ID from the current list of
configured resources.
• Click the Pop-up Menu button to create a new Resource ID, edit the
current Resource ID, or browse for a Resource ID.
Users that have this Resource ID assigned to their Role ID will be able to see any
alarms generated for this point on their Alarm Viewer screens.

Data Structure
This area contains the information that defines the structure of the point. Enter
information in the following fields:
Type Click the drop-down list button to the right of this list box to
display the types available for this point, and select one.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-55

 The choices depend on whether you selected Analog, Boolean,
Text, or APPL for the point’s Point Class.
For more information on the point types available for each
Point Class, see Selecting A Point Class.
For device points, your choice will also depend on the
communication protocol and device. See the CIMPLICITY
HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Device
Communications Manual (GFK-1181) for details for your
protocol and device.
Elements Points can be configured as arrays of values to provide more
efficient data collection
Enter the number of discrete elements in the point’s data array
in this field. Setting this field to a value other than "1" creates a
point that holds an array of the selected point type. For
example, if the point type is INT, and Elements is "10", an
array of ten (10) INT elements is created.
For more information on array points, see Using Array
Points.
There may be restrictions on array sizes for device points. See
the CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95
Device Communications Manual (GFK-1181) for details for
your protocol.

Logging
Use the check boxes and buttons in this area to indicate how the point is to be logged.
Log Data Set this check box if you want data for this point logged to the
Data Log or a Group log.
Log Alarm Set this check box if you want data for this point to be logged to
the Alarm or Event Log.
Once you set either box, the Settings... button activates. You can click Settings...
to enter Data Logger configuration information for the point.

Access
The fields in this input box are only available if you are defining a device point. Use
them to indicate how the point is to be accessed.
Read Click this radio button if you only want to be able to read values
from the point.
Read/Write Click this radio button if you want to be able to read and write
values to the point.

4-56 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Safety Point
The Safety Point is a digital or analog point that is to be checked when a Setpoint
request is made for this point. The point may be a device or virtual point.
At run-time, if the Safety Point evaluates to zero, or if it is unavailable, a Setpoint
will not be permitted on the point you are currently defining. Setpoints will only be
permitted if the Safety Point is available and evaluates to a non-zero value.
If you want to use this option, enter the Point ID of the safety point in this field. You
can also:
• Click the Browser button to the right of the input field to use the Select
A Point Browser to select the Point ID from the current list of
configured points.
• Click the Pop-up Menu button to create a new Point ID, edit the current
Point ID, or browse for a Point ID.

Availability Trigger
The Availability Trigger is a digital or analog point that is used to determine the
validity of the point you are currently configuring. You can use this point to
configure a "device healthy" signal for points that are tied to intermediate devices.

Enable Point
Set this check box if you want the point to be active when the project starts.
If you do not want the point to be enabled, clear the check box.
If you are using dynamic configuration, the point becomes active as soon as you
finish configuring it.

Enable Alarm
This check box is enabled when you define alarming for the point.
Set this check box if you want the point to generate alarms when the project is
running.
If you do not want the point to be alarmed, clear the check box.
If you are using dynamic configuration, point alarming becomes active as soon as
you finish configuring it.

Enterprise Point
Set this check box if you want the point to be available to other projects as an
enterprise point.
If you do not want the point to be available to other projects as an enterprise point,
clear this check box.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-57


This feature is currently being
supported only for the Trending
option.
4-58 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual
Point Buffering
Point buffering lets you allocate a buffer for a point and save a number of the most
recent values. You can save values for a time period, or by count.
Max Duration Set this box to save a buffer of points based on time, and enter
the time period in the input boxes.
Max Count Set this box to save a number of point values in the buffer, and
enter the number of values you want to save in the input box.
You may select either option, or both. If you select both, the Max Count takes
precedence over Max Duration in determining the number of values saved in the
buffer.
Example:
Point ABC is scanned every 5 seconds
• If you define a Max Duration of 1 minute, the buffer contains the 12
most recent values for ABC at any given time.
• If you define a Max Count of 10, the buffer contains the 10 most
recent values (that is, the values for the last 50 seconds).
• If you define both Max Duration and Max Count, the buffer contains
the 10 most recent values.
Note
Point buffering is not supported for Enterprise Server points.
GFK-1180
 Device Properties
The Device properties let you define the Device ID, addressing, trigger settings, scan
rate, and analog deadband for device points.

Important
Domains for programmable controllers in CIMPLICITY HMI software are
sized when the project starts. If you dynamically reconfigure domains
sizes on the programmable controller, you must restart the project to
access points at the new domain offsets.

Device ID
Enter the Device ID of the device where the point originates in this field. You can
also:
• Click the Browser button to the right of the input field to use the Select
A Device Browser to select the Device ID from the current list of
configured devices.
• Click the Pop-up Menu button to create a new Device ID, edit the
current Device ID, or browse for another Device ID.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-59

 Addressing
Addressing is used for most GE Fanuc device communications options, and for
devices created via the Device Communications Toolkit API that use custom
addressing.
Use the fields in this input box to define where the point is located in the device, and
how the point is to be updated.

Address Enter the starting address for the point in this field. The
address you use depends on the addressing conventions
for the individual device. See the CIMPLICITY HMI
for Windows NT and Windows 95 Device
Communications Manual (GFK-1181) for more
information.
Address Offset This field is active only when you are defining Bool
points.
If the first bit of the point’s data is not the first bit of the
address, enter the bit offset in this field. Address
offsets start at "0", and are numbered from right to left.
For example, if you are configuring a digital point
located in the third bit of Register 5 on a Series 90-70,
the Address is "%R5", and the Address Offset is
"2".
See the CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and
Windows 95 Device Communications Manual (GFK-
1181) for more device and protocol specific
information.
Update Criteria This field determines when data for the point is passed
from the device communications processor to the point
database. Once the updated data is in the point
database, it is available to all CIMPLICITY
applications that need it.
For more information on update criteria, see Device
Point Data Collection.
Click the drop-down list button to the right of the field
to see the choices available, then click the one you
want.
Your choices are:
On Scan
On Change
On Demand On Scan
On Demand On Change
Unsolicited
Poll Once
4-60 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 The choices you see depend on the protocol you are
using.
Device Data Set this check box if the address you enter is for a
device point.
Diagnostic Data Set this check box if the address you enter is for a
diagnostic point.
Ethernet Global Data This check box will be enabled only if the device
supports Ethernet global data. Set this check box if the
address you enter is for Ethernet global data.

Domain Address
Domain Address is used for devices created via the Device Communications Toolkit
API that use standard addressing.
Use the fields in this input box to define where the point is located in the device, and
how the point is to be updated.

Domain Type Select the domain that represents the type of device memory
from which the point is coming.
Domain Offset Enter the starting address for the point in this field. The
address depends on the addressing conventions for the
individual device. See the CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows
NT and Windows 95 Device Communications Manual (GFK-
1181) for more information.
Bit Offset This field is active only when you are defining Bool points.
If the first bit of the point’s data is not the first bit of the
address, enter the bit offset in this field. Address offsets start
at "0", and are numbered from right to left.
See the CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95
Device Communications Manual (GFK-1181) for more device
and protocol specific information.
Update Criteria This field determines when data for the point is passed from
the device communications processor to the point database.
Once the updated data is in the point database, it is available
to all that need it.
For more information on update criteria, see Device Point
Data Collection.
Click the drop-down list button to the right of the field to see
the choices available, then click the one you want.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-61


When you define Trigger Settings for
a point, use a Scan Rate of 0 (zero).
4-62 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual
Your choices are:
On Scan
On Change
On Demand On Scan
On Demand On Change
Unsolicited
Poll Once
The choices you see depend on the protocol you are using.
Trigger Settings
Enter data in the fields in this box if reads of this point are to be triggered by a
certain condition of another point.
For more information on triggered points, see Using the Trigger Function.
Trigger Point Enter the Point ID of the device point that serves as the trigger
for this point. The Trigger Point must be on the same device
as the point you are defining. You can also:
• Click the Browser button to the right of the input field
to use the Select A Point Browser to select the Point ID
from the current list of configured points.
• Click the Pop-up Menu button to create a new Point ID,
edit the current Point ID, or browse for a Point ID.
Relation This field determines how the trigger point will be evaluated.
Click the drop-down list button to the right of the field to see the
choices available, then click the one you want.
Your choices are:
None Triggering will not occur.
ONCHANGE Trigger is activated whenever the
Trigger Point is changed.
EQ Trigger is activated when the Trigger
Point’s value equals Value.
LT Trigger is active when the Trigger
Point’s value is less than Value.
GT Trigger is active when the Trigger
Point’s value is greater than Value.
LE Trigger is active when the Trigger
Point’s value is less than or equal to
Value.
GE Trigger is active when the Trigger
Point’s value is greater than or equal to
Value.
Value Enter the value the Trigger Point will be compared with to
determine if the trigger condition has been met.
This point is read only when the trigger condition evaluates to TRUE.
The trigger condition is evaluated each time the trigger point is polled, so effectively,
this point is polled at the trigger point’s scan rate while the trigger condition is true.
GFK-1180

When you define Trigger Settings for
a point, enter 0 (zero) in the Scan
Rate field.
GFK-1180
Scan Rate
Enter the frequency at which the CIMPLICITY device communications option will
read this point’s data based on the ports Base Rate. The Base Rate is the
minimum rate at which device points can be polled on the port. The Scan Rate is a
multiple of the Base Rate. For example, if the Base Rate is 5 seconds, and the
Scan Rate is set to "3", the point is scanned every 15 seconds.
Analog Deadband
When you are defining an Analog point, you can use the Analog Deadband to
filter out changes in the raw value of this point. The raw value must change by at
least this value before the point value is updated in the CIMPLICITY point database.
You can use the Analog Deadband to have CIMPLICITY software ignore small
fluctuations in the value of a point. For example, if you have a point ranging from 0
to 10,000, and you enter 5 in this field, any point fluctuations of less than 5 are
ignored.
Poll After Set
Set this check box if you want the point’s value to be read immediately after a
Setpoint is done to it.
If you clear this check box, the point’s value will be read on the next scan or when the
trigger condition for the point is set to "TRUE".
Note
The Point Bridge does not support Poll After Set. If you are defining a Point Bridge
point, clear this check box.
Point Configuration 4-63
 Virtual Properties
The Virtual properties let you define the Point Manager, calculation type, startup
condition, reset point, trigger point, equation, and variance for a virtual point.

Point Manager
Displays the name of the Point Management process that manages this point.

Process ID
Displays the name of the Virtual Point process that calculates the value for this point.

Calculation Type
Select the method for determining the point value. Click the drop-down list button to
the right of the field to see the choices available, then select the one you want.
The calculation types are:
Global Max Capture
Equation Min Capture
Delta Accum Trans-High Accum
Value Accum Equation w/Override
Average Timer/Counter
Histogram
For Text and Appl point types, you can only define Global virtual points. For
Boolean point types, you can only define Global, Equation, and Equation
w/Override virtual point.

4-64 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Reset Point
Use the Reset Point for virtual points with Average, Min Capture, Max
Capture, Delta Accum, or Value Accum calculation types. See the description
for the calculation type for details on how this point is used.
The virtual point resets whenever the Reset Point is updated.
You can also:
• Click the Browser button to the right of the input field to use the Select
A Point Browser to select the Point ID from the current list of
configured points.
• Click the Pop-up Menu button to create a new Point ID, edit the current
Point ID, or browse for a Point ID.
For the Reset Point, you should choose a global point with an initial value.

Trigger Point
Enter the Point ID of the point that will cause the value of this virtual point to be
updated. See the description for the calculation type for details on how this point is
used.
The virtual point updates whenever the Trigger Point value updates. The Trigger
Point may be either a digital or an analog point.
You can also:
• Click the Browser button to the right of the input field to use the Select
A Point Browser to select the Point ID from the current list of
configured points.
• Click the Pop-up Menu button to create a new Point ID, edit the current
Point ID, or browse for a Point ID.
This feature is designed to minimize the system resources that are required for
calculating virtual points when it is not necessary to keep virtual points current with
the points used to calculate their values. For example, if the application requires that
the virtual point be updated hourly for logging purposes, select a Trigger Point
with a one hour scan rate.
See Using the Trigger Function for more information on trigger points.

Equation
Enter information that specifies how the point value is calculated.
You can click the Browser button to the right of the input field to use the Edit
Expression dialog box to construct the equation. You can also use the Pop-up Menu
button to:
• Browse for another Point ID
• Create a new Point ID.
• Edit the properties for a Point ID.
• Edit the expression.
• Select operations to be included in the expression.
See the description for the calculation type for details on how this field is used.
See Using the Expression Editor for more information

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-65

 Variance
For Delta Accum and Value Accum points, enter the maximum acceptable delta
value that can be added to the virtual point.
Values greater than this number will not be added to the accumulator point, and the
system will log a message to the Status Log.

Rollover
For Delta Accum points, enter the value at which the point "rolls over" to a zero
value when incremented by one unit.
For example, if you configure a Rollover value of 99, and the point has a current
value of 97, if a new value of 3 is received, the delta is calculated as:
(100 - 97) + 3 = 6

Start Time
For Timer/Counter points, enter a starting time used by the Derived Point
Processor to update the Point Manager with information on the number of events,
cumulative duration, and time of the last HIGH event occurrence.

Interval
For Timer/Counter points, enter the frequency at which the Derived Point
Processor updates the Point Manager with information on the number of events,
cumulative duration, and time of the last HIGH event occurrence.

Local
Set this check box if the value of this virtual point is not to be reported to the Point
Management process. This is useful for points that are only used to hold
intermediate values in calculations. For such points, setting the Local flag
eliminates the overhead of reporting to the Point Management process. Local points
cannot be shared with other applications.

Startup Conditions
Use these radio buttons to select the source for the initial value of this point when the
software is started up or reset. You can choose:
Not Applicable No reset/startup condition is defined.
Saved Use the value saved when the project was last shutdown
Note
The last known value is not saved if the computer crashes.
Init Use the constant entered in the Initial Value field.
For Analog and Boolean class points and multi-character
strings (such as STRING_8), each element in the array is
initialized to the Initial Value. For example, if you have a
STRING_8 array of size 4 and an Initial Value of
"ABCDEFGH", each element in the array is initialized to
"ABCDEFGH".

4-66 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 For single character string arrays, each element in the array is
initialized with the corresponding character in the Initial
Value field. For example, if you have a STRING array of
size 8 and an initial value of "ABCDEFGH", then STRING[0]
is set to "A", STRING[1] to "B", etc. If too many elements
are given in Initial Value, the string truncates at the number of
elements. If the Initial Value does not specify enough
elements, the remaining elements of the string are initialize to
the Null character.
Saved or Init Use the saved value if there is one, otherwise use the constant
entered in the Initial Value field.
If you choose Init or Saved or Init, the Initial Value field activates. Enter the
value for the point at initialization, before any data is generated by its component
point(s).
See the description for the calculation type you are defining for details on Startup
Conditions are used.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-67

 View Properties
The View properties let you define the display format, display settings, and graphic
screen for Analog device and virtual points, and APPL device points.

Format
These input fields let you define the justification, display width, and precision to be
used when the point is displayed in standard CIMPLICITY software displays such as
CimView.
Justification Click the radio button next to the justification you want. Your
choices are:
Left - Point display is left justified
Right - Point display is right justified
Zero - Point display is right justified and zero filled
Width Enter the number of spaces you want to dedicate to the display
of the point value in this field.
If Width is omitted, CIMPLICITY software will use a width
large enough to accommodate the value.
Precision This field is available only if you are defining a Floating type
point.
Enter the number of digits to be displayed to the right of the
decimal point in this field.

4-68 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Type Use this field to determine the format type when the point is
displayed on a CimView screen.
• For integer point types, Decimal is the only
format type.
• For Real points and points with Engineering
Units conversion, select Fixed, Scientific or
Compact.
If you select Fixed, the point’s value is displayed in fixed
format using the Width and Precision information you
specify. For example, if you specify a Width of 7 and
Precision of 3, the point display uses 7 places and there are 3
places after the decimal point. For example, 10 displays as
10.000. If you do not specify the Precision, the default is 6.
If you select Scientific, the point’s value is displayed in
scientific format using the Width and Precision information
you specify. If you do not specify the precision, the default is
6.
If you select Compact, the point’s value displays in Fixed or
Scientific format based on Precision, which determines the
exponent to start displaying in Scientific format. For example,
if you specify a Precision of 5, the value 100,000 displays as
1e+005 and 10,000 displays as 10000. The Compact type
also truncates trailing zeros to the right of the decimal point.
For example, 10.0 displays as 10 and 10.10 displays as 10.1.

Display Settings
Display limits are used by CimView as maximum/minimum limits in single point
graphic expressions. These expressions are:
• Horizontal/Vertical movement
• Rotation/Fill
• Horizontal/Vertical scaling
If you have a single point expression in any of the above expressions and you do not
specify a minimum or maximum limit for the expression, the point’s display limits are
used instead. If these limits are not specified either, default values of 0 (minimum)
and 100 (maximum) are used.
Display High Enter the upper bound for the display in this field. If the
point value is greater than this value, the Display High
value is displayed.
Display Low Enter the lower bound for the display in this field. if the
point value is less than this value, the Display Low value
is displayed
Engineering Units Enter the units (for example, "degrees" or "parts") that the
point data represents in this field. Engineering units may
be selected whether or not any conversion takes place.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-69

 Graphic Screen
Enter the name of the CimView screen that will be displayed when a user selects this
point on the Alarm Viewer and clicks Screen. Click the drop-down list button to
the right of the field to see the choices available, then click the screen you want to be
displayed.

Conversion Properties
The Conversion properties let you define the type of value conversion to be
performed, the conversion limits, and custom expressions for the Custom
conversion

For an in-depth discussion of the types of data conversion, see Types of Data
Conversion.

Conversion
CIMPLICITY software supports the following types of point conversion:
None Click this radio button if you do not want any point conversion.
Linear Click this radio button to convert the point according to the high and
low Raw and Converted limits that you specify on this page.
Custom Click this radio button to convert the point according to the
conversion limits and Custom Expressions that you specify on this
page.

4-70 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Limits
For Raw Limit Low and Raw Limit High, enter the minimum and maximum raw
data values that can be expected for this point. Values equaling or exceeding the
indicated limits are ignored as follows:
• If a setpoint value exceeds a defined raw limit, the setpoint is rejected.
• If a raw limit is exceeded at run-time and RAW LIMIT ALARMS are
disabled, the last good point value displays until the point comes back
within raw limits.
• If a raw limit is exceeded at run-time and RAW LIMIT ALARMS are
enabled:
• The point value on CimView screens displays the default text until
the point comes back within raw limits.
• Point Control Panel displays asterisks (******) for the point value
until the point comes back within raw limits.
• If a raw limit is exceeded at startup,
• The point value on CimView screens displays the default text until
the point comes back within raw limits
• Point Control Panel displays asterisks (******) for the point value
until the point comes back within raw limits.
• Users cannot enter setpoints that exceed the raw limits.
If Raw Limit Alarms are enabled, an alarm is generated when a point value first
exceeds its alarm limits. When the point value returns to within its limits, the alarm
state will be set to Normal.
If you select Linear conversion, you must also enter values in the Conv. Limit
Low and Conv. Limit High fields. The entries in these four fields, plus the raw
value for the point are used to convert the point’s raw value to an engineering units
value.
See Types of Data Conversion for a description of the Linear Conversion
equation.
If you select Custom conversion, you may enter values in the Conv. Limit Low
and Conv. Limit High fields. If a setpoint value exceeds a defined conversion
limit, the setpoint will be rejected.

Custom Expressions
The Custom Expressions input fields are enabled when you select Custom
conversion.
Enter the equation to convert raw data to engineering units in the Forward
expression.
Enter the equation to convert Setpoint values from engineering units to raw values in
the Reverse expression.
You may also enter values in the Conv. Limit Low and Conv. Limit High fields.
If a setpoint value exceeds a defined conversion limit, the setpoint will be rejected.
See Types of Data Conversion for details on Custom Conversion.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-71

 Alarm Properties
The Alarm properties let you define the alarm class, alarm message, alarm criteria,
alarm limits, and help file that will be used for alarm processing by this point.

Definition
To activate the rest of this dialog, you must first define the Alarm Class and Alarm
Message for the alarm.
This input box lets you define the alarm class and message that will be used when
this point’s value goes into an alarm state.
Alarm Class Enter an Alarm Class in this field. Alarms with similar
characteristics can be grouped by class, and classes can be
prioritized. An alarm’s class determines the order in which it
appears relative to other alarms in Alarm Viewer. You can
also:
• Click the Browser button to the right of the input box
to use the Select a Alarm Class Browser to display a
list of Alarm Classes and select one.
• Click the Pop-up Menu button to create a new Alarm
Class, modify the current Alarm Class, or browse for
an Alarm Class.
Alarm Message Enter a message in this field that will be displayed with the
alarm in Alarm Viewer. This message may contain text plus
the following variable information that is determined when the
alarm is generated:
%ID - displays the Point ID.
%VAL - displays the point value (converted to
engineering units if applicable).

4-72 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 %EU - displays the Engineering Units label.
%LIMIT - displays the alarm limit that was exceeded.
%STATE - displays the alarm string for the String Index.
%DEV_ID - displays the Point ID of the deviation point.
%DEV_VAL - displays the value of the deviation point.
%DEV_AMT - displays the difference between the
current point value and the deviation point value.
%% - displays an actual percent sign in the message.
For example, if an alarm string is configured so that the string
for Warning High is "WARNING", and the string for Alarm
High is "EMERGENCY, the Alarm High and Warning High
limits are 400 and 350 degrees, and the alarm message is:
CONDITION: %STATE - TEMP IS AT %VAL DEGREES
If the temperature reads 353 degrees, an alarm will be
generated with the message:
CONDITION: WARNING - TEMP IS AT 353 DEGREES
If the temperature goes to 402 degrees, the alarm will be
updated and the message will read:
CONDITION: EMERGENCY - TEMP IS AT 402 DEGREES
If you specify an Alarm Class, you must specify an Alarm
Message.
String Index If you are using %STATE in your alarm message, enter the
index number of the string whose texts you want to use. You
can also:
• Click the Browser button to the right of the input
field to use the Select a Alarm String Browser to
display the list of Alarm Strings and select one.
• Click the Pop-up Menu button to create a new Alarm
String, modify the current Alarm String, or browse
for an Alarm String.

Alarm Criteria
You can select one of the following methods for evaluating the alarm values:
Absolute Absolute alarms are used to detect when the value of a point is
too high or too low.
On Update On Update alarms can be used to detect point value changes.
Rate of Change Rate of Change alarms can be used to detect either a faster or
slower than expected change in the value of a point.
If you select this alarm criteria, you must also enter a sampling
interval in the Interval fields.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-73

 The Interval fields represent the frequency at which the point
will be sampled for Rate of Change alarming. If the difference
between the current value of the point and the value at the last
sample time exceeds alarm limits, an alarm message will be
generated
Deviation Deviation alarms can be used to detect when the value of a
point deviates too far from that of a second point.
If you select this alarm criteria, you must also enter a Point ID
in the Deviation Point field. You can also:
• Click the Browser button to the right of the input
field to use the Select a Point Browser to display the
list of Point IDs and select one.
• Click the Pop-up Menu button to create a new Point
ID, modify the current Point ID, or browse for a
Point ID.
See Types of Alarming for details on the Alarm Criteria.
Alarm Values
Enter the values you want for alarm limits in these fields. The evaluation of alarm
limits depends on the Alarm Criteria you select.
• For Absolute alarming, you can define an upper and lower alarm limit
and an upper and lower warning limit for the point value.
• For Rate of Change alarming the high values are used to detect faster
than expected changes, and the low limits are used to detect slower than
expected changes. Specify positive alarm limits to check for increasing
values and negative alarm limits to check for decreasing values.
• For Deviation alarming, you can define an upper and lower alarm limit
and an upper and lower warning limit for the difference between the
value of this point and the Deviation point.
• For Boolean points, you can choose to alarm when the point’s value is
1 or 0.
Alarm Delay
The Alarm Delay feature is only available when you select Absolute alarming. If
you set the Delay Alarms check box, the Interval fields represent the length of the
delay before the alarm is reported.
When the alarm condition is detected for the point, the Point Manager sends the
information immediately to the Alarm Manager and all other Point Management
Interested Processes such as CimView and the Event Manager. The Alarm Manager
generates the Alarm Delay. This means that Alarm Delay only applies to the Alarm
Viewer and other Alarm Management Interested Processes, such as the Alarm
Printer, that are serviced by the Alarm Manager
In other words, the Alarm Delay delays the display of the alarm on Alarm Viewers
and other Alarm Management Interested Processes unless the point remains in an
alarm state for the configured interval. It does not delay processing of the alarm by
other processes such as CimView and the Event Manager that receive their alarm
information from the Point Manager.

4-74 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Deadband
Enter a value defining the tolerance for alarm conditions in this field.
The deadband cushions the generation of alarms when a point value fluctuates at an
alarm limit. For example, if a high alarm limit is defined as 100, the point’s alarm
state changes each time the point value goes from 99 to 100 or 100 to 99. If you
define a deadband of 5, the point goes into the alarm state when its value reaches
100, and stays in the alarm state until its value drops below 95.
In addition, when a point transitions from an alarm state into a warning state of the
same type, the alarm status switches from Alarm to Warning only if the point value is
more than the deadband away from the alarm limit. For example, if a high alarm
limit of 100, a warning high limit of 90, and a deadband of 2 are defined for a point,
when the point’s value is 100, the point is in Alarm High state. The alarm state
changes to Warning High when the point’s value falls below 98 (the alarm limit
minus the deadband).
Help File
Enter the name of a text file that users can display when they click the Help button in
the Alarm Viewer. You can enter a filename of up to 8 characters.
The actual file is in the ALARM_HELP directory in your project. The actual
filename is the name given in this field, followed by ".HLP".
Alarm Help files are ASCII text files of up to sixty (60) lines. Each line can have a
maximum of 70 characters. Files are located in the %SITE_ROOT%\alarm_help
directory.
If you wish, you may use the same Help File for several points.

Alarm Routing Properties

The Alarm Routing properties let you select the Roles that can view any alarms
generated by this point.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-75

 There are two display boxes in this dialog box:
• The Available Roles box lists the Roles that are not currently selected
to receive alarms for this point.
• The Configured Roles for Alarm box lists the Roles that are
currently receiving alarms for this point.
You can:
• Add Roles from the Available Roles list to the Configured Roles
for Alarm list.
• Remove Roles from the Configured Roles for Alarm list to the
Available Roles list.
• Select a Role from either list and display (and possibly modify) its
properties.
• Create a new Role.

Adding A Role to the Configured Roles List

To move a Role from the Available Roles list to the Configured Roles for
Alarm list:
1. Select the Role in the Available Roles box.
2. Select Add.
The Role will be placed on the Configured Roles for Alarm list in alphabetical
order.

Removing A Role from the Configured Roles List

To move a Role from the Configured Roles for Alarm list to the Available
Roles list:
1. Select the Role in the Configured Roles for Alarm box.
2. Select Remove.
The Role will be placed on the Available Roles list in alphabetical order.

Displaying Role Attributes

To display (and possible modify) a Role’s attributes:
1. Select the Role.
2. Select Properties
The Role Properties dialog box opens for the selected role. When you are through
examining the properties, you can select OK to save any changes you have made and
return to the Alarm Routing properties, or you can select Cancel to close the dialog
box without making any changes and return the Alarm Routing properties.

4-76 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Creating A New Role
If you do not see the Role you want, you can create a new Role. To do this:
1. Select New. The New Role dialog box opens.
2. Enter the new Role ID and select OK. The system verifies that the Role
ID does not already exist, and that no invalid characters have been used.
3. If the Role ID you entered is valid, the Role Properties dialog box
opens.
4. Enter the properties you want for this role
5. Select OK to create the new Role and return to the Alarm Routing
properties.

Alarm Option Properties

The Alarm Option properties determine how, when, and for what time period alarms
will be displayed and reset.

Note
If you have not defined an alarm for the point, any information you enter on this page
is not saved when you select OK.

Repeat Timeout
The Repeat Timeout is the time (in minutes) that the Alarm Manager waits before
repeating the alarm to all interested processes. The alarm will continue to be
repeated until it is acknowledged, reset, or deleted.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-77

 Note
The actual number of minutes that the Alarm Manager will wait before repeating the
alarm may be greater than this number. The maximum time will be the number you
enter in this field plus the number of minutes configured for the timer for processing
automatic alarms in the Alarm Manager configuration file (alarm_mgr.dat). The
default for this timer is 5 minutes.
In particular, the Alarm Line Printer (AMLP) is an interested process. Setting a
repeat timeout will cause the point’s alarm to be reprinted on the Alarm Line Printer
until it is cleared.
You can choose one of the following options:
Time Click this radio button, and enter a time in minutes in the
input field if you want to repeat alarms to all interested
processes.
Immediate Not used.
Never Click this radio button if you do not want to have the
alarm repeated.

Acknowledge Timeout
The Acknowledge timeout is the time (in minutes) that the Alarm Manager waits
before automatically acknowledging an alarm.
Note
The actual number of minutes that the Alarm Manager will wait before
acknowledging the alarm may be greater than this number. The maximum time will
be the number you enter in this field plus the number of minutes configured for the
timer for processing automatic alarms in the Alarm Manager configuration file
(alarm_mgr.dat). The default for this timer is 5 minutes.
You can choose one of the following options:
Time Click this radio button, and enter a time in minutes in the
input field if you want to have the Alarm Manager
automatically acknowledge this point’s alarm if a user
has not acknowledged the alarm before this time period
expires.
Immediate Click this radio button if you want to have the Alarm
Manager automatically acknowledge this alarm
immediately after it is generated.
Never Click this radio button if you do not want the Alarm
Manager to automatically acknowledge this alarm.

Deletion Requirements
When an alarm has been acknowledged, one of two events has happened:
• A user has responded to the alarm and manually acknowledged it in the
Alarm Viewer.
• The alarm was automatically acknowledged by the Alarm Manager.

4-78 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 When an alarm has been reset, one of three events has happened:
• A user has manually reset the alarm in the Alarm Viewer. This is
permitted if you have enabled Manual Reset Allowed for the alarm.
• The alarm was automatically reset by the Alarm Manager. This is
permitted if you have selected a timed or immediate Reset Timeout
for the alarm.
• The condition causing the alarm no longer exists, and the alarm was
automatically reset by the process that detected the alarm condition.
The Deletion Requirements are the conditions that must exist in order for an alarm to
be deleted (removed from the system).
You can choose any combination of the following:
Acknowledge Set this check box to delete the alarm when it is
Acknowledged.
Reset Set this check box to delete the alarm when it is Reset.
If you set both check boxes, the alarm will not be deleted until it is acknowledged
and reset (these actions may occur in any order).

Reset Timeout
The Reset timeout is the time (in minutes) that the Alarm Manager waits before
automatically resetting an alarm.
Note
The actual number of minutes that the Alarm Manager will wait before resetting the
alarm may be greater than this number. The maximum time will be the number you
enter in this field plus the number of minutes configured for the timer for processing
automatic alarms in the Alarm Manager configuration file (alarm_mgr.dat). The
default for this timer is 5 minutes.
You can choose one of the following options:
Time Click this radio button, and enter a time in minutes in the
input field if you want to have the Alarm Manager
automatically reset this point’s alarm if it has not been
reset before this time period expires.
Immediate Click this radio button to have the Alarm Manager
automatically reset this point’s alarm immediately after it
is generated.
Never Click this radio button if you do not want the Alarm
Manager to automatically reset this alarm.

Manual Reset Allowed

Select this check box if you want to let users manually reset this point’s alarm. If you
clear the check box, the alarm can only be reset by the application detecting the alarm
condition, or by an automatic reset from the Alarm manager.
If you choose only Acknowledge for the deletion requirement, manual reset will be
ignored at run-time by the Alarm Viewer. A user can still reset the alarm, but it will
not be deleted until it is acknowledged.

GFK-1180 Point Configuration 4-79

 Max Number Stacked
You can configure an alarm so that the states it passes through, once it is generated,
can be kept or stacked until the alarm is deleted. This stack can be displayed by
users in the Alarm Viewer. When the alarm is deleted, all occurrences of the
stacked alarm are deleted.
Enter a number between 0 and 20 in this field to set the stack size for this alarm.
Zero (0) means that the alarm will not be stacked.
At run-time, as occurrences are generated for the alarm they fill the stack. When the
Max Number Stacked value is reached, the oldest alarm occurrence is deleted as
each new occurrence is generated.

4-80 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Device Configuration

About Devices
A device is anything that can communicate point data to CIMPLICITY HMI
software. CIMPLICITY HMI software can read data from and write data to devices.
Examples of devices are programmable controllers such as the GE Fanuc Series 90.
Use this function to configure devices and specify their characteristics.
Configuration requirements for devices vary depending on the type of device and
communications protocol being used. See the CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT
and Windows 95 Device Communications Manual (GFK-1181) for detailed
information on configuring a device for a particular protocol.

Configuring Devices
To configure devices, double-click the Devices icon in your project’s Configuration
cabinet.
If you have selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the Device
Search dialog box opens. Select the filtering criteria you want and then select OK to
open the Configuration - Device window with the filtered list of devices.
If you have not selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the
Configuration - Device window opens with a list of all configured devices.

GFK-1180 5-1
 When you select Devices the Configuration - Device window opens.

The Configuration - Device window always displays the following attribute for each
device:
Device ID The physical device identifier
In addition to Device, you can choose to display the following attributes:
Port The port to which the device is connected
Resource A configured resource
Only users that are assigned this resource can view alarms for
this device.
Note
Alarms for points on the device may or may not use the same
resource as the device.
Description Up to 40 characters of text that describes the device
The list of devices is initially sorted by Device ID. You may click on any of the
other attribute buttons at the top of the list to sort the list by that attribute.
You can use the Menu functions, Toolbar buttons, and shortcut keys to:
• Create a new device.
• Change the window display attributes.
• Change startup options.
• Modify a device.
• Copy the information for a selected device to a new device.
• Delete a device.
• Display a filtered list of devices

5-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Creating A New Device
To create a new device, you can do one of the following:
• Select New from the File menu.
• Click the New Item button on the Toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+N.
After you initiate the request, the New Device dialog box opens.

Enter the following information to define the new device:

Device Enter the name of the new device in this field.
Port Enter the name of the device’s port in this field.

You can click the Browser button - - to the right of the

Port input field to open the Select A Port Browser and use it
to select the port.
You can also use the Window Pop-up menu or the Pop-up
menu button - - to create a new port, edit the current port,
or browse for another port.
Select OK to continue configuring the new device. The Device Properties dialog
box for the new device opens. You will need to enter information for the General
and device-specific properties.
When you are finished defining the device properties, select OK to close the Device
Properties dialog box and create the new device, or select Cancel to close the dialog
box without creating the new device.

GFK-1180 Device Configuration 5-3

 Device General Properties

The General properties let you define the following for a new device:
Port The port you selected in the New Device dialog box is
displayed in this field.

You can click the Browser button - - to the right of this

input field to open the Select a Port Browser and use it to select
another port.
You can also use the Window Pop-up menu or the Pop-up
menu button - - to create a new port, edit the current port, or
browse for another port.
Description Enter up to 40 characters of explanatory text about the device.
Resource Enter the name of the device’s resource in this field.
Remember, only the users that are assigned this resource will be
able to see device alarms.

You can click the Browser button - - to the right of this

input field to open the Select A Resource Browser and use it to
select the resource.
You can also use the Window Pop-up menu or the Pop-up
menu button - to create a new resource, edit the current
resource, or browse for another resource.
Model Type Select the type of device from the drop-down list. The list of
model types depends on the protocol.

5-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Device-Specific Properties
The device-specific properties depend on the type of device you are configuring. See
the CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Device Communications
Manual (GFK-1181) for detailed information.
For devices used by both CIMPLICITY HMI and CIMPLICITY Control, see "Using
CIMPLICITY HMI with CIMPLICITY Control" for detailed information.

Modifying A Device
To modify a device, you can double-click the Device you want to modify.
Alternatively, you can select the Device you want to modify, then do one of the
following:
• Select Modify from the Edit menu.
• Click the Modify Item button on the Toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+M.
After you initiate the request, the Device Properties dialog box opens. The
properties contain the device’s current configuration information. You can modify
any of these properties.
Select OK to close the Device Properties dialog box and modify the information for
the selected Device.
Select Cancel to close the Device Properties dialog box without modifying the
Device.

GFK-1180 Device Configuration 5-5

Resource Configuration

About Resources
Resources are the physical or conceptual units that comprise your facility. They can
be devices, machines, or stations where work is performed, or areas where several
tasks are carried out. Resource configuration plays an important role in your
CIMPLICITY HMI project by routing alarms to specific users and filtering the data
users receive.
CIMPLICITY HMI software uses resources in the following ways:
• Each CIMPLICITY HMI device and point is associated with a
resource.
• Each user has a view of the facility. The view is defined by the
resources configured for that user. CIMPLICITY HMI software alarms
are generated against resources and routed (displayed) to users who
have those resources in their view.
• Many base system functions (such as Alarm Viewer) and product
option functions filter data by resource. For example, a user can create
an Alarm Viewer display that only contains alarm data for a specific
resource.

Configuring Resources
To configure resources, double-click the Resources icon from your project’s
Configuration cabinet.
If you have selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the Resource Search
dialog box opens. Select the filtering criteria you want, then select OK to open the
Configuration - Resource window with the filtered list of resources.
If you have not selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the
Configuration - Resource window opens with a list of all configured resources.

GFK-1180 6-1
 The Configuration - Resource window always displays the following attribute for
each resource:
Resource A name that uniquely identifies each resource.
In addition to Resource, you can choose to display the following attributes:
Description Text that gives users more information about the resource.
Resource Type Identifies the type of resource. CIMPLICITY HMI software
currently supports two resource types: SYSTEM, and
RESOURCE. This is a display-only field and cannot be
modified.
Any resources you create are automatically given a Resource
Type of RESOURCE
Alarm Mgr Identifies the Alarm Manager process that receives alarms for
this resource. This is a display-only field and cannot be
modified.
The list of resources is initially sorted by Resource. You may click any of the other
attribute buttons at the top of the list to sort the list by that attribute.
You can use the Menu functions, Toolbar buttons, and shortcut keys to:
• Create a new resource.
• Change the window display attributes.
• Change startup options.
• Modify a resource.
• Copy the information for a selected resource to a new resource.
• Delete a resource.
• Display a filtered list of resources

6-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Creating A New Resource
To create a new resource, you can do one of the following:
• Select New from the File menu.
• Click New Item on the Toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+N.
After you initiate the request, the New Resource dialog box opens.

Enter the name of the new resource in the Resource ID field and select OK. The
system verifies that the Resource ID does not already exist, and that no invalid
characters have been used.
If the Resource ID you entered is valid, the Resource Definition dialog box for the
new resource opens.

Resource Definition

The Resource Definition dialog box lets you define the following for a new resource:
Description Up to 40 characters of explanatory text describing the
resource.
Note that you cannot use the $ or | characters in a resource
name.
Users for this The list of users that can view alarm or point information for
Resource this resource.

GFK-1180 Resource Configuration 6-3

 The users currently assigned this resource are displayed in the Users for this
Resource box. Users currently not assigned this resource are displayed in the
Available Users box. You can add users, delete users, view and modify user
properties, or create new users.
When you are through entering information, you can select OK to close the dialog
box and create the new resource, or you can select Cancel to close the dialog box
without creating the new resource.

Adding A User To A Resource

To add a user to the list that can view this resource:
1. Select the user in the Available Users box.
2. Select Add.
The new user appears in the Users for this Resource box.

Deleting A User From A Resource

To delete a user from the list that can view this resource:
1. Select the user in the Users for this Resource box.
2. Select Remove.
The user appears in the Available Users box.

Viewing User Properties

To view (and possible modify) the properties for a user:
1. Select the user in either the Available Users or Users for this
Resource box.
2. Select Properties.
The User Properties dialog box for the selected user opens. You can view and
modify the General and Resources properties for the selected user.

Adding A New User

To add a new user:
1. Select New. The New User dialog box will open.
2. Enter the new user name in the User ID field.
3. Select OK. The User Properties dialog box for the new user will be
displayed.
4. Enter the General and Resources properties for the new user.

6-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Port Configuration

About Ports
A port is a communication "socket" that connects one or more factory devices such
as PLCs to the computer.
Use this function to configure ports and specify their characteristics. Configuration
requirements for ports vary depending on the type of port and communications
protocol being used. See the CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95
Device Communications Manual (GFK-1181) for detailed information on
configuring ports for your specific device.

Configuring Ports
You can create a maximum of sixteen (16) ports per project. If you attempt to create
more ports after that, the following message displays:

To configure ports, double-click the Ports icon from your project’s Configuration
cabinet.
If you have selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the Port Search
dialog box opens. Select the filtering criteria you want, then select OK to open the
Configuration - Port window with the filtered list of ports.
If you have not selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the
Configuration - Port window opens with a list of all configured ports.

GFK-1180 7-1
 The Configuration - Port window always displays the following attribute for each
port:
Port The physical port identifier.
In addition to Port you can choose to display the following attributes:
Protocol ID The protocol used for device communications.
Description Text that gives users more information about the port.
The list of ports is initially sorted by Port. You may click on any of the other
attribute buttons at the top of the list to sort the list by that attribute.
You can use the Menu functions, Toolbar buttons, and shortcut keys to:
• Create a new port.
• Change the window display attributes.
• Change startup options.
• Modify a port.
• Delete a port.
• Display a filtered list of ports

7-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Creating A New Port
To create a new port, you can do one of the following:
• Select New from the File menu.
• Click New Item on the Toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+N.
After you initiate the request, the New Port dialog box opens.

Enter the following information to define the port:

Node If Node is not grayed out, you will need to select the node name of
the computer where the port is located.
To select a node, click the drop-down list button the right of the input
field to display the list of available nodes, then click the name of the
node where the port is located.
Protocol The protocols available to you will depend on the node you select,
and the device communication protocols available on that node.
To select a protocol, click the drop-down list button to the right of
the input field to display the list of available protocols, then click the
protocol you want to use.
Port The ports available to you will depend on the node and protocol you
select.
To select a port, click the drop-down list button to the right of the
input field to display the list of available ports for the protocol, then
click the port you want to use.
Select OK to continue configuring the new port. The Port Properties dialog box for
the new port opens. You will need to enter information for the General and port-
specific properties.
When you are finished defining the port properties, select OK to close the Port
Properties dialog box and create the new port, or select Cancel to close the dialog
box without creating the new port.

GFK-1180 Port Configuration 7-3

 Port General Properties

The General properties let you define the following for a new port:
Description Up to 40 characters of explanatory text about the port.
Scan Rate The basic timer for points monitored from this port. The rate at
which points are polled is a multiple of this scan rate. The scan
rate includes configurable units that may be set in units of
Ticks (hundredths of seconds), Seconds, Minutes or
Hours.
Retry Count The number of times to retry communications to devices on this
port after a communications error is encountered
If communications cannot be established, devices on this port
are considered to be down, and a $DEVICE_DOWN alarm is
generated for each device.
Once a device is down, periodic attempts are made to resume
communications to the device.
Enable Set this check box to enable communications on this port. The
port.
Clear this check box to disable communications on this port.
Note
If you dynamically disable a port, polling stops. However,
setpoints and unsolicited data will still be processed.

Port-Specific Properties
The port-specific properties depend on the type of port you are configuring. See the
CIMPLICITY MMI and MES/SCADA Products Device Communications Manual
(GFK-1181) for detailed information.

7-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Changing A Port’s Protocol
In your CIMPLICITY HMI project configuration, device and point data are protocol
dependent. You cannot delete a port then re-add it using another protocol if device
and point data for the original port still exist. The correct procedure for changing a
port’s protocol is:
1. If you plan to re-use the same point data, export the point data for the
port using the Import/Export utility.
2. Delete the point data for the port.
3. Delete the device data for the port.
4. Delete the port.
5. Create the port with the new protocol.
6. Define the devices for the port.
7. If you exported the point data, then use the Import/Export utility to
import the point data. Otherwise, define new points.

GFK-1180 Port Configuration 7-5

Alarm Class Configuration

About Alarm Classes

You can group Alarms with similar characteristics by Class. You can then assign an
order or priority to each Alarm Class. The order is a number from 0 to 99, where 0 is
the highest priority and 99 is the lowest priority.
If you assign the same order to more than one class, the classes are alphabetized
within the order. For example, if you assign order 0 to the HIGH, MEDIUM and
LOW classes, the alphabetized class order is HIGH, LOW, MEDIUM.
An alarm’s class determines the order in which it appears relative to other alarms in
Alarm Viewer. For example, all alarms with priority 0 will display first, followed
by alarms with priority 1, etc.

Configuring Alarm Classes

To configure alarm classes, double-click the Alarm Classes icon in your project’s
Configuration Cabinet.
If you have selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the Alarm
Class Search dialog box opens. Select the filtering criteria you want, and then select
OK to open the Configuration - Alarm Class window with the filtered list of alarm
classes.
If you have not selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the
Configuration - Alarm Class window opens with a list of all configured alarm
classes.

GFK-1180 8-1
 The Configuration - Alarm Class window always displays the following attribute for
each Alarm Class:
Class ID The identifier for the class
In addition to Class ID, you can choose to display:
Class Description Order Alarm State BG
Alarm State FG Normal State BG Normal State FG
Ack State BG Ack State FG
The list of classes is initially sorted by Class ID. You may click any of the other
title buttons at the top of the list to sort the list by that attribute.
You can use the Menu functions, Toolbar buttons, and shortcut keys to:
• Create a new alarm class.
• Change the window display attributes.
• Change startup options.
• Modify an alarm class.
• Copy the information for a selected alarm class to a new alarm class.
• Delete an alarm class.
• Display a filtered list of alarm classes
Note that the colors are displayed by number rather than name in this window.

8-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Creating A New Alarm Class
To create a new alarm class, you can do one of the following:
• Select New from the File menu.
• Click New Item on the Toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+N.
After you initiate the request, the Alarm Class dialog box opens.

Select OK to close the Alarm Class dialog box and create the new Alarm Class.
Select Cancel to close the Alarm Class dialog box without creating a new Alarm
Class.
Enter the following information to create a new Alarm Class:

Class ID
Enter the name of the new Alarm Class. The class name can be up to five (5)
characters in length. Each class name must be unique.
Note that you cannot use the $ or | characters in a Class ID.

Description
Enter a description of the Alarm Class. The description can be up to 64 characters in
length.

Order
Enter the Alarm Class order (priority). This must be a number between 0 and 99.
The lower the number you enter, the higher the priority of the class.

GFK-1180 Alarm Class Configuration 8-3

 Normal State
You can select the foreground (text) and background colors for displaying alarms in
this class in Alarm Viewer that are in the Normal state.
Default colors are White for the text and Black for the background.

Alarm State
You can select the foreground (text) and background colors for displaying alarms in
this class in Alarm Viewer that are in the Alarm state.
Default colors are White for the text and Black for the background.

Acknowledged State
You can select the foreground (text) and background colors for displaying alarms in
this class in Alarm Viewer that are in the Acknowledged state.
Default colors are White for the text and Black for the background

Audio Support
You can configure an alarm class to use audio alarming whenever an alarm in that
class is generated.
For details on configuring and using this feature, see Using Alarm Audio Support.

8-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Alarm Class Color Assignments
The default mappings for Alarm Colors are:
Number Red Green Blue Color
0 0 0 0 Black
1 255 0 0 Red
2 0 255 0 Lime
3 0 0 255 Blue
4 128 0 0 Maroon
5 0 128 0 Green
6 128 0 128 Purple
7 255 255 255 White
8 0 128 128 Teal
9 128 128 128 Gray
10 128 128 0 Olive
11 32 64 64 Dark
12 224 176 160 Rose
13 255 0 255 Fuchsia
14 0 255 255 Aqua
15 255 255 0 Yellow

GFK-1180 Alarm Class Configuration 8-5

Mapping Alarm Class Colors in RGB.DAT
If you need to define an RGB.DAT file for one or more of the following reasons:
• You want to change any of the default colors (0 through 95)
• You want to add more colors to the default table (indexes 96 through
255 are available for this purpose)
• You are importing screens from a CIMPLICITY System-I/U, -D/V, -
H/U or -RS/U system that do not used the default color mappings.
you need to be aware that indexes 0 through 15 in the RGB.DAT file are the default
colors used by Alarm Class configuration, Alarm State animation and Color Index
animation. If you change the colors in indexes 0 through 15 of the RGB.DAT file,
you need to change to colors displayed in the Alarm Class dialog box to match them.
To change the colors, create an AM_COLORS.CFG file in the same directory as
your RGB.DAT file. The first line in the file must contain only the |-* characters.
Each succeeding line contains an index number (0 through 15) followed by a vertical
bar ( | ) and the color name.
The following is an example of an AM_COLORS.CFG file (the colors listed in this
sample file match the default colors):
|-*
0|Black
1|Red
2|Lime
3|Blue
4|Maroon
5|Green
6|Purple
7|White
8|Teal
9|Gray
10|Olive
11|Dark
12|Rose
13|Fuchsia
14|Aqua
15|Yellow
Use the same RGB.DAT and AM_COLORS.CFG files for all projects. The file that
is used to display colors is the file for the project that Alarm Viewer or CimView
was started in, not the file for the project where the Alarm Classes or CimView
screens were configured.

8-6 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Alarm String Configuration

About Alarm Strings

You use Alarm Strings to name alarm states. An alarm state is displayed in an Alarm
when %State is included in the alarm message. Alarm messages are configured in
the Point and Alarm definition functions.
For analog points, you can define up to four alarm values for a point. Each value
corresponds to an alarm state, and each state has a corresponding alarm string:
• When the point’s value is greater than or equal to the Alarm High
value, it is in the Alarm High state, and the Alarm High Msg will be
displayed in the %State field.
• When the point’s value is greater than or equal to the Warning High
value, and less than the Alarm High value, it is in the Warning High
state, and the Warning High Msg will be displayed in the %State
field.
• When the point’s value is less than or equal to the Warning Low
value, and greater than the Alarm Low value, it is in the Warning Low
state, and the Warning Low Msg will be displayed in the %State
field.
• When the point’s value is less than or equal to the Alarm Low value, it
is in the Alarm Low state, and the Alarm Low Msg will be displayed
in the %State field.
• When the point’s value is less than the Warning High value and
greater than the Warning Low value it is in the Normal state, and
"NORMAL" will be displayed in the %State field.
For digital points, only one alarm state can be defined. That is, a digital point is in
alarm when it is either "1" or "0". Otherwise, the point’s value is in the Normal state.
Also, note the following:
• If the alarm value is "1", the Alarm High Msg is displayed in the
%State field when the point is in alarm.
• If the alarm value is "0", the Warning High Msg is displayed in the
%State field when the point is in alarm.

GFK-1180 9-1
 For example, the following alarm message has been configured for an analog point:
Temp Alarm - Temp: %STATE

The analog point references the following set of alarm strings:

Alarm High Warning High Warning Low Alarm Low
VERY HOT HOT COLD VERY COLD
and has values defined for the Alarm High, Warning High, Warning Low, and
Alarm Low alarm limits.
If the value of the analog point is above the Alarm High value, the text of the Alarm
message will be
Temp Alarm - Temp: VERY HOT

Each set of alarm strings is identified by an index number that is specified when the
set is defined. Up to 99 sets, numbered 1 through 99, can be configured. When a
point is configured, an appropriate set of alarm strings may be selected for inclusion
in the alarm message.
The default configuration includes a set of alarm strings for Index number 1. This is
the default Alarm String Index that is used when you add a device point. This string
may be modified but should never be deleted.

Configuring Alarm Strings

To configure alarm strings, double-click the Alarm Strings icon in your project’s
Configuration Cabinet.
If you have selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the Alarm
String Search dialog box opens. Select the filtering criteria you want, and then select
OK to open the Configuration - Alarm String window with the filtered list of alarm
strings.
If you have not selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the
Configuration - Alarm String window opens with a list of all configured alarm
strings.

9-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 The Configuration - Alarm String window always displays the following attribute for
each Alarm String Index:
Index The alarm string index number
In addition to Index, you can choose to display the following attributes:
Alarm High Msg The alarm string that will be displayed when a point using
this index is in the Alarm High state
Warning High Msg The alarm string that will be displayed when a point using
this index is in the Warning High state
Warning Low Msg The alarm string that will be displayed when a point using
this index is in the Warning Low state
Alarm Low Msg The alarm string that will be displayed when a point using
this index is in the Alarm Low state
The list of alarm strings is initially sorted by Index. You may click any of the other
attribute buttons at the top of the list to sort the list by that attribute.
You can use the Menu functions, Toolbar buttons, and shortcut keys to:
• Create a new alarm string.
• Change the window display attributes.
• Change startup options.
• Modify an alarm string.
• Copy the information for a selected alarm string to a new alarm string.
• Delete an alarm string.
• Display a filtered list of alarm strings

Creating A New Alarm String Index

To create a new Alarm String Index, you can do one of the following:
• Select New from the File menu.
• Click New Item on the Toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+N.
After you initiate the request, the Alarm String Index dialog box opens.

GFK-1180 Alarm String Configuration 9-3

 Enter information in the in this dialog box to create a new Alarm String Index.
Select OK to close the Alarm String Index dialog box and create a new Alarm String
Index.
Select Cancel to close the Alarm String Index dialog box without creating a new
Alarm String Index.

Alarm String Index

This field initially contains the next available Alarm String Index. You can use that
index or enter a new, unique index number for the new set of Alarm Strings.
The number must be from 1 to 99 and cannot conflict with an existing Alarm String
Index.

Alarm High
Enter the alarm string to be displayed when a point using this Alarm String is in the
Alarm High state. The string can contain up to 16 characters.

Warning High
Enter the alarm string to be displayed when a point using this Alarm String is in the
Warning High state. The string can contain up to 16 characters.

Warning Low
Enter the alarm string to be displayed when a point using this Alarm String is in the
Warning Low state. The string can contain up to 16 characters.

Alarm Low
Enter the alarm string to be displayed when a point using this Alarm String is in the
Alarm Low state. The string can contain up to 16 characters.

9-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Alarm Configuration

About Alarms
To configure or modify alarms for
points, use the Configure Points
function.
CIMPLICITY HMI software generates alarms for points that are in an alarm state. It
also generates alarm messages about system events, such as device failures, program
terminations, system startups, and system shutdowns.
Use Configure Alarm Definitions to configure alarm definitions for alarms generated
by custom software or to modify alarms for CIMPLICITY HMI system events or
product options.

Alarm Message Variable Run-time Parameters

Variable run-time parameters determine the display of field data. Possible
parameters that you can include in an alarm message are:
Parameter Description
%ID Displays the Point ID.
%VAL Displays the point value (converted to engineering units if
applicable).
%EU Displays the Engineering Units label.
%LIMIT Displays the alarm limit that was exceeded.
%STATE Displays the alarm string for the String Index.
%DEV_ID Displays the Point ID of the deviation point.
%DEV_VAL Displays the value of the deviation point.
%DEV_AMT Displays the difference between the current point value and the
deviation point value.
%% Displays an actual percent sign in the message.
The contents of each variable message field are determined when the alarm is
generated.
Note
You may see alarms in the list whose messages include variables such as %d, %s, or
%o. These alarms are system alarms whose messages may not be modified.

GFK-1180 10-1
Standard Alarms
A set of standard event alarms is included in your base configuration. These alarms
are:
$ALARM_DISABLED
Alarm is disabled for the specified point.
$ALARM_ENABLED
Alarm is enabled for the specified point
$ALARM_MODIFIED
Alarm is modified for the specified point.
$ALARM_RAWLIM
Alarm raw limits modified for the specified point.
$ALARM_RESTORED
Alarm limits restored for the specified point.
$AM_STATUS
Alarm Management status message used to analyze system performance. This
message is issued every half-hour and shows the number of alarms generated,
the count of alarms acknowledged, reset and deleted, and the average number
of seconds required to log an alarm.
$DEVICE
Alarm message for specified device.
$DEVICE_DOWN
Device failure message for specified device.
$DEVICE_FAILOVER
Reserved for future use.
$DL_FILE_FULL
Log file full message for specified log file.
$DOWNLOAD
Setpoint was downloaded to specified device.
$DYN_CFG
The specified entity has been changed dynamically
$GMR_DEV_DOWN
Device down message for Series 90 TCP/IP PLC redundancy.
$GMR_POINT_DISCREPANCY
Point discrepancy alarm for Series 90 TCP/IP PLC redundancy.
$LOGIN_FAILURE
Specified user failed to log in to the specified CIMPLICITY project.

10-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 $LOGON
Specified user has logged in to a specified CIMPLICITY project.
$LOGOUT
Specified user has logged out from a specified CIMPLICITY project.
$REDUND_DEV_DOWN
Alarm message for PLC redundancy.
$RTR_LINK_DOWN
Router link has been lost to specified node.
AMSI_ALARM
Reserved for future use.
DB_CONN_DOWN
Process has lost connection to specified logging database.
DB_START_FORWARD
Process is forwarding data to specified logging database.
MCP_PROC_DOWN
Specified CIMPLICITY process has terminated unexpectedly.
These alarms are not associated with any CIMPLICITY Point IDs. They may be
modified, but they should never be deleted.

GFK-1180 Alarm Configuration 10-3

Configuring Alarms
To configure an alarm, double-click the Alarms icon in your project’s Configuration
Cabinet.
If you have selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the Alarm
Definitions Search dialog box opens. Select the filtering criteria you want, and then
select OK to open the Configuration - Alarm Definitions window with the filtered
list of alarms.
If you have not selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the
Configuration - Alarm Definitions window opens with a list of all configured alarms.

The Configuration - Alarm Definitions window always displays the following for
each alarm:
Alarm ID The unique Alarm identifier for each alarm in your configuration.
In addition to Alarm ID, you can choose to display:
Class ID The Alarm Class in which this alarm will be grouped.
Alarm Type The type of alarm format used for this alarm. This field is display
only. An Alarm Type will be assigned by CIMPLICITY HMI
software to an alarm if it contains variable run-time parameters
(see page 10-1).
Description A description of the alarm.
Message Fixed text and run-time parameters that are displayed when the
alarm is generated.
You can control the amount of data presented, and the order in which it is presented.
Select Attributes... from the View menu, or click Attributes on the Toolbar to
open the Configure Display Attributes dialog box and make your changes.

10-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 The list of Alarm Definition list is initially sorted by Alarm ID. You may click on
any of the other title buttons at the top of the list to sort the list by that attribute.
You can use the Menu functions, Toolbar buttons, and shortcut keys to:
• Create a new alarm.
• Change the window display attributes.
• Change startup options.
• Modify an alarm.
• Copy the information for a selected alarm to a new alarm.
• Delete an alarm.
• Display a filtered list of alarms

Creating A New Alarm Definition

To create a new alarm definition, you can do one of the following:
• Select New from the File menu.
• Click New Item on the Toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+N.
After you initiate the request, the New Alarm dialog box opens.

Enter the name of the new alarm in the Alarm ID field and select OK. The system
verifies that the Alarm ID does not already exist, and that no invalid characters have
been used.
If the Alarm ID you entered is valid, the Alarm Definition dialog box for the new
alarm opens. You will need to enter information on the following property pages:
Alarm Definition Defines what the alarm will look like.
Alarm Routing Defines what Roles will see the alarm.
Alarm Options Defines the Repeat, Acknowledge, Reset, and Delete
attributes for the alarm.

GFK-1180 Alarm Configuration 10-5

 Alarm Definition Properties for Non-Point Alarms

The Alarm Definition properties for a non-point alarm let you define the following
for an alarm:
Description Enter an optional description of the alarm.
Alarm Class Enter a valid Alarm Class ID in this field.

• You can click the Browser button - - to the

right of the input field to use the Select an
Alarm Class Browser to select the Class ID.

• You can click the Pop-up menu button - -

to browse for an Alarm Class, edit an existing
Alarm Class or create a new Alarm Class for
the alarm.
Alarm Type Select a valid alarm type from the drop-down list. For
detailed information on Alarm Types, see the CIMPLICITY
HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Integrator’s Toolkit
Operation Manual (GFK-1461)
Help File Enter the name of an optional Help file that can be displayed
by Alarm Viewer when a user clicks Help.
The Help file is a text file that can be displayed by Notepad.
Alarm Message Enter the text of the alarm message in this field. An alarm
message consists of any combination of fixed text, and
variable run-time parameters (see page 10-1). The total
display length for all fixed text and variable parameters is
80 characters.

10-6 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Logging If Database Logging is installed on your computer, you can
set the Log Alarm check box to enable logging for this
alarm. If you enable logging, you can then select
Settings... to define the logging parameters for the alarm.
Clear this check box to disable logging for this alarm.

Alarm Definition Properties for Point Alarms

The Alarm Definition properties for point alarms let you define the following for an
alarm:

Definition
This input box lets you define the alarm class and message that will be used when
this point’s value goes into an alarm state.
Alarm Class An alarm’s class determines the order in which it appears
relative to other alarms in Alarm Viewer. Alarms with
similar characteristics can be grouped by class, and classes can
be prioritized.
Enter an Alarm Class in this field. You can also:

• Click the Browser button - - to the right of

the input box to use the Alarm Class Browser to
display a list of Alarm Classes and select one.

• Click the Pop-up menu button - - to create a

new Alarm Class, modify the current Alarm
Class, or browse for an Alarm Class.

GFK-1180 Alarm Configuration 10-7

 Alarm Message Enter a message in this field that will be displayed with the
alarm in Alarm Viewer.
An alarm message consists of any combination of fixed text,
and variable run-time parameters (see page 10-1). The total
display length for all fixed text and variable parameters is 78
characters.
For example, if an alarm string is configured so that the string
for Warning High is "WARNING", and the string for Alarm
High is "EMERGENCY, the Alarm High and Warning High
limits are 400 and 350 degrees, and the alarm message is:
CONDITION: %STATE - TEMP IS AT %VAL DEGREES
If the temperature reads 353 degrees, an alarm will be
generated with the message:
CONDITION: WARNING - TEMP IS AT 353 DEGREES
If the temperature goes to 402 degrees, the alarm will be
updated and the message will read:
CONDITION: EMERGENCY - TEMP IS AT 402 DEGREES
If you specify an Alarm Class, you must specify an Alarm
Message.
String Index If you are using %STATE in your alarm message, enter the
index number of the string whose texts you want to use. You
can also:

• Click the Browser button - - to the right of

the input field to use the Alarm String Browser
to display the list of Alarm Strings and select
one.

• Click the Pop-up menu button - - to create a

new Alarm String, modify the current Alarm
String, or browse for an Alarm String.

Alarm Criteria
You can select one of the following methods for evaluating the alarm values:
Absolute Absolute alarms are used to detect when the value of a point is
too high or too low.
On Change On Change alarms are used to detect when the value of a point
changes.
Rate of Change Rate of Change alarms are used to detect either a faster or
slower than expected change in the value of a point.
If you select Rate of Change, you must also enter a sampling
interval in the Interval fields.
The Interval fields represent the frequency at which the point
will be sampled for Rate of Change alarming. If the difference
between the current value of the point and the value at the last
sample time exceeds alarm limits, an alarm message will be
generated

10-8 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Deviation Deviation alarms are used to detect when the value of a point
deviates too far from that of a second point.
If you select Deviation, you must also enter a Point ID in the
Deviation Point field. You can also:

• Click the Browser button - - to the right of

the input box to use the Select Port Browser to
display a list of Point IDs and select one.

• Click the Pop-up menu button - - to create a

new Point ID, modify the current Point ID, or
browse for a Point ID.
See Types of Alarming in Chapter 5, "Point Configuration", for details on the
Alarm Criteria.
Alarm Values
Enter the values you want for alarm limits in these fields. The evaluation of alarm
limits depends on the Alarm Criteria you select.
• For Absolute alarming, you can define an upper and lower alarm limit
and an upper and lower warning limit for the point value.
• For Rate of Change alarming the high values are used to detect faster
than expected changes, and the low limits are used to detect slower than
expected changes. Specify positive alarm limits to check for increasing
values and negative alarm limits to check for decreasing values.
• For Deviation alarming, you can define an upper and lower alarm limit
and an upper and lower warning limit for the difference between the
value of this point and the Deviation point.
• For digital points, you can choose to alarm when the point value is 0 or 1.
Alarm Delay
The Alarm Delay feature is only available when you select Absolute alarming. If
you set the Delay Alarms check box, the Interval fields represent the length of the
delay before the alarm is reported. This means an alarm will not be generated unless
the point remains in an alarm state for the configured interval.
Deadband
Enter a value defining the tolerance for alarm conditions in this field.
The deadband cushions the generation of alarms when a point value fluctuates at an
alarm limit. For example, if a high alarm limit is defined as 100, the point’s alarm
state changes each time the point value goes from 99 to 100 or 100 to 99. If a
deadband of 5 is defined, the point will go into the alarm state when its value reaches
100, and will stay in the alarm state until the value drops below 95.

GFK-1180 Alarm Configuration 10-9

 Help File
Enter the name of a text file that users can display when they click the Help button in
the Alarm Viewer. You can enter a filename of up to 8 characters.
The actual file is in the ALARM_HELP directory in your project. The actual
filename is the name given in this field, followed by ".HLP".
Alarm Help files are ASCII text files of up to sixty (60) lines. Each line can have a
maximum of 70 characters. Files are located in the %SITE_ROOT%\alarm_help
directory.
If you wish, you may use the same Help File for several points.

Alarm Routing Properties

The Alarm Routing properties let you choose the roles to which this alarm will be
routed. All the currently available roles are listed in the Available Roles box. All
the roles currently configured for this alarm are listed in the Configured Roles for
Alarm box.
You can:
• Add a role to the alarm.
• Remove a role from the alarm.
• Change the properties of a selected role.
• Create a new role.

Adding A Role
To add a role to the Configured Roles for Alarms list:
1. Select the role in the Available Roles box.
2. Select Add.

10-10 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Removing A Role
To remove a role from the Configured Roles for Alarms list:
1. Select the role in the Configured Roles for Alarms list.
2. Select Remove.

Modifying A Role
To view (and possibly modify) the properties for a particular role:
1. Select the role.
2. Select Properties. The Role Properties dialog box for the selected
role opens.

Adding A New Role

To add a new role:
1. Select New. The New Role dialog box opens.
2. Enter the new Role ID in the Role ID field.
3. Select OK. The Role Properties dialog box for the selected role opens.
4. Select the privileges you want for the new role.
5. Select OK to create the new role and close the Role Properties dialog
box.

GFK-1180 Alarm Configuration 10-11

 Alarm Options Properties

The Alarm Options properties let you define the Repeat, Acknowledge, Delete, and
Reset requirements for the alarm.
• Use Repeat Timeout to control how often the alarm will be re-sent to
alarm printers.
• Use Acknowledge Timeout to control whether or not the alarm will
be automatically acknowledged.
• Use Deletion Requirements to determine when the alarm is deleted.
• Use Reset Timeout to control whether or not the alarm will be
automatically reset.
• Use Max Number Stacked to define the number of occurrences to
retain when this alarm is generated more than once before being
deleted. After the Max Number Stacked is reached, the oldest alarm
occurrence is deleted as each new occurrence is generated.
• Use Manual Reset Allowed to permit users to manually reset the
alarm. If you disallow Manual Reset, the alarm can only be reset by the
application detecting the alarm condition or by the Alarm Manager
when an Automatic Reset is defined.

10-12 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Repeat Timeout
If you have configured an Alarm Printer, use these fields to control how the message
for this alarm will be sent to the Alarm Printer:
Time Select this radio button to send the alarm message to all
interested processes at the interval you enter in the Minutes
input field until the alarm is cleared.
In particular, the Alarm Printer (AMLP) is an interested
process. Selecting this option will cause the alarm message to
be reprinted on the Alarm Line Printer at the selected interval
until the alarm is cleared.
Note
The actual number of minutes that the Alarm Manager will
wait before repeating the alarm may be greater than this
number. The maximum time will be the number you enter in
this field plus the number of minutes configured for the timer
for processing automatic alarms in the Alarm Manager
configuration file (alarm_mgr.dat). The default for this
timer is 5 minutes.
Immediate Select this radio button to send the alarm message to all
interested processes immediately when it is generated.
In particular, the Alarm Printer (AMLP) is an interested
process. Selecting this option will cause the alarm message to
be printed once when it is generated. The alarm message will
not be repeated.
Never Select this radio button if you do not want to send the alarm
message to any interested processes.

Deletion Requirements
The Deletion Requirements determine the conditions under which the alarm may be
deleted from the system. You can choose one or both of the following:
Acknowledge Set this check box to delete the alarm when it is
acknowledged.
Reset Set this check box to delete the alarm when it is reset.
If you set both check boxes, the alarm will not be deleted until it has been
acknowledged and reset.

GFK-1180 Alarm Configuration 10-13

 Acknowledge Timeout
Use these fields to control how the alarm will be acknowledged.
Time Select this radio button and enter the number of minutes in the
Minutes input field for the Alarm Manager to wait before
automatically acknowledging the alarm.
The alarm may also be acknowledged by a user before the
time period expires.
Note
The actual number of minutes that the Alarm Manager will
wait before automatically acknowledging the alarm may be
greater than this number. The maximum time will be the
number you enter in this field plus the number of minutes
configured for the timer for processing automatic alarms in the
Alarm Manager configuration file (alarm_mgr.dat). The
default for this timer is 5 minutes.
Immediate Select this radio button if you want the Alarm Manager to
automatically acknowledge the alarm when it is generated.
Never Select this radio button if the alarm is never to be
automatically acknowledged.

Reset Timeout
Use these fields to control how the alarm will be reset.
Time Select this radio button and enter the number of minutes in the
Minutes input field for the Alarm Manager to wait before
automatically resetting the alarm.
The alarm may also be reset by the application detecting the
alarm condition or manually by a user (if manual reset is
allowed) before the time interval expires.
Note
The actual number of minutes that the Alarm Manager will
wait before automatically resetting the alarm may be greater
than this number. The maximum time will be the number you
enter in this field plus the number of minutes configured for
the timer for processing automatic alarms in the Alarm
Manager configuration file (alarm_mgr.dat). The default
for this timer is 5 minutes.
Immediate Select this radio button if you want the Alarm Manager to
automatically reset the alarm when it is generated.
Never Select this radio button if the alarm is never to be
automatically reset.

10-14 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Using Alarm Audio Support

About Alarm Audio Support

You can configure an alarm class to use audio alarming whenever an alarm in that
class is generated. You can use a wave (.WAV) file or a beep. The sound is played
until the Alarm Stop condition is met for all the alarms from the configured class.
To generate an audio alarm from a wave file, your computer needs:
• A sound card to generate the sound
• A sound system, such as a speaker or headset, to make the sound
audible
To generate an audio alarm with the beep, your computer needs the system beep (you
can also generate a beep from a sound card, but it is not required). If you do have a
sound card, you can configure the frequency, duration and number of beeps. If you
do not have a sound card:
• For Windows NT, you can configure the frequency, duration and
number of beeps.
• For Windows 95, you can configure the number of beeps.
Audio alarms are prioritized by two keys, alarm class priority and project priority.
You can select one of these keys to be the primary key for prioritization.

About Prioritizing Alarms

The Alarm Sound Manager can only play one sound at a time. You can configure the
Alarm Sound Manager to prioritize alarms by Alarm Class or Project priority. You
determine Alarm Class priorities when you configure Alarm Classes. You determine
Project priorities when you connect to projects in the Alarm Sound Manager
window.
When you prioritize alarms by Alarm Class, the determination of the highest priority
alarm is:
• The sound for first alarm for the highest priority Alarm Class is played
first.
• If alarms exist for the same Alarm Class in more than one project, then
the highest priority alarm for the highest priority project is played first.

GFK-1180 11-1
 • If more than one project has the highest priority, then the order in which
the projects are displayed in the Alarm Sound Manager window
determines the project priority.
When you prioritize alarms by Project priority, the determination of the highest
priority alarm is:
• The sound for the alarm with highest priority Alarm Class in the highest
priority project is played first.
• If more than one project has the highest priority, then the order in which
the projects are displayed in the Alarm Sound Manager window
determines the project priority.

Examples
Suppose you have three projects, each with two Alarm Classes as follows:
Project Priority Alarm Class Priority Alarm Class Priority
PROJ1 3 ALM1A 1 ALM1B 2
PROJ2 2 ALM2A 1 ALM2B 2
PROJ3 1 ALM3A 1 ALM3B 2
In addition, you currently have one alarm generated for each class in each project.
If you prioritize audio alarms by Alarm Class, the alarm order is:
ALM3A, ALM2A, ALM1A, ALM3B, ALM2B, ALM1B
If you prioritize audio alarms by Project priority, the alarm order is:
ALM3A, ALM3B, ALM2A, ALM2B, ALM1A, ALM1B

11-2 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
Configuring Alarm Audio Support
You configure Alarm Audio support in the Alarm Class configuration.
To configure Alarm Audio support for an Alarm Class:
1. Double-click the Alarm Class icon in your project’s Configuration
cabinet.
2. Select the Alarm Class for which you want to configure Alarm Audio
support from the list of Alarm Classes.
3. Open the Alarm Class Configuration dialog box for the Alarm Class.
4. Select the Audio property page.

Set the Audio support check box if you want audio support for the alarm class.
You can configure two types of sounds:
• Wave file
• Beep
You can now do one of the following:
• Select OK to save all changes made and close the Alarm Class
Configuration dialog box.
• Select Apply to save all changes made and leave the dialog box open.
• Select Cancel to close the Alarm Class dialog box without saving
changes.

GFK-1180 Using Alarm Audio Support 11-3

 Wave File Configuration
To configure a wave file for audio alarming:
1. Click the Wave file radio button to use a wave (.WAV) file when the
alarm sounds.
2. Enter the name of the save file in the File name field. You can use the
browser button to browse for a wave file for this field.
You can specify logical names in the file name, such as SITE_ROOT and BSM_ROOT
in the path name for the wave file. These are expanded into actual directory names
when the file is used. For example, SITE_ROOT:\sounds\high.wav refers to
the file high.wav in the sounds directory within the HMI project’s directory.
You can also use a special variable called WIN_DIR, which expands to the Windows
95/NT directory.

Beep Configuration
To configure a beep for audio alarming:
1. Click the Beep radio button if you want to use a beep sound.
On computers with sound cards, this is the default sound event.
On computers without sound card, this is the default system beep.
2. Specify the following information for the beep sound:
For Windows NT, or if you are generating the beep through the sound
card on Windows 95:
• Enter the Frequency of the sound. Select a value between 37 and
32767 Hertz.
Remember, 1000 milliseconds equals 1 • Enter the Duration of the sound in milliseconds. Select a value
second.
between 1 and 10000 milliseconds.
For both Windows NT and Windows 95.
• Enter the Number of beeps to play when the alarm is generated.
Select a value between 1 and 10.
If you enter a value greater than 1, the Delay field is enabled.
• Use the Delay field to enter the delay between the beeps in
milliseconds. Select a value between 0 and 10000 milliseconds.

11-4 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
About Alarm Sound Manager
You can use the Alarm Sound Manager to connect to running HMI projects that are
broadcasting on your local network. The Alarm Sound Manager then plays sounds
and displays alarm information when alarms are generated by those projects for alarm
classes that have audio alarm support.
You must run the Alarm Sound Manager in order for the sounds to be played.
To run the Alarm Sound Manager, select or double click the Alarm Sound Manager
icon in the Windows Start Menu.

Using the Alarm Sound Manager

When the Alarm Sound Manager is running, you can see its icon on the Windows
Taskbar.

You can click on the icon to open the Alarm Sound Manager window.

The Alarm Sound Manager window displays the current alarm.

GFK-1180 Using Alarm Audio Support 11-5

 The items on the lower part of the Alarm Sound Manager window are available at all
times.

They include:
• The current alarm being played
• The Mute check box
• The Load profile... and Save profile… buttons
• The Minimize, Exit, and Help buttons
You can use the Projects, Options, and Startup pages to select the projects whose
alarms you want to display, the priority of concurrent alarms, start the Alarm Sound
Manager at startup and select a default profile file.

Turning Sound On and Off

You can set the Mute check box to temporarily shut off sound play. When you shut
off sound play, the Windows Taskbar icon for the Alarm Sound Manager changes to
this:

Saving the Current Configuration

After you have configured the Alarm Sound Manager window properties to your
liking, you can save your configuration, and then recall it whenever you open this
window.
To save all the changes you have made in the current Alarm Sound Manager session,
select Save profile....
To retrieve a previously saved profile and display it in the current Alarm Sound
Manager session, select Load Profile….

Using the Window Buttons

To minimize the window, select Minimize.
To exit the Alarm Sound Manager, select Exit. Remember that if you do this, audio
alarming stops and the icon for the Alarm Sound Manager no longer appears on the
Windows Taskbar.
To display the Help window for Alarm Sound Management, select Help.

11-6 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
 Projects Properties
The Projects page lets you add and remove broadcasting projects to the current
session.

While you are displaying this property page, you still have access to the alarm
information at the bottom of the window.

Adding a project
To add a project, click on the Add… button. The Add Project dialog box opens.

Use the drop-down list button to the right of the Project field to select a project to
add.
Select the project priority by specifying a number greater or equal to zero (0). The
higher the number, the lower the priority (which means that zero (0) is the highest
priority).
The project is placed in the list of projects according to its priority. If more than one
project has the same priority, then they are displayed in the order that they were
added to the list.

GFK-1180 Using Alarm Audio Support 11-7

 Examples:
For example, if you connect to PROJ1 with priority 3, PROJ2 with priority 2, and
PROJ3 with priority 1, then the list of projects looks like this:
PROJ3
PROJ2
PROJ1
If you connect to PROJ1 with priority 3, PROJ2 with priority 1 and PROJ3 with
priority 1, then the list of projects looks like this:
PROJ2
PROJ3
PROJ1
This project ordering is used by the Alarm Sound Manager to help determine which
sound plays first at run-time.

Deleting a project
To delete a project, select it and click on the Delete button.

11-8 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
 Option Properties

The Options page lets you:

• Select which priority to check first when concurrent alarms are
received. You can select Alarm Class or Project.
• Specify the alarm sound/beep stop condition. You can select one of the
following:
• Acknowledge only - the alarm sound/beep stops when the alarm
is acknowledged.
• Reset only - the alarm sound/beep stops when the alarm is reset.
• Both Ack and Reset - the alarm sound/beep stops when the
alarm is acknowledged and reset.
• Either Ack or Reset - the alarm sound/beep stops when the
alarm is acknowledged or reset.
• Configure the Project default priority to be used when adding new
projects to the current session. This value must be greater or equal to 0
(zero).
The higher the number, the lower the priority (this means that 0 is the
highest priority).
• Specify whether you want the alarm sound/beep to be repeated.
If you set the Repeat sound/beep checkbox, the sound/beep is
repeated every ten (10) seconds until the stop sound/beep condition is
satisfied.
If you clear the Repeat sound/beep check box, each alarm
sound/beep is played only once.

GFK-1180 Using Alarm Audio Support 11-9

 While you are displaying this property page, you still have access to the alarm
information at the bottom of the window.

Startup Properties
The Startup page lets you configure the Alarm Sound Manager to start up at boot
time, and specify a default profile to use whenever the Alarm Sound Manager starts.

While you are displaying this property page, you still have access to the alarm
information at the bottom of the window.
To start the Alarm Sound Manager at boot, set the Start at Windows startup
check box.
To specify a profile file to be used by the Alarm Sound Manager when it starts, enter
the name of the file in the Use profile field. You can use the browser button to the
right of the input field to search for a profile file.

11-10 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
Alarm Blocking Configuration

About Alarm Blocking

Monitoring and control systems do an excellent job of informing operators of
problem conditions through alarms. However, there are times when operators can be
overwhelmed by numerous alarms that are the result of one major problem. For
example, when a process conveyor stops, it affects all machines feeding into it. The
operator needs to know that the major problem is the stopped conveyor and not waste
valuable time looking through all the other resulting alarms. Alarm Blocking lets you
configure a hierarchy of alarms for your process so users see the important alarms
first.
Alarm Blocking lets you:
• Logically group alarms into blocking groups.
• Select a run-time blocking mode for each blocking group.
• Assign a priority level to each alarm in a blocking group.
Each Alarm Blocking group works independently. This means that the high priority
alarms in one group do not block the high priority alarms in another group.
Before you implement Alarm Blocking, you need to plan how you want to group and
prioritize your alarms for your project. You need to decide:
• The number of blocking groups you need.
• Which alarms are to be assigned to each blocking group.
• How the alarms are to be prioritized in each blocking group.
• How to handle the display of equal priority alarms in each blocking
group.
Alarms that you do not assign to Alarm Blocking groups are not affected by Alarm
Blocking.

GFK-1180 12-1
 Assigning Alarms
CIMPLICITY HMI software generates two types of alarms; point alarms and system
alarms. Each point alarm is uniquely identified by its Alarm ID. Each system alarm
is uniquely identified by its Alarm ID and Resource ID.
For example:
• For point XYZ, the unique Alarm ID is XYZ.
• Each unique instance of the $DEVICE_DOWN system alarm is
identified by the Alarm ID and the Resource ID of the affected device.
For Alarm Blocking, you can assign a uniquely identified alarm to only one group.
This means:
• You can assign a point alarm to only one blocking group.
• You can assign a uniquely identified system alarm to only one blocking
group.
This means that you can have more than one instance of a system alarm
in a blocking group or you may have system alarms in more than one
blocking group, provided that the Resource ID you assign to each
instance is unique across all Alarm Blocking groups.

Choosing Blocking Modes

You can select one of two blocking modes for each Alarm Blocking group that you
create.
• If you select Peer Blocking mode, only the first alarm in a set of alarms
with equal priority displays.
• If you select Non-Peer Blocking mode, all alarms in a set of alarms with
equal priority display.

Assigning Alarm Priorities

You need to assign each alarm in an Alarm Blocking group a number from 0 to
32767. The higher the number you enter, the higher the priority of the alarm. For
example, alarm XXX with priority 100 blocks alarm YYY with priority 10. You can
assign the same priority number to more than one alarm in an Alarm Blocking group.
The priority of an alarm and the blocking mode of the group determine whether the
alarm is blocked or not.

12-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Alarm Blocking Rules
When an alarm that is assigned to an Alarm Blocking group is generated:
• If there is a current alarm with higher priority in the group, the newly
generated alarm is blocked.
• For Peer Blocking, if there is a current alarm with equal priority in the
group, the newly generated alarm is blocked. In other words, only one
alarm in a set of alarms with equal priority displays at any given time.
• For Non-Peer Blocking, all current alarms with equal priority display at
any given time.
When the blocking alarm returns to Normal state or is deleted:
• For Peer Blocking, if alarms of equal priority exist, the oldest one
displays and becomes the new blocking alarm.
• For Non-Peer Blocking, all alarms with the next lower priority display
and become the new blocking alarms.
If lower priority alarm is the current blocking alarm and a higher priority alarm is
generated, the lower priority alarm remains on the list of alarms and the higher
priority alarm becomes the new blocking alarm.
If an alarm already exists in Normal state and it returns to Alarm state, the alarm is
not blocked.

GFK-1180 Alarm Blocking Configuration 12-3

Configuring Alarm Blocking
To configure alarm blocking, double-click the Alarm Blocking icon in your project’s
Configuration Cabinet.
If you have selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the Alarm
Block Group Search dialog box opens. Select the filtering criteria you want, and
then select OK to open the Alarm Blocking Group - Configuration window with the
filtered list of alarm groups.
If you have not selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the Alarm
Blocking Group - Configuration window opens with a list of all configured alarm
groups.

The Alarm Blocking Group - Configuration window always displays the following
attribute for each Alarm Class:
Group ID The identifier for the class
In addition to Group ID, you can choose to display:
Group Description Optional description of the group
Peer block Identifies whether Peer Blocking is enabled or
disabled.
The list of groups is initially sorted by Group ID. You may click any of the other
title buttons at the top of the list to sort the list by that attribute.
You can use the Menu functions, Toolbar buttons, and shortcut keys to:
• Create a new Alarm block group.
• Add alarms to the groups.
• Remove alarms from the groups.
• Modify alarm information in the groups.
• Change the window display attributes.
• Change startup options.
• Delete an alarm block group.
• Display a filtered list of alarm block groups.

12-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Creating an Alarm Block Group
To create a new Alarm block group, you can do one of the following:
• Select New from the File menu.
• Click New Item on the Toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+N.
After you initiate the request, the Alarm Blocking dialog box opens.

You can resize the width of the Alarm ID, Priority and Resource ID fields to suit
your needs.
Enter the following information to create a new Alarm block group:
Group ID Enter a new, unique Alarm group name. The group
name can be up to 32 characters long.
Description Enter a description of the Alarm group. The
description can be up to 64 characters long.
Peer block Set this check box to enforce Peer Blocking Mode for
this group. Clear this check box if you want to use
Non-Peer Blocking Mode.
The Blocking Mode and alarm priorities determine the
alarm blocking hierarchy at run-time
Alarms This input box displays the current list of alarms in the
Alarm block group.
You can add an alarm to the list by directly entering its
Alarm ID, Priority and Resource ID or by using the
Add button to select an Alarm ID from the Browser
dialog box.

GFK-1180 Alarm Blocking Configuration 12-5

 You can change an alarm on the list by directly editing
its Alarm ID, Priority or Resource ID or by selecting
the Alarm ID and pressing Set attributes….
To delete an alarm from the list, select it and press
Delete.
Select OK to close the Alarm Blocking dialog box and create the new Alarm block
group. Select Cancel to close the Alarm Blocking dialog box without creating a new
Alarm block group.

Adding an Alarm
You can enter the name of an Alarm ID in the Alarm ID field in any of the following
ways:
• You can select Add to open the Browser dialog box and browse for the
Alarm ID you want.
• You can click the Browser button to the right of the input field to open
the Browser dialog box and browse for the Alarm ID you want.
• You can click the Pop-up menu button to the right of the input field to
create a new Alarm ID, modify the current Alarm ID or browse for an
Alarm ID.
Enter the priority of the Alarm ID in the Priority field. This can be a number from 0
to 32767. The higher the number you enter, the higher the blocking priority for the
alarm. For example, if you have alarm XXX with priority set to 10 and alarm YYY
with priority set to 100 in the same group, when alarm YYY generates, it blocks
alarm XXX.
If the Alarm ID does not have a Point ID, you must assign a Resource ID to the
alarm. You can click the Browser button to the right of the input field to open the
Browser dialog box and browse for the Resource ID you want. You can also use the
Pop-up menu button to create a new Resource ID, modify the current Resource ID or
browse for a Resource ID. Remember that each Alarm ID/Resource ID combination
must be unique within a group and across all groups.

Removing an Alarm
To remove an alarm from an Alarm block group:
1. Select the alarm from the list.
2. Press Delete.
The list of alarms in the window updates immediately.

Modifying an Alarm
You can modify an alarm’s name, priority and Resource ID in the list. All you need
to do is:
1. Select the field you want to edit in the Alarms list.
2. Type in your changes.

12-6 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 If you are changing an Alarm ID or Resource ID, you can also use the Browser and
Pop-up Menu buttons in the field to search for a new one.
You can also set a number of alarms to the same priority and/or Resource ID at the
same time. To do this:
1. Select the alarms whose priority and/or Resource ID you want to set.
You can use the Shift and Ctrl keys while making your selection.
2. Select Set Attributes…. The Set Attributes dialog box opens

3. Enter the new priority and/or Resource ID for the alarms and select
OK. All the selected alarms will be assigned the new priority. Non-
point alarms will be assigned the new Resource ID.

Modifying an Alarm Block Group

To modify an Alarm block group, you can double-click the Alarm block group you
want to modify. Alternatively, you can select the Alarm block group you want to
modify, then do one of the following:
• Select Modify from the Edit menu.
• Click Modify Item on the Toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+M.
After you initiate the request, the Alarm Blocking dialog box opens. The fields
contain the group’s current configuration information. You can:
• Modify the group description.
• Change the Peer block status.
• Add alarms to the list.
• Remove alarms from the list.
• Change alarm names, priorities and Resource IDs on the list.
Select OK to close the Alarm Blocking dialog box and modify the information for the
selected Alarm group.
Select Cancel to close the Alarm Blocking dialog box without modifying the Alarm
group.

GFK-1180 Alarm Blocking Configuration 12-7

Alarm Printer Configuration

About Alarm Printer Configuration

You can configure a serial or parallel printer in CIMPLICITY HMI software that
prints alarms and/or events as they occur. You may also configure an alarm printer
to write to a file, rather than to a device. You may configure a local or network
printer as the alarm printer. If your project includes the Host Redundancy option,
you may configure a redundant alarm printer.
Important

Before you start, make sure that the printer is not configured in
Windows.

To configure an alarm printer, double-click the Alarm Printer icon in your project’s
Configuration cabinet.
If you have selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the Alarm
Log Printer Search dialog box opens. Select the filtering criteria you want, and then
select OK to open the Alarm Log Printer - Configuration window with the filtered
list of printers.
If you have not selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the Alarm
Log Printer - Configuration window opens with a list of all configured printers.

GFK-1180 13-1
 The Alarm Log Printer - Configuration window always displays the following for
each printer:
Name The name of the alarm printer.
In addition to Name, you can choose to display:
Node ID The node to which the alarm printer is connected.
Destination The actual device or file name of the printer (like LPT1: or
amlp.fil).

Page Width The page width in characters.

Page Length The page length in lines.
The list of alarm printers is initially sorted by Name. You may click on any of the
other title buttons at the top of the list to sort the list by that attribute.
You can use the Menu functions, Toolbar buttons, and shortcut keys to:
• Create a new alarm printer.
• Change the window display attributes.
• Change startup options.
• Modify an alarm printer.
• Delete an alarm printer.
• Display a filtered list of alarm printers

Adding an Alarm Printer

To add a new alarm printer, you can do one of the following:
• Select New from the File menu.
• Select New Item on the Toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+N.
After you initiate the request, the New Alarm Log Printer dialog box opens.

Enter the name of the new alarm printer, or the name of the file you want to write
alarms to in the Name field and select OK. You may enter a maximum of 16
characters. The system verifies that the alarm printer name does not already exist,
and that no invalid characters have been used.
If the alarm printer name you entered is valid, the Alarm Printer properties dialog
box for the new alarm printer opens.

13-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Alarm Printer Properties
The Alarm Printer property sheet let you define the device, and the types of alarms
handled by it. You can configure local and network printers. You can also configure
redundant alarm printers if your project supports the Host Redundancy option.
When you are finished defining the alarm printer properties, select OK to close the
Alarm Printer property sheet and create the new alarm printer, or select Cancel to
close the property sheet without creating the new alarm printer.

General Properties

The AMLP Configuration property page let you define the following for a new alarm
printer:

Log Events
Select this check box if you want to log events to the printer.

Log Alarms
Select this check box if you want to log alarms to the printer.
If you clear this check box, the Alarm logging options are grayed out.

GFK-1180 Alarm Printer Configuration 13-3

 Alarm Logging Options
These options are available only when you select the Log alarms check box.
Use these fields to specify the types of alarms, and alarms classes that will be printed
on this alarm printer:
Generated alarms
Set this check box to log messages when alarms are generated.
Acknowledged alarms
Set this check box to log messages when alarms are acknowledged.
Reset alarms
Set this check box to log messages when alarms are reset.
Deleted alarms
Set this check box to log messages when alarms are deleted.
All alarm classes
Set this check box to log messages for all alarm classes. When you do, the
Alarm Class input field will be grayed out.
Alarm Class
This field is available when you clear the All alarm classes check box.
If you want log alarms for a particular Alarm Class, enter that class name in this
field. You can also:

• Click the Browser button - - to the right of the input field to display
the Select Alarm Class browser and use it to select the Alarm Class.

• Click the Pop-up Menu button - - to create a new Alarm Class, edit
the current Alarm Class, or browse for an Alarm Class.

Output
Enter the device name for the alarm printer. You can:
• Enter the name of a local port on the project’s computer (for example -
LPT1 or COM1) where you have attached the alarm printer.
Note

If you are connecting to serial port COM10 and above, the format is \\.\COM<n>.

• Enter a file name to write alarms to a file. If you wish, you may also
enter a period followed by a three character file extension (for example,
alarms.fil).
If you do not enter a file extension, none is automatically provided.
The file is placed in the project’s \log directory.

13-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 • Enter the path for a network printer (for example,
\\M_005ad4\d5prn1).
Note

If the printer is connected locally on your computer, use the local port name instead
of the network path.

• Enter the path for a file on a network disk (for example,

\\nt001\proj1\alarms).
You can associate more than one alarm printer with a network printer or file on a
network disk. If you use a network printer or file, you should clear the Print
header field in the Layout property page.

Layout Properties

The Layout property page lets you determine whether a header should be printed at
the top of a page. Enter information in the following fields:

Print Headers
Set this check box if you want to print a header at the top of each page.
If you have more than one alarm printer process sending messages to the same printer
or file, clear this check box. When you clear the check box, the Page length field
is disabled.

GFK-1180 Alarm Printer Configuration 13-5

 Page Length
Enter the number of lines per page that can be printed. The number must be an
integer between 1 and 999.

Page Width
Enter the number of characters that can be printed on a line. The number must be an
integer between 80 and 132.

Redundant Alarm Printing

This field is enabled if your project has the Host Redundancy option.
Set this check box if you want both the Master and Slave computers to print alarms.
Clear this check box if you only want the Master computer to print alarms

Date/Time Format

Use the Date/Time Format properties to choose how the alarm printer will print the
date and time.
You can define the following:
Header Date
Select the format you want to use to print the date on the alarm printer page header.
This field is not available if you are not printing a page header. A sample for the
format you choose displays in the Sample field in this box. You may select one of
the formats from the list, or construct your own format.

13-6 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Alarm Date/Time
Select the format you want to use to print the date and time of each alarm. A sample
for the format you choose displays in the Sample field in this box. You may select
one of the formats from the list, or construct your own format.

Constructing Date and Time Formats

To construct date formats, use the following information:
m Numeric month with no leading zero.
mm Numeric month with leading zero.
mmm Short text month.
mmmm Long Text month.
d Numeric day with no leading zero.
dd Numeric day with leading zero.
ddd Short text day of the week.
dddd Long text day of the week.
y Last two digits of year. For digits 00 through 09, only the last digit is
displayed.
yy Last two digits of year. For digits 00 through 09, both digits are displayed.
yyyy All four digits of year
For example, if you enter dddd dd mmmm yyyy, the sample date will be
Saturday 05 March 1994.
You may use spaces, dashes, slashes or any other delimiter of your choice to separate
the date fields.
To construct time formats, use the following information:
H Hours based on a twelve-hour clock with no leading zero.
HH Hours based on a twelve-hour clock with leading zero.
HHH Hours based on a 24-hour clock with no leading zero.
HHHH Hours based on a 24-hour clock with leading zero.
M Minutes with no leading zero.
MM Minutes with leading zero.
S Seconds with no leading zero.
SS Seconds with leading zero.
T Hundredths of seconds with no leading zero.
TT Hundredths of seconds with leading zeros.
P, A, p, or a AM/PM indicator.
For example, if you enter HHHH:MM:SS:TT p, the sample time will be
13:05:06:08 PM.
You may use colons, spaces or any other delimiter of your choice to separate the time
fields.

GFK-1180 Alarm Printer Configuration 13-7

More about Redundant Alarm Printers
In a redundant configuration, both the Master and Slave computer have the same
configuration. When you perform a Configuration Update, the configuration data for
the project on the Master computer is copied to the project on the Slave computer.
The information you enter in the Redundant alarm printing and Output fields
determine where alarms will be printed.
First let’s take a redundant configuration where each computer has a local line printer
(LPT1) configured. The primary computer is COMP1 and the secondary computer is
COMP2.

• If you enter LPT1 in the Output field and select the Redundant
alarm printing check box, the Master project on COMP1 sends alarm
messages to LPT1 on COMP1 and the Slave project on COMP2 sends
alarm messages that it generates while in standby mode to LPT1 on
COMP2.
When the project on COMP2 becomes the Master project, it continues
to send alarm printer messages to LPT1 on COMP2.
• If you enter LPT1 in the Output field and clear the Redundant
alarm printing check box, the Master project on COMP1 sends
alarms to LPT1 on COMP1. The Slave project on COMP2 sends no
alarms until it becomes the Master project.
When the project on COMP2 becomes the Master project, it sends
alarm messages to LPT1 on COMP2.
Now, let’s look at a redundant configuration with a network line printer
(\\ABC\NET1). The primary computer is COMP1 and the secondary computer is
COMP2.

• If you enter \\ABC\NET1 in the Output field and select the

Redundant alarm printing check box, the Master project on
COMP1 sends alarm messages to \\ABC\NET1 and the Slave project on
COMP2 sends alarm messages that it generates while in standby mode
to \\ABC\NET1. This may result in duplicate messages.
If you select this option, disable the Print header field.

13-8 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 • If you enter \\ABC\NET1 in the Output field and clear the
Redundant alarm printing check box, the Master project on
COMP1 sends alarms to the network device. The Slave project on
COMP2 sends no alarms until it becomes the Master project.
When the project on COMP2 becomes the Master project, it sends
alarm messages to \\ABC\NET1.

Additional Steps for Serial Printers

If you are configuring a serial printer, its printer baud rate, parity, and data length
will have to be set each time your system is rebooted. You can do this by creating a
file called cimp_port.bat in the top-level directory on the disk where your
project is located. The file will be called by the Alarm Printer program when it
initiates printing on the printer. The file contains:
@echo off
mode <port> baud=<rate> parity=<set> data=<n> stop=<m>
where
<port> is the serial port to which the printer is connected.
<rate> is the baud rate of the printer.
<set> is the parity used by the printer.
<n> is the number of data bits.
<m> is the number of stop bits.
For example, if you have a printer on COM1: port that communicates at 9600 baud,
no parity, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit, the file would look like this:
@echo off
mode COM1: baud=9600 parity=n data=8 stop=1
If you have more than one serial printer, you will need one mode line per printer.
To create this file:
1. Open a Notepad window.
2. Enter the printer configuration information according to the above
template.
3. Save the file called cimp_port.bat in the top-level directory on the
disk where your project is located.

GFK-1180 Alarm Printer Configuration 13-9

Modifying the Size of the Alarm Queue
The Alarm Line Printer program (AMLP) assumes that there is no restriction for the
size of the alarm message queue. If the output device is disabled, a virtual memory
overflow can result.
You can use the AMLP_MAX_QUEUE global parameter to restrict the size of the
alarm message queue.
For detailed information on editing the global parameter file, see "Global
Parameters" under System Management.
The record format for AMLP_MAX_QUEUE is:
AMLP_MAX_QUEUE|3|<number>
where <number> is the maximum number of messages in the queue.
After you implement this global parameter, if the output device is disabled and the
number of alarms in the alarm queue exceeds the value you specify, the alarm
message:
The alarm dropped has exceeded the configured size of alarm
queue
is generated.
To return to the default queue size, remove the AMLP_MAX_QUEUE record from
the Global Parameters file.

Choosing Delete and Acknowledge Times

The Alarm Line Printer program (AMLP) assumes that the time to be printed when
an alarm is acknowledged or deleted is the time the alarm was generated.
You can use the AMLP_USE_GEN_TIME global parameter to select whether you
want the generation time or the action (acknowledge or delete) time to be printed.
The record format for AMLP_USE_GEN_TIME is
AMLP_USE_GEN_TIME|1|<option>
where <option> is:
Y if you want the generation time printed when the alarm is acknowledged or
deleted.
N if you want the time of the action (acknowledge or delete) to be printed.
To return to the default time printing, remove the AMLP_USE_GEN_TIME record
from the Global Parameters file.

13-10 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Role Configuration

About Roles
In CIMPLICITY HMI software, a role is the mechanism for granting users access to
privileged functions. Each user is assigned one role. Conversely, one role may be
assigned to several users.
The default configuration includes the following three roles:
• SYSMGR
• USER
• OPER
For each role defined in CIMPLICITY HMI project, you can specify whether users
assigned that role can:
• Perform Setpoints from CimView screens that contain Setpoint
actions.
• Enable dynamic configuration.
• Delete alarms from Alarm Viewer windows.
• Access the CPC (CIMPLICITY Process Control) utility.
• Modify alarm setups on Alarm Viewer windows.
• Generate a Setpoint audit trail.
• Use Point by Address points in CimView screens.
• Trigger events in the Basic Control Engine user interface.
• Stop, pause or resume scripts in the Basic Control Engine user
interface.

GFK-1180 14-1
Configuring Roles
To configure a role, double-click the Roles icon in your project’s Configuration
cabinet.
If you have selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the Role
Search dialog box opens. Select the filtering criteria you want, and then select OK
to open the Configuration - Role window with the filtered list of roles.
If you have not selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the
Configuration - Role window opens with a list of all configured roles.

The Configuration - Role window always displays the following attribute for each
role:
Role ID A name that uniquely identifies each role.
The list of Roles is sorted by Role ID. You may click on the title button to sort the
list.
You can use the Menu functions, Toolbar buttons, and shortcut keys to:
• Create a new role.
• Change the window display attributes.
• Change startup options.
• Modify a role.
• Copy the information for a selected role to a new role.
• Delete a role.
• Display a filtered list of roles

14-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Creating A New Role
To create a new role, you can do one of the following:
• Select New from the File menu.
• Click New Item on the Toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+N.
After you initiate the request, the New Role dialog box opens.

Enter the name of the new role in the Role ID field and select OK. The system
verifies that the Role ID does not already exist, and that no invalid characters have
been used.
If the Role ID you entered is valid, the Role Properties dialog box for the new role
will be displayed. You will need to enter information in the following categories:
Privileges Defines the privileges for the role.
When you are finished defining the role’s properties, select OK to close the dialog
box and create the new role, or select Cancel to close the dialog box without
creating the new role.

Role Properties

The Privileges properties let you define the privileges for a new role.

GFK-1180 Role Configuration 14-3

 General Privileges
Dynamic Configuration
Process Control
If you select this check box, users assigned this role
can enable Dynamic Configuration from functions in
the Configuration Cabinet.
If you select this check box, users assigned this role
can use the CPC (CIMPLICITY Program Control)
utility to start and stop CIMPLICITY HMI
processes.

Event Manager Privileges

Trigger Event If you select this check box, users assigned this role
can trigger events in the Event Manager from the
Basic Control Engine user interface.
Script Control If you select this check box, users assigned this role
can stop, pause, or resume scripts in the Event
Manager from the Basic Control Engine user
interface.

Alarms Privileges
Delete Alarms
Modify Alarm Setups
If you select this check box, users assigned this role
can delete alarms from the Alarm Viewer.
If you select this check box, users assigned this role
can modify alarm setups in Alarm Viewer.

Points Privileges
Set Point
Setpoint Audit Trail
Point by Address
If you select this check box, users assigned this role
can perform setpoints from CimView screens that
contain Setpoint actions.
If you select this check box, a $DOWNLOAD event
will be recorded in the Event Log for each setpoint
that is generated by users assigned this role.
If you select this check box, users assigned this role
can create points and expressions in CimEdit that
use Point by Address points.

More on the Setpoint Audit Trail

When you enable the Setpoint Audit Trail, the information sent to your Event Log
can provide a detailed audit trail of which users set which setpoints. However, the
audit trail imposes significant overhead (20 times slower) since a record is logged in
the database for each setpoint. This is particularly noticeable when a user performs
setpoints in a loop in the Program Editor.
If you do not require an audit trail for setpoints, it is recommended that you disable
the Setpoint Audit Trail option (this is the default).

14-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
User Configuration

About Users
The Users function lets you configure users for your CIMPLICITY HMI project. A
user is an individual person working with a CIMPLICITY HMI project. Each
CIMPLICITY HMI user has the following attributes:
Security A user may be assigned a Password. If a Password is configured
and enabled, then a user cannot access CIMPLICITY HMI project
functions without entering both the User ID and Password.
Roles and A user is assigned a role. Each role in your CIMPLICITY HMI
Privileges project has certain privileges assigned to it. The privileges define
the functions the user can access. If a user lacks the privilege to
access a secure function, an error message is displayed and access is
denied.
View of A user’s view determines the resource data to which the user has
Resources access. Alarms for resources outside a user’s view will not appear
on the user’s Alarm Viewer window.
The default configuration includes:
• ADMINISTRATOR (role: SYSMGR)
The default user does not require a password to access CIMPLICITY HMI project
functions.

Configuring Users
To configure a user, double-click the Users icon in your project’s Configuration
cabinet.
If you have selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the User
Search dialog box opens. Select the filtering criteria you want, and then select OK
to open the Configuration - User window with the filtered list of alarms.
If you have not selected the Display search criteria at startup option, the
Configuration - User window opens with a list of all configured alarms.

GFK-1180 15-1
 The Configuration - User window always displays the following attribute for each
user:
User ID A name that uniquely identifies each user.
In addition to User ID, you can choose to display the following attributes for each
user:
Enabled Indicates if the account is enabled or disabled.
Password If a password is defined, it is displayed in this field.
Role ID The role assigned to the user. This determines the privileges
assigned to the user.
User Name The user’s name.
The list of Users is initially sorted by User ID. You may click on any of the other
attribute buttons at the top of the list to sort the list by that attribute.
You can use the Menu functions, Toolbar buttons, and shortcut keys to:
• Create a new user.
• Change the window display attributes.
• Change startup options.
• Modify a user.
• Copy the information for a selected user to a new user.
• Delete a user.
• Display a filtered list of users

15-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Setting Run-Time User Properties
The run-time user properties let you specify how many failed login attempts can
occur before CIMPLICITY HMI software automatically disables the account.
Note
Automatic account disabling is not support on Servers using Server Redundancy.
To access the run-time user properties, you can do one of the following:
• Click the Users icon in your project’s Configuration cabinet, hold down
the right mouse key and then select Setup from the drop-down menu.
• Select Setup from the Edit menu in the Configuration - User window.
• Press Ctrl+O in the Configuration - User window.
The User Setup dialog box opens.

To disable automatic account disabling, select No account disable.

To enable automatic account disabling,
1. Select Account Disable.
2. Enter the number of failed login attempts before disabling the account.
Select OK to close the dialog box and save your changes, or select Cancel to close
the dialog box without implementing any changes.

What Happens at Run-Time

If Account Disable is selected and the user fails to login after the specified number
of failures, the account is automatically disabled and a $LOGIN_FAILURES event is
generated.
To re-enable the account, the system administrator needs to dynamically re-enable
the user account. To do this:
1. Open the User Configuration application.
2. Select Dynamic mode.
3. Re-enable the user account.

GFK-1180 User Configuration 15-3

Creating a New User
To create a new user, you can do one of the following:
• Select New from the File menu.
• Click New Item on the Toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+N.
After you initiate the request, the New User dialog box opens.

Enter the name of the new user in the User ID field and select OK. The system
verifies that the User ID does not already exist, and that no invalid characters have
been used.
If the User ID you entered is valid, the User Properties dialog box for the new user
opens. You will need to enter information in the following categories:
General Defines the password and role for the user.
Resources Defines the resources for which the user can view data.
When you are finished defining the user’s properties, select OK to close the dialog
box and create the new user, or select Cancel to close the dialog box without
creating the new user.

15-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 User General Properties

The General properties let you define the following for a new user.
Note
If you change a user’s configuration dynamically, the user must log out then log back
in for the changes to take effect.

Role
Enter the user’s role in this field.

You can click the Browser button - - to the right of the input field to display the
Select A Role Browser and use it to select the role.

You can also use the Pop-up Menu button - - to create a new role, edit the current
role, or Browser for another role.

Password Needed
Set this check box to require the user to enter a password at login. Clear this check
box if the user does not need to enter a password.

Password and Confirm Password

This input box and the Confirm Password input box can only be accessed when
the Password Needed check box is set.
Enter the user’s password in this input box, and then re-enter it in the Confirm
Password input box. Asterisks are displayed in place of the characters you type.
If, at some future date, you clear the Password Needed check box, the
Password input box will retain the original password, but the user does not need to
enter it when logging in.

GFK-1180 User Configuration 15-5

 At run-time, the following rules also apply to user passwords:
• A user is prompted to change the password when the current password
expires.
• A user can change the password from the CIMPLICITY Login Panel.
• A user can use the ChangePassword command in the Basic Control
Engine to change the password in CimView.
• In a Server Redundancy configuration, a user can only change the
password when the Primary computer is running.

User Name
Enter the user’s name or descriptive text about the user.

Enabled
Set this check box to enable the user account.
If you clear this check box, the account is disabled and is not available for user login.
If you disable an account dynamically, currently logged in users will not be logged
out; however, new login attempts will be rejected.

Password Expires
Enter the number of days until the user’s password expires or enter zero if the
password never expires.
After the elapsed number of days, the user will be required to change the password
prior to logging in.
In s Server Redundancy configuration, Automatic Password Expiration is not
supported.

15-6 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 User Resource Properties

The Resources properties let you define the resources for which the user can view
alarms. The resources currently assigned to the user are displayed in the
Resources box. You can add or delete resources.
Note
If you change a user’s resources dynamically, the user must log out then log back in
to access the changed resources.

Adding A Single Resource

To add a resource to the user’s list:
1. Enter a valid Resource ID in the input box. You can click the Browser
button - - to the right of the input field to use the Select A Resource
Browser and use it to select the Resource ID. You can also use the
Pop-up Menu button - - to create a new Resource ID, edit the
current Resource ID, or browse for another Resource ID.
2. Select Add.
The new resource will appear in the Resources box.

Adding All Resources

To add all the currently configured resources to the user’s list, select Add All. All
the resources appear in the Resources box.

GFK-1180 User Configuration 15-7

 Deleting A Resource
To delete a resource from the user’s list:
1. Select the resource in the Resources box.
2. Select Delete.
The resource is removed from the Resources box.
You can also use the Shift and Ctrl keys in combination with the mouse to select
more than one resource for deletion.

15-8 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Database Logger
About the Database Logger
ODBC stands for Open Data Base
Connectivity.
Types of Log Files Available
GFK-1180
The Database Logger option lets you log alarms, events, and point values to a
database, then retrieve the information for reports via a wide variety of ODBC-
compliant applications.
You don’t need to know about SQL or database internals to configure logging tables.
Simply select the items you want to log and conditions under which you want to log
them. You can log individual points in detail, or you can group points together for
trend analysis. In addition, you can define multiple tables with different logging
conditions and attributes to meet different needs within your facility.
The Database Logger option uses the standard ODBC interface to log your
production data. This interface supports both the Microsoft Access and Microsoft
SQL Server databases.
You can enter the Database Logger configuration transactions from Point
Configuration or from the Database Logging icon in the CIMPLICITY
Configuration cabinet.
CIMPLICITY software organizes logging into the following categories:
• Alarm Logging
• Event Logging
• Data Logging
• Group Logging
• Application Logging
16-1
 Alarm Logging
Alarm Logging lets you log alarm information in the Alarm Log table. You can
specify alarms to be logged as they are generated, cleared, acknowledged, and/or
deleted.
The following system alarms are recorded in the Alarm Log table:
Alarm ID Description
$DEVICE Specified device has a problem.
$DEVICE_DOWN Specified device has failed.
$DEVICE_FAILOVER Device failover for Server Redundancy.
$GMR_DEV_DOWN Specified Series 90 TCP/IP redundant
device is down.
$GMR_POINT_DISCREPANCY Specified Series 90 TCP/IP redundant point
has discrepancy.
$REDUND_DEV_DOWN Redundant device down for Server
Redundancy.
AMSI_ALARM Reserved for future use.
DB_CONN_DOWN Connection lost to specified database for
Database Logger.
DB_START_FORWARD Forwarding files found for Database Logger
Store and Forward.
MCP_PROC_DOWN Specified CIMPLICITY process has
terminated unexpectedly.

Event Logging
Event Logging lets you log system and user-defined events in the Event Log table.
The following system events are recorded in the Event Log table:
Event ID Description
$ALARM_DISABLED Alarming for specified point is disabled.
$ALARM_ENABLED Alarming for specified point is enabled.
$ALARM_MODIFIED Alarm limits for specified point modified by user.
$ALARM_RESTORED Alarm limits for specified point restored to original
values.
$AM_STATUS Alarm Management throughput statistics. Issued
every half-hour.
$DL_FILE_FULL Reserved for future use.
$DOWNLOAD Setpoint was downloaded to a specified point.
$DYN_CFG Dynamic configuration enable/disable has been
performed by a specified user.
$LOGIN_DISABLED Specified use failed to log in to the specified
CIMPLICITY HMI project.

16-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 $LOGON Specified user has logged in to a specified
CIMPLICITY HMI project.
$LOGOUT Specified user has logged out of a specified
CIMPLICITY HMI project.
$RTR_LINK_DOWN Router link has been lost to specified node.
DEMO_SPEED Carwash Demo speed alarm is generated.

Data Logging
Data logging lets you log point data in a variety of ways.
You can log points:
• At a specified time of day.
• Periodically at a specified time interval.
• Periodically at a specified time interval while a digital point is HIGH or
LOW.
• When the alarm state on the point changes.
• Whenever the point’s value is updated.
Whenever point data is logged, the entry in the log file includes the Point ID, a
timestamp, and other optional attributes that you select.

Group Logging
Group logging lets you log information on a group of points in parallel. This method
gives better performance and uses disk space more efficiently than Data logging.
Each entry in a Group log table contains a timestamp and the information you select
for each point.
Group data can be logged as follows:
• At a specified time of day.
• Periodically at a specified time interval.
• Periodically at a specified time interval while a digital point is HIGH or
LOW.
• In response to an event.
• When the alarm state on a point changes.
• Whenever a point’s value is updated.

Application Logging
Certain CIMPLICITY HMI applications, such as the Basic Control Engine, allow
you to log actions. To take advantage this feature, you must configure an
Application Table for the product option.
The application chooses what data to log and when to log it.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-3

Creating Tables
When a project is started, the Database Logger creates any tables you have
configured for that project based on the attributes you have specified. This means
you don’t have to know anything about databases to log data from your CIMPLICITY
project.
Specifically, when a project starts, the Database Logger will:
• Attempt to create or repair any missing or damaged databases.
• Create any missing tables.
• Create any missing columns in the tables.

Microsoft Access Note

To successfully create or repair tables, the Database Logger requires an exclusive
lock on the Access database. If another application is using the Access database, the
Database Logger cannot exclusively lock the database, and it will terminate. If this
happens, the following message will be logged in the Status Log for the project:
Unable to repair database
This problem occurs, for example, if a user is running reports on the Access database
while a project is being started.

Using Wildcards in Search Strings

You can use the following wildcards in the Database Logger user interface:
* Use this wildcard to search for any number of characters at this point in the
string. For example, if you want to display the list of tables that start with
"M" and end with "X", enter M*X in the Table Identifier field.
? Use this wildcard to search for any character in this place in the string. For
example, if you want to display the list of tables whose first character is "M"
and third character is "X", enter M?X in the Table Identifier field.
Note
There are no implied wildcards. If you do not include or terminate your search string
with an asterisk, only those items that match your request exactly will be returned.
If a Browser button is available to the right of an input field, you can click it and use
the Browser to select the filter.
If you are calling ODBC functions directly, you cannot use the * and ? wildcards.
The underscore ( _ ) character is the only available wildcard. Use it to search for any
character in this place in a string.
If you are calling SQL functions directly, you can use the * and ? wildcards.

16-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Table Characteristics
The Database Logger tables have the following characteristics:

Column Definitions
A table can have, at most, 250 columns. The following columns are defined for each
type of log file:
• Data logging tables contain a timestamp and Point ID column, plus an
additional column for each table and point attribute you have selected.
The number of columns is independent of the number of points in the
table. For example, if you have a table that logs the point value and
previous value for all points configured for data logging, the table will
have four columns.
• Alarm, Event, and Application logging tables have columns that are
specific to that table, plus an additional column for each table attribute
you have selected. All table rows include a timestamp column and an
autoincrement sequence number that ensures that each row is unique.
• Group logging tables contain a timestamp column, plus an additional
column for each table and point attribute you have selected. For
example, if you have a table logging the value and alarm state of five
points, the table will have eleven columns.
Points with Engineering Units The number of columns you can actually have in a group table depends
conversion are stored in floating point
on the type of data you are storing. A record being added to the
format
database can have at most 2 KB of data. With overhead, 2 KB amounts
to approximately 222 8-byte floating-point numbers.
If you are storing a number of floating-point numbers or long text
strings in a group record, it is recommended that you verify that the 2
KB limit is not being exceeded.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-5

 Key Definitions
The following keys are defined for each type of log file:
• Group logging tables have a unique primary key index on the
timestamp column. If you have selected the project name table
attribute, the primary key index also includes the project name column.
• Data logging tables have a primary key index on the joined timestamp
and Point ID columns, and a secondary index on the timestamp alone.
If you have selected the project name table attribute, the primary key
index also includes the project name column.
• Alarm, Event, and Application logging tables have a primary key index
on the joined timestamp and sequence number columns, and a
secondary index on the timestamp alone. If you have selected the
project name table attribute, the primary key index also includes the
project name column.
Important
Since the Microsoft Access format does not support subsecond
timestamp data, you cannot log points to a Data or Group table at
subsecond rates. Attempting to do so will cause the duplicate-keyed
records to be dropped from the database.

16-6 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Entering from Point Configuration
When you are configuring a point, you can choose to log point data and/or alarm data
for that point.
• When you select Log Data, the point is automatically added to the
DATA_LOG table with the default point Logging Conditions for that
table. You can customize your point logging by selecting Settings....
The Point Logging dialog box opens.
• When you select Log Alarm, the point’s alarm is automatically added
to the ALARM_LOG table with the default alarm Logging Conditions
for that table. You can customize your alarm logging by selecting
Settings.... The Alarm Logging dialog box opens.

Point Logging
When you select Settings... for Log Data, the Point Logging dialog box opens

This dialog box lists the tables where the point you selected is currently being
logged. If the list is empty, the point is not being logged in any table.
Use this dialog box to add the point to logging tables, modify logging tables, or
remove the point from one or more logging tables.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-7

 Adding the Point to a Logging Table
To add the point to another logging table:
1. Select Add....
2. The Table Browser dialog box opens. Select the table or tables where
you want to add the point, then select OK to return to the Point Logging
dialog box.
3. When you return to the Point Logging dialog box, the table(s) that you
selected are added to the list. You must confirm the additions in order
to have them take effect. Select Cancel to cancel the additions, or
select OK to confirm them.

Modifying the Logging Properties for the Point

To change the logging properties for the point in a particular table:
1. Select the table.
2. Select Modify....
3. The Table Properties dialog box for the point opens. Make your
modifications, and then select OK to return to the Point Logging dialog
box.
4. When you return to the Point Logging dialog box, the modifications
you have made to the point have already taken place. Note that the
Cancel button has changed to a Close button to indicate that you
cannot undo the modifications.

Removing the Point from One or More Logging Tables

To remove the point from a logging table:
1. Select the tables from which you want to remove the point. The tables
that you select will be highlighted.
2. Select Remove.
3. You will be asked to verify the removal request. Select Cancel to
cancel the request, or select OK to proceed.
4. When you return to the Point Logging dialog box, the table(s) that you
selected are deleted from the list. You must confirm the deletions in
order to have them take effect. Select Cancel to cancel the deletions,
or select OK to confirm them.

Removing the Point from All Logging Tables

To remove the point from all logging tables:
1. Select Remove All
2. You will be asked to verify the removal request. Select Cancel to
cancel the request, or select OK to proceed.
3. When you return to the Point Logging dialog box, all logging tables
that contain the point are deleted from the list. You must confirm the
deletions in order to have them take effect. Select Cancel to cancel the
deletions, or select OK to confirm them.

16-8 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Alarm Logging
When you select Settings... for Log Alarm, the Alarm Logging dialog box opens

The Alarm Logging dialog box shows you the table the point alarm is being currently
logged to along with the states that are being logged.
If the alarm is not currently being logged, the default setting is ALARM_LOG and
the default ALARM_LOG point properties are selected.
If the alarm is currently being logged, the initial settings will indicate which table is
being used, and which states are being logged.
You can log an alarm to the ALARM_LOG table or to the EVENT_LOG table. An
alarm can only be logged to one of these tables, not both. If, for example, an alarm is
currently being logged to the EVENT_LOG table, and you select the ALARM_LOG
table in this dialog box, the alarm is automatically removed from the EVENT_LOG
table when you select OK.

Logging an Alarm
To log an alarm:
1. Select the ALARM_LOG table or the EVENT_LOG table.
2. If you have selected the ALARM_LOG table, select the alarm events to
log. You may choose any combination of events.
3. Select OK to confirm your changes and close the dialog box, or select
Cancel to cancel your proposed changes and close the dialog box.

Displaying Table Attributes

You can use the Table attributes button to display and modify the table properties
for the ALARM_LOG and EVENT_LOG tables. To display the table properties for
the table to which the alarm is currently being logged:
1. Select Table attributes. The Table Properties dialog box for the
selected table opens. Make your modifications, and then select OK to
return to the Alarm Logging dialog box.
2. When the Alarm Logging dialog box redisplays, the table has been
modified. Note that the Cancel button has changed to a Close button
to indicate that you cannot cancel the modification of the table.
3. Select Close to close the dialog box without making any other
changes. Before you select OK, make sure that you are logging the
alarm to the correct table.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-9

 Using the Table Browser

Use the Table Browser dialog box to select a table to display a filtered list of logging
tables, add a point to one or more tables, create a new logging table, or modify the
properties of an existing table.
You can set the Auto Browse check box to have the current list of tables displayed
automatically when you open the browser.

Displaying A Table List

The dialog box initially displays a blank list of tables. You can choose to display the
list of all logging tables, or you can filter the list according to table identifier and/or
table type.
To display a table list:
1. Enter information in the Table Identifier field. You can leave this
field blank, or you can enter a full or partial table name. If you are
entering a partial table name, you can use the following wildcards:
? - Matches exactly one character.
* - Matches zero or more arbitrary characters.
2. Select a Table Type. You can display all table names, or you can
select a particular type of table. When you click the Select button for
this field, your choices are:
ALL - displays all group and data table names.
DATA - displays all data table names.
GROUP - displays all group table names.
3. Select Browse to display the list of tables.

16-10 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Creating A New Table
To create a new logging table:
1. Select New Table....
2. The New Table dialog box opens. Make your modifications, and then
select OK to return to the Table Browser dialog box.
3. When the Table Browser dialog box redisplays, the new table has been
created and appears in the table list. Note that the Cancel button has
changed to a Close button to indicate that you cannot undo the creation
of the table.

Modifying the Properties of A Table

The Modify Table... button is only available when you select a single table from the
list. To modify the properties of a table:
1. Select the table from the list.
2. Select Modify Table....
3. The Table Properties dialog box for the selected table opens. Make
your modifications, and then select OK to return to the Table Browser
dialog box.
4. When the Table Browser dialog box redisplays, the table has been
modified. Note that the Cancel button has changed to a Close button
to indicate that you cannot undo the modification of the table.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-11

Starting from Your Project’s Configuration Cabinet
Double-click the Database Logger icon in your project’s Configuration cabinet to
initiate the configuration function.
The CIMPLICITY Database Logger Configuration window opens.

The CIMPLICITY Database Logger Configuration window displays a list of all the
currently configured group and data tables, as well as the Alarm Log and Event Log
tables. The icon to the left of each table indicates its type as follows:
Alarm Log table or Event Log table
Data Log table
Group Log table
Application table
You can use the Menu functions, Toolbar buttons and shortcut keys to:
• Add a new Group or Data table.
• Copy the information for a selected table to a new table.
• Delete a table.
• Modify a table’s properties.
• Open a table.
• Add points to a table.
• Modify logging properties.
• Display a filtered list of tables.

16-12 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Database Logger Window Menu Options
You can use the menu options to create new tables, modify, copy or delete tables,
toggle the Toolbar and Status Bar display, filter the table list, change logging
properties, and access Help.

The File Menu

When you select the File menu, the following drop-down list displays:

The File menu functions are:

New Table... Creates a new group or data table.
Open Table... Displays the contents of the currently selected table.
Copy Table... Copies the current table and its contents to a new table.
Delete Table Deletes the currently selected table.
Exit Exits the Data Logger function.

The Edit Menu

When you select the Edit menu, the following drop-down list displays:

The Edit menu functions are:

Table Properties...
Add Alarms...
Add Points...
Reconcile Table...
Logging Properties...
Displays and modifies the properties of the currently
selected table.
Adds alarms to the Alarm Log or Event Log table.
Adds points to a Data Log or Group Log table.
Opens the Reconcile Table dialog box.
Displays and modifies Data Logger properties.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-13

 The View Menu
When you select the View menu, the following drop-down list displays:

The View menu functions are:

Toolbar Enables/disables the display of the Toolbar.
Status Bar Enables/disables the display of the Status Bar.
Filter... Filters the list of log tables.

The Help Menu

When you select the Help menu, the following drop-down list displays:

The Help menu functions are:

Help Topics Displays the Help Contents for the Database Logger.
About Database Logger Displays the current version number for Database
Logger.

Using the Window Pop-Up Menu

The Window Pop-up Menu is available when you are working with at Database
Logger.

Use one of the following methods to access this menu:

• With no tables selected, hold down the right mouse button. You can
then select the general menu options.
• Select a table and hold down the right mouse button. You can then
select general or table related menu options.
The menu functions are:
Open Opens the selected table.
New... Opens the New Table dialog box and lets you create a
new table.
Rename... Opens the Rename Table dialog box and lets you
rename the table.

16-14 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Delete Deletes the selected table
Copy... Copies the selected table to a new table.
Properties... Opens the Table Properties dialog for the selected
table.
Add Alarms... Opens the Select A Point or Select a Alarm Definition
Add Points... dialog box and lets you select points for the table.
Logging Properties... Opens the Logging Properties dialog box.

Database Logger Toolbar Buttons

The Toolbar buttons on the CIMPLICITY Database Logger Configuration window
will perform the following functions:
New Table Creates a new data or group table.

Open Table Displays the contents of the currently

selected table.
Delete Table Deletes the currently selected table.

Copy Table Copies the current table and its contents to

a new table.
Add Item Adds points or alarms to the selected
table.
Table Properties Displays and modifies the properties of
the currently selected table.
Logging Properties Displays and modifies Data Logger
properties.
Filter Items Filters the list of visible items.

About Database Logger Displays program information, version

number and copyright.

Database Logger Shortcut Keys

You can use the following shortcut keys to initiate commonly used functions:
Ctrl+N Creates a new group or data table.
Ctrl+C Copies the current table and its contents to a new table.
Ctrl+O Displays the contents of the currently selected table.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-15

Creating A New Table
When you create a new log table, the New Table dialog box opens.

To create a new data or group table:

1. Enter the name of the new table in the Table identifier input field.
The name can contain alphanumeric characters (A thorough Z, 0
through 9) and underscores ( _ ). The name should be no longer than
16 characters. If you enter more than 16 characters, the name will
automatically be truncated to the first 16 characters when you select
OK. You cannot use the name of a currently existing table when you
create a new table.
2. Select the type of table you want.
3. Select OK to create the table, or select Cancel to cancel the proposed
creation. When you select OK, the Table Properties dialog box opens.
You can only create new group and data log tables. Only one Alarm table (called
ALARM_LOG) and one Event table (called EVENT_LOG) table exist in the Data
Logger. You cannot delete these tables, and you cannot create additional Alarm or
Event tables.

16-16 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Table Properties
Five properties can be associated with the property dialog box for a table. They are
Logging Conditions, Logging Attributes, Maintenance Events, Maintenance Actions
and Logging Properties.
• Logging Conditions determine when data will be put into the log table.
• Logging Attributes determine what data will be logged in the table.
You can specify point attributes, table attributes, and array attributes.
• Maintenance Events define when export, purge, and command actions
will be performed on the table.
• Maintenance Actions define the type of actions that take place when a
Maintenance Event occurs.
• Logging Properties define the database connection and the Store and
Forward properties for the table.
The number of properties, and the information on them depends on the type of table
you are looking at.
• For the ALARM_LOG table, you can modify Default Logging
Conditions, Logging Attributes, Maintenance Events, Maintenance
Actions and Logging Properties.
• For the EVENT_LOG table, you can modify Logging Attributes,
Maintenance Events Maintenance Actions and Logging Properties.
• For a data table, you can define or modify default Logging Conditions,
Logging Attributes, Maintenance Events, Maintenance Actions and
Logging Properties.
• For a group table, you can define or modify Logging Conditions,
Logging Attributes, Maintenance Events, Maintenance Actions and
Logging Properties.
• For an application table, you can modify Logging Attributes,
Maintenance Events, Maintenance Actions and Logging Properties.
To display a particular property page, move the cursor to its name tab in the Table
Properties dialog box and click the left mouse button. Before that page is displayed,
any changes that you have made on the current property page are validated. If any
problems are found during validation, you must correct them before the next property
page is displayed.
When you select OK, information on all the properties in the dialog box are applied
to the table.
When you select Cancel, none of the information on any of the properties is applied
to the table.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-17

 Default Logging Conditions for the ALARM_LOG
Table

The Default Logging Conditions property page for the ALARM_LOG table displays
the current default logging criteria for alarms being logged into the table. These
criteria are:
Generate Information about the alarm is logged when the alarm occurs.
Acknowledge Information about the alarm is logged when the alarm is
acknowledged by the operator or the system.
Reset Information about the alarm is logged when the alarm is reset
by the operator or the system.
Delete Information about the alarm is logged when the alarm is
manually deleted from the system.

Modifying Logging Conditions

To change the default logging conditions:
1. Set the check box for each event that you want to log.
2. Clear the check box for each event that you do not want to log.
3. Select OK.

16-18 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Logging Conditions for Group and Data Tables

The Logging Conditions property page for a group or data table displays the current
logging conditions for the table. You can have logging to the table occur under any
combination of the following:
• Data triggered logging
• Alarm triggered logging
• Timed/gated logging
Select Use Defaults to reset the Logging Conditions to their default values. The
default is to log data periodically every 5 minutes.
The Point and Point Alarm fields have a Browser button and a Pop-up Menu
button.
• Use the Browser button - - to open the Select A Point Browser and
search for a Point ID.

• Use the Pop-up Menu button - - to create a new Point ID or browse

for an existing Point ID.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-19

 Table Data Triggered Logging
Select this option if you want to log data when the trigger point’s value changes.
To select this type of logging:
1. Set the On point value update check box.
2. Enter the Point ID of the trigger point in the Point field.
You can combine data triggered logging with alarm triggered logging.
If you do not define any logging conditions under Timed/Gated Logging, then data
will only be logged into the table when the trigger occurs.
Table Alarm Triggered Logging
Select this option if you want to log data when the trigger point goes into the selected
alarm state.
To select this type of logging:
1. Set the Alarm triggered logging check box.
2. Set the check box for each alarm state that you want to trigger logging.
3. Enter the Point ID of the trigger point in the Point alarm field.
For this option to work successfully, you must define alarm limits for the trigger
point. For example, if you select a Point ID and choose its Alarm High state, logging
in the table will occur each time the point enters the Alarm High state.
You can combine alarm triggered logging with data triggered logging.
If you do not define any logging conditions under Timed/Gated Logging, then data
will only be logged into the table when the trigger occurs.

Combining Triggers
You can combine triggers. When you combine triggers, logging occurs when either
of the triggers occurs. For example, if you want to log a set of points when
POINT_A is updated or when POINT_B is in Alarm High state:
1. Set the On point value update check box.
2. Enter POINT_A in the Point field.
3. Set the On point alarm state check box.
4. Set the Alarm High check box.
5. Enter POINT_B in the Point field.

16-20 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Table Timed/Gated Logging
Timers and gates determine the logging interval. You can choose one or more of the
following events:
Periodic Set this check box when you want to log data into the
table at regular intervals.
Enter the time value in the input field, and select the
time interval.
Valid intervals are DAYS, HOURS, MINUTES,
SECONDS, or TICKS (100 ticks = 1 second).
Synchronized Set this check box when you want to log data at a
particular time of day.
Enter the time in the input field, and select AM or
PM.
On digital point state Set this check box if you want to log data while a
digital point is in a certain state.
Select the state to check for and enter the digital
Point ID in the input field. Valid states are HIGH,
LOW, and TRANSITION
You can combine timed events. For example, if you want to log a set of points every
hour on the half-hour, do the following:
1. Set the Periodic check box, and enter 1 HOUR in the data fields.
2. Set the Synchronized check box and enter 12:30 AM in the data
fields.
If you select a TRANSITION point state, together with a periodic or synchronized
time, the gate will be ignored.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-21

 Logging Attributes for ALARM_LOG, EVENT_LOG
and Application Tables

The Logging Attributes property page for ALARM_LOG, EVENT_LOG or any

application table displays the current table attributes that will be logged to the table.
Select Use Defaults to reset the Logging Attributes to their default values. The
default is to log the Project Name.

Table Attributes to be Logged

You can log any of the following table attributes:
Project Name Log the name of the CIMPLICITY HMI project.

If you select or unselect the project name table attribute you must drop
the table so that it is properly recreated with or without the new project
field as part of the primary key. Failing to do so can cause the database
logger to fail to log data into the table.

16-22 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Logging Attributes for Group and Data Tables

The Logging Attributes property page for a group or data table displays the current
point attributes that will be logged to the table. You can define the following
attributes to be logged:
• Point attributes
• Table Attributes
Select Use Defaults to reset the Logging Attributes to their default values. The
default is to log Point Value and the Project Name.

Point Attributes to be Logged

You can log any of the following point attributes:
Point Value Log the point’s current value.
Previous Value Log the previous value recorded in this table for this
point.
Raw Value Log the point’s raw value.
Alarm State Log the point’s current alarm state.
Resource Log the point’s Resource ID.
Time Last Logged Log the time the point was last logged in this table.
Engineering Units Log the point’s engineering units.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-23

 Table Attributes to be Logged
You can log any of the following table attributes:
Project Name Log the name of the CIMPLICITY HMI project.

If you select or unselect the project name table attribute you must drop
the table so that it is properly recreated with or without the new project
field as part of the primary key. Failing to do so can cause the database
logger to fail to log data into the table.

Maintenance Events for All Tables

The Maintenance Events property page for a table displays the current maintenance
events for the table. Maintenance actions will occur when any of the events that you
configure on this property sheet occur. You can select:
• Triggered maintenance
• Timed/gated maintenance
Select Use Defaults to reset the Maintenance Events to their default values. The
default is to perform maintenance actions every day at midnight.
The Point field has a Browser button and a Pop-up Menu button.
• Use the Browser button - - to open the Select A Point Browser and
search for a Point ID.

• Use the Pop-up Menu button - - to create a new Point ID or browse

for an existing Point ID.

16-24 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Triggered Maintenance Events
You can select either of the following triggered maintenance events:
Disk space low Maintenance actions will be executed when disk space falls
below the specified threshold.
The disk is checked for this condition at an interval you
specify in the Logging Properties dialog box.
Logging count Maintenance actions will be executed when the number of
records logged to the table reaches a multiple of this number.

Timed/Gated Maintenance Events

You can select any of the following timed/gated maintenance events:
Periodic. Maintenance actions will be executed at the time
interval specified.
Valid intervals are DAYS, HOURS, and MINUTES.
Synchronized Maintenance actions will be executed at the time of
day specified.
On digital point state Maintenance actions will be executed when the
digital point you choose is in the selected state.
Valid states are HIGH, LOW, and TRANSITION.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-25

 Maintenance Actions for All Tables

The Maintenance Actions property page for a table displays the current maintenance
actions for a table. Every maintenance action for a table will be performed whenever
any of its maintenance events occurs. You can select:
• Export actions
• Purge actions
• Command actions
Select Use Defaults to reset the Maintenance Actions to their default values. The
default maintenance action is to purge all records except for those entered in the table
for the last day.

Export Actions
Export actions let you export data from the table to a CSV (Comma Separated Value)
format file when a maintenance event occurs.
To select this option:
1. Set the Export records check box.
2. Select the type of export you want to perform.
You can choose to export one of the following:
All All records in the table are exported.
By Count The last (most current) <n> records in the table are
exported.
By Time Data entered in the table for the last <n> days, hours, or
minutes is exported.

16-26 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Purge Actions
Purge actions let you delete data from the table when a maintenance event occurs.
To select this option:
1. Set the Delete records check box.
2. Select the number of records you want to retain in the table.
You can retain records in one of the following ways:
By Count Delete all but the last (most recent) <n> records in the
table.
By Time Delete all but the records entered in the table for the
last <n> days, hours, or minutes.
3. If you want to save the data to be purged from the table to a CSV
format file before removing it from the table, then set the Save
deleted in file check box and enter the name of the CSV file.

Command Actions
Command actions let you perform more complicated actions when maintenance
events occur. You can select one or both of these actions:
Execute SQL command Lets you execute a SQL command on the table.
Enter the command in the input field.
Run program Lets you run a program. Enter the program
pathname in the input field. You may include
command-line arguments for the program.
Compact database Use this action to compact the Microsoft Access
database where the table resides during a
maintenance event.

Use the Compact database action with great caution. Compacting a

Microsoft Access database requires the database file not be used by
any process, otherwise the action fails and waits to be executed during
the next maintenance event. Due to this restriction, the Database
Logger terminates all communication with the Microsoft Access
database while the compact action occurs. This means that the logger
queues may overflow depending on how fast items are being logged
and the size of the logger queue.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-27

 Logging Properties for All Tables

The Logging Properties property page for a table displays the current database
connection and the parameters used by Store and Forward for the table.

Connect Information
You can select an ODBC data source for each table that you create in the Database
Logger. To connect to a table, enter the following information:
ODBC data source
Select the data source to receive logged data for this
table. This field displays the list of currently
configured ODBC data sources. In general, it will
consist of a list of one or more Microsoft Access or
SQL Servers.
The default data sources are:
• CIMPLICITY Alarm Logging
A Microsoft Access data source that logs data
to the CIMPLOG.MDB file in the ARC
directory of your CIMPLICITY HMI project.
• CIMPLICITY Point Logging
A Microsoft Access data source that logs data
to the POINTLOG.MDB file in the ARC
directory of your CIMPLICITY HMI project.
• CIMPLICITY SQL Server Logging
A Microsoft SQL Server data source that logs
data to an on-node SQL Server database. You
must install SQL Server (sold separately) to use
this data source.

16-28 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 If you have an Oracle database, you may the see
ODBC data source that you created for Oracle.
Database user Enter the username needed to connect to the
selected database driver. This field is required if
you are connecting to a SQL Server.
Password Enter the password needed to connect to the selected
database driver. This field is required if you are
connecting to a SQL Server.
Reconnect wait period Enter the amount of time the Database Logger waits
between reconnect attempts when the connection to
the database is lost. The default is 30 seconds.
Enter a value between 0 (continuous retries) and 24
hours.

Store and Forward

To configure Store and Forward for this table, set the Enable Store and Forward
check box.
After you enable this feature, use the radio buttons to select between unlimited or
limited storage of database records.
Unlimited Click this radio button if you want the
Database Logger to store an unlimited
number of records when its connection to
the database is down.
The number of records actually stored is
determined by the amount of time the
connection is lost and by the amount of free
disk space you have.
Max number of stored records Click this radio button if you want to select
the number of records the Database Logger
will store when its connection to the
database is down.
Enter a number between 1 and
4,294,967,295.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-29

Filtering the Table List
To filter the list of tables in the Database Logger window, select Filter... from the
View menu.
The Filter Tables dialog box opens.

Use this dialog box to filter the list of logging tables by Table Identifier and/or Table
Type.
To filter the table list:
1. Enter a full or partial Table ID in the Table Identifier input field. You
can use the ? and * wildcards to perform partial string searches.
2. Select the Table Type you want to filter for. Valid selections are
ALARM, ALL, DATA, EXTERNAL, or GROUP.
3. Select OK to filter the list according to the information you’ve entered,
or select Cancel to cancel the filter function.
To display all the tables, put an asterisk (*) in the Table Identifier field, and select
ALL for the Table Type.

Copying a Table
Important
You cannot copy the Alarm (ALARM_LOG), Event (EVENT_LOG) or
External tables.
To copy the attributes, actions, and contents of a selected group or data table to a
new table, select the table you want to copy, then do one of the following:
• Select Copy... from the File menu.
• Select Copy... from the window pop-up menu.
• Click the Copy button on the Toolbar
• Press Ctrl+C
The Copy dialog box opens.

16-30 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Enter the new table name in the input field. You must enter a new name. The Data
Logger will not let you use a current table name for a new table.
Select OK to create the table, or select Cancel to cancel the copy function.

Renaming A Table
To rename a data or group table, select the table, and then do one of the following:
• Select Rename... from the File menu.
• Select Rename... from the window pop-up menu.
• Press Ctrl+R.
The Rename table dialog box opens

Enter the new table name in the input field. You must enter a new name. The
Database Logger will not let you use a current table name when you rename a table.
Select OK to create the table, or select Cancel to cancel the rename function.
Note
You cannot rename the Alarm (ALARM_LOG), Event (EVENT_LOG) or External
tables.

Deleting A Table
To delete a group, data or external table, select the table, and then do one of the
following:
• Select Delete Table from the File menu.
• Select Delete... from the window pop-up menu.
• Click the Delete Table button on the Toolbar.
A confirmation message dialog box for the table opens.
Select OK in the confirmation message box to verify that you want the table
removed, or select Cancel to cancel your request. The table list updates after the
confirmation message box closes.
Note
You cannot delete the Alarm (ALARM_LOG) or Event (EVENT_LOG) tables.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-31

Reconciling a Table
You can use the Reconcile option on the Edit menu to show the differences
between the current CIMPLICITY HMI table configuration and the logging database.
When you select Reconcile from the Edit menu, the Reconcile Table dialog box
opens.

The dialog box lists all the fields in the table configuration, and any fields in the table
in the database that are not in the configuration. Each field has one of the following
icons:
Field is in the Database Logger configuration and database table
Field is in the Database Logger configuration and database table, but
types don’t match
Field is in the database table, but not in the Database Logger table
configuration (unused).
Field is in the Database Logger configuration, but not in the database
table (uncreated).
Field has been removed from the Database Logger configuration and
the database table.
You can use this dialog box to remove unused fields from the database table or create
fields in the database table for new fields in the configuration.
Important
You can use this dialog box to remove fields from Microsoft Access
databases. Fields in SQL Server and Oracle databases must be
removed manually.

16-32 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Creating Uncreated Database Fields
To create fields in the database for new fields in the configuration:
1. Select the fields you want to create.

Uncreated fields display this icon:

You can use the Shift and Ctrl keys to select multiple fields, or you can
select Select Uncreated to select all the uncreated fields in the table.
2. Select Create.

After the fields are created in the database, their icons change to:

Removing Unused Microsoft Access Fields

To remove unused fields from the database table:
1. Select the fields you want to remove.

Unused fields display this icon:

You can use the Shift and Ctrl keys to select multiple fields, or you can
select Select Unused to select all the unused fields in the table.
2. Select Remove.

After the unused fields are removed from the database, their icons change to:

Removing Unused SQL Server and Oracle Fields

SQL Server and Oracle do not directly support dropping columns in a database table.
To delete unused columns, you must:
1. Copy the table to a temporary table.
2. Drop the table from the database.
3. Recreate the table with the fields you wish to use.
4. Copy the data from the temporary table to the new table.
5. Delete the temporary table.
Consult your SQL Server or Oracle documentation for details on how to do this.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-33

Database Logger Properties
If a Group table holds 200 points, 18
writes/sec to that table gives a data
rate of 3600 points/sec.
16-34
The Logging Properties dialog box lets you define logging parameters, and specify
the type of database driver that interfaces with the Database Logger option.
Benchmark tests on a 60 MHz Pentium PC show that the following data rates can be
sustained for group tables with 200 points:
Microsoft Access 3.5 writes/second
On-node SQL Server 18 writes/second
A write is defined as a single log event on a table. The data rate is relatively
independent of the number of points logged to a table, and of the number of tables
being logged to. For example, using a SQL Server, you can log to 18 tables in one
second, or you can perform 3 log events on 6 tables in one second. Because of this
characteristic, a group table can log data faster than a data table with the same
number of points.
Note
Smaller groups log faster than larger groups. However, one large group logs faster
than two that are half as big do.
Parameters
CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 The Parameters page displays the current disk scan rate, data table queue size, data
logging scan rate, and maintenance action export path. When you open the ODBC
Configuration page, or select OK to close the property sheet, information on the page
will be validated. You can define the following parameters:
• Disk full scan rate
• Database queue size
• Point data logging scan rate
• Maintenance action export path

Disk full scan rate (min)

If any of your tables use the "Disk Full" maintenance event, you should know that the
disk is not continuously monitored for this condition. Instead, the disk is monitored
at the rate specified by this field.
The "Disk Full" condition is only useful for Microsoft Access databases. The SQL
Server forces preallocation of disk space for data tables.

Database queue size

This field controls the queue of logged data for each table. Enter a queue size that
will support worst-case logging during activity bursts. For example, if 10 points are
being logged to the DATA_LOG table, you should have a queue size of at least 10 in
case their logging conditions all occur simultaneously.
A message is logged to your project’s Status Log whenever the database queue for a
table overflows, and additional write requests are dropped until there is room in the
queue for them.
If you are doing more logging than can be supported by the benchmarked data rate
for the database, increasing the size of the database queue will not resolve the
problem of lost data.
Increasing the size of the Database Logger queue will increase the amount of memory
used by the database logger. Since each table preallocates memory for the queue,
this growth will take place at startup time. For each additional entry in the queue, the
following additional memory will be used:
Alarm Log Table 200 bytes per entry.
Event Log Table 200 bytes per entry.
Data Tables Size of logged data plus 36 bytes.
Group Tables Size of logged data plus 36 bytes.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-35

 Point data logging scan rate (ticks)
100 ticks = 1 second This scan rate is the worst-case scan rate at which the Point Data Logger will submit
data for logging. The value you enter here should be faster than the fastest table scan
rate. Enter the scan rate in ticks.
This value should be faster than the fastest table scan rate, and large enough so that
all the data for a PLC scan comes into the database together.

Maintenance action export path

The export path defines the directory that holds the files created by table maintenance
export and purge actions. This pathname is validated when the Parameters page is
closed.
The default value of SITE_ROOT:\ARC places the data into the ARC subdirectory
of the project. You may use the logical directory name SITE_ROOT to specify a
different subdirectory of your project, or use any other full path specification such as
D:\EXPORT.

Alarm and Point Logging

The Alarm Logging page shows the ODBC configuration that will be used when
logging data to the ALARM_LOG, EVENT_LOG and Application tables. The Point
Logging page shows the ODBC configuration that will be used when logging data to
Data and Group tables.
You can define the following parameters:
• Connect information, including ODBC Data Source, Database User,
Password, and Reconnect Wait Period.
• Store and forward information, including Enable Store and Forward and
the maximum number of stored records.

16-36 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 If additional information is required to connect to the database you selected, you will
be prompted for it during validation. Validation occurs when you select OK, or
select the Parameters page. Information needed varies from database to database. In
general:
• If you are connecting to a Microsoft Access database, you may be
prompted for a file name.
• If you are connecting to a SQL Server, you may be prompted for a
database name.
• If you are connecting to an Oracle database, you may be prompted for a
Server ID. Enter the Alias Name for the Oracle database in this field.
If the Data Logger is unable to connect to the selected database, validation fails.

Connect Information
Enter information in the following fields:
ODBC Data Source
Select the data source to receive logged data. This
field displays a current list of ODBC data sources.
In general, it consists of a list of one or more
Microsoft Access or SQL Servers. The default data
sources are:
• CIMPLICITY Alarm Logging
A Microsoft Access data source that logs data
to the CIMPLOG.MDB file in the ARC
directory of your CIMPLICITY installation.
• CIMPLICITY Point Logging
A Microsoft Access data source that logs data
to the POINTLOG.MDB file in the ARC
directory of your CIMPLICITY installation.
Note
The CIMPLOG.MDB and POINTLOG.MDB files
are compatible with Microsoft Access version 7.0.

• CIMPLICITY SQL Server Logging

A Microsoft SQL Server data source that logs
data to an on-node SQL Server database. You
must install SQL Server (sold separately) to use
this data source.
If you are using an Oracle Database, you may see
the ODBC data source that you created for Oracle.
If you are using Microsoft Access, you need to be
aware that there are file locking issues for both
logging and reporting if you select the same
Microsoft Access data source for both the Alarm
and Point logging pages. To avoid these problems,
always select separate data sources for Alarm and
Point logging pages.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-37

 If you are using SQL Server or Oracle, these file
locking issues do not exist. You may configure both
the Alarm and Point logging pages to the same SQL
Server data source.
Database User Enter the username needed to connect to the
selected database driver. This field is required if
you are connecting to a SQL Server.
Password Enter the password needed to connect to the selected
database driver. This field is required if you are
connecting to an SQL Server.
Reconnect Wait Period Enter the amount of time the Database Logger waits
between reconnect attempts when the connection to
the database is lost. The default is 30 seconds.
Enter a value between 0 seconds (continuous retries)
and 24 hours.

Store and Forward

Enter information in the following fields:
Enable Store and Forward
Unlimited
Max number of stored records
Set this check box to enable the Store and
Forward feature.
After you enable the feature, use the radio
buttons to select between unlimited or
limited storage of database records.
Click on this radio button if you want the
Database Logger to store an unlimited
number of records while its connection to
the database is down. The number of
records actually stored is determined by the
amount of time the connection is lost and by
the amount of free disk space you have.
Click on this radio button if you want to
select the number of records the Database
Logger will store when its connection to the
database is down.
Enter a number between 1 and
4,294,967,295.

16-38 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Displaying A Table
To display the contents of a table, you can double-click on the table name in the
CIMPLICITY Database Logger Configuration window.
Alternatively, you can select the table in the CIMPLICITY Database Logger
Configuration window then:
• Select Open Table... from the File menu.
• Click the Open Table button on the Toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+O.
The CIMPLICITY Database Logger Configuration window for the selected table
opens.

You can use the Menu functions, Toolbar buttons and shortcut keys to:
• Add new points to the table.
• Delete points from the table.
• Display and modify point or alarm logging properties.
• Display and modify table properties.
• Display a filtered list of points.
• Close the table and return to the main Data Logging window.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-39

 Table Menu Options
You can use the menu options to add points to the table, delete points from the table,
display and modify table and point properties, toggle the Toolbar and Status Bar
display, filter the table list, and access Help.

The File Menu

When you select the File menu, the following drop-down list displays:
For Data and Group tables For Alarm and Event tables

The File menu options are:

Add Points... For Data and Group logs, adds points to the table.
Add Alarms... For Alarm and Event logs, adds alarms to the table.
Remove Point Removes the selected point from the table.
Remove Alarm Removes the selected alarm from the table.
Close Table Closes the table and returns to the main Data Logger
window.

The Edit Menu

When you select the Edit menu, the following drop-down list displays:
For Data and Group tables For Alarm and Event tables

The Edit menu options are:

Point Properties... For Data and Group logs, displays and modifies the
logging properties of the selected point.
Alarm Properties... For Alarm and Event logs, displays and modifies the
logging properties of the selected alarm.
Table Properties... Displays and modifies the properties of the table.
Reconcile Table... Reconciles the current table with the database.

16-40 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 The View Menu
When you select the View menu, the following drop-down list displays:

The View menu options are:

Toolbar Enables/disables the Toolbar display.
Status Bar Enables/disables the Status Bar display.
Filter... Filters the list of points in the table.

The Help Menu

When you select the Help menu, the following drop-down list displays:

The Help menu options are:

Help Topics Opens the Help Contents for the Database Logger
About Database Logger Displays the current version number for Database
Logger.

Using The Window Pop-Up Menu

The Window Pop-up Menu is available when you are working with at Database
Logger table.
For Data and Point tables For Alarm and Event tables

Use one of the following methods to access this menu:

• With no items selected, hold down the right mouse button. You can
then select the table related menu options.
• Select an item in the table and hold down the right mouse button. You
can then select item or table related menu options.
The menu functions are:
Remove Removes the selected point.
Properties... Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected point.
Add Points... For Data and Group logs, opens the Select A Point
Browser and lets you select points to be added to the table.
Add Alarms... For Alarm and Event logs, opens the Select A Alarm
Definition Browser and lets you select alarms to be added
to the table.
GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-41
 Table Properties... Opens the Properties dialog box for the table.
Close Closes the table.

Table Toolbar Buttons

The Toolbar buttons available to you are:
Close Table Closes the table and return to the main
window.
Remove Items Removes selected points or alarms from
the table.
Add Item Adds points or alarms to the table.

Item Properties Displays and modifies the logging

properties for the selected point or alarm.
Table Properties Displays and modifies the properties of
the table.
Filter Items Filters the list of points or alarms in the
table.
About Database Logger Displays program information, version
number and copyright.

Adding Points to A Table

The Select A Point dialog box opens when you add a new point to a data or group
table. Use this dialog box, which is part of the Browser, to generate a list of points
from which you can select a point (or points) to add to the table. For more
information on the Point Browser, see that chapter in this manual.

Removing Points from A Table

To remove a point from a table:
1. Select the point.
2. Select Remove Point from the File menu or click the "Remove
Point" button on the Toolbar. A confirmation message box opens.
3. Select OK in the confirmation message box to verify that you want the
point removed or select Cancel to cancel your request.
The point list updates after the confirmation message box closes.

Editing Point Logging Properties

You can modify the logging properties for each point in a logging table. The
properties that you can modify depend on the table type:
• For points in group tables, you can modify each point’s Logging
Attributes.
• For points in data tables, the Alarm Log table, and the Event Log table,
you can modify each point’s Logging Conditions.
16-42 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Group Table Point Properties

The Logging Attributes property page for a point in a group table displays the current
attributes assigned to the point. You can have point logging occur under any
combination of the following:
• Point Attributes
• Array Attributes (array points only)
Select Use Defaults to reset the Logging Attributes to their default values. The
default is to log point values.

Point Attributes to be Logged

You can log any of the following point attributes:
Point Value Log the point’s current value.
Previous Value Log the point’s previous value.
Alarm State Log the point’s current alarm state.
Engineering Units Log the point’s engineering units.
Raw Value Log the point’s raw value.
Time Last Logged Log the time the point was last logged.
Resource Log the point’s Resource ID.
SQL Field Prefix This is the prefix for the column in the SQL database,
and must be unique for each point in the table. The
default is the Point ID.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-43

 Array Attributes to be Logged
This attribute is available only when you are entering an array point into a table.
Log array elements
Select the elements to be logged. To log all
elements, press All. You can use commas and dashes
in your list as delimiters.
Examples:
To log the first, third and fifth elements of an array,
type 1,3,5
To log the first through fifth elements, and the tenth
element of an array, type 1-5,10

Data Table Point Properties

The Logging Conditions property page for a point displays the current logging
conditions for that point. You can have point logging occur under any combination
of the following:
• Data triggered logging
• Alarm triggered logging
• Timed/gated logging
Note
If device point is configured as OnScan, point value is updated on every scan even
though its value remains unchanged.

16-44 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Select Use Defaults to reset the Logging Conditions to their default values. The
default is to log data periodically every 5 minutes.
The Point and Point Alarm fields have a Browser button and a Pop-up Menu
button.
• Use the Browser button - - to open the Select A Point Browser and
search for a Point ID.

• Use the Pop-up Menu button - - to create a new Point ID or browse

for an existing Point ID.
Point Data Triggered Logging
Select this option if you want to log data when the trigger point’s value changes.
If you do not define any logging conditions under Timed/Gated Logging, then data
will only be logged into the table when the trigger occurs.

Point Alarm Triggered Logging

Select this option if you want to log data when the trigger point goes into the selected
alarm state.
For this option to work successfully, you must define alarm limits for the trigger
point. For example, if you select a Point ID and choose its Alarm High state, logging
into the table will occur every time the point enters the Alarm High state.
If you do not define any logging conditions under Timed/Gated Logging, then data
will only be logged into the table when the trigger occurs.

Combining Triggers
You can combine triggers. When you combine triggers, logging occurs when either
of the triggers occurs. For example, if you want to log a set of points when
POINT_A updates or while POINT_B is in Alarm High state, do the following:
1. Set the On point value update check box.
2. Enter POINT_A in the Point field.
3. Set the On point alarm state check box.
4. Set the Alarm High check box
5. Enter POINT_B in the Point field.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-45

 Point Timed/Gated Logging
Timers and gates determine the logging interval for the point. You can choose one or
more of the following events
Periodic Set this check box when you want to log point data
into the table at regular intervals.
Enter the time value in the input field, and select the
time interval. Valid intervals are DAYS, HOURS,
MINUTES or SECONDS.
Synchronized Set this check box when you want to log point data at
a particular time of day.
Enter the time in the input field, and select AM or
PM.
On digital point state Set this check box if you want to log data while a
digital point is in a certain state.
Select the state to check for and enter the digital
Point ID in the input field. Valid states are HIGH,
LOW, and TRANSITION
You can combine timed events. For example, if you want to log a set of points every
hour on the half-hour, do the following:
1. Set the Periodic check box, and enter 1 HOUR in the data fields.
2. Set the Synchronized check box and enter 12:30 AM in the data
fields.

16-46 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Alarm Log Table Point Properties

The Logging Conditions property sheet for an alarm in the ALARM_LOG table
displays the current default logging criteria for that alarm. These criteria are:
Generate Information about the alarm is logged when the alarm occurs.
Acknowledge Information about the alarm is logged when the alarm is
acknowledged by the operator or the system.
Reset Information about the alarm is logged when the alarm is reset
by the operator or the system.
Delete Information about the alarm is logged when the alarm is deleted
from the system.

Modifying Logging Conditions for an Alarm

To change the default logging conditions for an alarm:
1. Set the check box for each event that you want to log.
2. Clear the check box for each event that you do not want to log.
3. Select OK. The point’s logging conditions update, and the dialog box
closes.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-47

Filtering the Point List

The Filter Points dialog box lets you filter the list of points in a data or group table
by Point ID and/or Point Type.
To filter the point list:
1. Enter a full or partial Point ID in the Point Identifier input field. You
can use the ? and * wildcards to perform partial string searches.
2. Select the Point Type you want to filter for. Valid selections are ALL,
ANALOG, APPL, DIGITAL, or TEXT.
3. Select OK to filter the list according to the information you’ve entered.
Select Cancel to cancel the filter function.
To display all the points in the table, put an asterisk (*) in the Point Identifier field,
and select ALL for the Point Type.

Filtering the Alarm or Event List

The Filter Alarms dialog box lets you filter the list of alarms in the alarm or event
table by Alarm ID.
To filter the alarm list:
1. Enter a full or partial Alarm ID in the Alarm Identifier input field. You
can use the ? and * wildcards to perform partial string searches.
2. Select OK to filter the list according to the information you’ve entered.
Select Cancel to cancel the filter function.
To display all the alarms in the table, put an asterisk (*) in the Alarm Identifier
field.

16-48 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Reporting
Because the CIMPLICITY HMI Database Logger option writes to ODBC-compliant
databases, you may use database-specific reporting mechanisms to generate custom
reports for your site. Both the Microsoft Access and SQL Server databases provide
methods for reporting which you may find useful. Alternately, you may use any
ODBC-compliant application to generate reports.
Three sample reports are provided with the CIMPLICITY HMI Database Logger
product option. These reports are written in Microsoft Excel version 5.0 format, and
are stored in the report subdirectory of your CIMPLICITY HMI distribution
directory. The report files are:
SQLALARM.XLS A report for use with CIMPLICITY HMI Alarm tables.
SQLDATA.XLS A report for use with CIMPLICITY HMI Data tables.
SQLGROUP.XLS A report for use with CIMPLICITY HMI Group tables.
There is also a Microsoft Excel 97 version of each report. The files are:
SQLALARM97.XLS A report for use with CIMPLICITY HMI Alarm tables.
SQLDATA97.XLS A report for use with CIMPLICITY HMI Data tables.
SQLGROUP97.XLS A report for use with CIMPLICITY HMI Group tables.
For ad-hoc reporting, you will find that these samples are fully functional as shipped.
They may be used with either Access or SQL Server to report on any tables you may
have configured. In addition, you may copy and modify these reports to meet your
specific needs. Data in these reports is ordered by timestamp.
From Excel, you may save generated reports to disk for later use, print them, or
perform further analysis on your data.

Notes on Installing Microsoft Excel

Generally, installing Microsoft Excel is a straightforward process. However you
must perform additional steps when loading Microsoft Excel from an Excel CD, a
Microsoft Office for Windows 95 CD or a Microsoft Office for Windows 97 CD in
order to successfully generate reports.

Installing from an Excel CD

When you install Microsoft Excel from an Excel CD in Office 95 or Office 97, make
sure that you select the Microsoft Query Add-in in the Add-ins section.
CIMPLICITY software expects xlodbc.xla and xlodbc32.dll to be in the
C:\msoffice\excel\library\msquery directory. After you finish
installing Microsoft Excel, do the following:
1. Locate xlodbc.xla and xlodbc32.dll.
2. Create the path C:\msoffice\excel\library\msquery.
3. Copy xlodbc.xla and xlodbc32.dll from their current directory
to the new path.
If you do not do this, a "Path not found" error message displays when you attempt to
open any of the report files.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-49

 Installing from Microsoft Office for Windows 95 CD
When you install Microsoft Excel, do the following to install the Microsoft Query
Add-in:
1. Select Converters, Filters and Data Access.
2. Click Change Option.
3. Select Data Access.
4. Click Change Option.
5. Select MS Query. It is not necessary to select any of the ODBC drivers
at this point, as they will be installed with your CIMPLICITY HMI
software.
6. Continue with your installation.
If you do not do this, a Path not found error message displays when you attempt to
open any of the report files.

Installing from Microsoft Office for Windows 97 CD

When you install Microsoft Excel, do the following to install the Microsoft Query
Add-in:
1. Select Data Access.
2. Click Change Option.
3. Select Microsoft Query. It is not necessary to select any of the ODBC
drivers at this point, as they will be installed with your CIMPLICITY
HMI software.
4. Continue with your installation.
If you do not do this, a Path not found error message displays when you attempt to
open any of the report files.

Installing the Sample Reports

If you do not install the MSQuery Add Before you can use the sample reports on your computer, you must first configure
In, when you attempt to open any of them for use with your installation of Microsoft Excel (purchased separately). You
the report files, a Path not found must have installed the MSQuery Add In with this product.
error message displays.
Microsoft Excel Version 7 does not require additional configuration for the reports.
If you have an older version of Microsoft Excel, perform the following additional
steps:
1. From Excel, open the report file.
2. From the Tools menu, select Add Ins...
3. Use the Browse button to select the XLODBC.XLA add-in; it will be
located in the LIBRARY\MSQUERY subdirectory of your Excel
installation.
4. Replace any existing XLODBC.XLA add-in, if you are prompted to do
so.
5. Save your updated report.
Repeat these steps for all three report files. You will need to do this only once for
each report.

16-50 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Alarm Report
This report provides the ability to report on the ALARM_LOG and EVENT_LOG
tables. You may filter the report by Alarm Class or timestamp.
When you open the SQLALARM.XLS spreadsheet in Microsoft Excel, the Control
worksheet is displayed initially.

This worksheet displays the current report parameters and status. From this
worksheet, you can:
• Set parameters.
• Generate the report.
• Clear the error log.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-51

 Setting Alarm Report Parameters
To set report parameters, click Set Parameters. The Set Report Parameters dialog
box opens with the tunable parameters for this report.

Enter information in the following fields to configure your report parameters:

ODBC Table Select the table for which to generate the report. You may
select the ALARM_LOG or EVENT_LOG table.
Alarm Class Enter an optional alarm class identifier to filter the report. If
no class is specified, all alarms will be included.
Start Time Enter an optional start time for the report. If no time is
specified, the earliest data will be included.
End Time Enter an optional end time for the report. If no time is
specified, the latest data will be included.
Data Source Select the ODBC data source to be used in generating the
report. This should be the same data source that was used to
log the data. If an appropriate data source is not visible in
the drop-down list, you may browse for one.
To save your parameters, click OK. To cancel your changes, click Cancel.
If you save your spreadsheet after setting the report parameters, the parameters will
be available the next time you run the report.

16-52 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Generating an Alarm Report
Once you have set your report parameters, click Generate Report to generate the
report.
While the report is being generated, progress messages will be displayed on the status
display of the report. The completed report will be stored on the Data worksheet.
An alarm report contains the following columns:
timestamp The time that the alarm was logged.
Alarm ID The alarm identifier of the alarm or event logged. For point
alarms, this is the same as the point identifier.
alarm_class The alarm class of the alarm or event logged. You may filter
a report to include only one class of alarm; see Set
Parameters, above.
resource The resource of the alarm or event logged.
logged_by The user or process which caused the alarm or event to be
logged. For point alarm generation, this is frequently
MASTER_PTM0_RP, the CIMPLICITY Point Manager.
reference Reference information for the alarm logged.
prev_state The previous state of the alarm before the event which caused
it to be logged. This may be N (normal), G (generated), A
(acknowledged), or R (reset).
log_action The trigger event which caused the alarm to be logged. This
may be G (generation), A (acknowledgment), R (reset), or D
(manual deletion).
final_state The final state of the alarm after the trigger event. This may
be G (generated), A (acknowledged), R (reset), or D
(deleted).
alarm_message The alarm message for the alarm being logged.
If you save your spreadsheet after generating a report, the data will be available the
next time you view the report.

Clearing the Alarm Error Log

If an error occurs during report Generation, it will be reported on the status display
and added to the Error Log worksheet.
Once you have resolved any errors, click Clear Error Log to delete the error
messages from the Error Log worksheet. If you save your spreadsheet without
deleting any error messages from the error log, these messages will remain the next
time you open the report.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-53

Data Report
This report provides the ability to report on Data tables that you have configured,
including the default DATA_LOG table. Because Data tables contain individual
points on each row, you may filter the report by Point ID to view only the point you
wish to see. In addition, you may filter the report by timestamp.
When you open the SQLDATA.XLS spreadsheet in Microsoft Excel, the Control
worksheet is displayed initially.

This worksheet displays the current report parameters and status. From this
worksheet, you can:
• Set parameters.
• Generate the report.
• Clear the error log.

16-54 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Setting Data Report Parameters
To set report parameters, click Set Parameters. The Set Report Parameters dialog
box opens with the tunable parameters for this report.

Enter information in the following fields to configure your report parameters:

Database Table Enter the table for which to generate the report. You can
enter the name of a CIMPLICITY Data table or enter
DATA_LOG for the default Data table.
Point ID Enter an optional point identifier for the report. If no
identifier is specified, all points will be included.
Start Time Enter an optional start time for the report. If no time is
specified, the earliest data will be included.
End Time Enter an optional end time for the report. If no time is
specified, the latest data will be included.
Data Source Select the ODBC data source to be used in generating the
report. This should be the same data source that was used to
log the data. If an appropriate data source is not visible in
the drop-down list, you may browse for one.
To save your parameters, click OK. To cancel your changes, click Cancel.
If you save your spreadsheet after setting the report parameters, the parameters will
be available the next time you run the report.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-55

 Generating A Data Report
Once you have set your report parameters, click Generate Report to generate the
report.
While the report is being generated, progress messages will be displayed on the status
display of the report. The completed report will be stored on the Data worksheet.
A data report contains a column for each attribute in the table. These may be named
as follows:
timestamp The time that the point was logged.
POINT_ID The point identifier of the point being logged
project The name of the CIMPLICITY HMI project logging the point data.
_ALRM The alarm state of the point being logged.
_ENG The engineering units label of the point being logged.
_PREV The previous logged value of the point being logged.
_VAL The current value of the point being logged.
_TIME The timestamp of the previous time the point was logged.
_RAW The raw value of the point being logged.
_RES The resource of the point being logged.
If you save your spreadsheet after generating a report, the data will be available the
next time you view the report.

Clearing the Data Error Log

If an error occurs during report Generation, it will be reported on the status display
and added to the Error Log worksheet.
Once you have resolved any errors, click Clear Error Log to delete the error
messages from the Error Log worksheet. If you save your spreadsheet without
deleting any error messages from the error log, these messages will remain the next
time you open the report.

16-56 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Trend Report
This report provides similar functionality to the Data report for use with Group
tables. In addition, it provides a static trend representation of the point values in the
report.
When you open the SQLGROUP.XLS worksheet, spreadsheet in Microsoft Excel,
the Control worksheet is displayed initially.

This worksheet displays the current report parameters and status. From this
worksheet, you can:
• Set parameters.
• Generate the report.
• Clear the error log.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-57

 Setting Trend Report Parameters
To set report parameters, click Set Parameters. The Set Report Parameters dialog
box opens with the tunable parameters for this report.

Enter information in the following fields to configure your report parameters:

Database Table The table for which to generate the report. Enter the name of
a CIMPLICITY Group table.
Start Time Enter an optional start time for the report. If no time is
specified, the earliest data will be included.
End Time Enter an optional end time for the report. If no time is
specified, the latest data will be included.
Data Source Select the ODBC data source to be used in generating the
report. This should be the same data source that was used to
log the data. If an appropriate data source is not visible in
the drop-down list, you may browse for one.
To save your parameters, click OK. To cancel your changes, click Cancel.
If you save your spreadsheet after setting the report parameters, the parameters will
be available the next time you run the report.

16-58 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Generating A Trend Report
Once you have set your report parameters, click Generate Report to generate the
report.
While the report is being generated, progress messages will be displayed on the status
display of the report. The completed report will be stored on the Data worksheet.
A trend report contains a column for each point attribute in the table. The prefix of
each column is based on the SQL Field Prefix specified for the point. To this prefix
is appended a variable extension based on the attribute, and a number indicating the
array index (0 for non-array points). The attribute extensions are as follows:
timestamp The time that the point was logged.
project The name of the CIMPLICITY HMI project logging the alarm data.
_ALRM The alarm state of the point being logged.
_ENG The engineering units label of the point being logged.
_PREV The previous logged value of the point being logged. This value
will be NULL immediately following a CIMPLICITY restart.
_VAL The current value of the point being logged.
_TIME The timestamp of the previous time the point was logged. This
value will be NULL immediately following a CIMPLICITY restart.
It will be the same for all points in the group, because they are all
logged together.
_RAW The raw value of the point being logged. If the point does not have
engineering units conversion, it is the same as the current value.
_RES The resource of the point being logged.
In addition to the collection of data into the Data worksheet, this data will be
graphed on the Chart worksheet.
If you save your spreadsheet after generating a report, the data and chart will be
available the next time you view the report.

Clearing the Trend Error Log

If an error occurs during report Generation, it will be reported on the status display
and added to the Error Log worksheet.
Once you have resolved any errors, click Clear Error Log to delete the error
messages from the Error Log worksheet. If you save your spreadsheet without
deleting any error messages from the error log, these messages will remain the next
time you open the report.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-59

Printing Reports Automatically
Important
You can only use this feature with Microsoft Access and SQL Server
databases.
You can use OLE automation from CIMPLICITY HMI scripts to trigger the running
and printing of reports from Microsoft Excel spreadsheets that you have configured
to produce reports.
The CIMPLICITY HMI script may be:
• Triggered by Database Logger Maintenance Events
• Triggered by any event in the Event Manager
• Attached to an object a user can trigger on a CimView screen
To implement this feature, you will need to:
1. Configure the CIMPLICITY Service to access a printer.
2. Create a script to generate the report and print it.
3. Create an action to trigger the script.

Modifying the CIMPLICITY Service for Automatic

Printing
The CIMPLICITY service needs access to a user-defined printer to print reports. To
grant this access:
1. From the Start menu, select the Control Panel.
2. In the Control Panel, activate Services.
3. In the Services dialog box, double-click on the CIMPLICITY Service.
4. In the Service dialog box, under Log On As:, select This Account:.
5. Select a CIMPLICITY user account.
6. If the account requires a password, enter the password and confirm it.
7. Select OK to accept your changes and close the Service dialog box.
8. Select OK to close the Services dialog box.
9. Close the Control Panel.
Note
If no one is logged in to the account you select here, when the script executes, no
printers will be available. The report will be generated, but it will not be printed.

16-60 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
 Creating a Script
You will need to create a script to open the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet for your
report, generate the report and print it.
The following script opens the SQLALARM.XLS spreadsheet, generates a report,
and prints it. You can use it as a template for creating your own scripts:
Sub Main ()
’----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
’ This section sets REPORT_TRIGGER back to 0 so that the script doesn’t continue to run.
’ This is not needed if the report is triggered directly from a CimView screen or by a
’ TIMED event in the Database Logger or Event Manager.
’
Dim PT As New point
PT.id = "\\PROJECT\REPORT_TRIGGER"
PT.value = 0
PT.set
’----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
’ The code from this point on is for printing.
’ This example uses one of the existing Excel spreadsheets for extracting and printing
’ the data from the cimplog.mdb alarm database.
’ You will need to customize this code so that it prints what you need. It is also
’ possible in some applications to run a specific macro from the command line.
’ You can then use the SHELL command.
’
Dim Excel As Object
Set Excel = CreateObject ("Excel.Application")
’
’ Open the workbook for alarm reporting
Excel.application.workbooks.open "C:\CIMPICITY\REPORT\SQLALARM.XLS"
Excel.application.workbooks("SQLALARM.XLS").activate
’
’ Run the macro to get the data
Excel.application.Run "SQLALARM.XLS!GenerateReport"
’
’ Print the data
Excel.application.workbooks("SQLALARM.XLS").worksheets("Data").activate
Excel.application.workbooks("SQLALARM.XLS").activesheet.printout
’
’ Quit without saving the data
Excel.application.workbooks("SQLALARM.XLS").saved = TRUE
Excel.application.quit
End Sub

To create a script:
1. Select Program Editor from your CIMPLICITY HMI menu.
2. Create the script to run the report and print it. You can use the sample
script as a template.
3. Compile the script and create an executable.

GFK-1180 Database Logger 16-61

 Triggering an Automatic Report
There are many ways to trigger a script to run and print a report from Database
Logger tables. The following are some suggestions.

Using Database Logger Maintenance Actions

To trigger a report automatically from a maintenance action:
1. Open the Database Logger in the project’s Configuration Cabinet.
2. Open the property sheets for the table.
3. On the Maintenance Events page for the table, specify the event(s) you
want to trigger the script.
4. On the Maintenance Actions page for the table, check Run program,
then enter the fill path and name of the executable you created from the
script.
5. Select OK to save your changes and close the property sheets.
The report automatically generates and prints whenever any of the maintenance
events you specified occur.

Using the Event Manager

To trigger a report automatically from an event:
1. Open the Event Editor in the project’s Configuration Cabinet.
2. Create any event you wish to trigger the report.
3. Create an action for this event to run the script.
The report automatically generates and prints whenever the event occurs.

Using a CimView Screen

To let users trigger a report from a CimView screen:
1. Open the screen in CimEdit.
2. Select or create the object you want to trigger the report.
3. Display the object’s property sheets.
4. On the Script property page, select Edit.
5. In the Edit Script window, enter a script that will trigger the report.
You can generate the report directly, or trigger an event that invokes an
action that generates the report.
6. Close the Edit Script window.
7. Open the Events property page.
8. Create a new event and assign it a new procedure.
9. In the Procedure Information dialog box, create an Invoke Script action
and specify the script you created.
10. Select OK to save the new procedure information.
11. Select OK to save the object’s properties.
When a user executes the event you configured, the report automatically generates
and prints.

16-62 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User Manual GFK-1180
Client Configuration

About Client Configuration

You can use the Client Configuration utility to configure default logins for
CIMPLICITY HMI Viewers on Client computers.
You can configure a CIMPLICITY HMI Viewer on a Client computer to
automatically log in to a Server project. The project’s Client Configuration provides
a default login on a per-Client computer basis. When A CIMPLICITY HMI Viewer
on the Client accesses project data from the Server (by opening a CimView screen,
for example), the Viewer is automatically logged in to the project.
You can also configure a Client to use the Windows Logon Username as the default
user for logging in to a CIMPLICITY HMI project. When you check the Trusted
option, a user on a Client computer automatically logs in to the CIMPLICITY HMI
project if their Windows Logon Username matches a CIMPLICITY HMI User ID in
the project.

Using Client Configuration

To start Client Configuration, double-click the Client icon in the Configuration
cabinet. The Client - Configuration window opens.

GFK-1180 17-1
 You can use the Menu functions, Toolbar buttons, and shortcut keys to:
• Create a new client.
• Change the window display attributes.
• Change startup options.
• Modify an item.
• Copy the information for a selected item to a new item.
• Delete an item.
• Display a filtered list of items

Creating A New Client

To create a new client, you can do one of the following:
• Select New from the File menu.
• Click the New Item button on the Toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+N.
After you initiate the request, the New Client dialog box opens.

Enter the name of the computer for the new client, then select OK. The Client
Properties dialog box opens.

17-2 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Base System User's Manual GFK-1180
 Client Properties

You can select either or both of the client options.

• If you enter just the Default User ID, all users from the Client
computer are automatically logged in with the default User ID.
• If you just set the Trusted check box, only those users whose
Windows Logon Username match a CIMPLICITY User ID in the
project are automatically logged in. All other users will have to enter a
User ID and Password (if required) in the CIMPLICITY Login dialog
box.
• If you select both options, those users whose Windows Logon
Username match a CIMPLICITY User ID in the project are
automatically logged in with that User ID. Otherwise, users are
automatically logged in with the default User ID.
When you are finished defining the client properties, select OK to close the Client
Properties dialog box and create the new client properties, or select Cancel to close
the dialog box without creating the new client properties.

Default User ID
Enter the optional default username for users on the Client computer. Users on the
Client computer will automatically be logged in to the CIMPLICITY HMI project
with this User ID.

You can click the Browser button - - to the right of the input field to open the
Select A User Browser and use it to select the User ID.

You can also use the Window Pop-up menu or the Pop-up menu button - - to
create a new user or browse for an existing user.

Trusted
Set this check box if you want the project to accept the Windows Logon Username
on the Client computer as the CIMPLICITY User ID and automatically log the user
into the project. The project must have a CIMPLICITY User ID configured that
matches the Windows Logon Username.
Clear this check box if you want users on the Client computer to manually log in to
CIMPLICITY HMI project.

GFK-1180 Client Configuration 17- 3

Using CIMPLICITY HMI with
CIMPLICITY Control

About CIMPLICITY HMI and CIMPLICITY Control

CIMPLICITY Control provides you with PLC programming and configuration.
When you create a folder in the CIMPLICITY Control Workbench, you can
configure and program Series 90 PLC hardware, create ladder logic programs and
create variables that are mapped to PLC reference addresses. Since CIMPLICITY
HMI points can also be mapped to PLC reference addresses as well, a Control
variable has properties that are common with a HMI point.
CIMPLICITY Control and HMI work together to provide you with configuration
options that let you import variables from a Control folder into points in an HMI
project.
Note
You must have both CIMPLICITY Control and CIMPLICITY HMI installed on your
computer.
When CIMPLICITY Control and CIMPLICITY HMI are both installed in a
computer, a CIMPLICITY Control Workbench icon is placed in your project’s
Configuration cabinet.
To open the CIMPLICITY Control Workbench, just double-click or open the
CIMPLICITY Control icon.

GFK-1180 18-1
Supported Device Protocols
Any device protocol that supports Series 90 PLCs includes Control configuration
options when the software is properly installed. These protocols are:
• Series 90 TCP/IP
• Series 90 TCP/IP Redundancy
• SNP

Device Properties
To import variables as device points into a project, you must create an association
between the project’s devices and Control folders. A device can have associations
with multiple folders. However, a folder can only be associated with one of the
project’s devices because a folder is seen by the project as being a device itself.
When you create a new device that is supported by CIMPLICITY Control, a property
page called Control is displayed in the device properties. Use this property page to
configure and control imports from CIMPLICITY Control for that device.

18-2 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
 Import Options
You can select various options that customize the import of points from Control.
You can customize the following:
Point ID Prefix
The format of a point ID imported from CIMPLICITY Control can take the form
<prefix><PointID>. Use the radio buttons to select the prefix you want to use
for points you are importing.
• Select None if you want no prefix.
• Select Device name to use the device name as the prefix.
• Select Folder name to use the folder name as the prefix.
• Select Custom and enter the character string you want to create a
custom prefix.
The length of a Point ID may be up to 32 characters long in CIMPLICITY HMI.
Therefore, the allowed number of characters in the prefix depends on the number of
characters in the imported Point ID.
• If the Point ID is already greater than 32 characters, no prefix is
inserted and the Point ID is truncated at the end.
• If the Point ID is less than 32 characters long, the maximum number of
characters in the prefix will be:
32 - number of characters in the ID
• If the prefix exceeds this limit for a Point ID, it will be truncated before
it is added to the Point ID.
Add
Select this check box to create new points in the CIMPICITY HMI database. For
each device, any exportable variables from the associated folders that do not exist as
points in the project are created using the variable properties and the common point
properties.
Modify
Select this check box to modify points in the CIMPLICITY HMI database. For each
device, any exportable variables from the associated folders that exist as points in the
project are modified using the variable properties if the existing points belong to the
device. Common properties are also modified if you also set the Use common
point properties on modify check box.
Delete
Select this check box to delete points in the CIMPLICITY HMI database. For each
device, any previously exported point belonging to the device that was not exported
from an associated folder is deleted.
Note
Only previously exported points from existing associations are deleted. Previously
exported points from folder associations that no longer exist are not removed from
the project.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY HMI with CIMPLICITY Control 18-3

 On configuration update
Select this check box to import points for all devices associated with Control folders
during configuration update for those folders that have changed since the last import.
Use common point properties on modify
Select this check box to use common point properties during a modify operation or
keep the common point properties that the point already has in the HMI project.

Common Point Properties

Each point in a CIMPICITY HMI project must be associated with a resource.
CIMPLICITY Control does not have the concept of a resource, therefore you need to
define a common resource that will be used for all data retrieved from CIMPLICITY
Control for this project.
To select a resource, click the drop-down list button in the Resource field and
select the Resource ID you want to use.
To select the type of access you want points to have, click the radio button for Read
only or Read/write. If you select Read only, the HMI project can only read data
from the points. If you select Read/write, the project reads data from and writes
data to the points.
Select the Enable point check box if you want the points you import to be enabled.
If points are enabled, they are scanned and their values are available to HMI
applications.

Actions
Select Import now to perform an exchange of data. The import is performed
regardless of whether it is needed. See Import Rules for a detailed explanation of
how imports are performed.
Select Associate with folders... to associate CIMPLICITY Control folders with
CIMPLICITY HMI devices. When you select this option the CIMPLICITY
Association Server dialog box opens.

18-4 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
 Associating Folders with Devices
When you select Associate with folders... on the Control property page for a
device, the CIMPLICITY Association Server dialog box opens.

This dialog box shows you the current associations and lets you:
• Create new associations
• Edit existing associations
• Delete associations

Creating a New Association

Select New to create a new association. When you do, the New Association dialog
box opens.

Enter the CIMPLICITY HMI project path name in the PROJECT PATH field.
Enter the CIMPLICITY Control folder path name in the FOLDER PATH field.
Enter the CIMPLICITY HMI device name in the DEVICE NAME field.
Remember that a device can have associations with multiple folders, but a folder can
only be associated with one of the project’s devices.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY HMI with CIMPLICITY Control 18-5

 Select OK to add the association to the list of associations. The dialog box closes
and the list in the CIMPLICITY Association Server dialog box updates.

Editing an Association
To edit an association:
1. Select the association in the CIMPLICITY Association Server dialog
box.
2. Select EDIT.
The Edit Association dialog box opens

Use this dialog box to change the project path, folder path, or device name.

Deleting an Association
To edit an association:
1. Select the association in the CIMPLICITY Association Server dialog
box.
2. Select DELETE.
The Delete Association dialog box opens, prompting you to confirm your request.

Select Yes to delete the association, or select No to cancel the delete request.

18-6 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
Import Process
When you select Import now from the Control property page of a supported device
or when you perform a configuration update, the CIMPLICITY Control Point Import
process starts.
During the import process a status dialog box displays and informs you the state of
the import process. This is done to give you positive feedback because the import
process can be quite lengthy.

Import Rules
CIMPLICITY HMI always assumes that the information in a Control folder is the
most up to date. During a configuration update, all devices with Control
configuration that have the On Configuration Update option selected are verified to
see if they need an import. An import is needed for those folders that have changed
since their last import.
There are three categories used to classify points during import:
New A point is considered new if it does not exist in the project.
Modifiable A point is considered modifiable if it exists in the project and it
belongs to the device associated with the folder being imported.
Removable A point is considered removable if it exists in the project and it
belongs to the device associated with the folder being imported but
was not imported during the current import session.
The import process retrieves exportable information from each association and uses
the following algorithm to import the points:
1. If a point is new and the configuration of the device associated with the
folder being imported has the new option selected, it is added into the
project.
Further imports will then consider this point modifiable unless its
device is changed through point configuration.
2. If a point is modifiable and the device configuration has the modify
option selected, the point is modified using the imported information.
If the device configuration has the use common properties on modify
option selected, common properties are also modified. Any other point
property is left intact (for example, alarm, display, engineering units,
etc.)
3. If a point is removable and the device configuration has the delete
option selected, it is deleted from the project.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY HMI with CIMPLICITY Control 18-7

 4. If a point exists in the project but it is a virtual point or does not belong
to the device associated with the folder being imported, a new point
conflict occurs.
5. If the point information imported from Control is incomplete or
incorrect, an incorrect information conflict results for that particular
point.
Please note that the import process only identifies point conflicts between folders and
projects. It does not identify conflicts between folders associated with the same
device.
Example:
A device can be associated with folders A and B. Both folders can contain the same
exportable variables. When the import occurs, the last folder to be imported
modifies the imported information from the previous folder because the points are
considered modifiable since they belong to the same device. To prevent this situation
from happening you can use the folder name prefix option to add a prefix to each
Point ID thus preventing folder to folder conflicts from occurring.

18-8 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
Resolving Point Conflicts
When conflicts occur during import, the CIMPLICITY Control Point Import
Conflicts dialog box opens and displays the list of conflicts.

Two types of conflicts can occur:

• New point conflicts
• Incorrect information conflicts
Note
Conflicts do not need to be resolved in order for the import to continue.
To display the Resolve Conflict dialog box for a point and resolve a point conflict, do
one of the following:
• Double-click on the point in the list.
• Select the point in the list, then select Resolve.
Select OK to import the resolved points.
Select Cancel to cancel the import of resolved points.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY HMI with CIMPLICITY Control 18-9

 New Point Conflicts
A new point conflict occurs when the point exists in the project but does not belong
to the device associated with the folder being imported.

To solve the conflict, you can take one of the following actions:
• Don’t import the point
• Rename it using a Point ID considered new or modifiable.
The action always defaults to Do not import.
Previously imported points with new point conflicts will always have new point
conflicts unless the point is renamed using the CIMPLICITY Control Workbench.

18-10 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
 Incorrect Information Conflict
An incorrect information conflict occurs when the information imported from the
folder is incorrect or incomplete.

To solve the conflict, you can take one of the following actions:
• Don’t import the point.
• Correct the point’s information.
If you rename the point you must use a Point ID considered new or modifiable. The
dialog box ensures that you do so.
The conflict action normally defaults to Do not import. However, for previously
imported points with incorrect information, their last imported information is placed
in the conflict correction dialog and the conflict action defaults to Correct.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY HMI with CIMPLICITY Control 18-11

Remote Configuration
Control configuration options are only supported in the computer where associations
are created. This is because the Association Server’s storage is local to the computer.
In order to perform point imports from remote computers you need to configure
associations properly in each remote computer.
• A project path in an association needs to be the path by which the
project is opened.
For example, if a computer opens a project through HMI as
X:\project\project.gef, the project's associations in that
computer must also be configured as X:\project\project.gef.
If another computer opens the same project as
Y:\project\project.gef, the project's associations in that
computer must be configured as Y:\project\project.gef.
• A folder path in an association needs to be exactly the same for all
computers.
For example, if project.gef has an association with folder
F:\folder\folder.ef7, all computers must have their
associations configured with the same folder path and must be able to
open the folder through that same path as well. This is because the
import process will have to access the folder through the path given by
the association.

Example
For example, given the following two computers:
ComputerA HMI and Control installed
Drive E: mapped to \\ComputerB\C$
Contains C:\project\project.gef
Configured associations:
C:\project\project.gef with
E:\folder\folder.ef7

ComputerB HMI and Control installed

Drive E: mapped to its own C drive (\\ComputerB\C$)
Drive F: mapped to \\ComputerA\C$
Contains C:\folder\folder.ef7
Configured associations:
F:\project\project.gef with
E:\folder\folder.ef7

18-12 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
 You can make HMI changes to the project from either machine because they both
have HMI installed. You can make changes to the folder from either machine
because they both have Control installed.
If you open the project from ComputerA and perform a point import, it will be
performed because the computer has the project’s associations configured.
If you open the project from ComputerB and perform a point import, it will also be
performed because the computer has the project’s associations configured.
Note that if ComputerB had its association configured as follows:
F:\project\project.gef with C:\folder\folder.ef7

the import will be performed but it will end up assuming that the folder is a different
folder.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY HMI with CIMPLICITY Control 18-13

Configuration Import/Export

Introduction
You can use the Import/Export Utility to:
• Write existing CIMPLICITY HMI point data in to a file.
• Create and modify CIMPLICITY HMI point data using third party
software.
• Import point data into CIMPLICITY HMI software to update the
database.
• Update the configuration of multiple points at a time.
• Delete CIMPLICITY HMI point data from CIMPLICITY HMI
software.
You can use the same point information to configure more than one system. For
example, you can use a spreadsheet to create and modify point data, then import the
data into both the CIMPLICITY HMI database and Logicmaster 90 software.
The following is a quick overview of how Import/Export passes data between the
CIMPLICITY HMI point database and third party applications.

Point/Alarm
Third Party Import/Export Configuration
Applications
Files

Import/Export
Configuration
Files

CSV Files in
Log File
SNF format

In addition to reading and writing information in the CIMPLICITY HMI point

database and CSV files, Import/Export uses information in the Import/Export
configuration files to determine default field data, and writes informational, warning,
and error messages to a log file.

GFK-1180 19-1
Import/Export Data File Format
The file and record formats used by the Import/Export Utility give you the ability to
transfer configuration data between the CIMPLICITY HMI point database and third-
party software.
Import/Export reads and writes text files that use the CSV (Comma Separated Value)
format. Each record in a CSV file begins on a new line and continues until the next
newline character is encountered. Each field in a record is separated by a comma.
You can process CIMPLICITY HMI point configuration data in any third-party
application that can read or write files in CSV format.
The CSV files used by Import/Export consist of a number of records. These records
use the SNF (Shared Name File) format. In an SNF file, the first record, called the
Field Names record, lists of the names of all the variables contained in each
subsequent record.
In addition, the SNF format used by Import/Export has the following conventions:
• For import, if a field is empty, and the point already exists, the current
value of the field is preserved.
• For import, if a field is empty, the point is a new point and a default is
defined in ie_deflds.cfg, the default is entered in the field in the
database.
• Comment lines are indicated by two pound signs at the beginning of the
line.
• The field names must be from the list of supported fields and are
case-insensitive. Any invalid fields will be identified as an error and
ignored.

Sample Data File

An example of a CSV file in SNF format follows. This file modifies the alarm limits
of a subset of device points. These points are assumed to already be configured in
the CIMPLICITY HMI database.

## Shared Name File Ver. 1. 0

## File created by: GE FANUC -- CIMPLICITY Ver. 3. 5
## File created at: 09:05:30 on 6/22/1993
##
} Header

}
PT_ID,PT_ORIGIN,DEVICE_ID,PT_TYPE,RAW_LIM_LOW,
RAW_LIM_HIGH,ALM_HIGH_1,ALM_HIGH_2,ALM_LOW_1,
ALM_LOW_2,DESC Field Names**
##

}
PT1,D,DEV_1,ANALOG_16,0,1000,800,950,100,5,Example 1
PD2,D,DEV_1,ANALOG_8,0,100,80,90,10,5,”Double””quotes”” ”
PT3,D,DEV_2,FLOATING,0.0,0.58,0.45,0.50,0.20,0.10,#3
PT4,D,DEV_2,ANALOG_8,0,120,100,110,20,10,”Comma, example” Records
PT5,D,DEV_2,FLOATING,1.0,2.5,2.0,2.3,1.4,1.2,” Spaces”

** FIELD NAMES is a physical record consisting of a single line. It is shown here

as multiple lines for readability within the documentation.

19-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Editing CSV Files in Notepad
When using Notepad to edit a CSV file, keep the following guidelines in mind:
• If you want to enter a blank character field, use " " (a double-quote,
followed by any number of spaces, followed by a double-quote) for the
field entry.
• If you want initial blanks at the start of the field, enclose the field
(including the blanks) in double quotes. For example:
...," Initial blanks",...

• You must enclose between double quotes any fields that contain a
comma as part of the data. For example:
...,"Comma, example",...

• You must enter two double quotes if you want a double quote to be part
of a data string. For example
...,"Quotes ""example"" ",...

Editing CSV Files in Excel

When using Excel to edit a CSV file, keep the following guidelines in mind:
• If you want to enter a blank character field, use " " (a double-quote,
followed by any number of spaces, followed by a double-quote) for the
field entry.
• Initial blanks at the start of a field are ignored. If you want initial
blanks, you must edit the file with Notepad and enclose the field in
double quotes.
• A field that contains a comma does not need to be enclosed in double
quotes. For example:

• You do not need to enter two double quotes if you want a double quote
to be a part of a data string. For example:

GFK-1180 Configuration Import/Export 19-3

Import/Export Configuration Files
There are two configuration files in your project data directory that are read by
Import/Export when it starts up:
• The ie_deflds.cfg file contains import field defaults.
• The ie_formats.cfg file contains export field formats.
You may modify these configuration files through any text editor, independent of
Import/Export.

Import Field Defaults (ie_deflds.cfg)

The ie_deflds.cfg file in your project’s data directory contains information
about default values that Import/Export will assign to point configuration fields when
importing data for new points. This file is a CSV file that uses the SNF format.
An initial version of ie_deflds.cfg is included in your software distribution,
and looks like this:
## Shared Name File
## CIMPLICITY IMPORT/EXPORT -- Default Points Configuration
##
PT_ID, PT_ORIGIN, PT_TYPE, ACCESS, ADDR_TYPE, ALM_CRITERIA,
ALM_ROUTE_OPER, ALM_ROUTE_SYSMGR, ALM_ROUTE_USER, ALM_TYPE,
ANALOG_DEADBAND, CALC_TYPE, CONV_TYPE, ELEMENTS, JUSTIFICATION,
LOCAL, POLL_AFTER_SET, PT_ENABLED, RESET_ALLOWED, SAMPLE_INTV,
SAMPLE_INTV_UNIT, SCAN_RATE, UPDATE_CRITERIA, VARIANCE_VAL, VARS
##
IE_DEV_ANALOG,D,INT,R,FQ,ABS,0,0,0,,0,,NO,1,LEFT,,0,1,0,0,SEC,1,OC,,1
##
IE_DEV_DIGITAL,D,BOOL,R,FQ,,0,0,0,AL,,,,1,LEFT,,0,1,0,0,SEC,1,OC,,1
##
IE_DEV_TEXT,D,STRING,R,FQ,,0,0,0,,,,,1,LEFT,,0,1,0,0,SEC,1,OC,,1
##
IE_VIRT_ANALOG,G,INT,RW,,ABS,0,0,0,,,EQU,,1,LEFT,0,,1,0,0,SEC,,,0,1
##
IE_VIRT_DIGITAL,G,BOOL,RW,,,0,0,0,AL,,EQU,,1,LEFT,0,,1,0,0,SEC,,,0,1
##
IE_VIRT_TEXT,G,STRING,RW,,,0,0,0,,,EQU,,1,LEFT,0,,1,0,0,SEC,,,0,1
##

The ie_deflds.cfg file defines default values for selected fields based on point
of origin and point type. You may configure default information for analog, digital
and text point types for both device and virtual (derived) points.
Important

Do not change information in the PT_ID, PT_ORIGIN, or PT_TYPE fields

of records in this file.

When you import data into the CIMPLICITY HMI point configuration, any fields in
an import record that do not contain data, and that correspond to default fields in
ie_deflds.cfg, will have their values set to the default values contained in
ie_deflds.cfg. For example, if a new digital device point is being imported,
and the ACCESS field in the import file is left blank, the import function will
substitute the default ACCESS value used for IE_DEV_DIGITAL.

19-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180

The internal format contains
all the fields in the Full Set
plus additional unsupported
fields.
GFK-1180
Changing Information in ie_deflds.cfg
Default values are particularly useful if you frequently import points with similar
data. This data can be put in ie_deflds.cfg rather than putting it in every
import file.
You can modify the fields in ie_deflds.cfg with a text editor.
You may change the values for any fields in the data records of ie_deflds.cfg,
except the PT_ID, PT_ORIGIN and PT_TYPE fields.
You may add new default fields to this file. When you add a new field, perform the
following steps:
1. Type a comma at the end of the Field Name list, and add the field name.
2. Type a comma at the end of each data record in the file, and add the
field value. If the field is empty, just type a comma.
Export Field Formats (ie_formats.cfg)
The ie_formats.cfg file in your project data directory defines the Field Names
records you will be using to generate export files. This file is a CSV file that uses the
SNF format. The first field in each record is the name of the format, and the
remaining fields are the field names to be exported when that format is specified.
An initial version of ie_formats.cfg is included in your software distribution,
and looks like this:
##
## CIMPLICITY IMPORT/EXPORT -- Export Format Configuration
##
Full Set, PT_ID, ACCESS, ACK_TIMEOUT, ADDR, ADDR_OFFSET, ADDR_TYPE,
ALM_CLASS, ALM_CRITERIA, ALM_DEADBAND, ALM_DELAY, ALM_HIGH_1,
ALM_HIGH_2, ALM_HLP_FILE, ALM_LOW_1, ALM_LOW_2, ALM_MSG,
ALM_ROUTE_OPER, ALM_ROUTE_SYSMGR, ALM_ROUTE_USER, ALM_STR,
ALM_TYPE, ANALOG_DEADBAND, CALC_TYPE, CONV_LIM_HIGH, CONV_LIM_LOW,
CONV_TYPE, DELETE_REQ, DESC, DEVIATION_PT, DEVICE_ID, DISP_LIM_HIGH,
DISP_LIM_LOW, DISP_WIDTH, ELEMENTS, ENG_UNITS, EQUATION, FW_CONV_EQ,
GR_SCREEN, INIT_VAL, JUSTIFICATION, LOCAL, MAX_STACKED,
POLL_AFTER_SET, PRECISION, PROC_ID, PTMGMT_PROC_ID, PT_ENABLED,
PT_ORIGIN, PT_SET_INTERVAL, PT_SET_TIME, PT_TYPE, RAW_LIM_HIGH,
RAW_LIM_LOW, REP_TIMEOUT, RESET_ALLOWED, RESET_COND, RESET_PT,
RESET_TIMEOUT, RESOURCE_ID, REV_CONV_EQ, ROLLOVER_VAL, SAFETY_PT,
SAMPLE_INTV, SAMPLE_INTV_UNIT, SCAN_RATE, SRC_PT_ID1, SRC_PT_ID2,
TRIG_PT, TRIG_REL, TRIG_VAL, UPDATE_CRITERIA, VARIANCE_VAL, VARS
##
Logicmaster Export, PT_ID, ADDR, DESC, PT_TYPE
##
The default file contains two formats: Full Set and Logicmaster Export.
• The Full Set format contains all fields supported by Import/Export.
• The Logicmaster Export format contains the four fields of interest to the
Logicmaster 90 (LM90).
Select one of the formats in this file when you export data. If you do not select a
format, an internal format is used.
Configuration Import/Export 19-5
 Changing Information in ie_formats.cfg
You can modify a current format or add additional export formats to
ie_formats.cfg with a text editor.
To add a new default format to the file:
1. Add a new line to the file.
2. Enter the name of the new format, followed by a comma. Make sure
that the format name is unique.
3. Enter the list of field names that you want to export. Use a comma to
separate the names.
Do not modify the Full Set or You can modify an existing format by either adding or deleting field names from its
Logicmaster Export definition record.
definitions.

Import/Export Log File

Any errors or warnings incurred by Import/Export will be logged to a file in the
directory pointed to by the logical LOG_PATH, which is typically your project’s log
subdirectory.
After importing or exporting data, check the Import/Export Log file for errors. Since
it is an ASCII file, you can use any available text editor to read it. The messages are
self-explanatory, but if you need further information, be sure to check the Status Log
file.

Import/Export Log File Name

The name of the log file is based on the current PRCNAM. The PRCNAM
environment variable must be set. If you do not set the environment variable, you
will get an error message and the utility will exit.
The file will be named IE<prcnam>.log, where <prcnam> is the value assigned
to PRCNAM. Only one user at a time may run with the same PRCNAM, so each
PRCNAM has its own log file. Each time a new session of Import/Export begins, the
log file (IE<prcnam>.log or the default IElog.log) is closed and a new one is
started. The log file is in the directory specified by the logical, LOG_PATH.

Import/Export Log File Format

Every message written to the log file is timestamped and includes the type of message
(error, warning or informational). The date is shown in the first message of the file
and the time appears on each message.
For example, you may see messages that look like the following:
08:30:14 INFO: Starting application Mar 11 1994.
08:38:15 Warning: Length of point ‘GEF_DEMO_REAL_REAL_LONG_NAME’ with
prefix xxxxxxxx is too long - truncated
10:29:53 ERROR: No DEVICE_ID specified for device Point ‘DEMO_COS’

19-6 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 In the above example:
• The INFO message tells you when the application (in this case, import)
started.
Point IDs may have up to 32 • The WARNING message tells you that the prefix that you are adding to
characters the beginning of each Point ID will cause the identified Point ID to be
truncated. For example, GEF_DEMO_REAL_REAL_LONG_NAME
will be truncated to
XXXXXXXX_GEF_DEMO_REAL_REAL_LONG.
• The ERROR message tells you that you do not have a DEVICE_ID for
a given point. This is categorized as an error, because this point data
will not be imported unless you add a Device ID.

Importing Configuration Data

Through a PLC programming application or third party software package, you can
create a SNF format file containing point configuration data. Since only a subset of
CIMPLICITY HMI point fields may be contained in the file, you may also need to
modify the ie_deflds.cfg file to specify default values for additional fields.
Once you have configured the ie_deflds.cfg file and created the SNF format
import file, you are ready to use Import/Export to import your configuration data into
the CIMPLICITY HMI point database. When you import the data, you can also
specify filter criteria to be applied to points in the file.
The import function will process each record in the input file. If it finds an invalid
data field, it discards the record and reports the error to a log file, and then continues
processing with the next record in the file.
Any data that exceeds the maximum length of the field it is being imported into is
truncated. This truncation is reported as a warning and does not keep the record from
being imported, unless the resulting truncated data is invalid.

Import Procedure
To import data, do the following:
1. Log in and start up a command shell in the project where you want to
import data.
2. At the system prompt, invoke the following command:
$ clie import <file> [-D <device_id>] [-R <resource_id>]
[-Pa <prefix>] [-y]
where:
<file> is a required argument, and is the full path of import file to be read. The
file may be in any directory, but the project’s data subdirectory is recommended.
You should always use the .csv extension with this filename.

GFK-1180 Configuration Import/Export 19-7

Option names are case The optional arguments for the import command are:
sensitive and must be entered
as defined.
Argument Description
-D <device_id> A valid Device ID in the CIMPLICITY HMI database.
For each device point in the import file that does not have
a Device ID, add the Device ID indicated by this
argument.
If no Device IDs are specified in the import file, this
option will set all device points in the import file to the
specified Device ID.
This option will not override Device IDs already present
in the import file. Those IDs will remain unchanged.
-R <resource_id> A valid Resource ID in the CIMPLICITY HMI database.
For each Point ID in the import file that does not have a
Resource ID, add the Resource ID indicated by this
argument.
If no Resource IDs are specified in the import file, this
option will set all points in the import file to the specified
Resource ID.
This option will not override Resource IDs already
present in the import file. Those IDs will remain
unchanged.
-Pa <prefix> Add prefix_ to the start of each Point ID in the input
file.
-y Perform the import in dynamic mode if the project is
running. Allows you to import point information without
restarting the project.
For example:
clie import myfile.csv -R RESOURCE1
imports the point data from MYFILE.CSV and use RESOURCE1 as the Resource ID
for any records that do not have a Resource ID defined.

Importing in Dynamic Mode

Dynamic mode import lets you import point information without shutting down and
restarting a project. To perform an import in dynamic mode you must use the
command line option –y as described in the following example:
clie import myfile.csv -y
The CIMPLICITY Login dialog box will ask you to log into the project if you have
not done so.
If you attempt a dynamic import while the project is not running, the import will
continue in static mode and display the following warning message:
Project must be running to use dynamic configuration.

19-8 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Importing Additional Roles
The format of the standard import file will only let you import point alarm routing
information for the SYSMGR, USER, and OPER roles. If you need to route point
alarms to other roles, and you want to import this information:
1. Create a second file called <filename>.rol where <filename>
is the same as the CSV file.
2. Add one line in <filename>.rol for each point that you are routing
to roles other than SYSMGR, USER, or OPER. The format of the line
will be the Point ID followed by a list of roles. Separate each field with
a comma.
3. Run the Import utility as usual. The utility will automatically search for
a .rol file whose name matches that of the .csv file, and process the
additional role information.
The following is an example of a .rol file:
## Point Role File Ver. 1.1
## File created by: GE Fanuc -- CIMPLICITY Ver. 1.0
## File created at: 15:33:35 on 6/21/95
##
TEST_ANALOG,DOER,FIXER
TEST_DIGITAL,FIXER

GFK-1180 Configuration Import/Export 19-9

Exporting Configuration Data
Option names are case
sensitive and must be entered
as defined.
19-10
When exporting data, you must first determine which points to export and what file
to export them to. You can also specify filter criteria from which a list of points is
created.
You can define formats in ie_formats.cfg and identify which fields to export to
a file. Therefore, it is not necessary to export all the possible fields in every file.
The list of points is automatically exported to the file you specify. You can then edit
the file with a spreadsheet program, simple text editor, etc. After modifying the data,
you can use the Import/Export Utility to import the data back into the CIMPLICITY
HMI point database.
Export Procedure
To export configuration data, do the following:
1. Log in and start a command shell in the project from which you want to
export data.
2. At the system prompt, invoke the following command:
$ clie export <file> [-Pr] [-Ef <format>]
[-Sp<point_id>] [-Sd <device_id>] [-So <origin_id>]
[-St <type>] [-Sr <resource_id>]
where:
<file> is a required argument, and is the full path of export file to be written. The
file may be in any directory, but the project’s data subdirectory is recommended.
You should always use the .csv extension with this filename.
The optional arguments for the export command are:
Argument Description
-Pr Remove all prefixes from Point IDs (up to and including
the underscore), before exporting.
-Ef <format> The type of file format to use.
Specify one of the formats, found in the project’s
ie_formats.cfg format configuration file.
Default formats in the file are:
”Full Set” - all supported fields will be exported
”Logicmaster Export” - only 4 fields will be
exported.
If no format name is specified, the internal format is
used. This format includes all of the fields in the Full
Set, plus additional unsupported fields.
CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 -Sp <point_id> A full or partial Point ID.
Export data for Point IDs that match the string you
specify.
-Sd <device_id> A full or partial Device ID. You can use the * and ?
wildcard characters when specifying a partial Device ID.
Export data for Point IDs whose Device IDs match the
string you specify.
-So <origin_id> Export data for Point IDs whose Origin IDs match the
string you specify. Specify one of the following:
D - device point
G - global virtual point
R - derived virtual point
-St <type> A full or partial Point Type in the CIMPLICITY
database. You can use the * and ? wildcard characters
when specifying a partial Point Type.
Export data for Point IDs whose Point Types match the
string you specify.
-Sr <resource_id> A full or partial Resource ID. You can use the * and ?
wildcard characters when specifying a partial Resource
ID.
Export data for Point IDs whose Resource IDs match the
string you specify.
Two export files will be generated by the Export utility: <filename>.csv and
<filename>.rol. The .rol file will contain information on additional roles
configured for alarm routing. If there are no roles other than SYSMGR, USER and
OPER, the file will still be generated, but will contain no information.
For example:
clie export myfile.csv -Pr -Ef "My Set"
exports the data fields defined by "My Set" in ie_formats.cfg to MYFILE.CSV
and MYFILE.ROL, and strip off any prefixes on the Point IDs.

Specifying Wildcard Characters for Export

You can use the following wildcards:
* Use this wildcard to search for any number of characters at this point in the
string. For example, if you want to display a list of resources that start with
"M" and end with "X", enter M*X in the Resource ID field.
? Use this wildcard to search for any character in this place in the string. For
example, if you want to display the list of resources whose names are three
characters long, and whose first character is "M" and third character is "X",
enter M?X in the Resource ID field.
Note

There are no implied wildcards. If you do not include or terminate your search string
with an asterisk, only those items that match your request exactly will be returned.

GFK-1180 Configuration Import/Export 19-11

Deleting Configuration Data
You can use the clie utility to delete point information from the CIMPLICITY
HMI database.
To delete CIMPLICITY HMI point data, do the following:
1. Start a command shell in the project from which you want to export
data.
2. At the system prompt, invoke the following command:
$ clie delete <point_id> [/NOCONFIRM]
where:
<point_id> is the Point ID you want to delete. You can use the wildcard
characters, ? and *, to delete sets of Point IDs.
The optional argument for the delete command is:
Argument Description
/NOCONFIRM Deletes the requested points without prompting you to confirm
the deletion.
If you choose to confirm the deletion, you are prompted like this:
> clie delete D?I*
Starting Import/Export - logging to LOG_PATH:IC169.log

Do you want to DELETE <DRIVE_CONVEY1>

(Y)es (N)o (A)ll
y
Do you want to DELETE <DRIVE_CONVEY2>
n
Number of points Deleted = 1
Successful completion - Review LOG_PATH:IC169.log log file for
messages.

>

Specifying Wildcards for Delete

You can use the wildcards as follows:
* Use this wildcard to search for any number of characters at this point in the
string. For example, if you want to delete all points that start with "M" and
end with "X", enter M*X in the <point_id> field.
? Use this wildcard to search for any character in this place in the string. For
example, if you want to delete all points whose names are three characters
long and whose first character is "M" and third character is "X", enter M?X
in the <point_id> field.
Note

There are no implied wildcards. If you do not include or terminate your Point ID
string with an asterisk, only those Point Ids that match your request exactly will be
deleted.

19-12 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Import/Export Field Names
The field names used by the Import/Export Utility correspond to a set of fields in the
CIMPLICITY HMI point and alarm configuration files. Each field has certain
requirements that must be met for information in that field to successfully be
imported into the CIMPLICITY HMI point database.
The next two sections give you detailed information about the field names used by
Import/Export.

Required Fields
The PT_ID field is required in every file. This should preferably be the first field in
the record.
Here is some more detailed information about the field:
Maximum Field Length 32 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Point ID
Description Unique name for a point

Optional Fields
Any of the fields listed below may be specified in a data file for Import/Export.
None are absolutely required, but, when specifying new points to be imported into
the CIMPLICITY database, certain fields may be required.
Points are device points, derived points, or global points.
• A device point gets its data directly from a device or PLC.
• A derived point gets its data from an equation, and cannot be set with a
setpoint.
• A global point can be updated either by an application or through
standard setpoint functions. An equation cannot be specified when the
point is defined.
Some of the optional fields are specific to points of a particular origin. The Point
Origin column identifies the type of point defined by the record. The point types
are:
A= All G= Global (virtual)
D= Device R= Derived (virtual)
All field names and enumerated data are case-insensitive.

GFK-1180 Configuration Import/Export 19-13

 The optional field names are:

ACCESS BFR_EVENT_UNITS PT_ENABLED

ACCESS_FILTER BFR_GATE_COND PT_ORIGIN
ACK_TIMEOUT BFR_SYNC_TIME PT_SET_INTERVAL
ADDR CALC_TYPE PT_SET_TIME
ADDR_OFFSET CONV_LIM_HIGH PT_TYPE
ADDR_TYPE CONV_LIM_LOW RAW_LIM_HIGH
ALM_CLASS CONV_TYPE RAW_LIM_LOW
ALM_CRITERIA DELETE_REQ REP_TIMEOUT
ALM_DEADBAND DESC RESET_ALLOWED
ALM_DELAY DEVIATION_PT RESET_COND
ALM_HIGH_1 DEVICE_ID RESET_PT
ALM_HIGH_2 DISP_LIM_HIGH RESET_TIMEOUT
ALM_HLP_FILE DISP_LIM_LOW RESOURCE_ID
ALM_LOW_1 DISP_WIDTH REV_CONV_EQ
ALM_LOW_2 ELEMENTS ROLLOVER_VAL
ALM_MSG ENG_UNITS SAFETY_PT
ALM_ROUTE_OPER EQUATION SAMPLE_INTV
ALM_ROUTE_SYSMGR FW_CONV_EQ SAMPLE_INTV_UNIT
ALM_ROUTE_USER GR_SCREEN SCAN_RATE
ALM_STR INIT_VAL TRIG_CK_PT
ALM_TYPE JUSTIFICATION TRIG_PT
ANALOG_DEADBAND LOCAL TRIG_REL
BFR_COUNT MAX_STACKED TRIG_VAL
BFR_DUR POLL_AFTER_SET UPDATE_CRITERIA
BFR_EVENT_PERIOD PRECISION VARIANCE_VAL
BFR_EVENT_PT_ID PROC_ID VARS
BFR_EVENT_TYPE PTMGMT_PROC_ID

19-14 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 ACCESS
Point Type D
Maximum Field Length 2 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Access
Description Device read/write access. Valid values are:
R = Read only
W = Read/Write

ACCESS_FILTER
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Byte
CIMPLICITY Field Name Enterprise Point
Description Indicates whether the Enterprise Server has access
to the point. Valid values are:
E = Enterprise Server can access
B or blank = Enterprise Server cannot access

ACK_TIMEOUT
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Acknowledge Timeout
Description Time in minutes before the point’s alarm is
automatically acknowledged. Valid values are:
-1 = No auto acknowledge
0 = Acknowledge immediately
>0 = Minutes to wait for automatic acknowledge

ADDR
Point Type D
Maximum Field Length 32 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Memory Type or Address
Description Actual address of the point within the device. For
devices with memory types, this field contains the
memory type. Otherwise, the actual point address is
used.

GFK-1180 Configuration Import/Export 19-15

 ADDR_OFFSET
Point Type D
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Address Offset
Description Offset in memory from the first bit of the Point
address. For Analog, APPL, and Text point types,
this field must be zero.

ADDR_TYPE
Point Type D
Maximum Field Length 2 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Address Type
Description For MMS Ethernet devices only. The type of
address. Valid values are:
VN = Variable Name
FQ = Fully qualified
LG = Logical
UC = Unconstrained
AI = Array Index
SI = String Index

ALM_CLASS
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length 5 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Alarm Class
Description The Alarm Class ID to be used for the point’s
alarms. The Alarm Class ID must already be
defined in the CIMPLICITY database.

ALM_CRITERIA
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length 3 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Alarm Criteria
Description Method to be used for evaluating alarm conditions.
Valid options are:
ABS = Absolute
DEV = Deviation
ROC = Rate of Change
ONU = On Update

19-16 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 ALM_DEADBAND
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Alarm Deadband
Description Tolerance around alarm limits. The range is
determined by the PT_TYPE defined for the point.

ALM_DELAY
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Delay Alarms
Description Determine if the generation of alarms by the point
should be delayed. Valid values are:
0 = Alarms are not delayed
1 = Alarms are delayed by the length of time
specified by PT_SET_INIT and PT_SET_TIME.

ALM_HIGH_1
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Warning High
Description High warning limit

ALM_HIGH_2
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Alarm High
Description High alarm limit

ALM_HLP_FILE
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length 10 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Help File
Description Name of the help text file. ".HLP" will be added to
the name. Help files are located in
%SITE_ROOT%\am_help

GFK-1180 Configuration Import/Export 19-17

 ALM_LOW_1
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Warning Low
Description Low warning limit

ALM_LOW_2
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Alarm Low
Description Low alarm limit

ALM_MSG
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length 54 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Alarm message
Description Text displayed when the alarm is set. See Alarm
Message Variables for the list of variable
information that can be used in the text.

ALM_ROUTE_OPER
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Boolean
CIMPLICITY Field Name Alarm Routing: OPER
Description Determines if alarm information is sent to users with
OPER role. Valid values are:
0 = Do not sent alarm to OPER role
1 = OPER role can display the alarm.

ALM_ROUTE_SYSMGR
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Boolean
CIMPLICITY Field Name Alarm Routing: SYSMGR
Description Determines if alarm information is sent to users with
SYSMGR role. Valid values are:
0 = Do not sent alarm to SYSMGR role
1 = SYSMGR role can display the alarm.

19-18 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 ALM_ROUTE_USER
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Boolean
CIMPLICITY Field Name Alarm Routing: USER
Description Determines if alarm information is sent to users with
USER role. Valid values are:
0 = Do not sent alarm to USER role
1 = USER role can display the alarm.

ALM_STR
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Alarm String Index
Description Alarm string index to be applied for alarms. Must
be a valid index.

ALM_TYPE
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length 2 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Alarm Type
Description Determines which log is written to. Valid values
are:
AL = Alarm Log
EV = Event Log

ANALOG_DEADBAND
Point Type D
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Analog Deadband
Description Used to filter changes in raw value of point. The
raw value must change at least this much to update
the value of the point.

BFR_COUNT
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Point Buffering Max Count
Description The maximum number of point values to buffer for
Trending. If left zero, then the number of values is
not used as a limiting factor when buffering data.

GFK-1180 Configuration Import/Export 19-19

 BFR_DUR
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Point Buffering Max Duration
Description The longest time between the first value and last
value buffered for Trending. If left zero, then
duration is not used as a limiting factor when
buffering data.

BFR_EVENT_PERIOD
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name
Description Not currently implemented

BFR_EVENT_PT_ID
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name
Description Not currently implemented.

BFR_EVENT_TYPE
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name
Description Not currently implemented.

BFR_EVENT_UNITS
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name
Description Not currently implemented.

BFR_GATE_COND
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name
Description Not currently implemented.

19-20 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 BFR_SYNC_TIME
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name
Description Not currently implemented.

CALC_TYPE
Point Type R
Maximum Field Length 3 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Calc Types
Description Method for determining the derived point value.
Valid values are:
EQU = Equation
DAC = Delta Accumulator
VAC = Value Accumulator
AVG = Average
MAX = Maximum
MIN = Minimum
T_C = Timer/Counter
HST = Histogram
T_H = Transition High Accumulator
EWO = Equation with Override

CONV_LIM_HIGH
Point Type D
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Conv Limit (hi)
Description Maximum limit for linear conversion.

CONV_LIM_LOW
Point Type D
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Conv Limit (lo)
Description Minimum limit for linear conversion.

GFK-1180 Configuration Import/Export 19-21

 CONV_TYPE
Point Type D
Maximum Field Length 2 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Conversion Type
Description Point EU conversion type. Valid values are:
NO = None
LC = Linear conversion
CS = Custom conversion

DELETE_REQ
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length 2 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Deletion Requirement
Description Determines when alarm occurrence should be
deleted. Valid values are:
A = Acknowledge only
R = Reset only
AR = Acknowledge and Reset

DESC
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length 40 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Description
Description Description of point

DEVIATION_PT
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length 32 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Deviation Point
Description Point that current point will be compared to when
checking for deviation alarm. Must be a configured
Point ID.

DEVICE_ID
Point Type D
Maximum Field Length 32 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Device ID
Description Device where the point data originates. Must be a
configured Device ID.

19-22 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 DISP_LIM_HIGH
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Disp. Limit (hi)
Description Largest value to display in CimView screens.

DISP_LIM_LOW
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Disp. Limit (low)
Description Smallest value to display in CimView screens.

DISP_WIDTH
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Display Width
Description Number of spaces for display of point value in
CimView.

ELEMENTS
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Elements
Description Number of discrete elements in the point’s data
array. This is determined by the point’s configured
data type.

ENG_UNITS
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length 8 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Eng. Units
Description Units that the data represents.

GFK-1180 Configuration Import/Export 19-23

 EQUATION
Point Type R
Maximum Field Length 72 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Equation
Description Specifies how the value is calculated.
If CALC_TYPE is DAC, VAC, AVG, MAX, or
MIN, this field must contain the source Point ID.
If CALC_TYPE is EQU, enter a mathematical
formula, the result of which is the value of this
point. See Equation Operations for the list of valid
operators.

FW_CONV_EQ
Point Type D
Maximum Field Length 72 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Eng. Conversion Expression
Description Arithmetic expression used to convert raw data to
engineering units value. See Equation Operations
for the list of valid operators.

GR_SCREEN
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length 16 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Graphic Screen
Description CimView screen to display when the Get Screen
Hot Key is pressed for this point on the Point List or
Alarm Page.

INIT_VAL
Point Type R/G
Maximum Field Length Number
CIMPLICITY Field Name Initial Value
Description Value for point at initialization before any data is
generated by its component point(s). Use if
PT_TYPE is G, or PT_TYPE is D and
CALC_TYPE is ACC, MIN, or MAX.

19-24 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 JUSTIFICATION
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Boolean
CIMPLICITY Field Name Justification
Description Determines if the value displayed is justified and/or
padded with zeros. Valid values are:
0 = Left justified
1 = Right justified
2 = Right justified with leading zeros

LOCAL
Point Type R/G
Maximum Field Length Boolean
CIMPLICITY Field Name Local Value
Description Determines if value is reported to Point Manager.
Valid values are:
0 = Report value
1 = Do not report value

MAX_STACKED
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Max Number Stacked
Description Maximum number of alarm occurrences tracked.
Valid values are:
0 = Alarm is not stacked
1 to 19 = Number of alarms stacked

POLL_AFTER_SET
Point Type D
Maximum Field Length Boolean
CIMPLICITY Field Name Poll After Set
Description Determines if polling should be done after a
setpoint. Valid values are:
0 = Do not poll (default)
1 = Scan immediately

GFK-1180 Configuration Import/Export 19-25

 PRECISION
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Precision
Description Number of decimal places in display.

PROC_ID
Point Type R/G
Maximum Field Length 14 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Virtual Proc ID
Description The Derived Point process that will calculate the
value of this point. Must be a valid PTDP_RP
Process ID. Format is:
<node_id>_PTDP_RP

PTMGMT_PROC_ID
Point Type R/G
Maximum Field Length 14 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Point Manager
Description The Point Management process that will manage
this point. Must be a valid PTM_RP Process ID.
Format is:
<node_id>_PTM<n>_RP

PT_ENABLED
Point Type D
Maximum Field Length Boolean
CIMPLICITY Field Name Enabled
Description Determines if the point is enabled or disabled.
Valid values are:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled

19-26 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 PT_ORIGIN
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length 1 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name No field defined
Description Code indicating the origin of this point. Valid
values are:
D = Device Point
R = Derived Virtual Point
G = Global Virtual Point
I = Device Internal Point
A = Device Always Poll Point

PT_SET_INTERVAL
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Alarm Delay Interval (value)
For Rate of Change alarms, the frequency with
Description
which the point will be sampled for Rate of Change
alarming.
For Absolute alarms, the length of delay before the
alarm is reported if Delay Alarms is set to "Y".

PT_SET_TIME
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length 3 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Alarm Delay Interval (units)
Description The type of units for PT_SET_INTERVAL. Valid
values are:
SEC = Seconds
MIN = Minutes
HR = Hours

PT_TYPE
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length 16 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Type
Description Identifies type and length of point data. Must be a
configured point type.

GFK-1180 Configuration Import/Export 19-27

 RAW_LIM_HIGH
Point Type D
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Raw Limit (hi)
Description The maximum data value expected from the device
for this point.

RAW_LIM_LOW
Point Type D
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Raw Limit (low)
Description The minimum data value expected from the device
for this point.

REP_TIMEOUT
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Repeat Timeout
Description Time in minutes before the point’s alarm is
automatically re-sent to alarm line printers. The
alarm will be re-sent only if it is still active. Valid
values are:
-1 = No automatic re-send
>0 = Minutes before automatic re-send

RESET_ALLOWED
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Boolean
CIMPLICITY Field Name Reset Allowed
Description Determines if a user can reset the point’s alarm.
Valid values are:
0 = User cannot reset the alarm
1 = User can reset the alarm

19-28 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 RESET_COND
Point Type R/G
Maximum Field Length 2 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Reset/Startup Cond
Description Search sequence for source of initial value. Valid
values are:
UN = Unavailable
IN = Use INIT_VAL
SA = Use saved value
SI = Saved and init

RESET_PT
Point Type R/G
Maximum Field Length 32 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Reset Point
Description Point that will cause this derived point to reset.
Must be a configured Point ID.

RESET_TIMEOUT
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Reset Timeout
Description Time in minutes before this point’s alarm is
automatically reset. Valid values are:
-1 = No automatic reset
0 = Reset automatically
>0 = Minutes before automatic reset

RESOURCE_ID
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length 16 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Resource ID
Description Resource ID for this point. Must be a configured
Resource ID.

GFK-1180 Configuration Import/Export 19-29

 REV_CONV_EQ
Point Type D
Maximum Field Length 72 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Reverse Engineering Expression
Description Arithmetic expression used to convert engineering
units value to raw data for setpoints. See Equation
Operations for the list of valid operators.

ROLLOVER_VAL
Point Type R
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Rollover
Description For Delta Accumulator virtual points, the value of a
point at which it rolls over to a zero value when
incremented by one unit.

SAFETY_PT
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length 32 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Safety Point
Description Point ID of an analog or digital point to be checked
when a setpoint request is made for this point. If the
point evaluates to zero (0), the setpoint is denied.
Must be a configured Point ID.

SAMPLE_INTV
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Number
CIMPLICITY Field Name ROC (value)
Description Size of rate of change interval expressed in
SAMPLE_INTV_UNIT units.

SAMPLE_INTV_UNIT
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length 3 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name ROC (units)
Description The type of units for SAMPLE_INTV. Valid
values are:
SEC = Seconds
MIN = Minutes
HR = Hours

19-30 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 SCAN_RATE
Point Type D
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Scan Rate
Description Frequency of point sampling. This is a multiple of
the base scan rate set for the system.

TRIG_CK_PT
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length 32 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Availability Trigger
Description The point serving as the availability trigger for this
point.
If the Availability Trigger is TRUE (non-zero) this
point value is available.
If the Availability Trigger is FALSE (zero), this
point value is unavailable.

TRIG_PT
Point Type D/R
Maximum Field Length 32 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Trigger
Description The point serving as the trigger for this point. Use
differs if device or derived point. Must be a
configured Point ID.
For device points the trigger point must be on the
same device as the points it triggers.
For derived points, the trigger point must be
processed by the same Derived Point Process as the
points it triggers.

GFK-1180 Configuration Import/Export 19-31

 TRIG_REL
Point Type D
Maximum Field Length 2 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Relation
Description Determines how the trigger is evaluated. Valid
values are:
NO = No Trigger
OC = On Change
EQ = Equal
LT = Less Than
GT = Greater Than
LE = Less Than or Equal
GE = Greater Than or Equal

TRIG_VAL
Point Type D
Maximum Field Length 16 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Value
Description Value the trigger is compared with to determine if
the TRIG_REL condition is met.

UPDATE_CRITERIA
Point Type D
Maximum Field Length 2 characters
CIMPLICITY Field Name Update Criteria
Description Value determining when point data is passed to the
CIMPLICITY point database after the device is
read. Valid values are:
UN = Unsolicited
OC = On Change
OS = On Scan
DS = On Demand On Scan
DC = On Demand On Change
PO = Poll Once

VARIANCE_VAL
Point Type R/G
Maximum Field Length Number
CIMPLICITY Field Name Variance value
Description Accumulator variance value.

19-32 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 VARS
Point Type A
Maximum Field Length Integer
CIMPLICITY Field Name Vars
Description Number of process variables represented by this
point.

Logicmaster 90 Support

Supported Field Names

Logicmaster fields map to the following field names in the Shared Name File:
Logicmaster Field Field Name
reference † ADDR
nickname PT_ID
description DESC
length ELEMENTS
type ‡ PT_TYPE
† blockname => add to ADDR string (for example: %Lxxxxx,block).
‡ timer and pid are not supported by CIMPLICITY HMI software at this time.

Sample Logicmaster File

The following is an example of a Logicmaster file:

## Shared Name File Ver. 1.0

## File created by: GE FANUC -- CIMPLICITY Ver.
## File created at: 09:05:30 on 6/22/1993
3. 5 } Header
##
PT_ID,ADDR,DESC,PT_TYPE
##
}Field Names

}
BSO_PB,%I00001,Boiler shutoff pushbutton ,bool
OVRTMP,%Q00001,Boiler overtemp warning ,bool
STEMP,%R00001,Scaled boiler temperature ,real
TEMP1,%A00001,Boiler temp thermocouple #1 ,int Records
TEMP2,%A00002,Boiler temp thermocouple #2 ,int

GFK-1180 Configuration Import/Export 19-33

Using the Alarm Viewer

About the Alarm Viewer

An alarm describes an abnormal condition that has occurred in the factory. An alarm
in CIMPLICITY HMI software is uniquely identified by its Resource ID, Alarm ID,
and Reference ID.
You can configure an Alarm Viewer as an OCX control in a CimView screen or as
a stand-alone document. You can also implement Alarm Viewer methods for an
Alarm Viewer OCX control in a CimView screen.
In either mode, the Alarm Viewer lets you monitor and respond to alarms occurring
at your worksite. You can:
• Configure alarm views.
• Display current alarms.
• Modify the state of existing alarms.
• Enter comments about an existing alarm.
• Receive instructions on how to resolve alarm conditions.
• Filter the alarm list to display only those alarms that have certain
characteristics.
You can use the Alarm Viewer to display alarms in two modes:
• Static display mode
• Dynamic display mode
In Static display mode, when you open an Alarm Viewer window, you are presented
with a current list of alarms. This list remains in the window until you:
• Acknowledge or reset alarms that are configured to be deleted on
acknowledge or reset.
• Click Refresh to obtain an updated list of alarms when the alarm count
display changes to the Unseen Alarm Count color.
In Dynamic display mode, the alarm display is updated automatically whenever a
new alarm in your view is generated, or whenever the status of an existing alarm
changes.

GFK-1180 20-1
Configuring an Alarm Viewer OCX in CimEdit
To configure an Alarm Viewer in CimEdit, do one of the following:
• On the OLE toolbar, click the AMV button.
A new Alarm Viewer control is placed in the upper left corner of your
CimEdit screen.
• On the Tools toolbar, click the OLE button, or select OLE Object
from the Tools menu, then:
1. Select the position of the upper left corner of the Alarm Viewer
and click the left mouse button to fix it. The Insert Object dialog
box opens.

2. On the ActiveX page, select CIMPLICITY AMV Control.

3. Select OK. A new Alarm Viewer control opens at the position
you selected in your CimEdit screen.
The Alarm Viewer control looks like this initially:

20-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Once the Alarm Viewer control is in CimEdit, you may:
• Click once on the Alarm Viewer control to activate its borders. You
can now resize the control or move it using the borders.
• Double-click on the control to display the CIMPLICITY AMV Control
Properties dialog box and configure the Alarm Viewer.

Configuring Alarm Viewer Control Properties

After you create an Alarm Viewer control on your CimEdit screen, you can display
and change its properties.
To access the CIMPLICITY AMV Control Properties, you can do one of the
following:
• Double-click the Alarm Viewer control.
• Select the Alarm Viewer control, and then select CIMPLICITY AMV
Control Object from the Edit menu. This will show a cascading
menu. Select Properties from the cascading menu.
• Select the Alarm Viewer control, click the right mouse button, and
then select Properties from the pop-up menu.
If you do any of the following, you will display the Object Properties dialog box for
the Alarm Viewer control:
• From the Edit menu, select Properties.
• On the Format toolbar, click the Properties button.
The information about an Alarm Viewer includes:
Fields Selects the fields you want to display in an alarm message and
the order in which you want to display them.
Buttons Changes the button layout and captioning.
Projects Defines the projects the to which the control connects.
Display/Sort Defines the run-time sort order and display options.
Count Layout Selects the count information to be displayed and the order and
orientation in which to display it.
Date Format Chooses how the date and time will be displayed in alarm
messages.
Fonts Selects the font type, style and size used for alarm, button,
count, date, and status text.
Colors Defines the colors used by all elements in the control.
Any fields that do not apply to the Alarm Viewer you are defining will be grayed
out.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-3

 Fields
Use the Fields properties to select the fields you want to display in alarm messages
and the order in which you want to display them.

The list of fields depends on whether you are configuring a Static Alarm List or a
Dynamic Alarm List.
• Select Static to configure a Static Alarm List. The list of fields
changes to show you the ones available for the Static Alarm List.
• Select Dynamic to configure a Dynamic Alarm List. The list of fields
changes to show you the ones available for the Dynamic Alarm List.
If any field titles have been modified, the modified title appears in parentheses to the
right of the field name (for example, "(Ack)" appears to the right of "Ack State").
To select a field, set its check box.
Once you select a field, you can configure which row of the alarm message the field
will be placed in, where in the row it will be placed, and the length of the display.

Position Left
Select the Alarm List field you want to move, then click Position Left to move it
toward the front of the current message row.

Position Right
Select the Alarm List field you want to move, then click Position Right to move it
toward the end of the current message row.

Row Up
Minimum row number is 1. Select the Alarm List field you want to move, then click Row Up to move it up a
row in the message. The field will be placed at the start of the message row.

20-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Row Down
Maximum row number is 10. Select the Alarm List field you want to move, then click Row Down to move it
down a row in the message. The field will be placed at the start of the message row.

Modify
Select the Alarm List field you want to modify, then click Modify. The Field
Properties dialog box opens.

The current field length is displayed in the Length input field. To change the length
of a field:
1. Enter the new field length in the Length input field.
2. Click OK.
Note
Field length is based on the average size of characters in the font you have chosen.
Thus, a length of 6 may be sufficient to display the string "IIIIII", but may be too
short to display "WWWWWW". To ensure that the length is always adequate, select
a fixed pitch font (such as Courier New) for your alarm page display.
The current field title is displayed in the Title input field. To change the title of a
field:
1. Enter the new field title in the Title field.
2. Click OK.
When you change the title of a field, its original title appears next to the check box in
the Fields list, and the modified title appears to the right in parentheses.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-5

 Buttons
Use the Buttons properties to change the button layout and captioning used for the
Alarm List.

The list of buttons depends on whether you are configuring a Static Alarm List or a
Dynamic Alarm List.
• Select Static to configure a Static Alarm List. The list of buttons
changes to show you the ones available for the Static Alarm List.
• Select Dynamic to configure a Dynamic Alarm List. The list of
buttons changes to show you the ones available for the Dynamic Alarm
List.
To select a button, set its check box.
You may need to use the vertical scroll bar to the right of the list to see all of the
buttons. The following is a complete list:
Button Description
Help Displays the help file for an alarm. See page 20-46 for
more information.
Setup Displays the Alarm Setup dialog. See page 20-46 for more
information.
Refresh Updates the alarm list. See page 20-46 for more
information.
View Stack Displays the stacked alarms for the selected alarm. See
page 20-47 for more information.
Comments Displays the Alarm Comments dialog. See page 20-47 for
more information.

20-6 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Toggle Displays the Dynamic Alarm list. See page 20-46 for more
information.
Ack Acknowledges the current alarm. See page 20-48 for more
information.
Reset Resets the current alarm. See page 20-48 for more
information.
Delete Deletes the current alarm. See page 20-48 for more
information.
Ack and Reset Acknowledges and resets the current alarm. See page 20-
48 for more information.
Ack First Acknowledge first alarm. See page 20-49 for more
information.
Ack All Acknowledge all alarms. See page 20-49 for more
information.
CimView Screen Displays the CimView screen associated with the alarm.
See page 20-47 for more information.
Custom1 through Lets you define up to eight custom buttons that you can use
Custom8 to integrate external applications with the Alarm Viewer.
See page 20-42 for more information.
All buttons are available for the Static display. For the Dynamic display, only the
Refresh and Help buttons are not available.
Once you have selected the buttons for display in the alarm list, you can configure
which button row the button will be placed in, where in the row it will be placed, and
what caption will be displayed.

Position Left
Select the Alarm List button you want to move, then click Position Left to move it
toward the front of the current row.

Position Right
Select the Alarm List button you want to move, then click Position Right to move
it toward the end of the current row.

Row Up
Minimum row number is 1 Select the Alarm List button you want to move, then click Row Up to move it up a
row. The button will be placed at the start of the row.

Row Down
Maximum row number is 10 Select the Alarm List button you want to move, then click Row Down to move it
down a row. The button will be placed at the start of the row.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-7

 Modify
Select the Alarm List button that you want to modify, then click Modify. The Button
Caption dialog box opens.

To modify a button:
1. Enter the new caption in the Button Caption input field. You may
enter up to 100 characters.
2. Enter a description in the Description field.
3. If you have selected a custom button, enter the command string you
want to be executed when the button is selected in the Command
String field (this field is not available for the standard buttons).
4. Click OK.
For standard buttons, the button name in the Buttons field of the Button Layout
window does not change - just the caption that is displayed in the button at run-time.
For custom buttons, the caption displayed in the button at run-time changes, and
when a user clicks the button, the command string you specified will be executed.

20-8 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Projects
Use the Projects properties to select the projects from which you want to view
alarms.

To add a project to the list, select Add Project. When the Select Project dialog box
opens, select the project you want from the list of available projects, then select OK.
To delete a project from the list, select it, and then select Delete Project. When
you are asked to verify the deletion, select OK.
To connect to the local project, set the Connect to Local Project check box.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-9

 Display/Sort
Use the Display/Sort properties to define the sort order of alarms, and toggle the
display of the field titles, status box, and beginning display mode. You can also
enable/disable access to the popup runtime context menu via the right mouse button,
and enable/disable primary sort key changes with the left mouse button in the title bar
area.

You can define the following:

Sort Alarms
You can use these fields to select the primary and secondary sort parameters for the
Alarm List.
For the primary sort key:
By Click the drop-down list button to the right of the input field and
select the primary sort key.
Ascending Select this radio button if you want to sort the primary key in
ascending order.
Descending Select this radio button if you want to sort the primary key in
descending order.
For the secondary sort key:
Then Click the drop-down list button to the right of the input field and
select the secondary sort key.
Ascending Select this radio button if you want to sort the secondary key in
ascending order.
Descending Select this radio button if you want to sort the secondary key in
descending order.

20-10 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 You can select any of the following as a sort key:
None This key will not be used to sort alarm items.
Project Projects are sorted alphabetically by Project Name.
Class Alarms in the selected classes are sorted, lowest to highest, in the
sort order assigned to each Alarm Class when it was created.
Resource Alarms in the selected resources are sorted alphabetically, lowest
to highest, by Resource ID.
State Alarms are sorted according to a combination of their State and
Ack Status in the following order:
1. All unacknowledged alarms in ALARM state
2. All unacknowledged alarms in NORMAL state
3. All acknowledged alarms in ALARM state
Time Alarms are arranged according to the time of their occurrence,
with the most recent first.
Message Alarms are sorted alphabetically by alarm message contents.
Ack state Alarms are sorted/grouped by acknowledgement state (Y/N)
Stacked Alarms are sorted/grouped by presence/absence of stacked alarms.
Comment Alarms are sorted/grouped by presence/absence of comments.
Alarm ID Alarms are sorted alphabetically by Alarm ID
Duration In dynamic display mode, alarms are sorted by duration. This
value is not available in static display mode, so alarms will be
sorted by time if this item is selected.
Reference Alarms are sorted alphabetically by reference value.
The default sort key is Time descending. If an order is not established between
two alarms after applying the selected key criteria, Time descending will be used
to try to establish an order.
Select the desired sort criteria from the drop-down list boxes, and choose a desired
direction with the corresponding radio buttons.
If Allow title bar sort changes is enabled, the primary sort key can be modified with
the left mouse button in the title bar area of the alarm list.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-11

 Display
You can toggle the display of the following:
Field Titles Set this check box to display the field titles at the top of the
alarm list.
Clear the check box to eliminate the display.
Status Box Set this check box to display project status information.
Clear the check box to eliminate the display.
Begin in Static Set this check box to begin the Alarm Viewer display in Static
Display mode.
Clear the check box to begin the display in Dynamic Display
mode.

Allow Runtime Popup Menu

Set this check box if you want users to access the run-time popup menu. If you clear
this check box, the run-time popup menu is disabled.

Allow Title Bar Sort Changes

Set this check box if you want users to be able to modify the primary sort key in the
title bar area of the alarm list. Users can accomplish this by clicking the left mouse
button in the title bar area over the column data. If the column selected is not
currently the primary key, it will be selected as the primary key. If the column
selected is already the primary key, the direction of the sort will be reversed.

Count Layout
Use the Count/Layout properties to select the count information to be displayed and
the order and orientation in which to display it.

20-12 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 You can define the following:

Position
Use these check boxes to position the alarm count information:
• Clear both check boxes to position the alarm count on the lower left-
hand corner of the Alarm Viewer.
• Set the Top of Screen check box to display the alarm information in
the upper left corner of the Alarm Viewer.
• Set the Top of Screen and Center Count check boxes to display the
alarm information centered at the top of the Alarm Viewer.

Orientation
You can choose to display the alarm count information fields horizontally or
vertically.
• Select the Horizontal radio button to display the alarm count
information fields side by side in the order you specify.
• Select the Vertical radio button to display the alarm count information
fields one on top of the other in the order you specify.

Fields
You can choose whether to display:
• Alarm count
• Alarm date
• Alarm time
You can use the Move Up and Move Down buttons in this area to order the count,
date, and time display to your liking.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-13

 Date Format
Use the Date Format properties to choose how the date and time will be displayed in
alarm messages.

You can define the following:

Date
Select the format you want to use to display the date of an alarm on the list. A
sample for the format you choose displays in the Sample field in this box. You may
select one of the formats from the list, or construct your own format using the
following information:
m Numeric month with no leading zero.
mm Numeric month with leading zero.
mmm Short text month.
mmmm Long Text month.
d Numeric day with no leading zero.
dd Numeric day with leading zero.
ddd Short text day of the week.
dddd Long text day of the week.
y Last two digits of year. For digits 00 through 09, only the last digit
is displayed.
yy Last two digits of year. For digits 00 through 09, both digits are
displayed.
yyyy All four digits of year
For example, if you enter dddd dd mmmm yyyy, the sample date will be
Saturday 05 March 1994.

20-14 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 You may use spaces, dashes, slashes or any other delimiter of your choice to separate
the date fields.

Time
Select the format you want to use to display the time of an alarm on the list. A
sample for the format you choose displays in the Sample field in this box. You may
select one of the formats from the list, or construct your own format using the
following information:
H Hours based on a twelve-hour clock with no leading zero.
HH Hours based on a twelve-hour clock with leading zero.
HHH Hours based on a 24-hour clock with no leading zero.
HHHH Hours based on a 24-hour clock with leading zero.
M Minutes with no leading zero.
MM Minutes with leading zero.
S Seconds with no leading zero.
SS Seconds with leading zero.
T Hundredths of seconds with no leading zero.
TT Hundredths of seconds with leading zeros.
P, A, p, or a AM/PM indicator.
For example, if you enter HHHH:MM:SS:TT p, the sample time will be
13:05:06:08 PM.
You may use colons, spaces or any other delimiter of your choice to separate the date
fields.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-15

 Fonts
Use the Fonts properties to change the font type, style and size used for text displays
in the Alarm List.

All of the text fields are shown in the list box, along with their current font types and
sizes.
To change the font information for a text field:
1. Select the text you want to change.
2. Select Font.
3. The Font dialog box opens and shows you the current attributes for the
font in the Font, Font style, Size, Effects, and Script fields.
4. Change the font properties for the text.
5. Select OK to save your changes or select Close to close the Font
dialog box and return to the Fonts property page.

20-16 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Colors
Use the Colors properties to change the colors of properties in the control.

First, select the property you want to change in the Property Name field. You can
change the color of any of the following:
• Alarm list background
• Button background
• Alarm count text
• Count background
• Normal count text
• Status background
• Status text
To select a color for the property, you can choose a default system color from the
System Color list, or select one of the 16 colors from the palette.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-17

Viewing the Alarm Viewer OCX List
After you have configured a CimView screen with an Alarm Viewer OCX control,
you can use the CimView screen to display alarms.
You can use the buttons at the bottom of the alarm list to perform various other
functions.

Selecting Alarms
Several of the functions you can perform require you to select one or more alarms
from the alarm list. There are several ways to do this:
• To select a single alarm, move the mouse to the alarm and click on it.
• To select a series of individual alarms, hold down the Ctrl key, then
move to each alarm in turn and click on it.
• To select a group of alarms, click on the first alarm in the group, and
then hold down the Shift key, move the mouse to the last alarm in the
group and click on it. All alarms in the list between the first alarm and
last alarm will be selected.

20-18 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Configuring Alarm Viewer Methods
An Alarm Viewer method is a function that operates on an Alarm Viewer control in
CimView.
The following method is reserved for GE Fanuc use:
• NotifyAllPropertySinks
The following methods are available for Alarm Viewer controls:
AboutBox DoAckAll DoAckFirst
DoAcknowledge DoAckReset DoCimviewScreen
DoComments DoCustom<n> DoDelete
DoHelp DoRefresh DoReset
DoSetup DoToggle DoViewStack
MoveDownOneAlarm MoveUpOneAlarm PageDownAlarms
PageUpAlarms SelectAllAlarms SelectPageAlarms
SelectTopAlarm

AboutBox Method
This method displays the Help About dialog box for the CIMPLICITY Alarm Viewer
control. There is no equivalent to this method in the Alarm Viewer control.
When you configure the AboutBox method, the Advanced... button is not
activated because no further parameters are required for the method.

DoAckAll Method
This method acknowledges all alarms currently displayed on the CIMPLICITY
Alarm Viewer control. It is equivalent to the Ack All button in the Alarm Viewer
control.
When you configure the DoAckAll method, the Advanced... button is not activated
because no further parameters are required for the method.

DoAckFirst Method
This method acknowledges the first alarm in the alarm list on the CIMPLICITY
Alarm Viewer control. It is equivalent to the Ack First button in the Alarm Viewer
control
When you configure the DoAckFirst method, the Advanced... button is not
activated because no further parameters are required for this method.

DoAcknowledge Method
This method acknowledges the currently selected alarm(s) in the alarm list on the
CIMPLICITY Alarm Viewer control. It is equivalent to the Ack button in the Alarm
Viewer control
When you configure the DoAcknowledge method, the Advanced... button is not
activated because no further parameters are required for this method.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-19

 DoAckReset Method
This method acknowledges and resets the currently selected alarm(s) in the alarm list
on the CIMPLICITY Alarm Viewer control. It is equivalent to the Ack and Reset
button in the Alarm Viewer control
When you configure the DoAckReset method, the Advanced... button is not
activated because no further parameters are required for this method.

DoCimviewScreen Method
This method displays the CimView screen configured for the currently selected
alarm in the alarm list on the CIMPLICITY Alarm Viewer control. It is equivalent to
the CimView Screen button in the Alarm Viewer control
When you configure the DoCimviewScreen method, the Advanced... button is
not activated because no further parameters are required for this method.

DoComments Method
This method opens the Alarm Comments dialog box so that you can view the alarm’s
comments and add new ones. It is equivalent to the Comments button in the Alarm
Viewer control.
When you configure the DoComments method, the Advanced... button is not
activated because no further parameters are required for this method.

DoCustom<n> Method
These methods launch user-defined applications from the CIMPLICITY Alarm
Viewer control. They are equivalent to the Custom1 through Custom8 buttons in
the Alarm Viewer control.
When you configure the DoCustom<n> method, the Advanced... button is not
activated because no further parameters are required for this method.

DoDelete Method
If users have the Alarm Delete privilege, this method deletes the currently selected
alarm(s) in the alarm list on the CIMPLICITY Alarm Viewer control. It is equivalent
to the Delete button in the Alarm Viewer control
When you configure the DoDelete method, the Advanced... button is not activated
because no further parameters are required for this method.

DoHelp Method
This method opens the Alarm Operator Help dialog for the currently selected alarm
in the CIMPLICITY Alarm Viewer control. It is equivalent to the Help button in the
Alarm Viewer control.
When you configure the DoHelp method, the Advanced... button is not activated
because no further parameters are required for this method.

20-20 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 DoRefresh Method
This method refreshes Static Alarm list with the latest alarms. It is equivalent to the
Refresh button in the Alarm Viewer control.
When you configure the DoRefresh method, the Advanced... button is not
activated because no further parameters are required for this method.

DoReset Method
This method lets a user reset an alarm or group of alarms. It is equivalent to the
Reset button in the Alarm Viewer control. The alarm will not be triggered again
until it returns to its normal state then goes back to an alarm state.
When you configure the DoReset method, the Advanced... button is not activated
because no further parameters are required for this method.

DoSetup Method
This method opens the Alarm Setups dialog so that users can select the filtering they
want when viewing alarms in the CIMPLICTIY Alarm Viewer control. It is
equivalent to the Setup button in the Alarm Viewer control.
When you configure the DoSetup method, the Advanced... button is not activated
because no further parameters are required for this method.

DoToggle Method
This method toggles the CIMPLICITY Alarm Viewer control between the Static
Alarm list and the Dynamic Alarm list. It is equivalent to the Toggle button in the
Alarm Viewer control.
When you configure the DoToggle method, the Advanced... button is not
activated because no further parameters are required for this method.

DoViewStack Method
This method opens the Stacked Alarms dialog for the selected alarm in the
CIMPLICITY Alarm Viewer control. It is equivalent to the View Stack button in
the Alarm Viewer control.
When you configure the DoViewStack method, the Advanced... button is not
activated because no further parameters are required for this method.

MoveDownOneAlarm Method
This method moves the list of alarms being displayed down by one alarm. It is
equivalent to the down arrow on a user’s keyboard.
When you configure the MoveDownOneAlarm method, the Advanced... button
is not activated because no further parameters are required for this method.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-21

 MoveUpOneAlarm Method
This method moves the list of alarms being displayed up by one alarm. It is
equivalent to the up arrow on a user’s keyboard.
When you configure the MoveUpOneAlarm method, the Advanced... button is
not activated because no further parameters are required for this method.

PageDownAlarms Method
If there is more than one page of alarms in the list, this method displays the next page
of alarms. It is equivalent to the Page Down button on the user’s keyboard.
When you configure the PageDownAlarms method, the Advanced... button is
not activated because no further parameters are required for this method.

PageUpAlarms Method
If there is more than one page of alarms in the list, this method displays the previous
page of alarms. It is equivalent to the Page Up button on the user’s keyboard.
When you configure the PageUpAlarms method, the Advanced... button is not
activated because no further parameters are required for this method.

SelectAllAlarms Method
This method selects all alarms in the list.
When you configure the SelectAllAlarms method, the Advanced... button is not
activated because no further parameters are required for this method.

SelectPageAlarms Method
This method selects all alarms displayed on the current page.
When you configure the SelectPageAlarms method, the Advanced... button is
not activated because no further parameters are required for this method.

SelectTopAlarm Method
This method selects the first alarm in the current page and deselects all other selected
alarms.
When you configure the SelectTopAlarm method, the Advanced... button is not
activated because no further parameters are required for this method.

20-22 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Naming an Alarm Viewer Control
Before you can invoke a method for an Alarm Viewer control, the control must have
its Object name defined. To do this:
1. Select the Alarm Viewer control.
2. From the Edit menu, select Properties, or press Alt+Enter.
3. Select the General properties of the Object Properties dialog box.
4. Enter a name for the Alarm Viewer control in the Object name field.
5. Select OK to save your changes and close the Object Properties dialog
box.
You can now select the control when you create an Invoke Method action.

Creating an Invoke Method Action

You can create an Invoke Method action for any object or group for which you can
define procedures in your CimEdit screen.
When you select the Invoke Method action, the center of the dialog box changes to
look like this:

You will need to enter information in the following fields:

Control name Select the named Alarm Viewer control for which you
want to invoke the method.
Method Select the method you want to implement.
Confirmed This feature is currently not implemented.
None of the Alarm Viewer methods use the advanced features of method invocation.
Therefore, the Advanced... button is disabled for all Alarm Viewer methods.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-23

Configuring a Stand-Alone Alarm Viewer
To display alarms, double-click the Alarm Viewer icon from your project’s cabinet.
When you select the Alarm Viewer icon, the initial CIMPLICITY Alarm Viewer
window opens.

You can use the Menu functions, Toolbar buttons, and shortcut keys to:
• Log in as a particular CIMPLICITY HMI user.
• Select an Alarm Viewer file to display.
• Save the Alarm View you have just configured.
• Print the current list of alarms.
• Configure the count display.
• Configure the list display.

20-24 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Alarm Viewer Menus
You can use the menu options to access Alarm Viewer configuration files, copy
alarms from the Alarm Viewer window to the Clipboard, toggle the display of the
Toolbar and Status bar, configure a new Alarm Viewer screen, and access Help.

The File Menu

When you select the File menu, the following drop-down list displays:

The File menu functions are:

New Creates a new Alarm View.
Open Opens an Alarm Viewer screen in your currently active
CIMPLICITY Alarm Viewer window.
Save Saves the current Alarm View.
Save As Saves the current Alarm View. Use this menu item when you
want to specify the pathname of the saved file.
Install Installs an Alarm Viewer icon for the Alarm View in the program
group of your choice. The name under the icon will be the name
of the Alarm View.
Print Prints the current Alarm View.
Print Preview Displays the current Alarm View in print format.
Print Setup Defines the printer, page size, and orientation for your print
requests.
Exit Exits the CIMPLICITY Alarm Viewer.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-25

 The Edit Menu
When you select the Edit menu, the following drop-down list displays:

The Edit menu functions are:

Copy Copies the alarms you select to the Clipboard.
You can then paste the alarm information in another application
such as a mail message, or a Microsoft Word document.

The View Menu

When you select the View menu, the following drop-down list displays:

The View menu functions are:

Toolbar Enables/disables the display of the Toolbar buttons at the top of
the CIMPLICITY Alarm Viewer window.
Status Bar Enables/disables the display of the Status bar at the bottom of
the CIMPLICITY Alarm Viewer window.

The Login! Menu

When you select the Login! menu, the CIMPLICITY Login dialog box opens. Use
this dialog box to log in to a project and display its alarms.

The Configure Menu

When you select the Configure menu, the following drop-down list displays:

The Configure menu functions are:

Count Layout Opens the Alarm Count Configuration dialog box. This dialog
box lets you determine how alarm count information will be
displayed in an Alarm Viewer screen.
List Layout Opens the Alarm List Configuration dialog box. This dialog box
lets you determine how the information for individual alarms
will be displayed in an Alarm Viewer screen.

20-26 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 The Help Menu
When you select the Help menu, the following drop-down list displays:

The Help menu functions are:

Index Opens the Help Search dialog box.
Using Help Opens the Help Contents window for Alarm Viewer.
About AMV Displays the version number and copyright information for the
CIMPLICITY Alarm Viewer.

Alarm Viewer Toolbar Buttons

The Toolbar buttons available to you are:
New Creates a new alarm view document.

Open Opens an existing alarm view document.

Save Saves the current alarm view document

Copy Copies the selection and put it on the Clipboard.

Print Prints the active alarm view document.

Help Displays Help for clicked on buttons, menus and windows.

Alarm Viewer Shortcut Keys

You can use the following shortcut keys to initiate commonly used functions:
Ctrl+N Creates a new Alarm Viewer screen.
Ctrl+O Opens an Alarm Viewer screen.
Ctrl+S Saves the current Alarm Viewer screen.
Ctrl+P Prints the current window.
Ctrl+C Copies the alarms you select to the Clipboard.
F1 Opens the Help window
Alt+Spacebar Displays the Control menu.
Alt+Print Screen Captures the current window to the clipboard.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-27

Configuring an Alarm View
When you configure an Alarm Viewer screen, you must enter information for the
Alarm Count layout, and the Alarm List layouts for the Static Alarm list and the
Dynamic Alarm list.
To configure the Alarm Count, select Count Layout from the Configure menu.
To configure the Static and Dynamic Alarm lists, select List Layout from the
Configure Menu.

Defining the Alarm Count Layout

The Alarm Count display tells you how many alarms have been generated, and the
time and date of the most recently generated alarms. You have complete flexibility
on how to display this information on the Alarm Viewer screen.
Use the Alarm Count Configuration dialog box to select:
• The layout of the count information
• The colors in which to display the text
• The font type and size of the display

Configuring the Count Layout

Use the Layout properties to select the count information to be displayed and the
order and orientation in which to display it.

20-28 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 You can define the following:
Position
Use these check boxes to position the alarm count information:
• Clear both check boxes to put the alarm count information in the lower
left-hand corner of the Alarm Viewer.
• Set the Alarm at Top of Screen check box to put the alarm count
information in the upper left-hand corner of the Alarm Viewer.
• Set the Alarm at Top of Screen and Center Count check boxes to
center the alarm count information on the top of the Alarm Viewer.
Orientation
You can choose to display the fields horizontally or vertically.
• Select Horizontal to display the fields side by side in the order you
specify.
• Select Vertical to display the fields one on top of the other in the order
you specify.
Fields
You can choose whether to display:
• Alarm count
• Alarm date
• Alarm time
You can use the Move Up and Move Down buttons in this area to order the count,
date, and time display to your liking.

Configuring the Count Color

Use the Colors properties to change the colors for the unseen and seen alarm counts.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-29

 You can define the following colors for the alarm count display:
Unseen Alarm Count The color of the alarm count when new alarms are
generated and you have not yet viewed them.
Seen Alarm Count The color of the alarm count after you have viewed the
current set of alarms.
Background The background color for the alarm count display.
Click Color... to use the Color dialog box to select the color you want for the
display.
Note
If you select a dithered color, its solid component will be used, not the color you
selected. To see the components of a dithered color, click Define Custom
Colors>> in the Colors dialog box.

Configuring the Count Font

Use the Fonts properties to change the font type, style, and size for the count and for
the date/time fields.

You can define the following:

Count Font
The current font name and size are displayed. To change the count font, select
Font... to display the Font dialog box. Use the dialog box to configure the font type,
style, and size to be used for the count field.

20-30 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Date/Time Font
The current font name and size are displayed. To change the date/time font, select
Font... to display the Font dialog box. Use the dialog box to configure the font type,
style, and size to be used from the date/time fields.

Defining the Alarm List Layout

Use the Alarm List Configuration dialog box to configure the Alarm List for the
Static Alarm list and the Dynamic Alarm list. You can decide which fields to
display, and the order in which to display them, the list background color, the text
font, and which action buttons to display, and the order in which to display them.

Selecting Alarm List Fields

Use the Fields properties to select the fields you want to display in each alarm
message and the order in which you want to display them.

The list of fields will depend on whether you are configuring a Static Alarm List or a
Dynamic Alarm List.
• Select Static to configure a Static Alarm List.
• Select Dynamic to configure a Dynamic Alarm List.
If any field titles have been modified, the modified title appears in parentheses to the
right of the field name (for example, "(Ack)" appears to the right of "Ack State").

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-31


Minimum row number is 1.
Maximum row number is 10.
20-32 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual
Static Alarm Fields
After you select Static, the list of alarm fields looks like this:
You can select one or more of the fields in this list. To select a field, set its check
box.
Dynamic Alarm Fields
After you select Dynamic, the list of alarm fields looks like this:
You can select one or more of the fields in this list. To select a field, set its check
box.
Once you have selected a field for display in the alarm list, you can configure which
row of the alarm message the field will be placed in, where in the row it will be
placed, and the length of the display.
Position Left
Select the Alarm List field you want to move, then click Position Left to move it
toward the front of the current message row.
Position Right
Select the Alarm List field you want to move, then click Position Right to move it
toward the end of the current message row.
Row Up
Select the Alarm List field you want to move, then click Row Up to move it up a
row in the message. The field will be placed at the start of the message row.
Row Down
Select the Alarm List field you want to move, then click Row Down to move it
down a row in the message. The field will be placed at the start of the message row.
GFK-1180
 Modify
Select the Alarm List field you want to modify, then click Modify. The Field
Properties dialog opens.

The current field length is displayed in the Length input field. To change the length
of a field:
1. Enter the new field length in the Length input field.
2. Click OK.
Note
Field length is based on the average size of characters in the font you have chosen.
Thus, a length of 6 may be sufficient to display the string "IIIIII", but may be too
short to display "WWWWWW". To ensure that the length is always adequate, select
a fixed pitch font (such as Courier New) for your alarm page display.
The current field title is displayed in the Title input field. To change the title of a
field:
1. Enter the new field title in the Title field.
2. Click OK.
When you change the title of a field, its original title appears next to the check box in
the Fields list, and the modified title appears to the right in parentheses.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-33

 Selecting Alarm List Color and Font
Use the Color and Font properties to change the font type, style, and size used for the
Alarm List.

Font
The current font name and size are displayed. To change the alarm list font, select
Font... to display the Font dialog box. Use the dialog box to configure the font type,
style, and size to be used for the alarm list.
Background Color
The current background color for the screen is displayed. To change the background
color, select Color... to display the Color dialog box. Use the dialog box to
configure the background color you want for the alarm list.

20-34 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Selecting Alarm List Button Layout
Use the Button Layout properties to change the button layout and captioning used for
the Alarm List.

The list of buttons will depend on whether you are configuring a Static Alarm List or
a Dynamic Alarm List.
• Select Static to configure a Static Alarm List.
• Select Dynamic to configure a Dynamic Alarm List.
Static Alarm List Buttons
After you select Static, the list of alarm buttons looks like this:

You can select one or more of these buttons. To select a button, set its check box.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-35

 You will need to use the vertical scroll bar to the right of the table to see all of the
buttons. The following is a complete list:
Button Description
Help Displays the help file for an alarm. See page 20-46 for more
information.
Setup Displays the Alarm Setup dialog box. See page 20-46 for
more information.
Refresh Updates the alarm list. See page 20-46 for more information.
View Stack Displays the stacked alarms for the selected alarm. See page
20-47 for more information.
Comments Displays the Alarm Comments dialog box. See page 20-47
for more information.
Toggle Displays the Dynamic Alarm list. See page 20-46 for more
information.
Ack Acknowledges the current alarm. See page 20-48 for more
information.
Reset Resets the current alarm. See page 20-48 for more
information.
Delete Deletes the current alarm. See page 20-48 for more
information.
Ack and Reset Acknowledges and resets the current alarm. See page 20-48
for more information.
Ack First Acknowledge first alarm. See page 20-49 for more
information.
Ack All Acknowledge all alarms. See page 20-49 for more
information.
CimView Screen Displays the CimView screen associated with the alarm. See
page 20-47 for more information.
Custom1 through Lets you define up to eight custom buttons that you can use
Custom8 to integrate external applications with the Alarm Viewer.
See page 20-42 for more information.

20-36 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Dynamic Alarm List Buttons
After you select Dynamic, the list of buttons looks like this:

You can select one or more of these buttons. To select a button, set its check box.
Toggle Displays the Static Alarm list. See page 20-46 for more
information.
Setup Displays the Alarm Setup dialog box. See page 20-46 for more
information.
Once you have selected the buttons for display in the alarm list, you can configure
which button row the button will be placed in, where in the row it will be placed, and
what caption will be displayed.
Position Left
Select the Alarm List button you want to move, then click Position Left to move it
toward the front of the current row.
Position Right
Select the Alarm List button you want to move, then click Position Right to move
it toward the end of the current row.
Row Up
Minimum row number is 1 Select the Alarm List button you want to move, then click Row Up to move it up a
row. The button will be placed at the start of the row.
Row Down
Maximum row number is 10 Select the Alarm List button you want to move, then click Row Down to move it
down a row. The button will be placed at the start of the row.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-37

 Modify
Select the Alarm List button that you want to modify, then click Modify. The Button
Caption dialog box opens.

To modify a button:
1. Enter the new caption in the Button Caption field. You may enter up
to 100 characters.
2. Enter a description in the Description field.
3. If you have selected a custom button, enter the command string you
want to be executed when the button is selected in the Command
String field (this field is not available for the standard buttons).
4. Click OK.
For standard buttons, the button name in the Buttons field of the Button Layout
window will not change - just the caption that is displayed in the button at run-time.
For custom buttons, the caption displayed in the button at run-time will be changed,
and when a user clicks the button, the command string you specified will be
executed.
Background Color
The current background color for the screen is displayed. To change the background
color, click Color... to display the Color dialog box. Use the dialog box to
configure the background color you want for the alarm list.

20-38 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 General Configuration Information
Use the General properties to define the system that Alarm Viewer will connect to
when it displays this Alarm List, and how the window will be placed.

You must choose a connection mode. Window placement is optional. However, if

you do not select either of these options, the window may be overwritten by other
windows, and it will not pop to the top when new alarms are received.
Connection
These radio buttons let you select the type of system connection to be made when the
Alarm Viewer screen is requested by a user. Select one of the following:
Connect to Local Project
Always connects to the node on which the user is running.
Browse for project when connecting
The user is presented with a dialog that can be used to select the project
to when Alarm Viewer is to be connected.
Select project now
Enter the project to which Alarm Viewer will connect when it displays
this Alarm List.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-39

 Window Placement
Use these check boxes to define what happens to the Alarm Viewer window when
new alarms are received. Your choices are:
Always On Top Set this check box if you want the window to
always be on top of other windows.
Pop to Top on new Alarms Set this check box if you want the window to
redisplay on top of other windows when new
alarms are received.

Alarm Message Date/Time Format

Use the Date/Time Format properties to choose how the date and time will be
displayed in alarm messages.

Date
Select the format you want to use to display the date of an alarm on the list. A
sample for the format you choose displays in the Sample field in this box. You may
select one of the formats from the list, or construct your own format using the
following information:
m Numeric month with no leading zero.
mm Numeric month with leading zero.
mmm Short text month.
mmmm Long Text month.
d Numeric day with no leading zero.
dd Numeric day with leading zero.

20-40 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 ddd Short text day of the week.
dddd Long text day of the week.
y Last two digits of year. For digits 00 through 09, only the last digit is
displayed.
yy Last two digits of year. For digits 00 through 09, both digits are
displayed.
yyyy All four digits of year
For example, if you enter dddd dd mmmm yyyy, the sample date will be
Saturday 05 March 1994.
You may use spaces, dashes, slashes or any other delimiter of your choice to separate
the date fields.
Time
Select the format you want to use to display the time of an alarm on the list. A
sample for the format you choose displays in the Sample field in this box. You may
select one of the formats from the list, or construct your own format using the
following information:
H Hours based on a twelve-hour clock with no leading zero.
HH Hours based on a twelve-hour clock with leading zero.
HHH Hours based on a 24-hour clock with no leading zero.
HHHH Hours based on a 24-hour clock with leading zero.
M Minutes with no leading zero.
MM Minutes with leading zero.
S Seconds with no leading zero.
SS Seconds with leading zero.
T Hundredths of seconds with no leading zero.
TT Hundredths of seconds with leading zeros.
P, A, p, AM/PM indicator.
or a
For example, if you enter HHHH:MM:SS:TT p, the sample time will be
13:05:06:08 PM.
You may use colons, spaces or any other delimiter of your choice to separate the date
fields.

Saving the Layout

After you have defined the alarm list layouts for the Static and Dynamic displays, you
can select Save or Save As... from the File menu to save them.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-41

Creating Custom Buttons
If you wish to integrate an external application with the Alarm Viewer, you can
configure a custom button in your Alarm Viewer document. When a user selects an
alarm, then clicks on this button, the application launches with the parameters that
you configured.
To configure a custom button:
1. Select the button on the Button Layout properties.
2. Click Modify....
3. In the Command: field, enter the command line you wish to execute
when the button is pressed.
4. Click OK.
You may include any of the following parameter, which will be substituted with
characteristics of the selected alarm, in your command:
Parameter Value
%DATETIME Alarm Generation date and time
%DT same as %DATETIME
%DATE Alarm Generation date
%TIME Alarm Generation time
%ID Alarm Identifier of the selected alarm
%CLASS Alarm class of the selected alarm
%RESOURCE Factory resource of the selected alarm
%RES same as %RESOURCE
%REFERENCE Alarm reference identifier for the selected alarm
%REF same as %REF
%MESSAGE Alarm message for the selected alarm
%MSG same as %MESSAGE
%STATE Current alarm state of the selected alarm
%ACK "Y" or "N", if selected alarm is acknowledged
The following additional parameters do not require the user to select an alarm:
Parameter Value
%% An embedded percent sign
%USER User ID of the user invoking the command
%PRODUCT CIMPLICITY distribution directory
%CIM same as %PRODUCT
%DIRECTORY CIMPLICITY project directory
%DIR same as %DIRECTORY

20-42 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 %PROJECT CIMPLICITY project name
%PRJ same as %PROJECT

Example
Alarm Comments are only available for the duration of an instance of an alarm. You
can use a Custom Button to create a set of long-term notes, describing the historical
conditions surrounding past alarm conditions in a factory.
To do this:
1. Select a Custom button from the Button Layout list.
2. Type Notes... in the Button Caption field.
3. Type Edit Alarm notes for a selected alarm in the Description
field.
4. Type NOTEPAD %DIR\NOTES\%ID.TXT in the Command
String field.
The completed dialog looks like this:

When a user selects this button, a new Notepad will be executed for a file in the
NOTES subdirectory of the CIMPLICITY HMI project directory. The filename is
determined by the Alarm ID of the selected alarm.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-43

Logging In to the Alarm Viewer
When you select the Login! menu option, and no project is running on your
computer, the Select Project dialog box opens. You can use this dialog box to select
a project to connect to or start.
If a project is running on your computer, the CIMPLICITY® Login dialog box opens.

Enter your CIMPLICITY HMI username in the Username field, and enter your
CIMPLICITY HMI user password (if you have one) in the Password field.
You can also:
• Click on the Reconnect at Startup check box to automatically login
each time you start up Alarm Viewer.
• Click on the Save Username + Password check box to save your
username and password. They will automatically be entered in their
fields the next time you log in using this dialog.
When you select the Login! menu option, you may see the Select Project dialog box.
Use this dialog box to select a remote project to log in to.

20-44 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Viewing the Alarm List
After you have configured an alarm list, you can save it or use it to view alarms. You
can also use Open... on the File menu to select an alarm list for display.
You can use the buttons at the bottom of the alarm list to perform various other
functions.
You can use the Print functions on the File menu to print the alarm list.
You can use the Copy function on the Edit menu to copy selected alarms from the
alarm list to the clipboard.

Selecting Alarms
Several of the functions you can perform require you to select one or more alarms
from the alarm list. There are several ways to do this:
• To select a single alarm, move the mouse to the alarm and click on it.
• To select a series of individual alarms, hold down the Ctrl key, then
move to each alarm in turn and click on it.
• To select a group of alarms, click on the first alarm in the group, and
then hold down the Shift key, move the mouse to the last alarm in the
group and click on it. All alarms in the list between the first alarm and
last alarm will be selected.

Using the Alarm List Buttons

In general, the Alarm List buttons are activated as follows:
• The Setup, Refresh, and Toggle buttons, if defined, are available at
all times if they have been configured on your Static display.
• The Help, View Stack, Comments, Ack, Reset, Delete, Ack and
Reset, and CimView Screen buttons, if defined, are only active
when you select an alarm from the list.
• The Ack First and Ack All buttons are active if any alarms are
displayed.
In the following sections of this chapter, the buttons will be referred to by their
default captions. You may have defined other captions for some or all of your Alarm
List buttons, but the functions they perform do not change.
When you click on a button, a brief description of that button is displayed on the
Status Bar. If you move your mouse off the Alarm Viewer button without releasing
the mouse button, the action associated with the Alarm Viewer button will not be
invoked.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-45

 Changing the Setup Parameters
Normally, all alarms for the roles assigned to your CIMPLICITY User ID are
displayed on the Alarm Viewer screen. There are times, however, when you want to
display certain subsets of alarms. This is called alarm filtering.
Alarm filters are set up through the Alarm Setups dialog box. The filtering options
let you filter alarms by:
Alarm Class
Resource ID
Time
Alarm State
You may select one or more of these options to filter the alarm list. When you click
Setup, the Alarm Setups dialog box opens. For more information, see page 20-49.

Refreshing the Alarm List

Click Refresh to update the Static Alarm list with the latest alarms.

Toggling Between Lists

Click Toggle to switch between the Static Alarm list and the Dynamic Alarm list.

When you click Toggle on the Static Alarm list, the Dynamic Alarm list displays.
When you click Toggle on the Dynamic Alarm list, the Static Alarm list displays.

Displaying User Help

To display help information for an alarm:
1. Click the alarm in the list.
2. Click Help.

The Alarm Operator Help dialog box displays all the information associated with the
alarm at the top of the dialog. If a help file has been defined for the alarm, the
contents of the file will be displayed in a scrolling region.
Click Done to close the dialog box and return to the Alarm Viewer screen.

20-46 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Viewing the Alarm Stack
An alarm can be configured so the states it passes through can be kept or stacked. If
the number of states exceeds the maximum number configured for the alarm’s stack,
the oldest occurrences are eliminated. When an alarm is deleted, all occurrences of
the stacked alarm are deleted.
If an alarm has stacked occurrences, and the Stacked field is being displayed, you
will see an asterisk (*) in the "Stacked" field.
To view an alarm’s stack:
1. Click the alarm in the list.
2. Click View Stack.

The Stacked Alarms dialog box opens. Information about the selected alarm is
displayed at the top of the screen. The alarm stack displays the state information
with the most recent state change at the top of the list.
Click Done to close the dialog box and return to the Alarm Viewer screen.

Viewing Alarm Comments

Up to ten (10) comments can be associated with a current alarm. A comment is a line
of text that can be entered by any user that can view the alarm. Comments are
available for viewing until the alarm is deleted from the system.
If an alarm has comments, and the Comments field is being displayed, you will see
the letter C in the "Comment" field.
To view an alarm’s comments:
1. Click the alarm in the list.
2. Click Comments.

The Alarm Comments dialog box opens.

Adding Alarm Comments

To add a comment to the list click Add Comment.
Click Done to close the dialog box and return to the Alarm Viewer screen.

Viewing the Alarm’s CimView Screen

When an alarm (or point) is configured, it can be associated with a CimView screen.
Click CimView Screen to display the CimView screen defined for the alarm.

If no screen is defined for the alarm, an appropriate message will be displayed.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-47


Deletion requirements are defined
during alarm configuration.
20-48
Acknowledging an Alarm
You can acknowledge an alarm to inform other users that you have seen the alarm
and, if necessary, are working on resolving the condition that set off the alarm.
If an alarm is not listed as acknowledged, the condition may still exist and should be
investigated.
To acknowledge an alarm (or a group of alarms):
1. Select the alarm(s).
2. Click Ack.
Resetting an Alarm
You can manually reset an alarm to indicate to the system that you are manually
overriding the alarm condition. If you do this, the alarm will not be triggered again
until the situation returns to the configured acceptable range and then goes back out
of the acceptable range.
The system automatically resets an alarm if the condition that triggered the alarm
returns to within acceptable limits.
To reset an alarm (or a group of alarms):
1. Select the alarm.
2. Click Reset.
When you reset an alarm, its state changes from ALARM to NORMAL.
Deleting an Alarm
Normally, alarms are automatically deleted once they have been successfully
acknowledged and/or reset as long as their deletion requirements have been met.
If you have been given the Alarm Delete privilege, you can force alarms to be
deleted without the deletion requirements being met.
To delete an alarm (or a group of alarms):
1. Select the alarm.
2. Click Delete.
When you delete an alarm, it will be removed from the alarm list.
CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Acknowledging and Resetting an Alarm
You can simultaneously acknowledge and reset an alarm to indicate to the system
that you have seen the condition and are manually overriding it. If you do this, the
alarm will not be triggered again until the situation returns to the configured
acceptable range and then goes back out of the acceptable range.
To simultaneously acknowledge and reset an alarm (or a group of alarms):
1. Select the alarm.
2. Click Ack and Reset.

Acknowledging the First Alarm

You can acknowledge the first alarm in the alarm list. To do this:
• Click Ack First.

Acknowledging All Alarms

You can acknowledge all alarms currently in the alarm list. To do this
• Click Ack All.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-49

Filtering Alarms
Alarm filtering lets you look at particular groups of alarms on your alarm list. The
filtering options let you:
• Load a filter for the Alarm List display.
• Modify the current filter.
• Save the current filter.
• Create a new filter.
• Delete filters from the list.
• Declare one of the filters to be the default filter.
To initiate alarm filtering, click Setup.

When the Alarm Setups dialog box opens, the current filter displays in the Setup
field. The list of filters that you can use is displayed below the current filter. There
are three types of filters:
<<UNFILTERED>> This is the default filter. When it is loaded, you can view
all alarms available to your CIMPLICITY HMI User ID.
Site-wide filters Filters that start with the "$" character are site-wide
filters, and are available to any user.
You need to be logged in as ADMINISTRATOR to
create, modify, or delete site-wide filters.
User filters Filters that do not start with the "$" characters are only
available to users that log in with your CIMPLICITY
HMI User ID.
To close the dialog box and return to the Alarm List display, click Done.

20-50 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Loading an Alarm Viewer Filter for Display
To load a filter for display:
1. Click on the filter in the list that you want to use. The filter name
displays in the Setup field.
2. Click Load.
The filter loads and the Alarm List is refiltered and redisplayed.
Note
You must load a filter in order to modify it.

Modifying the Current Alarm Viewer Filter

When you click Modify Current, the Modify Setup dialog box opens.
You can modify the classes, resources, time filter, state filter, and sort order of the
current filter.

Modifying the Alarm Viewer Class List

The Classes property page displays the list of current alarm classes and indicates
which ones are used in the filter. Set the check box to the left of a class to include
alarms for that class in the Alarm List. Clear the check box to exclude alarms for that
class from the Alarm List.
Click Add All to select all classes.
Click Remove All to clear all classes.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-51

 Modifying the Alarm Viewer Resource List

The Resources property page displays the list of current resources, and indicates
which ones are used in the filter. Set the check box to the left of a resource to include
alarms for that resource in the Alarm List. Clear the check box to exclude alarms for
that resource from the Alarm List.
Click Add All to select all resources.
Click Remove All to clear all resources.

Modifying Alarm Viewer Filters and Sort Orders

20-52 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 The Time/State/Sort property page displays the current status of the Time and State
filters, and the Sort Order for the Alarm List.
Filter by Time
You can use this option to display all alarms that have occurred since a certain time.
To do this, set the Use Time Filter check box to enable this filter, then enter the
starting date and time for the filter in the Select Alarms Since input fields.
The time and date when you opened the Modify Setup dialog box are used as the
default time and date.
Filter by State
You can use this option to limit the alarms displayed on the Alarm List to only those
that occur in the state you select. The choices are:
State Ack Description
Status
Alarm N Display points in alarm state that have not been
acknowledged.
Alarm Y Display points in alarm state that have been acknowledged.
Normal N Display points that have returned to a normal state, but
have not been acknowledged.
Select the check box for each state for which you want to filter.
Sort
You can use this option to select the primary sort parameter for the Alarm List. The
choices are:
Class Alarms in the selected classes are sorted, lowest to highest, in the
sort order assigned to each Alarm Class when it was created.
Resource Alarms in the selected resources are sorted alphabetically, lowest to
highest, by Resource ID.
State Alarms are sorted according to a combination of their State and Ack
Status in the following order:
1. All unacknowledged alarms in ALARM state
2. All unacknowledged alarms in NORMAL state
3. All acknowledged alarms in ALARM state
Time Alarms are arranged according to the time of their occurrence, with
the most recent first.
The default sort key is Time. If a category other than Time is selected as the
primary sort key, the secondary sort key is Time.
Click the radio button next to the sort order you want to use.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-53

 Saving the Current Alarm Viewer Filter
To modify and save an existing filter:
1. Select the filter from the list, or use the current filter.
2. If the filter you want to use is not the current filter, click Load. The
filter will be loaded and the Alarm Setups dialog box closes. Click
Setup again to reopen the dialog.
3. Click Modify Current.
4. Use the Modify Setup dialog box to set your new filter options, and
click OK.

Creating A New Alarm Viewer Filter

To create a new filter:
1. Select the filter you want to use as the basis for your new filter, or use
the current filter.
2. If the filter you want to use is not the current filter, click Load. The
filter loads and the Alarm Setups dialog box closes. Click Setup again
to reopen the dialog.
3. Click Modify Current.
4. Use the Modify Setup dialog to set your new filter options, and click
OK.
5. On the Alarm Setups dialog box, enter the new filter name in the Setup
field and click Save. The new filter name will be added to the list of
available filters.

Deleting an Alarm Viewer Filter from the List

To delete a filter from the list:
1. Click the filter name in the list. The name will appear in the Setup
field.
2. Click Delete. The filter name will be removed from the list.

Declaring a Default Alarm Viewer Filter

When you install CIMPLICITY The default filter is the filter that the Alarm Viewer uses to initially display the Alarm
software, the default filter is List.
<<UNFILTERED>>.
To declare a default filter:
1. Click on the filter name in the list.
2. Click Make Default.
If you want to find out the name of your current default filter, do the following:
1. Start the Alarm Viewer.
2. Click Setup.
The filter that appears in the Setup field is the default filter.

20-54 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Printing Alarms
The File menu contains three functions for printing the alarm list.
• Print Setup...
• Print Preview
• Print...
When you click on Print Setup..., the Print Setup dialog box opens. You can use
this dialog to select the printer, and the format for your alarm list printout.
When you click on Print Preview, the printout that will be generated is displayed.
You can zoom in for a closer look, step through the pages, or view the printout as
one-sided or two-sided. In addition, if you click on the Print... button, you can
access the Print dialog box.
When you click on Print..., the Print dialog box opens. You can use this dialog box
to select the print range, print quality, and number of copies. In addition, you can
click on the Setup... button in this dialog to access the Print Setup dialog box.

Copying Alarms
The Copy function on the Edit menu lets you copy selected alarms to the clipboard.
Once the alarm is on the clipboard, you can paste it in another window.
For example, if there is an alarm on the list that you want to include in an e-mail
message:
1. Select the alarm.
2. Select Copy from the Edit menu.
3. Go to the e-mail message you are creating.
4. Position the cursor in the message.
5. Select Paste from the Edit menu.

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-55

Installing an Alarm Viewer Screen
Once you have saved an Alarm Viewer screen, you can create a shortcut for the
screen in the Start menu or on the desktop. Users can then display the screen by
clicking on the shortcut.

Installing A Screen from Alarm Viewer

To install a screen from the Alarm Viewer:
1. Open the screen in the Alarm Viewer.
2. From the File menu, select Install. The Create Shortcut dialog box
opens.

Menus in the Start menu are represented as folders

3. Select the folder where you want to place the shortcut.
4. Select OK. The shortcut is placed in the selected folder.

20-56 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Installing an Alarm Viewer Screen from the File
Manager
You can use the File Manager to install a shortcut for an Alarm Viewer screen.
Once you have done this, however, you should:
1. Select the shortcut.
2. Click the right mouse button to open the Windows pop-up menu.
3. Select Properties. The Properties dialog box for the screen opens.
4. On the Shortcut properties page, add amv.exe to the beginning of the
Target command line.
If you do not do this, the screen will take a longer time to start, and Alarm Viewer
will be forced to query the user about the project to be used.

Command Line Options

Once you have installed an Alarm Viewer shortcut, you can add arguments to the
command line to control user access.
To add arguments to the command line for an icon:
1. Click the Alarm Viewer shortcut to select it.
2. Click the right mouse button to open the Windows pop-up menu.
3. Select Properties... from the Windows pop-up menu. The Properties
dialog box for the screen opens.
4. Insert the option (or options) you want between the executable name
and the Alarm Viewer screen name in the Target input field on the
Shortcut properties page.
For example, if you have created an Alarm Viewer screen and you do not want
users to reconfigure the count layout or list layout, you can change the command line
for the screen’s Alarm Viewer icon from this:
amv.exe C:\cimplicity\projects\proj\view.AMV

to this:
amv.exe /noconfig C:\cimplicity\projects\proj\view.AMV

You can also use the command line to start multiple Alarm Viewer screens from a
single icon.
The following command line arguments are available for your use:

GFK-1180 Using the Alarm Viewer 20-57

 /noopen
Does not allow the user to open any other files from this Alarm Viewer screen.
The New and Open menu items and the file list are removed from the File menu.
The File Open toolbar button is disabled.
Example:
amv.exe /noopen C:\myproj\view.amv

/noconfig
Does not allow the user to configure the count and list layouts on the screen.
The Count Layout and List Layout menu items are disabled on the Configure
menu.
Example:
amv.exe /noconfig C:\myproj\view.amv

20-58 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Using CimView

About CimView
CimView is an interactive graphical user interface to help you monitor and control
your facility. It displays the screens that were created with CimEdit.
Your data can be displayed and monitored as text or a variety of graphic objects.
Both text and graphic objects can automatically change color, move, and rotate based
on the data collected.
CimView screens can also have a variety of interactive control functions that let you
set point values, display other graphic screens, initiate custom software routines and
start other Windows applications.

Getting Started
There are many ways to start a CimView session. Here are some:
• Your CimView session may be configured by your System Manager to
automatically start when you login.
• You can select a CimView icon that is in your project folder or on the
desktop.

GFK-1180 21-1
Window Components

The CimView window has several components that have been labeled in the above
figure.
You can use the Menu functions, Toolbar buttons, and shortcut keys to:
• Open a CimView screen in the current or a new window.
• Print the current screen.
• Flush cached screens.
• Enable/disable the Toolbar, Status Bar, and Menu/Title Bar.
• Toggle and zoom the screen size.
• Display help.
Depending on the configuration set up by your System Manager, you may not see all
of these window components, and you may not have access to all of these functions.
For example, in many installations the title bar, menu bar, toolbar, and status bar will
be hidden, and the CimView window will occupy the entire terminal screen.

21-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Menu Bar
The Menu Bar displays the menus that you will use to control most of your work in
CimView.

Title Bar
The Title Bar displays the filename of the screen you are currently displaying. You
can also use it to move the CimView window.
When you click the right mouse button in the Title bar, a menu of standard window
functions is displayed. You can use these functions to move, resize, lower, or close
the window.

Window Buttons
When you click on the Minimize button, you will minimize the window.
The minimized window is hidden. To restore the window, click on its button in the
task bar.
When you click on the Maximize button, the window will be resized to take up the
entire terminal screen. When the window is maximized, the Maximize button is
replaced by the Restore button.
When you click on the Restore button, the window will be restored back to its old
size.

Scroll Bars
Use the vertical scroll bar to move the screen up and down if it doesn’t fit in the
window.
Use the horizontal scroll bar to move the screen back and forth if it doesn’t fit in the
window.

Status Bar
The Status Bar displays information about your current viewing operation, and is
divided into four areas:
Message Area Displays informational messages about options that you
select or about operations that you perform.
Cursor Location Displays the X,Y coordinates of the current cursor
location in points.

Toolbars
A toolbar is a frame containing a set of controls. Generally, toolbars are used to
provide quick access to specific commands or options. These commands or options
are usually also available in the menus. CimView uses a Standard toolbar.

GFK-1180 Using CimView 21-3

 CimView Menus
The Menu Bar displays the menus that you will use to control most of your work in
CimView. The options are:
File Use this menu to open or print screens, and to exit CimView.
View Use this menu to display the toolbars, replace the current screen
with the previous or home screen, or change view magnification.
Help Use this menu to get Help on using CimView.

The File Menu

When you select the File menu, the following drop-down menu is displayed:

The File menu functions are:

Open... Opens a new screen in the current CimView
window.
This function is not available if your CimView
screen has been installed with /noopen.
Open Window... Opens a screen in a new CimView window.
This function is not available if your CimView
screen has been installed with /noopen.
Flush Cached Screens Flushes the cached screens from memory.
The screen cache lets CimView retrieve the most
recently replaced screens from memory rather than a
disk file. Flushing the cache will force CimView to
retrieve these screens from their disk files rather than
from memory. This is useful if a screen has been
updated recently and you want to make sure you are
looking at the most recent version.
Print... Prints the current CimView screen.
Print Setup... Defines the printer, page size, and orientation for
your print requests.

21-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Send Sends a copy of the screen file to someone via
electronic mail.
This function sends a copy of the screen file that can
be opened and displayed in CimView.
To send a picture of the current screen contents, use
Alt+Print Screen to copy a bitmap picture of the
current window to the clipboard, then Paste the
bitmap into a mail message.
Recent screens Lists the most recent screens you have displayed in
the CimView window. You can redisplay any of
these screens just by clicking on them. The list will
hold up to nine screens.
Exit Exits the current CimView window.

The View Menu

When you select the View menu, the following drop-down menu is displayed:

The View menu functions are:

Toolbars... Enables/disables the display of the Standard Toolbar
buttons.
Status Bar Enables/disables the display of the Status Bar at the
bottom of the CimView window.
Menu/Title Bar Enables/disables the display of the Title and Menu
bars at the top of the CimView window.
To restore their display, click the right mouse button,
then click Menu/Title Bar. You can also use
Alt+Spacebar to display the Control menu and select
View Menu/Title.

GFK-1180 Using CimView 21-5

 Full Screen Changes the window size to use the full screen area to
display the current CimView screen. When you do
this, the Title Bar, Menu Bar, Status Bar, and Toolbar
will all be disabled.
To change from Full Screen mode to normal mode,
you can press the Esc key. You can also click the
right mouse button, then click Full Screen, or you
can use Alt+Spacebar to display the Control menu
and select Restore.
To display the Menu and Title bars in Full Screen
mode, click the right mouse button, then click
Menu/Title Bar, or you can use Alt+Spacebar to
display the Control menu and select View
Menu/Title.
Previous Screen Replaces the current screen with the previous screen.
Home Screen Replaces the current screen with the first screen that
was displayed when you entered this CimView
session.
Zoom 50% Resizes the screen in the window to 50% of its normal
size.
Zoom 100% Resizes the screen in the window to its normal size.
Zoom 200% Resizes the screen in the window to double its normal
size.
Zoom to Best Fit Resizes the screen to fit the window.
Zoom... Displays the Zoom dialog. Use the dialog box’s radio
buttons or the Percent input field to select a zoom
factor for the screen.
Size Window to Zoom Resizes the window to fit the screen.

21-6 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Using the Help Menu
When you select the Help menu, the following drop-down menu is displayed:

The Help menu functions are:

Contents Displays the Contents page for CimView help.
Search for Help On Displays the Search dialog box for CimView help.
How to Use Help Displays the How to Use Help file.
On Screen Displays the application help file for the current
CimView screen.
About CimView Displays information about the current version of
CimView.

Using the Control Menu

To access the Control menu, click the right mouse button on the Title Bar or press
Alt+Spacebar. The following drop-down menu is displayed:

The Control menu functions are:

Restore If the window is currently an icon, restores the window.
Otherwise, the item is unavailable.
Move Lets you move the window around on the terminal screen.
Size Lets you resize the window.
Minimize Reduces the window to an icon.
Maximize Resizes the window to use the entire terminal screen.
Close Closes the current window. You will be prompted to save
any changes.

GFK-1180 Using CimView 21-7

 Using the Window Pop-Up Menu
To access the Window Pop-up menu, press the right mouse button anywhere on the
CimView screen. The following drop-down menu is displayed.

The Window Pop-up menu functions are:

Menu/Title Bar Toggles the display of the Menu Bar and Title Bar in the
window. A check mark appears to the left of this option if
the Menu Bar and Title Bar are being displayed.
Full Screen Toggles the window size between normal and full screen.
A check mark appears to the left of this option if Full
Screen mode is being used.
Help Displays user-defined Help for the screen or currently
selected group or object.
Properties Opens the Properties dialog.
If the cursor is on the CimView screen background, the
screen properties are displayed.
If the cursor is pointing to an object or group that is non-
static, the properties for the object or group are displayed.

CimView Toolbar Buttons

The Toolbar buttons available to you are:
Icon Menu Item Description
Open Window Opens an existing CimView screen in a new window.

Print Prints the screen. Unlike the Print menu item, it does
not display a dialog box first. The screen is
immediately printed.
Help Changes your cursor and allows you display Help for
selected objects, groups, buttons, menus, and screens.
Previous Displays the previous screen in this window.

Home Screen Displays the home screen in this window.

Full Screen Toggles Full Screen mode.

Zoom 100 Zooms the screen to 100%.

Zoom to Fit Zooms the screen to fit the window.

21-8 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 This toolbar is a movable toolbar. You can either display it in a separate window
(also called a floating toolbar), or you can align it to one of the edges of the
CimView window at your discretion (this is also called a docked toolbar).
If you are using a floating toolbar, you can close the Toolbar window by clicking the
Window Menu button on the toolbar.
If you have closed the Toolbar window, you can restore it by clicking Toolbars on
the View menu. When the Options dialog opens, click the Standard toolbar, and
then click OK.

Floating the CimView Toolbar

To display the toolbar as a floating toolbar:
1. Move the cursor to a blank spot in the toolbar.
2. Hold down the mouse button and drag the toolbar to any spot on your
terminal screen that is not a dockable location.
3. Release the mouse button.

Docking the CimView Toolbar

To dock a floating toolbar:
1. Move the cursor to a blank spot on the toolbar.
2. Hold down the mouse button and drag the toolbar to the edge of the
CimView window where you want to put the toolbar.
3. Release the mouse button.

CimView Shortcut Keys

You can use the following shortcut keys to initiate commonly used functions:
Ctrl+O Opens an existing screen in the current window.
Ctrl+P Prints the current window.
Alt+Enter Opens the Screen Properties dialog box.
Alt+Print Screen Captures the current window to the clipboard.
F1 Opens the Help window.
Alt+Spacebar Displays the Control menu. This menu is especially
useful if you have disabled the Menu/Title Bar. You can
use the Control menu to restore the display of the
Menu/Title bar.

GFK-1180 Using CimView 21-9

Displaying A CimView Screen
You can display a screen in many ways. Some of these are:
Outside of CimView:
• Click Start on the Task Bar, select Programs, select CIMPLICITY
HMI, and then select CimView. A dialog opens, allowing you to select
the screen to display.
• Double-click the icon for the screen in a folder or on the desktop.
Within CimView:
• Click on a screen object that has been configured to let you access
another screen.
• Press a key sequence that has been configured to let you access another
screen.

When you look at a screen in CimView, it consists of a set of objects. There are
many types of objects. Among them are:
• Text objects that display text information or point values.
• Graphic objects that represent facility resources and conditions.
• ActiveX controls.
Objects can be static, or they can be animated. CimView can display objects with
movement, rotation, fill, size, or color change animation.

21-10 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 An object can also be configured to perform procedures. A procedure may consist of
one or more of the following actions:
Absolute Setpoint Close Screen Execute Command Home Screen
Invoke Method Invoke Script Open Screen Overlay Screen
Previous Screen Ramp Setpoint Relative Setpoint Toggle Setpoint
Variable Setpoint Variable Assign
In addition to the actions that may be included in procedures, the Slider action may
be configured for object movement and Text objects may be configured for Setpoint
value animation (also known as in-place edit setpoints).
Consult with your CIMPLICITY system manager or project integrator about the
special features of the screens you will be using.

Selecting Action Objects

An object that has mouse events (also referred to as an action object) is one that
meets one or more of the following criteria:
• A mouse down event is defined.
• A mouse up event is defined.
• A slider setpoint is defined.
• An in-place edit setpoint is defined.
• The object is an OLE object that has a primary verb that does not
modify the object (for example, an embedded sound that you click on to
play).
When you move the mouse around the screen, action objects on the screen are
highlighted with a rectangle when the mouse moves over them.
Alternatively, you may locate action objects by pressing the Tab, Shift+Tab or
arrow keys on the keyboard.
• Use Tab to highlight the next object in the tab-order. If no object is
currently highlighted, the first object in the tab-order will be selected.
• Use Shift+Tab to highlight the previous object in the tab-order. If no
object is currently highlighted, the last object in the tab-order will be
selected.
Note
The tab-order of the objects is specified when the screen is created. Consult with
your CIMPLICITY system manager or project integrator about the tab-order.

• Use the arrow keys to highlight the closest object in the direction of the
arrow key. Selection occurs only between active action objects.
If you are currently using a Slider setpoint, the arrows affect the
setpoint, not the selection of another action object.

GFK-1180 Using CimView 21-11

 Executing the Procedure
Once you have highlighted an action object, you can use the left mouse button or the
Enter key to invoke the actions associated with the On mouse down and On
mouse up events assigned to the object.
• When you press the mouse button or the Enter key, the action
associated with the On mouse down event will be executed.
• When you release the mouse button or the Enter key, the action
associated with the On mouse up action will be executed.

Executing Slider Setpoints

The method you use to execute a Slider setpoint depends on whether you selected the
object with the mouse, an arrow key, or the keyboard.
Note
When you use a Slider setpoint, you may be setting different points in the horizontal
and vertical directions

Setpoint Object Selected with the Mouse

Once you have highlighted an object with a Slider setpoint action with the mouse, do
the following to perform the action:
1. Move the mouse cursor over the object.
2. Hold down the left mouse button and move the object in the direction
(vertical and/or horizontal) you want for the setpoint value. As you
move the object, the proposed setpoint value will be displayed in the
Status Bar message area.
3. Release the left mouse button. The new value for the point will be
displayed in the Status Bar.
If the object is also configured with mouse down and mouse up action procedures,
they execute appropriately.
If you want to cancel the Slider setpoint action, move the mouse cursor off the object,
then release the left mouse button, or press the Esc key and release the button.

21-12 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Setpoint Object Selected with the Keyboard
Once you have highlighted an object with a Slider setpoint action with the Tab,
Shift+Tab or arrow keys, do the following to perform the action:
1. To activate the arrow keys for the Slider setpoint action, press Enter.
2. Once the arrow keys are activated for the Slider setpoint action, you
will no longer be able to move the object with the mouse or use the left
mouse button to select other objects.
3. Use the Up and Down arrows for vertical slider actions, and use the
Left and Right arrows for horizontal slider actions. As you use the
arrow keys, the object will move in the direction you choose, and the
proposed setpoint value will be displayed in the Status Bar message
area.
To move the object by one pixel, press an arrow key. The direction of
the key defines the direction of the movement.
To move the object by ten (10) pixels, hold down the Ctrl key, then
press an arrow key.
4. Use the Esc key to cancel the slider action.
5. Use the Enter key to accept the slider action, and perform the setpoint.
The new value for the point will be displayed in the Status Bar.

In-Place Edit Setpoint Actions

You can use the mouse cursor or the Tab or Shift+Tab keys to highlight an object
with an in-place setpoint action. Once you have highlighted the object, do the
following to perform the action:
1. Press Enter or click the object with the left mouse button to activate
the object for editing.
2. Enter the new value for the setpoint.
You can use Ctrl+Z to undo a single level of editing.
You can cancel editing without making any changes to the setpoint, by
pressing Esc, or moving the cursor away from the object and clicking
the left mouse button.
3. Press Enter or Tab to perform the setpoint. If you press Tab, the next
action object is automatically highlighted.

GFK-1180 Using CimView 21-13

Setting CimView Window Options
You can define the following options for a screen in CimView window:
• Toolbar to be displayed
To access the Options dialog box, select Toolbars... from the View menu.

Use the Toolbars properties to select the toolbar to be displayed in your CimView
window. You can also toggle the display of color buttons and ToolTips.
The Toolbars input box shows you the special toolbars available for CimView, and
lets you select the ones to display. Note that the only toolbar currently available is
the Standard toolbar.
The Color Buttons check box lets you enable or disable the display of toolbar
buttons in color.
The Show ToolTips check box lets you enable or disable the display of ToolTips
on the toolbars. When ToolTips are enabled and you move the cursor into a button
on the Toolbar, you will see the button name in a box next to the cursor, and a
description of the button in the Status Bar at the bottom of the window.

21-14 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Displaying CimView Help Information
Help information can be defined for a screen and for objects on the screen in
CimEdit. Help information, when you request it, can be displayed in one of three
ways, depending on how it was generated:
• Text information that was entered on the property sheets will be
displayed in a dialog box.
• If the text was placed in a text file, it will be displayed in a Notepad
window on your screen.
• If the text was placed in a Help file generated by the Help compiler, it
will be displayed in a Help window on your screen.

Displaying CimView Screen Help

You can display help information for a screen in one of several ways:
You can:
• Click On Screen from the Help menu. If On Screen is grayed out,
there is no help information for the screen.
Or you can:
1. Click the Help button on the Toolbar.
2. Move the Help cursor to the screen background (that is, away from any
objects on the screen).
3. Click the left mouse button. The help information for the screen will be
displayed. If there is no help information for the screen, a "No help
defined for this screen" dialog box is displayed.
Or you can:
1. Move the cursor to the screen background (that is, away from any
objects on the screen).
2. Click the right mouse button. The window pop-up menu will appear.
3. Click Help in the pop-up menu. The help information for the screen
will be displayed. If Help is grayed out in the pop-up menu, there is no
help information for the screen.

GFK-1180 Using CimView 21-15

 Displaying CimView Object Help
You can display help for an object in one of several ways.
You can:
1. Click the Help button on the Toolbar.
2. Move the Help cursor to the object.
3. Click the left mouse button. The help information for the object will be
displayed. If there is no help information for the object, a "No help
defined for this object" dialog box is displayed.
Or you can:
1. Move the cursor to the object.
2. Click the right mouse button. The window pop-up menu will appear.
3. Click Help in the pop-up menu. The help information for the object
will be displayed. If Help is grayed out in the pop-up menu, there is no
help available for the object.

Displaying CimView Screen Properties

You cannot define or modify screen properties in CimView, but you can display
them. You will be able to show:
• Line and fill style, colors, and patterns for the screen.
• The screen size.
• Object help information for the screen.
• Events configured for the screen.
• Screen ambient properties.
• The list of point defined for the screen and the objects associated with
them.
• Variable IDs used by the screen.
• Procedures defined for the screen.
To display screen properties:
1. Hold down the right mouse button.
2. Select Properties from the drop-down menu.
When you are finished looking at the properties, click OK or Cancel to close the
dialog box and return to your screen.

21-16 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Displaying CimView Object Properties
You can display object properties for non-static objects. Non-static objects have one
or more of the following configured:
• Animation
• Events
• Help
You cannot define or modify object properties in CimView, but you can display
them. To display object properties:
1. Move the mouse cursor to the object.
2. Hold down the right mouse button.
3. Select Properties from the drop-down menu.
When you are finished looking at the properties, click OK or Cancel to close the
dialog box and return to your screen.

CimView Command Line Options

When a CimView screen is installed in a program group, arguments can be added to
command line for its icon to control user access. The command line can also be used
to launch multiple CimView screens from the icon.
The command line format is:
cimview.exe <option> <pathname> [<pathname>...]

For example, if you want to display your CimView screens in a window without a
Menu Bar and Title Bar, the command line would look like this:
cimview.exe /nomenutitle c:\cimplicity\projects\proj\ini.cim

If multiple CimView screens are launched from a single command line and
command line options are used, the first screen in the list is the primary window. For
example, if /alwaysmaximized is used, the first screen in the list will be
maximized, and all other screens will be displayed in their normal windows.
The following command line options can be associated with a CimView icon:

/alwaysmaximized
Displays the primary CimView window in a maximized state. You will not be
allowed to resize the primary window. The window will not rise to the top when you
click on it (this prevents it from obscuring other windows on your terminal screen).
This option is only applied if it is used with the first CimView window opened. This
window is known as the primary window. If used with subsequent open commands,
it will be ignored.

GFK-1180 Using CimView 21-17

 Example:
cimview.exe /alwaysmaximized C:\myproj\scr.cim

/geometry <width>x<height><±xoff><±yoff>
Sizes and positions the CimView window when it opens. The screen is sized to fit
the window. All fields are in pixels.
The arguments for this command line option are:
<width> specifies the window width.
<height> specifies the window height.
<+xoff> specifies the offset from the left edge of the terminal screen and
<-xoff> specifies the offset from the right edge of the terminal screen.
<+yoff> specifies the offset from the top edge of the terminal screen and
<-yoff> specifies the offset from the bottom of the terminal screen.
Example:
cimview.exe /geometry 200x200+100+200 C:\myproj\scr.cim

opens the screen in a 200x200 window that is 100 pixels from the left side of the
terminal screen and 200 pixels from the top edge of the terminal screen

/keypad
Displays a keypad window on the user’s screen whenever the user has to perform a
Variable Setpoint action in a procedure. To enter a new setpoint value, the user
clicks on the appropriate keys in the keypad window rather than entering them from a
keyboard.
This option is only applied if it is used with the first CimView window opened. This
window is known as the primary window. If used with subsequent open commands,
it will be ignored.
Example
cimview.exe /keypad C:\myproj\scr.cim

/noexit
Will not let you exit the primary CimView window.
The Exit menu item is removed from the File menu, and the Close menu item and
its Alt+F4 shortcut key are removed from the Control menu. Close Screen actions
are ignored in the primary window.
This option is only applied if it is used with the first CimView window opened. This
window is known as the primary window. If used with subsequent open commands,
it will be ignored.
Example:
cimview.exe /noexit C:\myproj\scr.cim

21-18 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 /nomenutitle
Removes the Menu Bar and Title Bar from the primary CimView window and all
subsequent windows that you open.
This option is applied to the new windows and also any windows that are opened
from within CimView. If a later CimView command is executed without the
option, the option is disabled for those windows and any new windows opened from
within CimView.
Example:
cimview.exe /nomenutitle C:\myproj\scr.cim

/noopen
Lets you open only the CimView screens that are explicitly mentioned in Open
Screen and Overlay Screen actions. Open Screen and Overlay Screen actions that do
not specify a screen are ignored.
In addition, the Open and Open Window menu items and the file list are removed
from the File menu, and the File Open Toolbar button is disabled.
This option is applied to the new windows and also any windows that are opened
from within CimView. If a later CimView command is executed without the
option, the option is disabled for those windows and any new windows opened from
within CimView.
Example:
cimview.exe /noopen C:\myproj\scr.cim

/noresize
Prevents you from resizing any CimView windows that you display.
This option is applied to the new windows and also any windows that are opened
from within CimView. If a later CimView command is executed without the
option, the option is disabled for those windows and any new windows opened from
within CimView.
Example:
cimview.exe /noresize C:\myproj\scr.cim

/project <name>
Sets the base project to <name>.
The data for all unqualified points on the windows that you display will be requested
from the named project.
This option is applied to the new windows and also to any windows that are opened
from within CimView. If a later CimView command is executed without the
option, the previous value for the default project continues to be used.
Example:
cimview.exe /project myproj C:\myproj\scr.cim

GFK-1180 Using CimView 21-19

 /wait
Makes CimView wait for the Router to start before opening the window.
Example:
cimview.exe /wait C:\myproj\scr.cim

/waitforproject <name>
Makes CimView wait for the project to start before opening the window
Example:
cimview.exe /waitforproj myproj C:\myproj\scr.cim

/zoomtobestfit
Initially places the primary CimView window in Zoom To Best Fit mode. All
subsequent windows are also displayed in this mode.
This option is applied to the new windows and also any windows that are opened
from within CimView.
Example:
cimview.exe /zoomtobestfit C:\myproj\scr.cim

OLE Controls in CimView

OLE Controls such as the CIMPLICITY Trend Control, define their own behavior.
Mouse events in the area defined for the control are caught by the control, and the
response is defined by the control.
For example, an OLE control may not highlight areas that you can click on when the
mouse moves over them.
If you click the right mouse button over the control, the pop-up menu for the control
(if defined) is displayed, not the CimView pop-up menu.
An embedded OLE object (other than a control) is highlighted with a slashed border.
To activate an embedded OLE control, you must double-click the object.

21-20 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Using the Point Control Panel

About the Point Control Panel

The Point Control Panel lets you:
• View the current point values for points in any project in your
enterprise.
• Perform setpoints on points you are displaying.
• Enable/disable alarms for points you are displaying.
• Change the alarm limits for points you are displaying.
• Save a Point Control Panel document and redisplay it at a later time.

Getting Started
To open a Point Control Panel window, select the Point Control Panel icon in your
CIMPLICITY HMI menu.
The initial Point Control Panel window opens.

To display a new, empty list, select New from the File menu.

GFK-1180 22-1

Point Control Panel
documents are saved with the
extension .PPL
22-2
To display a saved Point Control Panel document, select Open from the File menu,
or, if the document is in the list of recent files, just click on the file name in the list.
To print the current state of the Point Control Panel, select Print from the File
menu. If you want to see what your printout will look like, select Print Preview. If
you need to change the printer, paper type or page orientation, select Print Setup….
To save a Point Control Panel document, select Save from the File menu. When
the Save As dialog box opens, enter a file name for the file and select OK. By
default, Point Control Panel documents are placed in the main CIMPLICITY HMI
directory, but you can select another directory.
To exit the Point Control Panel, select Exit from the File menu.
To add points to the list, select Add… from the Edit menu.
To display the properties of a point, select it, then select Properties from the Edit
menu.
To delete a point from the list, select it and press Delete or select Delete from the
Edit menu.
To change the font colors for point alarming, select Colors from the Font menu.
You may see the following icons displayed next to points in the Point Control Panel:
This icon is displayed if the point is not valid.
This icon is displayed after you successfully disable alarming for a point.
This icon is displayed after you change the current alarms limits for a point.
Displaying Points
When you select Add… from the Edit menu or press Ctrl+A, the Select a Point
browser opens.
Select the project from which you want to display points. To request a list of all
points, just select Browse. To refine the list, you can enter search strings for Point
ID, Device ID, Resource, Point Type or Description, then select Browse.
When the list of points displays in the list box, select the ones you want to display,
then select OK.
The Select a Point browser closes and the Point Control Panel redisplays with the
points you selected. All the points you requested are automatically selected in the
Point Control Panel so that you can just look at them, and then delete them from the
view if you wish.
The current value, units and timestamp for each point are displayed in the Point
Control Panel. If a point is in an alarm condition, its text is displayed in the
appropriate color.
You can display point properties for each point in the list. You can also perform a
setpoint, enable/disable alarming and set new alarm limits for each point in the list.
CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Displaying Point Properties
To display properties for a point, you can do one of the following:
• Double-click on the point in the list.
• Select the point, then select Properties from the Edit menu.
• Select the point then press Alt+Enter.
The Point Properties dialog box opens. Use this dialog box to view point details and
alarm information. You can also perform a setpoint, enable/disable alarming and set
new alarm limits.
Note

If the point has no alarming or has On update alarming, the Alarm property page
does not appear in the dialog box.

Details

This property page shows you the Point Type and Resource for the point, its access,
display limits, current value and units and password.
Use this property page to perform a setpoint on the point’s value. To do this, enter
the new value in the Set Value field and select Apply or OK. If you select Apply,
the dialog remains open. If you select OK, the dialog closes. In either case, the
Point Control Panel is updated to reflect your changes.

GFK-1180 Using the Point Control Panel 22-3

 Alarm

The contents of this property page depend on whether you are viewing an Analog or
Boolean point type.
• For Analog point types, this property page shows you whether alarming
is enabled for the point and the configured and current alarm and
warning limits.
• For Boolean point types, this property page shows you whether
alarming is enabled for this point and the configured alarm state.
Use the Alarm Enabled field to enable or disable alarming for the point. If you
disable alarming, the Disabled icon - - displays next to the point in the Point
Control Panel main window. If the point is already in an Alarm state and you disable
it, the state is reset to Normal. If you enable alarming for a point that is already in an
Alarm state, the alarm is generated.
Use the Current fields in the Alarm Limits section to change alarm limits. If you
change alarm limits, the Modified icon - - displays next to the point in the Point
Control Panel main window.
After you change alarm information on this page, you can select Apply or OK to
have the changes take place. If you select Apply, the dialog box remains open. If
you select OK, the dialog box closes. In either case, the Point Control Panel updates
to reflect your changes.
To return to configured alarm limits, select Restore Alarm Limits.

22-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Changing Font Colors
When you select Colors from the Font menu the Font Color dialog box opens.

You can set the foreground (text) and background colors for the following states:
Normal Points that are in normal state display with these colors
Warning Points that are in Warning High or Warning Low state
display with these colors
Alarm Points that are in Alarm High or Alarm Low state display
with these colors
Wait for response Points for which the Point Control Panel is waiting for a
response display with these colors.
To change a color, click the drop-down list button to the right of the color you want
to change. When the palette opens, select the basic color or custom color you want,
and then select OK.
After you have defined your display colors, select OK to close the Font Color dialog
box closes and redisplay the Point Control Panel in the colors you have selected.
Select Cancel to close the dialog box without making any changes.

GFK-1180 Using the Point Control Panel 22-5


Point Control Panel
documents are saved with the
extension .PPL
22-6
Saving A Point Control Panel Document
To save a Point Control Panel document, select Save or Save As from the File
menu. The Save As dialog box opens.
Enter the file name you want in the File name field, then select the full path name
for the document. Select Save to save the document. The document is saved in the
directory you specify.
You can then select the document and create a shortcut for it on your desktop or in a
start menu.
CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Using the CIMPLICITY To
Windows Server (DDE)

About The CIMPLICITY To Windows Server

The CIMPLICITY to Windows Server (CWSERV) lets you access CIMPLICITY
point data from other Microsoft Windows products such as Microsoft Excel.
CWSERV uses the Microsoft standard of Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE). With
CWSERV, you can use your favorite software package that supports DDE to
monitor, analyze, report, or modify CIMPLICITY point data.

Command Syntax for CWSERV

Generally, a DDE command consists of three elements - the name of the service
being used, the topic, and the item.
For the CIMPLICITY to Windows Server:
• The service is CWSERV.
• The topics supported are POINT and SYSTEM. Use the Point topic to
display CIMPLICITY point information. Use the System topic to
display CWSERV system information.
• The items supported for the POINT topic correspond to various point
attributes such as value, alarm limits, and point state.
• The items supported for the SYSTEM topic are FORMATS,
SYSITEMS, TOPICS, and HELP.
The format of a particular DDE command depends on how it has been implemented
in the application where you are using it.

GFK-1180 23-1
 Microsoft Excel Example
The syntax for a CWSERV command in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, is:
=cwserv|point!<point_id>.<attribute>[n:mD]
where:
<point_id> is the CIMPLICITY Point ID whose data is being retrieved.
You may enter an unqualified or fully qualified (by project or
node name) Point ID.
<attribute> is the point attribute of interest. If you do not enter an attribute,
CWSERV uses "VALUE" as the default.
n:m is the range of array elements desired . If you do not enter a
range, CWSERV uses "[0]" as the default.
Enter "[n]" to specify a single element of an array.
D If you have requested a range of elements, use this field to
specify the display format. Enter "C" to display the elements in
a column, or "R" to display the elements in a row. If you do
not enter a display format, CWSERV uses "C" as the default.

Sample CWSERV Commands

This syntax will display the value of the point "ANALOG_POINT":
=cwserv|point!analog_point
This syntax will display the current state of the point "ANALOG_POINT":
=cwserv|point!analog_point.state
This syntax will display the sixth through tenth values of the array point
"ARRAY_POINT" in a row:
=cwserv|point!array_point.value[5:9R]
This syntax will display the value of the point "ANALOG_POINT" in the "TEST"
project:
=cwserv|point!\\test\analog_point.value

23-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Point Topic Attributes
The following point attributes can be displayed:
• VALUE
• RAW_VALUE
• STATE
• TYPE
• LENGTH
• ELEMENTS
• SIZE
• DISP_FORMAT
• EU_LABEL
• ALARM_HIGH
• ALARM_LOW
• WARN_HIGH
• WARN_LOW
• DISP_HIGH
• DISP_LOW
• INIT_STATE
• ALARM_ENABLED
• WARN_ENABLED

VALUE
Displays the converted (EU) value of the point. If there is no conversion, the raw
value is displayed. If you do not enter an attribute in the CWSERV command, this is
the default attribute that is displayed.

RAW_VALUE
Displays the raw value of the point.

STATE
Displays the current state of the point.
The point’s current state depends on its point class and alarm conditions.
For all point classes, the states that can be displayed are:
NORMAL The point’s value is within normal limits, and no alarms
are outstanding.
UNAVAILABLE If the point is a device point, communications with the
device have failed, and the point can no longer be read.
If the point is a virtual point, one or more of the source
points that comprise this point is unavailable.
For Analog and APPL point classes, the additional states that can be displayed are:
ALARM HIGH The point’s value is greater than the high alarm limit.
ALARM LOW The point’s value is less than the low alarm limit.
WARNING HIGH The point’s value is greater than the warning high limit

GFK-1180 Using the CIMPLICITY To Windows Server (DDE) 23-3

 and less than the alarm high limit.

23-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 WARNING LOW The point’s value is less than the warning low limit and
greater than the alarm low limit.
OUT OF RANGE The point is an Analog or APPL device point with
engineering units conversion, and its value exceeds one of
its conversion limits.
For the Digital (Boolean) point class, the additional states that can be displayed are:
ALARM The point’s value is in the alarm state.
WARNING You will only see this message if Enable Alarms has been
reset, Enable Warning is set, and the point’s value is in the
alarm state.

TYPE
Displays the point’s type. You will see one of the following:
• BOOLEAN
• BITSTRING
• OCTETSTRING
• CHARACTERSTRING
• UNSIGNED INTEGER 1
• UNSIGNED INTEGER 2
• UNSIGNED INTEGER 4
• INTEGER 1
• INTEGER 2
• INTEGER 4
• FLOATING POINT
• STRUCTURE
Note
OCTETSTRING points are not currently supported by CWSERV. If you try to
display such a point’s VALUE or RAW_VALUE attribute, "#NAME?" will be
displayed on the Excel spreadsheet.

LENGTH
Displays the length of the point. This field is only meaningful for the following point
types:
• BITSTRING
• OCTETSTRING

ELEMENTS
Displays the number of elements contained in the point.

SIZE
Displays the size of the data.

DISP_FORMAT
Displays the format used when displaying the point’s value in Alarm Viewer, Status
Log messages, or CimView.

GFK-1180 Using the CIMPLICITY To Windows Server (DDE) 23-5

 EU_LABEL
Displays the engineering units label for the point. The label can be up to eight (8)
characters long.

ALARM_HIGH
Displays the Alarm High value for the point. This field is only valid for the
following point types:
• ANALOG
• APPL
If the point’s value exceeds this number, the point is in ALARM HIGH state.

ALARM_LOW
Displays the Alarm Low value for the point. This field is only valid for the
following point types:
• ANALOG
• APPL
If the point’s value is less than this number, the point is in ALARM LOW state.

WARN_HIGH
Displays the Warning High value for the point. This field is only valid for the
following point types:
• ANALOG
• APPL
If the point’s value is greater than this number, but less than the Alarm High
number, the point is in WARNING HIGH state.

WARN_LOW
Displays the Warning Low value for the point. This field is only valid for the
following point types:
• ANALOG
• APPL
If the point’s value is less than this number, but greater than the Alarm Low number,
the point is in WARNING LOW state.

DISP_HIGH
Displays the high limit for the display value for this point. This field is only valid for
the following point types:
• ANALOG
• APPL

DISP_LOW
Displays the low limit for the display value for this point. This field is only valid for
the following point types:
• ANALOG
• APPL

23-6 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 INIT_STATE
Indicates whether the point is enabled or disabled. You will see one of the following
values:
0 The point is disabled
1 The point is enabled.

ALARM_ENABLED
Indicates whether high/low alarms are enabled or disabled for this point. You will
see one of the following values:
0 High/Low alarm messages are disabled for the point.
1 High/Low alarm messages are enabled for the point.

WARN_ENABLED
Indicates whether high/low warnings are enabled or disabled for this point.
0 High/Low warning messages are disabled for the point
1 High/Low warning messages are enabled for the point.

Using CWSERV with Microsoft Excel

You can use CWSERV on a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet to display point
information, and to update setpoints in the CIMPLICITY point database.

Displaying Point Data

To display CIMPLICITY point information in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet:
1. Select the cell where you want the point information to appear.
2. Enter the CWSERV formula in the cell, then press Enter.
For example, to display the raw value for the point CWSERV_VIRT, you would
type:
=cwserv|point!cwserv_virt.raw_value
To display an array in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet:
1. Select a range of cells (horizontal or vertical) where you want the point
information to appear.
2. Enter the CWSERV formula, and enclose the point information within
single quotes, then press Ctrl+Shift+Enter.
For example, to display the raw values for the ten-item array CWSERV_ARRAY in a
column on your spreadsheet, you would type
=cwserv|point!’cwserv_array.raw_value[0:9c]’

GFK-1180 Using the CIMPLICITY To Windows Server (DDE) 23-7

 Starting CWSERV
The first time you enter point information into a spreadsheet, the following dialog
box will be displayed:

This dialog box will also be displayed if you open a spreadsheet that contains
CWSERV commands and the CWSERV server is not active.
Click Yes to start CWSERV.
This dialog box will appear every time you open the spreadsheet:

Click Yes to reconnect to CWSERV to access data. If CWSERV is not running, you
will be asked if you want to start it. Click Yes to start CWSERV.
If you are connecting to the project for the first time, or your login timeout has
expired, the CIMPLICITY Login dialog box for the project is displayed.

Enter your CIMPLICITY username and password and click OK. Your spreadsheet
will now start to display the CIMPLICITY data you requested in the CWSERV
commands.

CWSERV Icon
While the server is active, you will see this icon on your terminal screen:

23-8 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Modifying Point Data
You can write Excel macros to update setpoints in CIMPLICITY software from a
spreadsheet. These macros will use the DDE POKE request. You can use this
request to change the value or raw_value attributes of a CIMPLICITY point.
Important
Setpoint security is not enforced. A user can set any CIMPLICITY point
that has write access, regardless of the setpoint security restrictions
configured within the CIMPLICITY system. You must establish
appropriate operational practices and procedures to prevent undesired
setpoint operations, and users must follow these practices and
procedures carefully.

Macro Format
The format for a Microsoft Excel macro that performs a setpoint is:
• Enter the macro name on the first line.
• Enter channel=INITIATE("cwserv","point") on the second
line to open the CWSERV channel.
• Enter =POKE(channel, "<point_id>.<attribute>",
<sheet location> for each setpoint you want to perform.
• Enter =TERMINATE(channel) to close the channel.
• Enter =RETURN() to terminate the macro.
An example of such a macro is:
set_point
channel=INITIATE("cwserv","point")
=POKE(channel,"cwserv_virt.value",Sheet1!R17C3)
=TERMINATE(channel)
=RETURN()

You can enter any number of POKE commands in the macro.

If you are performing setpoints on an array, you can use one POKE command to set
multiple array values. For example, if you want to set an array of ten items from
information in a column on the spreadsheet, you can use a POKE command like this:
=POKE(channel,"cwserv_array.raw_value[0:9]",Sheet1!R4C4:R13C4)
This command will take the values in rows 4 through 13 of column 4 of the
spreadsheet and use them to set the first 10 values in the CWSERV_ARRAY point.

Performance Considerations
When you perform a large number of DDE POKE requests from an application such
as Microsoft Excel, the DDE server application may fall behind. Under Excel, this
will cause some requests to timeout and fail.

GFK-1180 Using the CIMPLICITY To Windows Server (DDE) 23-9

 To avoid this condition, insert delays in your setpoint macros as follows:
ManyPoints
channel=INITIATE("cwserv","point")
=POKE(channel,"point001.value",Sheet1!D4)
=POKE(channel,"point002.value",Sheet1!D5)
=POKE(channel,"point003.value",Sheet1!D6)
=POKE(channel,"point004.value",Sheet1!D7)
=WAIT(NOW() + "00:00:01")
=POKE(channel,"point005.value",Sheet1!E4)
=POKE(channel,"point006.value",Sheet1!E5)
=POKE(channel,"point007.value",Sheet1!E6)
=POKE(channel,"point008.value",Sheet1!E7)
=WAIT(NOW() + "00:00:01")
=POKE(channel,"point009.value",Sheet1!F4)
=POKE(channel,"point010.value",Sheet1!F5)
=POKE(channel,"point011.value",Sheet1!F6)
=POKE(channel,"point012.value",Sheet1!F7)
=TERMINATE(channel)
=RETURN()

Depending on the performance and configuration of your computer, your delay

requirements may vary.
Implementing A Macro
You will need to do the following to implement a macro that performs a setpoint and
assign it to a button:
1. Select a location on your spreadsheet where you want to enter the
point’s setpoint value. Make a note of the sheet name and cell location.
2. If you have not already done so, select Toolbars from the View menu
and activate the Drawing toolbar.
3. Select Record Macro from the Tools menu on your spreadsheet.
4. Select Record New Macro from the Record Macro submenu. The
Record New Macro dialog box will open.
5. Enter your new macro name in the Macro Name input box.
6. Click Options.
7. Select This Workbook from the Store In input box.
8. Select MS Excel 4.0 Macro from the Language input box.
9. Click OK. A new Macro sheet will be created and the macro name will
be placed in the first cell (R1C1) of the sheet.
10. Select Record Macro from the Tools menu.
11. Select Stop Recording from the Record Macro submenu.
12. Enter your commands in the cells under the macro name on the Macro
page.
13. Go back to your sheet.
14. Select Create Button from the Drawing toolbar.
15. Create a button on the spreadsheet. When you do this, the Assign
Macro dialog box will open.
16. Select the setpoint macro from the Assign Macro dialog box.
Whenever a user enters the setpoint in the cell referenced by the macro, then clicks
the button, the setpoint value will be sent to CIMPLICITY software.

23-10 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Sample Spreadsheets and Macros
Two spreadsheet and macro sets are given here. The first spreadsheet and macro
show you how to display all the attributes of a single point, and perform a setpoint on
that point. The second spreadsheet and macro show you how to display the raw
values for an array point and perform a setpoint on the entire array.

Single Point Example

The following spreadsheet was configured to display all available point attributes for
CWSERV_VIRT, and to let the user perform a setpoint on that point.

The formulas that appear in cells R5C3 through R17C3 are:

R5C3 =cwserv|point!cwserv_virt.value
R6C3 =cwserv|point!cwserv_virt.state
R7C3 =cwserv|point!cwserv_virt.disp_format
R8C3 =cwserv|point!cwserv_virt.eu_label
R9C3 =cwserv|point!cwserv_virt.alarm_high
R10C3 =cwserv|point!cwserv_virt.warn_high
R11C3 =cwserv|point!cwserv_virt.warn_low
R12C3 =cwserv|point!cwserv_virt.alarm_low
R13C3 =cwserv|point!cwserv_virt.disp_high
R14C3 =cwserv|point!cwserv_virt.disp_low
R15C3 =cwserv|point!cwserv_virt.alarm_enabled
R16C3 =cwserv|point!cwserv_virt.warn_enabled
R17C3 =cwserv|point!cwserv_virt.init_state

GFK-1180 Using the CIMPLICITY To Windows Server (DDE) 23-11

 The following macro is the one associated with the Set button above.
set_point
channel=INITIATE("cwserv","point")
=POKE(channel,"cwserv_virt.value",Sheet1!R19C3)
=TERMINATE(channel)
=RETURN()

To change the setpoint, enter the new point value in cell R19C3, then click Set.
Array Point Example
The following spreadsheet was configured to display the raw values for
CWSERV_ARRAY, an array point with ten (10) elements, and to let a user perform
a setpoint on the array:

To create the display, cells R5C3 through R14C3 were selected, and the following
formula was entered:
=cwserv|point!’cwserv_array.raw_value[0:9c]’

and Ctrl+Shift+Enter was pressed.

Note
You must press Ctrl+Shift+Enter when entering a formula for a range of cells on
the spreadsheet. If you press Enter, only the first cell of the range will contain data.
In the case of array points, this means that only the first array element’s value is
displayed.
The following macro is the one associated with the Set button above.
Array
channel=INITIATE("cwserv","point")
=POKE(channel,"cwserv_array.raw_value[0:9]",Sheet1!R5C4:R14C4)
=TERMINATE(channel)
=RETURN()

To change the setpoint, enter the new values in R5C4 through R14C4, and click Set.

23-12 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Command Syntax for System Topic
The System topic contains information about CWSERV. You can display:
• Formats supported by CWSERV.
• System items supported by CWSERV.
• Topic supported by CWSERV.
• Help information about CWSERV.

Formats
CWSERV currently supports the CF_TEXT format.
To display format information on a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet:
1. Select one (1) cell in the spreadsheet.
2. Type the following formula in the cell and press Enter:
=cwserv|system!formats
The resulting display should look like this:
CF_TEXT

System Items
CWSERV currently supports four system items - Formats, Help, SysItems, and
Topics.
To display system item information on a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet:
1. Select four (4) rows in one column in the spreadsheet.
2. Type the following formula in the first cell and press
Ctrl+Shift+Enter.
=cwserv|system!sysitems
The resulting display should look like this:
Formats
Help
SysItems
Topics

Topics
CWSERV currently supports two topics - Point and System.
To display topic information on a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet:
1. Select two (2) rows in one column in the spreadsheet.
2. Type the following formula in the first cell and press
Ctrl+Shift+Enter.
=cwserv|system!topics
The resulting display should look like this:
System
POINT

GFK-1180 Using the CIMPLICITY To Windows Server (DDE) 23-13

 Help
You can display descriptive information about CWSERV. This information tells you
how to display information, and lists the System and Point topic attributes.
To display information about CWSERV on a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet:
1. Select 38 rows in one column in the spreadsheet.
2. Type the following formula in the first cell and press
Ctrl+Shift+Enter.
=cwserv|system!help
The resulting display should look like this:
CIMPLICITY to Windows Server (CWSERV):
0
This server provides clients with access to current CIMPLICITY point data.
The topics supported include SYSTEM and POINT.
0
The SYSTEM topic gives information about this server.
Supported items under the SYSTEM topic include the following:
Formats: Lists all supported formats.
SysItems: Lists all items supported under the SYSTEM topic.
Topics: Lists all supported Topics.
Help: Provides information about this server.
0
The items under the POINT topic are in the following format:
point_id.attr[start:endR]
point_id = tag name of the point [REQUIRED],
attr = type of point data desired [default = VALUE],
start and end = beginning and ending indices of an array point [default = 0], and
R = Row formatting for array elements (tab deliminated) [default = Column (<CR><LF> deliminated)].
0
Supported items under the POINT topic include the following:
VALUE: Point data value. (converted).
RAW_VALUE: Point raw data value (non-converted).
STATE: Current state of the point.
TYPE: Data type.
LENGTH: Length of point data.
ELEMENTS: Number of elements in the point for an array point.
SIZE: Size of point data.
DISP_FORMAT: Display format.
EU_LABEL: Engineering units label.
ALARM_HIGH: High alarm limit.
ALARM_LOW: Low alarm limit.
WARN_HIGH: High warning limit.
WARN_LOW: Low warning limit.
DISP_HIGH: High display limit.
DISP_LOW: Low display limit.
INIT_STATE: Initial state of point.
ALARM_ENABLED:1 if the alarm is currently enabled.
WARN_ENABLED: 1 if the warning limits are currently enabled.

23-14 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Error Messages
If the VALUE or RAW_VALUE field displays "******", there is a problem reading
the point data from the device.
If a field displays "#N/A", the attribute you requested does not contain a value.
If a field displays "#NAME?", you can have one of several problems; for example:
• You have entered an invalid Point ID or attribute name.
• The attribute is not supported by the point type.
• CWSERV does not support the point type for value displays.
When you see a "#NAME?" error in a field, check your project’s Status Log file for
detailed information on the cause of the problem.

Remote Access of CWSERV on Windows NT

You can access CWSERV from a networked NT system using Microsoft NetDDE.
This requires that you first set up a DDE Share on the Server node where CWSERV
is running. Then, when referencing CWSERV through DDE on the client, you must
be sure to indicate that you are using NetDDE. The following are a few notes to help
in this operation.

Creating a DDE Share

To create a DDE Share on the server node:
1. Open a command prompt and type:
start DDEShare
2. When the DDE Share window opens, select DDE Shares … from the
Shares menu.
3. Select Add a Share…. A DDE Share Properties dialog opens.
4. Enter CWSERV$ as the Share Name.
5. For all three Application Name boxes, enter CWSERV.
6. For all three Topic Name boxes, enter POINT.
7. Select the Allow Start Application checkbox.
8. Select the Is Service checkbox.
9. Select OK.

GFK-1180 Using the CIMPLICITY To Windows Server (DDE) 23-15

 Referencing CWSERV from a Networked NT Client
Once you have setup the DDE Share on the server and CWSERV is running, you can
access CWSERV from a client node. The syntax is slightly different than if
CWSERV were running locally. The Service or Application name becomes the node
name together with NDDE$. The topic name is the DDE Share name you just
created. The Item name remains the same as it would locally.
Service/Application name: \\nodeName\NDDE$
Topic name: CWSERV$

Example in Microsoft Excel

When accessing CWSERV from EXCEL, you must put the Service/Application and
Topic names in single quotes because of the ’$’ characters.
To access the value of the point, GEF_DEMO_ASETPT, from the node ALBP64,
type the following:
’\\albp64\ndde$’|’CWSERV$’!GEF_DEMO_ASETPT.value

23-16 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
System Utilities

About System Utilities

You can access the System Utilities after you install and license the System Utilities
option. The utilities are:
• Show Users
• Login Panel
• Program Control
Use Show Users to see what users are logged on to the various CIMPLICITY HMI
projects running on your network.
Use Login Panel to log in and out of CIMPLICITY HMI projects on the computer
and monitor saved logins.
Use Program Control to view, start, and stop processes for a project.

GFK-1180 24-1
Using Show Users
Show Users is an interactive process that lets you show the users on the various
CIMPLICITY HMI projects running on your network.

Starting Show Users

To start Show Users, select the Show Users icon from the CIMPLICITY HMI menu.
If no project is running on the computer, the Select CIMPLICITY Project dialog box
opens. Use this dialog box to start a project.

At this point, you can start as a Viewer, or select a project to start.

If a project is already running, or after you start a project or start as a Viewer, the
Show Users window opens.

From this window, you can

• Select all projects or a particular project to display.
• Search for users.
• Access Help.

24-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Show Users Menu Options
You can use the menu options to open a project, toggle the Toolbar and Status bar
displays, change display attributes, and access Help.

The Project Menu

When you select the Project menu, the following drop-down list displays:

The Project menu functions are:

Open Opens a new project on the network.
Recent Project Displays the list of recently opened projects and lets you select one.
Exit Exits Show Users.

The View Menu

When you select the View menu, the following drop-down list displays:

The View menu functions are:

Toolbar Enables/disables the display of the Toolbar.
Status Bar Enables/disables the display of the Status bar.
Options... Selects options from the Options dialog box.

The Help Menu

When you select the Help menu, the following drop-down list displays:

The Help menu functions are:

Contents Opens the Contents page for the Show Users help file.
Search for Help On Opens the Index page for the Show Users help file.
How to Use Help Opens the Contents page for the Show Users help file.
About ShowUser... Displays the current version number for the Show Users
utility.

GFK-1180 System Utilities 24-3

 The Search Menu
When you have one or more projects open in this window, the Search menu is
available. When you select the Search menu, the following drop-down list displays:

The Search menu functions are:

Search Displays the Search dialog box.
Next Displays the next line of user information that meets the search
criteria.
Previous Displays the previous line of user information that meets the
search criteria.

The Window Menu

When you have one or more projects open in this window, the Window menu is
available. When you select the Window menu, the following drop-down list
displays:

The Window menu functions are:

Cascade Cascades the currently open project windows.
Tile Horizontally Tiles the currently open project windows horizontally.
Tile Vertically Tiles the currently open project windows vertically.
Arrange Icons Arranges the icons for all minimized project windows.
Close All Closes all project windows.
Open Projects Displays the list of all opened projects in Show Users. To
activate the display of a project in this list, just click on it.

24-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Show Users Toolbar Buttons
The Toolbar buttons available to you are:
Open Opens a project.

Close Closes the active session.

Search Searches for a User.

Search Next Searches for the next User.

Search Previous Searches for the previous User.

Tile Windows Tiles windows horizontally.

Tile Windows Tiles windows vertically.

Cascade Windows Cascades windows.

Show Users Shortcut Keys

You can use the following shortcut keys to initiate commonly used functions:
Ctrl+O Opens a project.
Ctrl+S Opens the Search dialog box.
Ctrl+N Finds the next entry that matches the criteria in the Search
dialog box.
Ctrl+P Finds the previous entry that matches the criteria in the
Search dialog box.
Alt+Print Screen Captures the contents of the current window to the
clipboard.
F1 Opens the Help window.
Shift+F1 Invokes the Help cursor.
Alt+F4 Closes the current window. You will be prompted to save
any changes.
Ctrl+Esc For Windows 95, opens the Start Menu on the taskbar.
For Windows NT, opens the Task List dialog box.

GFK-1180 System Utilities 24-5

 Changing View Options
To display and modify the View options for Show Users, click Options... from the
View menu. The Options dialog box opens.

You can select the following options:

• If you set the On user login check box, a sound plays whenever a
user logs in to any CIMPLICITY project that you are viewing.
If you clear the check box, no sound plays when users log in to
CIMPLICITY projects that you are viewing.
• If you set the On user logout check box, a sound plays whenever a
users logs out of any CIMPLICITY project that you are viewing.
If you clear the check box, no sound plays when users log out of
CIMPLICITY projects that you are viewing.
When you are through selecting the options you want, select OK to close the dialog
box and save your changes, or select Cancel to close the dialog box without
implementing any changes.

Opening A Project in Show Users

If the project that you want to display is in the list of projects in the Project menu,
click on it. You will be prompted to login to the project. After you login, a
subwindow for the project will be displayed in the Show Users window.
Otherwise, to open a project, you can do one of the following:
• Select Open from the Project menu.
• Press Ctrl+O.
• Click the Open icon on the toolbar.
When the Open dialog box opens, it displays a list of currently running projects that
are broadcasting.

24-6 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 To open a project window, you can do one of the following:
• Double-click on a project in the list.
• Select a project in the list, then select Open.
• Enter a project name in the Project field, a node name in the Node
field, and then select Open.
After you select the project, the Open dialog box closes, and you are prompted to log
in to the project.
After you have logged in to the project, a subwindow for the project is displayed in
the Show Users window. The title bar for the subwindow displays the Project name
and node name of the computer on which the project is running.

The subwindow for the project displays the User ID, Role, Node and Process ID of
every CIMPLICITY user that is logged in to that project. The information in the
subwindow updates as users log in and out of the project.

GFK-1180 System Utilities 24-7

 Searching for User Information
You can use the Search function to look for a specific User ID, Role, Node or
Process in the currently active subwindow in Show Users. To initiate a search, do
one of the following:
• Select Search... from the Search menu.
• Click the Search icon on the toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+S.
The Search dialog box opens with the current search criteria.

You can search the list of users in a project by:

• User ID
• Role
• Node
• Process
• Any combination of the above
You can use the drop-down list buttons to the right of each field to display and select
previous search filters.
Select Close to close the dialog box and do no further searching.
Select Find to find the first user in the currently active subwindow that matches the
search criteria.
Select Next or press Ctrl+N to find the next user in the currently active subwindow
that matches the search criteria.
Select Previous or press Ctrl+P to find the previous user in the currently active
subwindow that matches the search criteria.

Closing A Project View in Show Users

To close a project subwindow in Show Users, select the project’s subwindow and
then do one of the following:
• Double-click on the Control button for the project.
• Click the Close icon on the toolbar.
• Select Close from the Project menu.

24-8 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Using the Login Panel
The Login Panel is an interactive process that lets you monitor the state of all remote
and local connections on your computer. It shows the status of projects for which
there is an active connection. An active connection is made by an application on
your computer that is collecting point or alarm data.
You can use this process to:
• Logout of a CIMPLICITY HMI project
• Override the current login
• Change your CIMPLICITY user password
• Manage your saved logins
These actions do not require that you exit from any applications that are currently
running. For example, if you are a supervisor, you can now override the login and
privileges of an operator, log out, and return the system back to the operator’s logged
in state.
When you log out of a project, data collection and background processing continues.
However, any open CIMPLICITY HMI screens will no longer show point status.

Starting the Login Panel

To start the Login Panel, select the Login Panel icon from the CIMPLICITY HMI
menu.
The Login Panel window opens.

For each project that users are logged into on this computer, the Node ID for the
project, Project ID, user name, login status, and type are displayed.
From this window, you can:
• Select a logged in project and log out.
• Select a logged out project and log in.
• Use the Edit menu to manage your saved logins.

GFK-1180 System Utilities 24-9

 Login Panel Menu Options
You can use the menu options to open a project, toggle the Toolbar and Status bar
displays, change display attributes, and access Help.

The File Menu

When you select the File menu, the following drop-down list displays:

The File menu functions are:

Exit Exits the Login Panel.

The Edit Menu

When you select the Edit menu, the following drop-down list displays:

The Edit menu functions are:

Saved Logins Opens the Saved Logins dialog box.

The Project Menu

When you select the Project menu, the following drop-down list displays:

The Project menu functions are:

Login Opens the Login dialog box for the selected project.
Logout Logs you out of the selected project.
Change Password Allows you to change your password for the selected
project.

The View Menu

When you select the View menu, the following drop-down list displays:

The View menu functions are:

Toolbar Enables/disables the display of the Toolbar.
Status Bar Enables/disables the display of the Status bar.

24-10 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 The Help Menu
When you select the Help menu, the following drop-down list displays:

The Help menu functions are:

Help Topics Opens the Help window for the Login Panel.
About LoginPanel Displays the current version number for the Login Panel
utility.

Login Panel Toolbar Buttons

The Toolbar buttons available to you are:
Login Opens the Login dialog box for the selected
project.
Logout Logs you out of the selected project.

About Displays the title, version number and copyright

information for the Login Panel

Login Panel Shortcut Keys

You can use the following shortcut keys to initiate commonly used functions:
F1 Opens the Help window.
Shift+F1 Invokes the Help cursor.
Alt+F4 Closes the current window. You will be prompted to save
any changes.
Ctrl+Esc For Windows 95, opens the Start Menu on the taskbar.
For Windows NT, opens the Task List dialog box.

GFK-1180 System Utilities 24-11

 Logging out of a Project
To log out of a project:
1. Select the project from the list of projects (its status must be "Logged
in").
2. Select Logout from the Project menu or click the Logout button -
- on the Toolbar.
CIMPLICITY HMI software logs out the project. All CimView screens that have
animation objects that use points from this project will disable the objects.

Logging in to a Project
To log in to a project:
1. Select the project from the list of projects (its status must be "Logged
out").

2. Select Login from the Project menu or click the Login button -
- on the Toolbar. The CIMPLICITY Login dialog box opens.
3. Enter the Username and Password for the user you want to be when
viewing screens for the project.
CIMPLICITY HMI software logs you in to the project as the user you designate. All
CimView screens connected to this project will now have their animation objects
enabled.
Note

The screen itself may change if visibility animation has been enabled for objects and
keyed to User ID and Role ID information.

24-12 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Changing Password
Note

In a Server Redundancy configuration, changing the password is only supported

when the Primary computer is on line.

To change your CIMPLICITY User’s Password for a project:

1. Select the project from the list of projects (its status must be "Logged
in").
2. Select Change Password from the Project menu
The Change Password dialog box opens.

The dialog box displays the current project and your User ID.
To change the password:
1. Enter the current password in the Old password field. As you type,
asterisks will display.
2. Enter the new password in the New Password field. As you type,
asterisks will display.
3. Enter the new password again in the Confirm field. As you type,
asterisks will display.
4. Select OK to accept the new password or select Cancel to not change
the password.

GFK-1180 System Utilities 24-13

 Managing Saved Logins
If you set the Save Username + Password check box in the CIMPLICITY Login
dialog box when you log in to a CIMPLICITY HMI screen, the Username and
Password information is saved in your Registry. In the future, whenever you open
any CIMPLICITY HMI screen that requires that username and password, you are
automatically logged in to CIMPLICITY HMI software.
To remove or add these logins, select Saved Logins from the Edit menu. The
Saved Logins dialog box opens.

When you are through with this dialog box, select Close to close it and return to the
Login Panel window.

Adding a Saved Login

To add a login to the list of saved logins:
1. Select Add.... The Add Saved Login dialog box opens.

2. Select the project you want to apply the login to in the Project field.
Use the drop-down list button to display the list of available projects in
your enterprise.
3. Enter the username for the login in the User field.
4. Enter the password in the Password field and confirm it in the
Confirm field.
5. Select OK to activate the new saved login, or select Cancel to exit this
dialog box without saving the information you entered.
After you activate the new saved login, whenever you open a screen in this project,
you are automatically logged in to the project.

24-14 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Removing a Saved Login
To remove a login from the list of saved logins:
1. Select the login in the list.
2. Select Remove.
The login information is deleted from the Registry.
If you are currently displaying any screens that require this login, they are not
affected. If you exit a screen that requires the login, then try to reopen it, the
CIMPLICITY Login dialog box opens and you are asked for a username and
password.

GFK-1180 System Utilities 24-15

Using Program Control
Program Control is an interactive process that lets you start, stop, and display the
current state of CIMPLICITY HMI processes. This section describes the functions
available in Program Control and procedures for running it.

Starting Program Control

To start CPC, double-click the Program Control icon in the CIMPLICITY program
group.
In order to access the CIMPLICITY Program Control dialog box, you must have a
project (Server or Viewer) running on your computer. If no project is currently
running on your computer, the Select CIMPLICITY Project dialog box opens.

You can use the Browse button to search for a project to start. Once you have
selected a project, you can:
• Select OK to start the project.
• Select Start as Viewer to start the project as a Viewer project.
When you start the project, the normal startup dialogs are displayed.
You can also select Cancel to close the dialog box without starting a project. When
the dialog box closes, the Program Control process terminates.

24-16 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Using CIMPLICITY Program Control
When the CIMPLICITY Program Control dialog box opens, you are given the
opportunity to connect to a project.

To connect to a project:
1. Click the drop-down list button to the right of the System input field.
A list of currently running projects that are broadcasting is displayed.
2. Select the project you want to connect to.
3. Select Connect.
4. If you are not currently logged in to the project, you are prompted for a
Username and Password.
The CIMPLICITY Program Control window redisplays with the list of process names
and statuses for the project you selected.

GFK-1180 System Utilities 24-17

 Once you are connected to a project, you can:
• Start a halted process.
• Stop a running process.
• Start all halted processes.
• Stop all running processes.
• Refresh the process list.
• Release the connection to the project.
• Exit CPC.
Important

This is not the recommended way to start or stop CIMPLICITY HMI

software. You should only use CIMPLICITY Program Control to start
and stop processes if you have been instructed to do so by GE Fanuc
support personnel, or if you are testing an API application. In the latter
case, you should only be starting and stopping your API application.

Orderly Startup and Shutdown

The order in which some processes should be started and stopped is critical to their
operation. If you are attempting to start or stop individual processes, and you want to
make sure you are doing so in an orderly manner, you can check the master.mcp
file in your project’s master directory. This file lists, in correct order, the files that
are started up for your project.
For example, the master.mcp file for the Cimpdemo project on a computer whose
Node ID is master, looks like this:

24-18 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 CIMPLICITY HMI Processes
The following table lists the Process IDs for all base system and product options for
CIMPLICITY HMI processes. The set of options running on a node depends on the
communication protocols, printers, and product options you have installed.
AMRP Alarm Management Resident Process
DA_RC Historical Data Analyzer Recalculation Process
DA_RP Historical Data Analyzer Resident Process
DL_RP Data Logger Resident Process
DYNCFG Dynamic Configuration Process
EM_EP Event Manager Event Processor
EM_RP Event Manager Resident Process
<node>_<port> Device Communications Interfaces
<node>_<printer_name> Alarm Manager Line Printer Process
<node>_PTDP_RP Point Management Virtual Point Resident Process
<node>_PTM<n>_RP Point Management Resident Process
PDC_DS Tracker - Decision Control Data Server
PRT_DC Tracker - Tracking Data Collector
PRT_DS Tracker - Tracking Data Server
PRT_GRD Tracker - Tracking Graphic Display
PTDL_RP Point Data Logger Resident Process
PTX_RP Point Translation Resident Process
UR_RP User Registration Resident Process

Starting A Halted Process

To start a halted process:
1. Select the process name in the list.
2. Select Start Process.
3. When the cpc dialog box opens, select Yes to confirm that you want
this process to start.

If the process starts successfully, its status in the process list changes from "Halted"
to "Running".

GFK-1180 System Utilities 24-19

 Stopping A Running Process
To stop a running process:
1. Select the process name in the list.
2. Select Stop Process.
3. When the cpc dialog box opens, select Yes to confirm that you want
this process to stop.

If the process stops successfully, its status in the process list changes from "Running"
to "Halted".

Starting All Halted Processes

To start all halted processes:
1. Select Start All.
2. When the cpc dialog box opens, select Yes to confirm that you want all
processes to start.

If the processes start successfully, their status in the process list changes from
"Halted" to "Running".

24-20 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Stopping All Running Processes
To stop all running process:
1. Select Stop All.
2. When the following dialog box opens, select Yes to confirm that you
want all processes to stop.

If the processes halt successfully, their status in the process list changes from
"Running" to "Halted".

Refreshing the Process List

The process list shows you the process statuses at the time you connected to the
project. These statuses are only updated automatically when you perform a startup or
shutdown operation. If you have been displaying the list for a while, you can select
Refresh to display the current status of all processes on the list.

Releasing the Connection

If you want to look at another project using CIMPLICITY Program Control:
1. Select Release to release your connection to the current project.
2. Select another project from the list of projects.
3. Select Connect.

Exiting Program Control

All you need to do to release your connection to a project and exit CIMPLICITY
Program Control is to select Exit.

GFK-1180 System Utilities 24-21

Resolving Problems

About CIMPLICITY HMI Log Files

CIMPLICITY HMI software consists of a large number of interrelated programs.
Not all programs are run interactively by users. The non-interactive programs,
therefore, cannot report problems directly to a user’s terminal. Instead, they use the
various log files available on the system.

System Log Files

You can find the system log files in the log directory under your main CIMPLICITY
HMI directory. All system messages are logged to these files.
These files include:
• The system Status Log file (COR_RECSTAT.CLG)
• The w32rtr.out and w32rtr.err files for the Router

Project Log Files

You can find these log files in your project’s log directory. All messages related to a
project are logged to these files.
These files include:
• The Status Log file (COR_RECSTAT.CLG)
• .OUT and .ERR files for all CIMPLICITY HMI processes other than
user processes
• .OUT_<n> and .ERR_<n> backup files for all CIMPLICITY HMI
processes other than user processes

Viewing Log Files

Use the Status Log viewer process to view information in the Status Log files for
projects or the system.
Use the Notepad to view the information in .OUT, .OUT_<n>, .ERR, and .ERR_<n>
files for projects.

GFK-1180 25-1
Using the Status Log Viewer
To display a Status Log, you can do one of the following:
• Select the Status Log icon from the CIMPLICITY HMI menu.
• In a project cabinet, select Status Log from the Tools menu.
• In a project cabinet, press Ctrl+L.
The CIMPLICITY Log Viewer window opens.

Remember that the Status Log file that is displayed depends on whether you initiated
the CIMPLICITY Log Viewer from a project or the CIMPLICITY HMI main menu.
The CIMPLICITY Log Viewer screen displays the following information for each
record that it finds in the status log file:
Date/Time The date and time the message was logged.
Status The type of message. This can be "Failure", "Warning" or
"Success".
Process The name of the process that generated the log message.
Procedure The name of the procedure that generated the log message.
Source A symbolic name for the error class.
Code The primary value used by software for expressing the type of error.
Reference A number (shown as a decimal integer) that can be used to
determine the location of the condition that caused the error.
Message An explanation of the condition that caused the log message.
Each entry in the list is preceded by a color-coded dot that corresponds to the Status
field entry. The correlations are:
• Red - Failure
• Yellow - Warning
• Green - Success

25-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 The Procedure, Source, Reference, and Code fields are primarily for GE Fanuc
use and should be reported if you are contacting GE Fanuc for troubleshooting
assistance.
The list of messages is initially sorted in descending order (newest to oldest) by
Date/Time. You can click on any of the column title buttons to sort the messages
alphanumerically by that message attribute. For example, if you want to view all the
messages generated by the MAC_PTDL process, click the Process button, and all
the messages generated by MAC_PTDL will be grouped together.
You can use the Menu functions, Toolbar buttons, and shortcut keys to:
• Select a log file to view.
• Clear the current log.
• Save the log file as a text file.
• Print the contents of the log file.
• Filter the log entries.
• Select the display order of messages.
• Find a particular message.
• Enable/disable live updates.
• Refresh the list when live updates are disabled.

Which Status Log File Gets Displayed

After you install CIMPLICITY HMI software, the first time you display the Status
Log, the file that is displayed will be:
• The system Status Log if you select the Status Log icon from the
CIMPLICITY HMI main menu.
• The project Status Log, if you select Status Log from the Tools
menu or press Ctrl+L in the Configuration cabinet for a project.
From that point on:
• If you select the Status Log icon from the CIMPLICITY HMI main
menu, the last Status Log file you looked at (project or system) will
automatically be displayed.
• If you select Status Log from the Tools menu or press Ctrl+L in the
Configuration cabinet for a project, the project’s Status Log file will
automatically be displayed.

GFK-1180 Resolving Problems 25-3

 Status Log Viewer Menu Options
You can use the menu options to select and print log files, filter log entries, find a
particular entry, toggle live updates, refresh the list, and access Help.

The Log Menu

The Log menu functions are:

View System Log Displays the system log file.
Select Log Selects the log file you want to view.
Clear Current Log Clears all messages from the current log file.
Save as Text... Saves the current contents of the Status Log file as a text
file.
Print... Prints the contents of the Status Log file to a printer.
Print Preview... Shows you what your print request will look like.
Print Setup... Configures the printer, form, and page setup for your
Status Log print request.
Exit Exits the Status Log function.

The View Menu

The View menu functions are:

All Entries Displays all entries in the Status Log.
Filter Entries... Filters the entries by Status, Process, Procedure, Source,
Reference, or Code.
Find... Locates an entry based on the Status, Process, Procedure,
Source, Reference, and Code information that you enter.

25-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Find Next If you selected Find previously, this command locates the
next entry based on the information you entered. If you
have not entered any Find parameters, this command
locates the next entry in the log file.
Detail... Displays all of the detailed information for the selected log
message.
Live Update Automatically updates the Status Log list as messages are
generated. Note that you cannot display message details
when in this mode.
Refresh Refreshes the Status Log list on request. This option is
available when Live Update is disabled. In addition, you
can display message details when in this mode.
Toolbar Enables/Disables the display of the Toolbar at the top of
the screen.
Status Bar Enables/Disables the display of the Status Bar at the
bottom of the screen.

The Help Menu

The Help menu functions are:

Help Topics Displays the main Help window for the Status Log
Viewer.
About Log Viewer... Displays program information, version number, and
copyright for Status Log Viewer.

Status Log Viewer Toolbar Buttons

The Toolbar buttons available to you are:
Open Selects a log file to view.

Save Saves the active document.

Print Prints the active document.

Status Log Viewer Shortcut Keys

Perform commonly used functions. The following are the more commonly used
functions that are available for your use:
Ctrl+P Prints the contents of the Status Log file.
F3 Finds the next Status Log message that fits the search criteria.
Ctrl+D Displays details for the selected message.
Ctrl+L Enables/Disables Live Updates.
Ctrl+R Refreshes the display.

GFK-1180 Resolving Problems 25-5

Selecting a Status Log to View
Your CIMPLICITY HMI system contains a System Status Log file. It also contains a
Project Status Log file for each project that you create. You can select any of these
files for display.
To select a log file to view, you can do one of the following:
• Select View System Log from the Log menu to display the System
Status Log file.
• Select Select Log from the Log menu to search for a log file to open.
If you do the latter, the Find CIMPLICITY Log File dialog box opens.

The Status Log Viewer can display CIMPLICITY HMI Status Log files of type
.CLG. You can search the directory structure on any drive you are connected to for
log files.
The default Status Log file name is COR_RECSTAT.CLG. Status Log files are
generally found in the log file for your main CIMPLICITY HMI log directory, and in
each of your project’s log directories.
To display a log file:
1. Locate the file in your CIMPLICITY HMI main log directory or a
project log directory.
2. Click OK.
3. The dialog box closes, and the file you selected is displayed in the
CIMPLICITY Log Viewer window.

25-6 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Displaying Status Log Message Details
To view all the details of a particular message, you can do one of the following:
• Double-click on the message.
• Select the message then press Ctrl+D.
• Select the message, and then select Detail from the View menu.
The Detail dialog box opens and displays the details for the message you selected.

This dialog box displays the following information:

Date The date the message was generated.
Time The time the message was generated.
Status The status of the message. This can be "Failure", "Warning",
or "Success".
Code The primary value used by the software for expressing the type
of error.
PID The Process ID of the process that logged the message. The
number is displayed in both decimal and hexadecimal format.
Process The name of the process that logged the message.
Procedure The name of the software module that logged the message.
Source: A numeric representation of the error class.
Reference A number passed by the procedure to assist in determining the
location of the condition that caused the error.
Error Message An explanation of the condition that caused the message to be
logged.

GFK-1180 Resolving Problems 25-7

 If you are contacting GE Fanuc for troubleshooting assistance about a particular
message or set of messages, the information in these fields is of critical importance:
• Status
• Code
• Process
• Procedure
• Source
• Reference
• Error Message
From this dialog box you can:
• Select Next to display the next message in the log file. If you are at the
last message in the file, you will be asked if you want to continue from
the beginning.
• Select Previous to display the previous message in the log file. If you
are at the first message in the file, you will be asked if you want to
continue from the end.
• Select Close to close the dialog box and return to the Log Viewer
screen.

Saving the Status Log as a Text File

The Status Log files are binary files, and cannot be viewed directly. You can,
however, copy the contents of a Status Log file to a text file that you can view with
Notepad.
To save the contents of a Status Log file in a text file, select Save As Text from the
Log menu. The Save As dialog box opens.

To create a text file, select a pathname and file name for the text file and click OK.
The first line of the text file shows the computer name and the full path name for the
Status Log file.

25-8 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Printing the Status Log File
You can print all entries in a Status Log file, or selected pages.
To print the contents of the Status Log file you are currently displaying, select Print
from the Log menu. The Print dialog box opens.

The dialog box options are:

Name Displays the name of the currently selected printer. You can
click the drop-down list button to the right of the input field
and select from the list of available printers.
Print Range Select All to print all Status Log messages, or select Pages
and enter a page range to print selected pages.
Copies Enter the number of copies you want printed in this input field.
Print to file Set this check box if you want to save the printout in a file in
addition to printing.
To display and change printer properties, click Properties.
To print the status log click OK. To cancel the print request, click Cancel.
The header line on each page of the printout shows the computer name, the full path
name for the Status Log file and a page number.

GFK-1180 Resolving Problems 25-9

Selecting a Status Log Printer
You can select a printer, form and orientation for your Status Log printout.
• To set up your printer configuration, select Print Setup from the Log
menu.
The Print Setup dialog box opens.

The dialog box options are:

Name Displays the currently selected printer. You can click the
drop-down list button to the right of the input field to display
the list of available printers and select one of them.
Size Displays the currently selected paper size. You can click the
drop-down list button to the right of the input field to display
a list of available paper sizes and select one of them.
Source Displays the currently selected paper source. You can click
the drop-down list button to the right of the input field to
display a list of available paper sources and select one of
them.
Orientation Click the orientation you want. Select Portrait for vertical
orientation, or Landscape for horizontal orientation.
To save the printer configuration, click OK.
To close the dialog box without making any changes, click Cancel.
For more configuration options, click Properties.
To connect to another printer on the network, click Network.

25-10 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Filtering the Status Log Messages
A Status Log file can contain up to 1,000 messages. If you are looking for a
particular set of messages, you will find it useful to filter the file to display only the
messages that are currently of interest to you.
To initiate filtering, select Filter Entries from the View menu. The Filter System
Entries dialog box opens.

The dialog box options are:

Status Lets you enable/disable filtering for message status. You may select
one or more status types.
If you select no status types, you will see no messages.
Process Lets you enable/disable filtering by process name. Click the drop-
down list to the right of the input field to display the list of
processes currently in the log file that you can select.
Procedure Lets you select the procedure name(s) to filter for. You can enter an
entire procedure name, or the first n characters.
Source Lets you enable/disable filtering by source name. Click the drop-
down list to the right of the input field to display the list of sources
currently in the log file that you can select.
Reference Lets you select a reference number to filter for. You must enter the
exact reference number.
Code Lets you select a code to filter for. You must enter the exact code.
You may use any combination of filter entries in your filter request.
To filter the Status Log, click OK. The Log Viewer screen redisplays with the
filtered list of messages. If no messages match the filter you requested, the screen is
blank.
To close the dialog box without filtering, click Cancel.
To clear filtering and redisplay all Status Log messages, click Clear, and then click
OK.

GFK-1180 Resolving Problems 25-11

Finding Status Log Messages
If you are looking for a particular message or set of messages, you may find it useful
to use the Find and Find Next options to perform the search.
To initiate finding a message, select Find from the View menu.
The Find System Entry dialog box opens.

The dialog box options are:

Status Lets you search for messages by status. You may select one or
more status types.
If you select no status types, no messages will be found.
Process Lets you search for messages by process name. Click the drop-
down list to the right of the input field to display the list of
processes currently in the log file that you can select.
Procedure Lets you search for messages by procedure name. You can enter an
entire procedure name, or the first n characters.
Source Lets you search for messages by source name. Click the drop-down
list to the right of the input field to display the list of sources
currently in the log file that you can select.
Reference Lets you search for messages by reference number. You must enter
the exact reference number.
Code Lets you search for messages by code. You must enter the exact
code.
Direction You can choose the direction to search in from your current location
in the Status Log. Click Up to search previous messages. Click
Down to search next messages.
You may use any combination of filter entries in your filter request.

25-12 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 To locate the entry in the Status Log, click Find Next. The dialog box closes, and
the next message in the Status Log that matches the filter is highlighted. If no
message is found, the highlight remains at the current message.
Note
The Find and Find Next options will not wrap around the message list when they
reach either end.

For example, if you are searching Down and you are already at the end of the
message list, when you activate the search, you will not be asked if you wish to
continue from the beginning of the list.
To close the dialog box without finding a message, click Cancel.
To clear the filters, click Clear, and then click OK.

Finding the Next Status Log Message

Once you have set the filters in the Find System Entry dialog box and found the first
message that matched the filters, you can select Find Next from the View menu, or
press F3 to find the next message in the configured direction that matches the filter.
If the filter has been cleared, Find Next will find the next message down in the list.

Process Names in Status Log

Processes that log messages in the Status Log include:
AB_ETH<n> Allen-Bradley Ethernet where <n> is the port number
AV<n> Alarm Viewer session where <n> is the session number
CfgCab Configuration
COM<n> Serial Devcomm where <n> is the port number
CM<n> CIMVIEW session where <n> is the session number
CW<n> CWSERV session where <n> is the session number
MAC_AM Alarm Manager
MAC_DL Data Logger
MAC_DYN Dynamic Configuration Manager
MAC_EMRP Basic Control Engine
MAC_PTDL Point Data Logger
MAC_PTDP Derived Point Processor
MAC_PTM Point Manager
MAC_PTX Point Translator
PB Point Bridge
PDC_DS Tracker Decision Control Data Server
PM_MCP Master Control Program
PRT_DC Tracker Data Collector
PRT_DS Tracker Data Server
PRT_GRD Tracker Graphic Display
TCPIP<n> Series 90 Ethernet where <n> is the port number
TCPRD<n> TCP/IP Redundancy where <n> is the port number
W32RTR Message router

GFK-1180 Resolving Problems 25-13

Checking System Output and Error Files
In the main CIMPLICITY HMI log directory, you will find the current set of
w32rtr.out and w32rtr.err files for the Router. These files may contain
additional information if you are experiencing problems with your CIMPLICITY
HMI software.
Important
You can only examine these files while the Router is not running. If you
stop the Router, all projects on the computer also stop.
To view the contents of a w32rtr.out or w32rtr.err file:
1. Stop the Router.
2. Use the Explorer to check for any non-zero length .ERR and .OUT
files in the main log directory.
3. Use Notepad to look at the contents of these files.

Checking Process Output and Error Files

In the log directory for a project, you will find a set of current and backup .ERR and
.OUT files. These files may contain additional information if you are experiencing
problems with your CIMPLICITY software.
Note
You can only examine .OUT and .ERR files while the project is not running. You
can examine backup .OUT and .ERR files while the project is running.
Some of the basic CIMPLICITY filenames and their associated programs are:
Filename Associated Process
AB_ETH<n> Allen-Bradley Ethernet device communications where <n> is the
port number
COM0<n> Serial device communications where <n> is the port number
MAC_AM Alarm Manager
MAC_DL Data Logger
MAC_DYN Dynamic Configuration
MAC_EMRP Basic Control Engine
MAC_PTDL Point Data Logger
MAC_PTDP Virtual Point Processor
MAC_PTM Point Manager
MAC_PTX Point Translation
MAC_UR User Registration
PB Point Bridge
PCIM<n> Genius device communications where <n> is the port number
TCPIP<n> Series 90 TCP/IP device communications where <n> is the port
number.

25-14 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 TCPRD<n> Series 90 TCP/IP redundancy where <n> is the port number.
W32RTR Message Router
In addition to these files, you may also find files for alarm log printers and device
communication drivers.
To view the contents of an .ERR or .OUT file:
1. Stop the project.
2. Use the Explorer to check for any non-zero length .ERR and .OUT
files in the project’s log directory.
3. Use Notepad to look at the contents of these files.

Backup Process Log Files

Each process can have up to two backup .OUT and .ERR files in the log directory.
The backup files contain additional information about the programs for the last two
times that the project was started. You will be able to look at the backup log files
while the project is running. The .OUT_1 and .ERR_1 files contain newer
information than the .OUT_2 and .ERR_2 files.

GFK-1180 Resolving Problems 25-15

System Management

About System Management

There are several procedures that you may need to use over time to manage your
CIMPLICITY HMI projects. In this chapter, you will find information on:
• How to modify CIMPLICITY HMI Global Parameters.
• How to modify CIMPLICITY HMI logical names.
• How to remove Login information.
• How to delete CIMPLICITY HMI information for the Registry.

Global Parameters
The Global Parameters file is used to define parameters for the CIMPLICITY Base
System and options that override default parameters in the software.
Some global parameters can be changed through user interfaces in CIMPLICITY
HMI Configuration functions. You should not change these parameters manually.
Some global parameters can only be implemented or changed by editing the Global
Parameters file.
Of the global parameters that you implement manually, some are implemented for all
projects on the computer, and some are implemented for individual projects.

Editing the File

To change a global parameter, select Command Prompt from the Tools menu in
the Configuration Cabinet for the project where you want to change the parameter,
then do the following:
1. Enter the following commands in the Command Prompt window:
cd <dir>
idtpop glb_parms
notepad glb_parms.idt
where <dir> is the directory where you need to make the changes.
For global parameters that apply to all projects, this will be
%BSM_ROOT%data. For all other global parameters, this will be
%SITE_ROOT%master.

GFK-1180 26-1
 2. Find the parameter you want to change, and make the change.
3. Save the modified file.
4. Exit the Notepad.
5. Type scpop glb_parms. A new binary version of the Global
Parameters file will be produced and put in the master directory.
6. Type exit to exit the Command Prompt window.
When you are ready to implement the change in the run-time system, you will have to
stop the project(s), perform a Configuration Update, and restart the project(s).

Parameters Modified through Configuration

Functions
The following global parameters are manipulated by configuration interfaces and
should not be changed manually.
DB_QUEUE_SIZE RTR_ACCEPT_CONN
DBDL_DEVICE_CHECK_PERIOD RTR_DISABLE_BCAST
DOWNLD_PASSWD RTR_STANDALONE
GMR_HRTBT_TIMER SETPOINT_SECURITY
GMR_MODE_ADDR STARTUP_TIMEOUT
PTDL_QUANTIZATION SYSNAME

DBDL_DEVICE_CHECK_PERIOD
Use the Disk full scan rate (min) parameter in the Logging Properties dialog box
in Database Logging to change this parameter.

DB_QUEUE_SIZE
Use the Database queue size parameter in the Logging Properties dialog box in
Database Logging to change this parameter.

DOWNLD_PASSWD
Use the Set Point Password input area of the Point Properties dialog box in Point
Configuration to change this parameter.

GMR_HRTBT_TIMER
Use the Heartbeat Timer field of the TCP/IP Port Properties for a redundant Series
90 TCP/IP port.

GMR_MODE_ADDR
Use the Mode Address field of the TCP/IP Port Properties for a redundant Series
90 TCP/IP port.

PTDL_QUANTIZATION
Use the Point data logging scan rate input area of the Logging Properties dialog
box in Database Logger to change this parameter.

26-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 RTR_ACCEPT_CONN
Use the Accept Connections field of the CIMPLICITY Options dialog in the
CIMPLICITY program group to change this parameter.

RTR_DISABLE_BCAST
Use the Enable Project Broadcast field of the Project Properties dialog box in
the Configuration cabinet to change this parameter.

RTR_STANDALONE
Use the Stand Alone field of the CIMPLICITY Options dialog in the CIMPLICITY
program group to change this parameter.

SETPOINT_SECURITY
Use the Set Point Security field of the Point Properties dialog box in Point
Configuration to change this parameter.

STARTUP_TIMEOUT
Sets the number of minutes to wait before timing out when starting up a project.
Record format is:
STARTUP_TIMEOUT|3|<minutes>

If you do not configure this parameter, the default timeout is 10 minutes.

SYSNAME
Important
Do not modify this option unless instructed to by GE Fanuc support
personnel.
The parameter contains the project name.
Record format is:
SYSNAME|1|<project_name>

GFK-1180 System Management 26-3

 Parameters Modified for All Projects
The following global parameters are applied to all projects on a computer. They
have to be modified in the Global Parameters file in the %BSM_ROOT%data
directory of each computer where you want them to apply:
CONNECT_DROP_PERIOD IPC_QUEUE_SIZE
CONNECT_RETRY_PERIOD REDUND_LINK_SLEEP
IPC_BCAST_INTERVAL RTR_MAX_OUTMESSAGE_COUNT

CONNECT_DROP_PERIOD
The time in seconds before an inactive login connection is dropped by the project.
The time starts when all CIMPLICITY application windows have been exited. A
user who opens a CIMPLICITY application window during this time period will not
be required to log in to CIMPLICITY software again.
Record format is:
CONNECT_DROP_PERIOD|3|<period>

The default time in the distributed Global Parameters file is 600 seconds (10
minutes).

CONNECT_RETRY_PERIOD
Time in seconds to retry connection to a remote project.
Record format is:
CONNECT_RETRY_PERIOD|3|<period>

The default time in the distributed Global Parameters file is 90 seconds.

Note
Entering a value of less than 30 seconds is not recommended.

IPC_BCAST_INTERVAL
Important
Do not modify this option unless instructed to by GE Fanuc support
personnel.
The Router (IPC) System Name Broadcast Period in seconds.
Record format is:
IPC_BCAST_INTERVAL|1|<number>

The default in the distributed Global Parameters file is 90 seconds.

26-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 IPC_QUEUE_SIZE
Important
Do not modify this option unless instructed to by GE Fanuc support
personnel.
The maximum number of messages buffered by the Router in its Router to
application queue. The first time a queue overflows, it logs the following message to
the Status Log:
Router to Application queue overflow on port <port_name>
Further queue overflows on the same port do not result in any more error messages.
When the queue overflows, if the new message is not a response required message, it
is dropped. If it is a response required message, it is enqueued by bumping the queue
size.
Record format is:
IPC_QUEUE_SIZE|1|<number>

If the parameter is not defined, a default value of 50 is used.

REDUND_LINK_SLEEP
For Server Redundancy, you can use this parameter to make the Router wait a period
of time before creating the link to the slave node.
Record format is:
REDUND_LINK_SLEEP|3|<number>

where <number> is the number of seconds to wait.

If you do not use this parameter, the default value is 5 seconds.

RTR_MAX_OUTMESSAGE_COUNT
Important
Do not modify this option unless instructed to by GE Fanuc support
personnel.
The maximum number of messages buffered by the Router for a Router to Router
link. If the queue overflows, the Router drops new messages. When it drops the first
message, it logs the following error to the Status Log:
Router dropped offnode message to <remote_node_name>
Further dropping of messages to the same node do not result in additional error
messages as long as the remote node stays active.
If the entry does not exist, a default value of 1000 is used.
Record format is:
RTR_MAX_OUTMESSAGE_COUNT|3|<number>

The default count in the distributed Global Parameters file is 1000.

GFK-1180 System Management 26-5

 Parameters Modified Per Project
The following global parameters are applied to individual projects. They are
modified in the Global Parameters file in the project’s %SITE_ROOT%master
directory:
ACK_TOUT GSM_ASC_FONT_SIZES
AM_RESET_ACK_STATE GSM_ASC_SCALE
AMLP_USE_GEN_TIME GSM_CACHE_SIZE
CE_MAX_DELAY GSM_EXPONENT_PRECISION
CE_MAX_THREADS GSM_SPCONFIRM_DEFAULT
CE_THREAD_TIMEOUT GSM_STALE_COLOR_KEY
CLR_TOUT GSM_UNAVAIL_COLOR_KEY
DBDL_ABORT_TIMEOUT LOGIN_NOSAVE
DB_DEBUG LOGIN_RETRY_PERIOD
DB_ENABLE_TRANSACTIONS LOG_OPT
DB_QUEUE_OVERFLOW_DELAY MAX_STACKED
DB_TIMESTAMP_PRECISION MAX_TREND_BUF
DEL_OPT PB_DIAGS
DONT_VERIFY_ESPOINT_FRID PROJECT_ID
EMEP_BUF_SIZE PTMDP_DO_EU_CONV
GSM_ANNUN_DIG_OFF PTMRP
GSM_ANNUN_DIG_ON RAW_LIMIT_ALARM
GSM_ANNUN_ALARM_H2 REPEAT_TOUT
GSM_ANNUN_ALARM_H1 SHORT_FILENAMES
GSM_ANNUN_ALARM_L1 SVC_RETRY_COUNT
GSM_ANNUN_ALARM_L2 SVC_RETRY_DELAY
GSM_ASC_FONT_NAME

ACK_TOUT
The time in minutes before an alarm is automatically acknowledged by the Alarm
Management Resident Process. If this parameter is defined, it is the default used for
Acknowledge Timeout in the Point and Alarm Alarm Options properties. If this
parameter is not defined, zero is used for the default.
Record format is:
ACK_TOUT|3|<minutes>

The default timeout in the distributed Global Parameters file is 0 (no automatic
timeout).

26-6 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 AM_RESET_ACK_STATE
In Alarm Management, when an alarm with the Acknowledge and Reset deletion
requirement have been acknowledged and transitions back to the Normal state, it is
automatically reset and deleted from the list of alarms. You can use this parameter to
reset the point’s Acknowledge state to "N" on this transition. This forces the user to
acknowledge the alarm again after it is reset.
Record format is:
AM_RESET_ACK_STATE|1|YES

AMLP_USE_GEN_TIME
For the Alarm Line Printer, when an alarm is acknowledged or deleted, this
parameter determines whether the generation time or the time of the acknowledge or
delete action is printer. If this parameter is not defined, the generation time is printed
by default.
Options are:
Y The generation time is printed.
N The time of the action (acknowledge or delete) is printed
Record format is:
AMLP_USE_GEN_TIME|1|<option>

CE_MAX_DELAY
For the Basic Control Engine, the maximum delay time in seconds after which a late
event will not be executed. For example, events may be delayed when there is a
heavy load on the system. If this parameter is not defined, the default is 60.
Record format is:
CE_MAX_DELAY|3|<time>

CE_MAX_THREADS
For the Basic Control Engine, the maximum number of simultaneous scripts. If this
parameter is not defined, the default is 30.
Record format is:
CE_MAX_THREADS|3|<number>

CE_THREAD_TIMEOUT
For the Basic Control Engine, the idle cache time in seconds before the threads are
freed. If this parameter is not defined, the default is 900 seconds.
Record format is:
CE_THREAD_TIMEOUT|3|<seconds>

GFK-1180 System Management 26-7

 CLR_TOUT
The time in minutes before an alarm is automatically reset by the Alarm Management
Resident Process. If this parameter is defined, it is the default used for Reset
Timeout in the Point and Alarm Alarm Options properties. If this parameter is not
defined, zero is used for the default.
Record format is:
CLR_TOUT|3|<minutes>

The default timeout in the distributed Global Parameters file is 0 (no reset timeout).

DBDL_ABORT_TIMEOUT
Important
Do not modify this option unless instructed to by GE Fanuc support
personnel.
The delay in ticks before abort drops table in shutdown for the Database Logger
option.
Record format is:
DBDL_ABORT_TIMEOUT|1|<period>

The default time in the distributed Global Parameters file is 50 ticks.

DB_DEBUG
Enables the dumping of diagnostic information for the Database Logger to the
MAC_DL.out and MAC_PTDL.out files in your project’s log directory.
Record format is:
DB_DEBUG|1|<value>

Where <value> can be any combination of:

0 Stop dumping diagnostic information
1 Print full syntax of ODBC error messages
2 Print details of database connection when established
4 Print syntax of ODBC statements if they fail
8 Rename/keep store and forward files after loading them
4096 Print application-specific details
If you do not define DB_DEBUG, the default is to print the full syntax of ODBC
error messages. Since ODBC errors should happen infrequently, this is unlikely to
cause problems with disk space.
You must explicitly specify a value of 0 (zero) to stop dumping diagnostic
information to the log files.
If you need additional diagnostic information, a value of 7 (1+2+4) is recommended.
Additional undocumented values should only be used by GE Fanuc engineers as they
send a great number of messages to MAC_DL.out and MAC_PTDL.out that could
quickly fill your available disk space.

26-8 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 DB_ENABLE_TRANSACTIONS
For the Database Logger, overrides the default database functionality as requested by
ODBC.
Options are:
Y Forces logging to use transactions.
N Forces logging to not use transactions.
Record format is:
DB_ENABLE_TRANSACTIONS|1|<option>

DB_QUEUE_OVERFLOW_DELAY
Important
Do not modify this option unless instructed to by GE Fanuc support
personnel.
The delay in minutes between logging overflow errors for the Database Logger
option.
Record format is:
DB_QUEUE_OVERFLOW_DELAY|1|<period>

The default time in the distributed Global Parameters file is 30 minutes.

DB_TIMESTAMP_PRECISION
For the Database Logger, specifies an alternate timestamp precision for ODBC data
sources that do not accept the default provided by the CIMPLICITY Database
Logger.
Important
Do not configure this option unless instructed to by GE Fanuc support
personnel.
Record format is:
DB_TIMESTAMP_PRECISION|1|’<timestamp>’

where <timestamp> is the timestamp for your database. The timestamp must be
enclosed in single quotes as shown above. The format is case sensitive.
For more information on this parameter, see the Database Logger documentation.

DEL_OPT
The default requirements for alarm deletion. The options are:
A Acknowledged only
R Reset only
AR Acknowledge and reset
Record format is:
DEL_OPT|1|<option>

The default requirement in the distributed Global Parameters file is AR.

GFK-1180 System Management 26-9

 DONT_VERIFY_ESPOINT_FRID
Changes the behavior of Setpoint Security for Enterprise Server points.
The options are:
Y Setpoint Security for all points from a given provider are enforced against
the Resource IDs as configured on the provider.
This means that a setpoint against any of these points with resources not
configured on the Enterprise Server project will always fail since a resource
that is not configured cannot be in a user’s view.
N If an Enterprise Server project contains the same Resource IDs as a given
provider, then Setpoint Security for points from the provider are enforced
against the Enterprise Server Resource IDs.
If a resource for a given point is not configured on the Enterprise Server,
then Setpoint Security for that point is enforced against the remote project’s
resource.
Record format is:
DONT_VERIFY_EXPOINT_FRID|1|<flag>

If the parameter is not defined, the default is "N".

EMEP_BUF_SIZE
Important
Do not modify this option unless instructed to by GE Fanuc support
personnel.
For the Basic Control Engine, defines the communications buffer size. This indicates
the count of pending messages that the Basic Control Engine will hold.
Record format is:
EMEP_BUF_SIZE|3|<value>

If this parameter is not defined, the default value is 10.

GSM_ANNUN_DIG_OFF
The color and blink state to be displayed when a digital point is low for Alarm State
color animation.
Record format is:
GSM_ANNUN_DIG_OFF|1|<color_number><blink>

where <color_number> is a number from 0 to 15 and <blink> is YES or NO.

The color associated with each number is defined in RGB.DAT.
If this parameter is not defined, the default is color 7, no blinking.

26-10 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 GSM_ANNUN_DIG_ON
The color and blink state to be displayed when a digital point is high for Alarm State
color animation.
Record format is:
GSM_ANNUN_DIG_ON|1|<color_number><blink>

where <color_number> is a number from 0 to 15 and <blink> is YES or NO.

The color associated with each number is defined in RGB.DAT.
If this parameter is not defined, the default is color 6, no blinking.

GSM_ANNUN_ALARM_H2
The color and blink state to be displayed when an analog point is in Alarm High state
for Alarm State color animation.
Record format is:
GSM_ANNUN_ALARM_H2|1|<color_number><blink>

where <color_number> is a number from 0 to 15 and <blink> is YES or NO.

The color associated with each number is defined in RGB.DAT.
If this parameter is not defined, the default is color 15, no blinking.

GSM_ANNUN_ALARM_H1
The color and blink state to be displayed when an analog point is in Warning High
state for Alarm State color animation.
Record format is:
GSM_ANNUN_ALARM_H1|1|<color_number><blink>

where <color_number> is a number from 0 to 15 and <blink> is YES or NO.

The color associated with each number is defined in RGB.DAT.
If this parameter is not defined, the default is color 14, no blinking.

GSM_ANNUN_ALARM_L1
The color and blink state to be displayed when an analog point is Warning Low state
for Alarm State color animation.
Record format is:
GSM_ANNUN_ALARM_L1|1|<color_number><blink>

where <color_number> is a number from 0 to 15 and <blink> is YES or NO.

The color associated with each number is defined in RGB.DAT.
If this parameter is not defined, the default is color 10, no blinking.

GFK-1180 System Management 26-11

 GSM_ANNUN_ALARM_L2
The color and blink state to be displayed when an analog point is in Alarm Low state
for Alarm State color animation.
Record format is:
GSM_ANNUN_ALARM_L2|1|<color_number><blink>

where <color_number> is a number from 0 to 15 and <blink> is YES or NO.

The color associated with each number is defined in RGB.DAT.
If this parameter is not defined, the default is color 13, no blinking.

GSM_ASC_FONT_NAME
The name of the font to use for text on an ASCII (.ASC) screen. This must be a
TrueType font.
Record format is:
GSM_ASC_FONT_NAME|1|<name>

If this parameter is not defined, the default is MS Console.

GSM_ASC_FONT_SIZES

A list of the 16 point sizes to use for the 16 text sizes in an ASCII (.ASC) file (GRE
text sizes 0 to 15, which are stored in the .ASC file as -1 to 14).
Record format is:
GSM_ASC_FONT_SIZES|1|<list>

If this parameter is not defined, the default values are:

112, 140, 168, 280, 364, 560, 602, 602, 602, 602, 602, 602, 602, 602, 602, 602

GSM_ASC_SCALE
A floating-point number that represents the number of document units per world
coordinates when converting ASCII (.ASC) screens to .CIM format.
ASC files store screen information in floating point "world coordinates". The
screens are 100.0 world coordinates wide by 60.0 world coordinates high. Document
units in .CIM files are integers in TWIPS (twentieth of a point, 1440 TWIPS/inch).
Thus, if you want your .ASC screens to be about six inches wide on the display, you
should use a scale factor of (1440 doc. units/inch)*(6 inches/screen)/(100 world
coord./screen) which equals 86.4 doc. units/world coord.
Record format is:
GSM_ASC_SCALE|1|<value>

If this parameter is not defined, the default value is 86.4 doc. units/world coord.

26-12 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 GSM_CACHE_SIZE
As a default CimView keeps eight (8) prior screens in cache memory for faster
updates. If you require faster screen repaint times when switching between screens,
you can use this parameter to increase the cache size.
Note
Increasing this number uses additional memory and may have a negative effect on the
performance of other transactions.
Record format is:
GSM_CACHE_SIZE|1|<number>

GSM_EXPONENT_PRECISION
If a Text object on a CimView screen has "General" format and the number of digits
exceeds this parameter, then the number is displayed in scientific notation with that
number of significant digits.
For example, if you set GSM_EXPONENT_PRECISION to 3, the number 1234
displays as 1.23e+3.
Record format is:
GSM_EXPONENT_PRECISION|1|<number>

If this parameter is not defined, the default number of digits is 6. That is, if the
number exceeds six digits, it is displayed in scientific notation with 6 significant
digits.

GSM_SPCONFIRM_DEFAULT
Procedure dialog boxes contain two buttons: OK and Cancel. Action dialog boxes
contain three buttons: OK, Skip, and Cancel. The default button for both dialog
boxes is the OK button.
You can use this global parameter to select one of the other buttons to be the default
button in procedure and actin dialog boxes.
Record format is:
GSM_SPCONFIRM_DEFAULT|1|<selection>

Where <selection> is OK, Skip or Cancel.

If you select a default that is not available in the dialog box, CimView uses the OK
button as the default.

GFK-1180 System Management 26-13

 GSM_STALE_COLOR_KEY
If a point being displayed in a Text object on a CimView screen is unavailable and
there is last available data, you can set the GSM_STALE_COLOR_KEY parameter
to display the value in that color rather than displaying the default text. If no last
available data exists, the default text is displayed.
Record format is:
GSM_STALE_COLOR_KEY|1|RGB(<red>,<green>,<blue>)

where <red>, <green>, and <blue> are the red, green, and blue color indices
from 0 to 255. For example, RGB(0,0,0) is black and RGB(255,255,255) is
white.
If this parameter is not defined, the Text object displays the default text when the
point is unavailable, regardless of whether a last available value exists or not.

GSM_UNAVAIL_COLOR_KEY
Color index number (0 to 255) used to indicate an unavailable point value on
CimView screens.
Record format is:
GSM_UNAVAIL_COLOR_KEY|1|<number>

where <number> is a number from 0 to 255. The color associated with each
number is defined in RGB.DAT.
If this parameter is not defined, the default is 0 (black).

LOGIN_NOSAVE
Disables the "Save Password" capability on the CIMPLICITY Login dialog.
Options are:
Y Disable the "Save Password" capability.
N Enable the "Save Password" capability.
Record format is:
LOGIN_NOSAVE|1|<option>

If the parameter is not defined, the "Save Password" capability is enabled.

LOGIN_RETRY_PERIOD
Important
Do not modify this option unless instructed to by GE Fanuc support
personnel.
Retry period in seconds for connecting to a project whose User Registration program
is down.
Record format is:
LOGIN_RETRY_PERIOD|3|<number>

The default in the distributed Global Parameters file is 15 seconds.

26-14 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 LOG_OPT
Use this parameter to define the default logging conditions for an alarm. You can
choose any of the following:
G Alarm is generated
A Alarm is acknowledged
R Alarm is reset
D Alarm is deleted by a user.
Record format is:
LOG_OPT|1|<options>

The default in the distributed Global Parameters file is no logging options.

MAX_STACKED
Use this parameter to define the default maximum number of occurrences of an alarm
that can be stacked in Alarm Viewer.
Record format is:
MAX_STACKED|3|<number>

The default in the distributed Global Parameters file is 0 (zero).

MAX_TREND_BUF
Use this parameter to change the maximum number of point values a point buffers for
Trending. Point buffering is used when a chart is first displayed and there is some
initial data.
Note
Increasing this parameter will affect system performance.
Record format is:
MAX_TREND_BUF|3|<number>

If you do not define this parameter, the default maximum is 200.

GFK-1180 System Management 26-15

 PB_DIAGS
Use this parameter to enable/disable Point Bridge diagnostics.
Record format is
PB_DIAGS|1|LEVEL=<num1>,FILECLOSE=<num2>,DBGCHK_SECS=<num3>,
DUMPPOINT

where:
<num1> controls the amount/detail of diagnostic output. The value ranges from
0 to 9, where 0 means no debugging output, and 9 means the maximum amount
of debugging output.
<num2> is a value for NT operating systems that may handle output files in a
manner that prohibits multiple process access (as sometimes occurs with NT on
DEC Alpha platforms). This value controls approximately how often the output
file will actually be closed/re-opened, in seconds. A value of 0 (zero) means that
this period closing will not occur. Any non-zero value of less than 60 will be
forced to 60.
<num3> provides a number of seconds for an internal timer that rechecks the
parameters in the Global Parameters file. This value cannot be less than zero.
The default value is equivalent to five minutes.
DUMPPOINT initiates a one-shot dump of the Point Bridge internal information
regarding the state of points it is servicing. This parameter is only acted upon
once when any of the other arguments are changed, and the resulting change
leaves LEVEL with a non-zero value.

PROJECT_ID
Important
Do not modify this option unless instructed to by GE Fanuc support
personnel.
This parameter is used by the Multiple Projects option and contains the one character
Project ID for the project.
Record format is:
PROJECT_ID|1|<name>

26-16 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 PTMDP_DO_EU_CONV
In Point Configuration, when you use a device Point ID in the Expression Editor for
virtual points, the raw value of the point is used by default. If you want to use the
engineering units value, you must enter EU_CONV(<point_id>) in the
expression.
Use this parameter to automatically convert Point ID values to engineering units
without having to use the EU_CONV function.
Options are:
0 Do not automatically convert Point ID values to engineering units in
expressions.
1 Automatically convert Point ID values to engineering units in expressions.
Record format is:
PTMDP_DO_EU_CONV|3|<option>

PTMRP
Important
Do not modify this option unless instructed to by GE Fanuc support
personnel.
Defines the default Point Manager to be used for point processing.
Record format is:
PTMRP|1|<number>

The default in the distributed Global Parameters file is MASTER_PTM0_RP.

RAW_LIMIT_ALARM
Use this parameter to enable or disable the generation of alarms for point values that
are outside their raw limits. The options are:
YES Raw limit alarms are enabled.
NO Raw limit alarms are disabled
Record format is:
RAW_LIMIT_ALARM|1|<number>

The default in the distributed Global Parameters file is YES.

REPEAT_TOUT
The time in minutes before an alarm is automatically repeated to all interested
processes by the Alarm Management Resident Process. If this parameter is defined,
it is the default used for Repeat Timeout in the Point and Alarm Alarm Options
properties. If this parameter is not defined, zero is used for the default.
Record format is:
REPEAT_TOUT|3|<minutes>

The default timeout in the distributed Global Parameters file is 0 (alarms are not
repeated).

GFK-1180 System Management 26-17

 SHORT_FILENAMES
Important
Do not modify this option unless instructed to by GE Fanuc support
personnel.
Enable or disable support for short (8 characters or less) filenames. The options are:
YES This option is enabled. Users cannot use filenames greater than 8
characters.
NO This option is disabled. Users can use any length filenames.
Record format is:
SHORT_FILENAMES|1|<option>

The default option in the distributed Global Parameters file is NO.

SVC_RETRY_COUNT
Important
Do not modify this option unless instructed to by GE Fanuc support
personnel.
Sets the number of retries waiting for an external service to start up.
Record format is:
SVC_RETRY_COUNT|1|<number>

The default retry count in the distributed Global Parameters file is 30.

SVC_RETRY_DELAY
Important
Do not modify this option unless instructed to by GE Fanuc support
personnel.
Sets the delay in ticks between retries waiting for an external service to start up.
Record format is:
SVC_RETRY_DELAY|1|<number>

The default retry delay in the distributed Global Parameters file is 100 ticks.

26-18 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Parameters for Device Communications
The following global parameters are modified on a per-project basis for particular
Communications options.
Allen-Bradley Communications
ABETH_PLC_POLL_TIMEOUT ABETH_PLC_REQUEST_TIMEOUT
ABETH_PLC_RESPONSE_TIMEOUT
Allen-Bradley Data Highway Plus Communications
ABKT_AB_ADDRESSING
FloPro/FloNet Communications
FLOPRO_RESPONSE_TIMEOUT FLOPRO_STATIC_MODEL
Mitsubishi Serial Communication
COM<port>_TO
Modbus Plus Communications
SA85_DRIVER_TIMEOUT
OMRON Serial Communications
COM<port>_TO
OMRON TCP/IP Communications
<port>_OMRON_SA1 <port>_OMRON_SERVICE
<port>_OMRON_SNA <port>_TO
Series 90 TCP/IP Communications
GMR_NO_MASTER GMR_WRITE_ALL
GMR_SKIP_L_DOMAIN HCT_SKIP_L_DOMAIN
UNSO_TX_AREA_<n>
Smarteye Communications
<port>_LOG_WARNING <port>_POLL_LIMIT
<port>_MODE <port>_RESTART_AREA
SE_LABEL_LEN

GFK-1180 System Management 26-19

 Sample File
The following is a sample GLB_PARMS.IDT file:
|-* IDT file generated by IDTPOP utility v1.0
* RECORD: GLB_PARMS SYSTEM GLOBAL PARAMETERS
*
* 0 PARM_ID Global Parameter Identifier
* 1 parm_type CH-0,S-1,IS-2,I-3,BT-4,WRD-5,LG-6,BL-7
* 2 parm_value Parameter Value up to 80 chars
*
ACK_TOUT|3|0
CLR_TOUT|3|0
CONNECT_DROP_PERIOD|3|600
CONNECT_RETRY_PERIOD|3|90
DBDL_ABORT_TIMEOUT|1|50
DBDL_DEVICE_CHECK_PERIOD|1|30
DB_QUEUE_OVERFLOW_DELAY|1|30
DB_QUEUE_SIZE|1|20
DEL_OPT|1|AR
DOWNLD_PASSWD
DYN_CFG|1|YES
GSM_UNAVAIL_COLOR_KEY|1|0
IPC_BCAST_INTERVAL|1|90
LOGIN_RETRY_PERIOD|3|15
LOG_OPT|1|
MAX_STACKED|3|0
PTDL_QUANTIZATION|1|100
PTMRP|1|MASTER_PTM0_RP
RAW_LIMIT_ALARM|1|YES
REPEAT_TOUT|3|0
RTR_ACCEPT_CONN|1|Y
RTR_DISABLE_BCAST|1|Y
SETPOINT_SECURITY|1|NO
SHORT_FILENAMES|1|NO
SVC_RETRY_COUNT|1|30
SVC_RETRY_DELAY|1|100
SYSNAME|1|MMI_ONE

26-20 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Logical Names
Logical names are used to override default values for the CIMPLICITY HMI Base
System and options.
Note
Logical names are not to be confused with environment variables. Logical names are
found in the log_names.cfg file, while environment variables are accessed
through the Control Panel.
Logical names that you may want to consider modifying for the Base System are:
CLIE_MAX_PTS Maximum number of Import/Export points.
Logical names that you may want to consider modifying for Allen-Bradley
Communications are:
ALL_UNSO Multi-point updates for all ports
<port>_ALL_UNSO Multi-point updates for specified port
PLC2_PROT_WRITE_ALL Enable protected writes to all PLC-2
devices
PLC2_PROT_WRITE_<port> Enable protected writes to all PLC-2
devices on the specified port
ABI_MAXDEF Maximum number of devices and
unsolicited data messages
Logical names that you may want to consider modifying for Modbus Plus
Communications are:
MD_QUERY_ALL Query command support for all devices
MD_QUERY_<device> Query command support for specified
device
MD_SKIP_GENREF_ALL Skip General Reference validation for all
devices
MD_SKIP_GENREF_<device> Skip General Reference validation for
specified device
Logical names that you may want to consider modifying for Mitsubishi TCP/IP
Communications are:
<prcnam>_UNSO_ALL_TYPES> Unsolicited point addresses are matched to
both their Hexadecimal and Decimal
format addresses.
<prcnam>_UNSO_DEC Unsolicited point addresses are matched to
their Decimal format addresses.
<prcnam>_UNSO_EITHER Unsolicited point addresses are matched to
either their Hexadecimal or Decimal
format addresses or both.
<prcnam>_UNSO_HEX Unsolicited point addresses are matched to
their Hexadecimal format addresses.

GFK-1180 System Management 26-21

 DC_CONNECT_MS Change the number of milliseconds to wait
for a connection to be established between
poll checks.
DC_CONNECT_URETRY_CNT Change the number of retries to re-establish
communications between poll checks.
DC_TCP_POLLS_MS Change the number of milliseconds in the
polling interval.
DCQ_DEAD_TIME Change the number of seconds to wait
before declaring a device dead.
MMAX_SYNC_TICKS Changes how long (in ticks) to wait for a
synchronous response from a device, once
the request has been made of the device.
MSYNC_TICKS Changes how long to wait for a
synchronous response from a device, once
the request has been made of the device.
Logical names that you may want to consider modifying for SNP Communications
are:
BSM$SNP_T1_TIME> Controls the time between SNP messages.
BSM$SNP_ATTACH_DELAY> Controls the time delay before SNP attach
messages.

Editing the File

Entries in the log_names.cfg file are in the following format:
<logical_name>|<type>|default|<length>|<value>

Where:
<logical_name> is the name of the logical
<type> is the type of logical (usually set to P for project)
<length> is the number of characters in <value>
<value> is the value to be assigned to the logical name.
You may use Notepad to edit the file.
To change a logical name in the Logical Names file for a project, select Command
Prompt from the Tools menu in the Configuration Cabinet for the project where
you want to change the parameter and do the following:
1. Type cd data.
2. Type notepad log_names.cfg.
3. Find the parameter you want to change, and make the change.
4. Exit the Notepad.
5. Type exit to exit the Command Prompt window.
When you are ready to implement the change in the run-time system, you will have to
stop and restart CIMPLICITY software.

26-22 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Base System Logical Name Descriptions
CLIE_MAX_PTS
If this logical name is not defined, the default maximum number of points that may
be imported or exported is 1000. You can use the CLIE_MAX_PTS logical to
increase the default number. An example of such an entry in log_names.cfg is:
CLIE_MAX_PTS|S|default|5|5000

Deleting Login Information

When a user logs in to a project, the user is given the opportunity to save the
Username and Password used. When a user logs in to a project from a Viewer, the
user is also given the opportunity to request that the login occur automatically when
the system reboots.
You can use the Login Panel utility to delete saved login information from the
System Registry.

GFK-1180 System Management 26-23

Removing Registry Information
Important
It is possible to cause serious damage to your operating system by
using RegEdit and RegEdt32. Be careful not to delete anything that is
not listed in these instructions.
After CIMPLICITY software has been removed from your computer (either manually
or via the Uninstall utility on Windows NT or the Add/Remove applet on Windows
NT), it may be necessary for you to remove registry information. The following
sections detail what you need to do to accomplish this for Windows 95 and
Windows NT systems.

Removing Windows 95 Registry Information

For Windows 95, run regedit, and do the following:
1. Open HKEY_CURRENT_USERS, open Software, and delete GE
Fanuc Automation.
2. Open HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT, and delete the following:

.AMV
.cim
.CLG
.GEF
CFGCab Document
CimEdit
CimEdit.Documents
All file types starting with CIMPLICITY
CimView
CimView.Documents
Default Device Property Sheet
SNPDevice Property Sheet
TCP IP Device Property Sheet
VME Device Property Sheet

26-24 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Removing Windows NT Registry Information
For Windows NT, do the following:
1. Run the regedit registry program and delete the following:

CFGCab Document
CimEdit
CimEdit.Documents
All file types starting with CIMPLICITY
CimView
CimView.Documents
Default Device Property Sheet
GE Fanuc CIMPLICITY 7.0 Screen
SNPDevice Property Sheet
TCP IP Device Property Sheet
VME Device Property Sheet

2. Run RegEdt32 and delete the following:

\\HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\GE Fanuc Automation
\\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\GE Fanuc Automation

GFK-1180 System Management 26-25

Managing Database Logging

About Managing Database Logging

This chapter covers the following system management topics for the Database
Logger:
• Installing ODBC drivers and configuring data sources.
• Installing Oracle drivers and configuring data sources
• Managing the database for the SQL Server
• How tables are created.
• Table characteristics
• Controlling database disconnect recovery
• Using Database Logger global parameters
Important
The Microsoft Access ODBC driver is only supported on Intel-based
computers. You must purchase SQL Server and the Database Logger
option to log data on a DEC Alpha-based computer.

GFK-1180 27-1
ODBC Configuration
By default, the CIMPLICITY HMI Database Logger uses the Microsoft Access
ODBC driver to write to Access format (.MDB) files. This is automatically
configured during CIMPLICITY HMI installation. You do not need to purchase or
configure additional software to use this driver.
For improved performance and network extensibility, you may wish to log to a third-
party database product such as Microsoft SQL Server or Oracle.

ODBC Drivers
ODBC Applications use an ODBC driver to communicate with database applications.
The drivers supported for use with the CIMPLICITY HMI Database Logger are:
Microsoft Access An entry-level database which requires no additional
software to use.
Microsoft Access is currently supported only for Intel-
based computers using Windows NT or Windows 95.
Microsoft SQL Server A high-performance database for larger applications.
You must purchase SQL Server to use this driver. In
addition, you must license your CIMPLICITY HMI
Database Logger option for use with SQL Server.
Microsoft SQL Server is currently supported for Intel-
based and DEC Alpha computers
Oracle A high-performance database for large applications.
You must purchase version 7.3 of Oracle and version
3.01 of INTERSOLV DataDirect ODBC Driver for
Oracle to use this driver.
Oracle is currently supported for Intel-based
computers running Windows NT or Windows 95.

ODBC Data Sources

An ODBC Data Source is a specific configuration of an ODBC driver. When you
install the CIMPLICITY HMI Database Logger, several data sources are
automatically configured:
CIMPLICITY Alarm Logging A data source which uses the Microsoft
Access driver to log to CIMPLOG.MDB
in your distribution ARC directory.
CIMPLICITY Point Logging A data source which uses the Microsoft
Access driver to log to
POINTLOG.MDB in your distribution
ARC directory.
CIMPLICITY SQL Server Logging A data source which uses the Microsoft
SQL Server driver to log to an on-node
(local) SQL Server.

27-2 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
 If a driver is not supported for a particular platform, data sources will not be
configured for it.
Note
If you change the attributes of a data source, after you have configured Database
Logging to use that data source, you will need to go to the Logging Properties dialog
box and reselect the data source.

Moving Projects
If you copy a project to another computer, the ODBC configuration associated with
that project will not be automatically copied.
• If the project uses the default Microsoft Access data sources, you do not
need to make any changes to your configuration.
• If the project uses the SQL Server data source, you must configure a
new database and user account on the new target computer, then re-
open the Database Logger to rewrite the connect string.
• If the project uses custom data sources, these must be reconfigured on
the target machine.

About Custom Data Sources

You may configure additional data sources on your computer, or customize the data
sources that are configured by CIMPLICITY installation. However, you must
observe the following restrictions:
• Use only supported ODBC drivers. Other drivers may not meet the
data requirements of CIMPLICITY software.
• Because CIMPLICITY runs as a service, it must use system data
sources.
If you want to trend Logged or Logged • Remember that data sources are not part of your CIMPLICITY project,
Point data that is stored in a remote
database, you must add a custom data
and will not automatically follow a project that is taken to a different
source to the database. node.
• Be aware of any driver-specific restrictions (below) which may apply.

GFK-1180 Managing Database Logging 27-3

 Configuring Microsoft Access Data Sources
To configure an ODBC data source for use with the Microsoft Access file format,
perform the following steps:
1. Run the ODBC Administrator (from the ODBC program group) or
select the ODBC option from the Windows NT Control Panel.
2. Click System DSN to select the list of System Data Sources.
3. Click Add... to add a new data source.
4. Select the Microsoft Access Driver from the list, and click OK.
5. Enter a unique Data Source Name. Use any combination of letters,
numbers, and white space; but avoid punctuation characters.
6. Enter a Data Source Description, if desired.
7. Click Select... button to select an existing database file, or click
Create... to create a new .MDB file.
8. In the Select Database or New Database dialog, specify a file name,
and click OK.
9. From the ODBC Microsoft Access 7.0 Setup dialog, click Options.
10. Verify that Exclusive is not checked.
11. Configure separate data sources for CIMPLICITY Point Logging and
Alarm Logging.
Note
Due to file locking issues in the Microsoft Access driver, you must never request
Exclusive access to a database that is used by CIMPLICITY for logging. In addition,
the Point Logging and Alarm Logging data sources must refer to different database
files.

Installing SQL Server

You can purchase SQL Server version 6.5 from Microsoft. Before you install and
configure the database, you will need to decide which computer will run the SQL
Server database. The computer does not have to be your CIMPLICITY HMI
computer. If you plan to access the SQL Server database from other computers on
your network, you will need to purchase a SQL Server Client license for each of
those computers.
Install the SQL Server on the computer where you want to run the SQL Server
database. When you are prompted regarding network options, be sure to select
TCP/IP networking if you are going to be accessing the database from an off-node
CIMPLICITY HMI server or viewer. See the SQL Server documentation for more
details on installing the software.
After you finish installing the software, reboot your computer. You are now ready to
start configuring the SQL Server. After you configure the SQL Server, you can
install the SQL Server Client Utilities on any other computers that will be logging
data to or reading data from the SQL Server database.

27-4 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
 Configuring SQL Server
If the SQL server is not currently running:
1. Open the SQL Service Manager from the Start menu.
2. Start the MSSQLServer service from the dialog box.
You are now ready to register your SQL Server, construct a SQL device, construct a
SQL database, and create a SQL user.
To register your SQL Server:
1. From the SQL Server 6.5 menu, run the SQL Enterprise Manager.
2. Select Register Server from the Server menu to register your server
node. In the dialog box, enter the node name in the Server field. You
can use a Login ID of sa with the standard security option.
3. Click Register in the dialog box to complete your registration
To create a SQL device:
1. In the SQL Enterprise Manager, select Devices from the Manage
menu.
2. Click the New Device icon.
3. Enter the name, drive, path, and size of your database device.
To construct the SQL database:
1. In the SQL Enterprise Manager, select Databases from the Manage
menu.
2. Click the New Database icon.
3. Enter the name, device, and log device for your new database.
To create a SQL user:
1. In the SQL Enterprise Manager, select Logins from the Manage
menu.
2. Create a new user for CIMPLICITY logging, and make your new
database the default for that user.
3. Double-click the database to display its Permissions dialog box, and
give the logging account the Create Table, Create Stored
Procedure and Dump Transaction Log privileges.
Consult your SQL Server documentation for additional information.

GFK-1180 Managing Database Logging 27-5

 Configuring SQL Server Data Source
After your SQL Server database and user account are created, you can enter the
account and password in the Logging Properties dialog box for Alarm Logging and
Point Logging. Perform the following steps:
1. From the Configuration cabinet, use the right button to obtain the
popup menu for the Database Logger product option. Select Logging
Properties.
2. On the Alarm Logging page, select the CIMPLICITY SQL Server
Logging data source from the list of ODBC data source names.
3. Specify the SQL Server User ID and password in the space provided.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the Point Logging page.
5. Click OK to save your changes.
Note that you may use the same SQL Server Data Source for both pages of this
dialog.

Installing SQL Server Client Utilities

Reading is done by any applications, For each computer where you will be logging to or reading data from an off-node
such as Trending and SPC, which need
SQL Server, you will need to install the SQL Server Client Utilities. Follow the
to access logged data.
directions in the SQL Server documentation to do this.
Remember to select TCP/IP Networking on your SQL Server client computers (GE
Fanuc recommends that you use TCP/IP networking to connect to the remote SQL
Server database).
You will also need to purchase a SQL Server Client license for each computer where
you install the SQL Server Client Utilities.
Finally, you will need to configure the remote SQL Server data sources for each of
these computers.

Configuring Remote SQL Server Data Sources

If you are logging to or reading data from an off-node SQL Server, do the following
to modify the CIMPLICITY data sources:
1. Open the 32bit ODBC Administrator in the ODBC program group
2. In the Data Sources dialog, select System DSN. The System Data
Sources dialog box opens
3. In the System Data Sources dialog box, select CIMPLICITY SQL
Sever Logging (SQL Server) in the list of data sources.
4. Select Setup. The ODBC SQL Server Setup dialog box opens.
5. In the ODBC SQL Server Setup dialog box:
• Enter the SQL Server’s computer name in the Server field.
• Specify the SQL Server computer’s TCP/IP address as the
Network Address.
• Enter DBMSSOCN as the Network Library.

27-6 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
 • If you are logging to a specific database name rather than the
default:
• Select Options.
• Enter the database name in the Database Name field
6. Select OK on the ODBC SQL Server Setup dialog.
7. Select Close on the System Data Sources dialog.
8. Select Close on the Data Sources dialog.

Configuring Additional SQL Server Data Sources

If you need to create a SQL Server data source in addition to the standard
CIMPLICITY data source, do the following on the SQL Server Client computer:
1. Open the 32bit ODBC Administrator in the ODBC program group
2. In the Data Sources dialog, select System DSN. The System Data
Sources dialog opens
3. In the System Data Sources dialog, select Add. The Add Data Source
dialog opens.
4. In the Add Data Source dialog, select the ODBC driver for the data
source.
5. Select OK. The ODBC SQL Server Setup dialog box opens.
6. In the ODBC SQL Server Setup dialog, enter the name of the data
source in the Data Source Name field.
7. In the ODBC SQL Server Setup dialog box:
• Enter the SQL Server’s computer name in the Server field.
• Specify the SQL Server computer’s TCP/IP address as the
Network Address.
• Enter DBMSSOCN as the Network Library.
8. If you are logging to a specific database name rather than the default:
• Select Options.
• Enter the database name in the Database Name field
9. Select OK on the ODBC SQL Server Setup dialog.
10. Select Close on the System Data Sources dialog.
11. Select Close on the Data Sources dialog.

GFK-1180 Managing Database Logging 27-7

Oracle Configuration

Requirements
You must purchase the INTERSOLV DataDirect ODBC driver or Oracle (part
number DCNT100). Currently supported versions are:
• Version 3.01 - INTERSOLV DataDirect ODBC Driver for Oracle
• Version 7.3 - Oracle
Oracle databases can be supported on Intel-compatible computers with Microsoft
Windows NT v4.0 or Microsoft Windows 95.
The INTERSOLV ODBC driver and Oracle client software must be installed in the
same computer as the CIMPLICITY HMI software.
For Microsoft Windows NT v4.0, you must have the Allow Service to Interact
with Desktop option turned on for the CIMPLICITY HMI service. If you do not,
logging to the Oracle database will not work. To enable this option:
1. Open the Control Panel.
2. Open Services.
3. Double-click on CIMPLICITY Service from the list of services or
select Startup.... The Service dialog box opens.
4. In the Service dialog box, make sure that the System Account and
Allow Service to Interact with Desktop options are selected.

Using Oracle with CIMPLICITY HMI

To prepare the Oracle database for use with CIMPLICITY HMI projects:
1. Install the INTERSOLV ODBC Driver for Oracle. Follow the
directions in the INTERSOLV documentation to do this.
2. Install the Oracle client utilities (either Administrator or User). Follow
the directions in the INTERSOLV documentation to do this.
3. Use SQL*Net Easy Configuration to configure a database alias to
match the configured alias on the Oracle server.
Remember that the database alias is case sensitive.
If you do not know what database alias to use, ask your database
administrator or look up the alias configuration from SQL*Net
configuration on the Oracle server directly.
4. Configure the CIMPLICITY Service to interact with the desktop.
5. Create a new system ODBC data source for Oracle.
The server name should be the alias name you created in SQL*Net Easy
Configuration.
6. Select Database Logger in your project’s Configuration Cabinet.
7. In the Database Logger window, select Logging properties from the
Edit menu.

27-8 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
 8. In the Logging Properties dialog box, go to the Alarm Logging and
Point Logging pages and select your newly created ODBC data source
as the ODBC data source.
You need to be aware of the following:
• Database aliases configured on the client node must also be configured
on the server node.
• The Oracle server’s IP address must be in the CIMPLICITY HMI
computer’s HOST file.
• In the ODBC data source for Oracle, enter the alias name in the Server
name field.
• All three of the Oracle services must be started on the Oracle server
node.

Database Management for SQL Server

This section contains information on procedures for configuring additional locks and
truncating the Transaction Log.

Configuring Additional Locks

If the SQL Server generates an error that looks like this on rollover:
Error #S1000 SQLSERVER has run out of locks. Re-run your command
when …
you can do the following to increase the number of locks:
1. Open the SQL Enterprise Manager in the Microsoft SQL Manager
program group.
2. From the Server menu, select SQL Server, then Configure. The
Server Configuration/Options dialog opens.
3. In the Server Configuration/Options dialog, select the Configuration
page.
4. Find locks in the list.
5. Increase the number of locks.
6. Select OK.
7. Exit the SQL Enterprise Manager.
The change takes place the next time the SQL Server is restarted.

GFK-1180 Managing Database Logging 27-9

 Handling the Transaction Log
All SQL Server transactions are logged to the Transaction Log file. The Transaction
Log contains an audit trail by default and can grow to be quite large. To conserve
disk space consider doing one of the following:
• Use a truncated Transaction Log by default
• Use a CIMPLICITY maintenance action truncate the Transaction Log
periodically

Truncating the Log as a System Default

To make the Transaction Log truncated by default:
1. Open the SQL Enterprise Manager in the Microsoft SQL Manager
program group.
2. From the Manage menu, select Databases. The Manage Databases
dialog opens.
3. In the Manage Databases dialog, double click on the database used by
the CIMPLICITY Database Logger. The Edit Database dialog opens.
4. In the Edit Database dialog, select the Options page.
5. Select the Truncate Log on Checkpoint option.
6. Select OK.
7. Close the Manage Databases dialog.
The change takes place the next time the SQL Server is restarted.

Truncating the Log as a CIMPLICITY Maintenance Action

To define a CIMPLICITY Maintenance Action that periodically truncates the
Transaction Log:
1. Open the Database Logger in the CIMPLICITY program group.
2. Select a table from the list of tables.
3. Open the Table Properties dialog for the table.
4. Select the Maintenance Actions page.
5. In the Command Action field, enter:
dump transaction DATABASENAME with no_log
This command will dump the Transaction Log without saving the log.
If you want to save the log to a file, see your SQL Server
documentation on how to do this.
6. Select the Maintenance Events page.
7. Configure the event that will trigger the action.
This change takes place the next time you update the project’s configuration and then
restart the project.

27-10 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
Creating Tables
When a project is started, the Database Logger creates any tables you have
configured for that project based on the attributes you have specified. This means
you don’t have to know anything about databases to log data from your CIMPLICITY
project.
Specifically, when a project starts, the Database Logger will:
• Attempt to create or repair any missing or damaged databases.
• Create any missing tables.
• Create any missing columns in the tables.

Microsoft Access Note

To successfully create or repair tables, the Database Logger requires an exclusive
lock on the Access database. If another application is using the Access database, the
Database Logger cannot exclusively lock the database, and it will terminate. If this
happens, the following message will be logged in the Status Log for the project:
Unable to repair database
This problem occurs, for example, if a user is running reports on the Access database
while a project is being started.

Table Characteristics
The Database Logger tables have the following characteristics:

Column Definitions
A table can have, at most, 250 columns. The following columns are defined for each
type of log file:
• Data logging tables contain a timestamp and Point ID column, plus an
additional column for each table and point attribute you have selected.
The number of columns is independent of the number of points in the
table. For example, if you have a table that logs the point value and
previous value for all points configured for data logging, the table will
have four columns.
• Alarm, Event, and Application logging tables have columns that are
specific to that table, plus an additional column for each table attribute
you have selected. All table rows include a timestamp column and an
autoincrement sequence number that ensures that each row is unique.
• Group logging tables contain a timestamp column, plus an additional
column for each table and point attribute you have selected. For
example, if you have a table logging the value and alarm state of five
points, the table will have eleven columns.

GFK-1180 Managing Database Logging 27-11

Points with Engineering Units
conversion are stored in floating
point format
The number of columns you can actually have in a group table
depends on the type of data you are storing. A record being added to
the database can have at most 2 KB of data. With overhead, 2 KB
amounts to approximately 222 8-byte floating-point numbers.
If you are storing a number of floating-point numbers or long text
strings in a group record, it is recommended that you verify that the 2
KB limit is not being exceeded.

Key Definitions
The following keys are defined for each type of log file:
• Group logging tables have a unique primary key index on the
timestamp column. If you have selected the project name table
attribute, the primary key index also includes the project name column.
• Data logging tables have a primary key index on the joined timestamp
and Point ID columns, and a secondary index on the timestamp alone.
If you have selected the project name table attribute, the primary key
index also includes the project name column.
• Alarm, Event, and Application logging tables have a primary key index
on the joined timestamp and sequence number columns, and a
secondary index on the timestamp alone. If you have selected the
project name table attribute, the primary key index also includes the
project name column.
Important
Since the Microsoft Access format does not support subsecond
timestamp data, you cannot log points to a Data or Group table at
subsecond rates. Attempting to do so will cause the duplicate-keyed
records to be dropped from the database.

27-12 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
Database Disconnect Recovery
The DB_CONN_DOWN alarm is not
stacked by default, but you can
change it in Alarm Configuration.
GFK-1180
If the Database Logger loses its connection to a Microsoft Access or SQL Server
database, it generates a DB_CONN_DOWN alarm. When it successfully reconnects
to the database, the alarm is cleared. You can control the amount of time to wait
between connection requests, and you can control the amount of data to be saved
locally then forwarded to the database when the reconnection is made.
Reconnect Wait Period
You can use the Reconnect wait period to define the amount of time to wait
between connection requests whenever the Database logger loses its connection to
the database. Each time a reconnect request fails, a DB_CONN_DOWN alarm is
generated.
You can define a separate wait period for the Alarm Logging and Point Logging.
After the database connection is reestablished, if you have also enabled the Store
and forward feature, all of the stored data is automatically forwarded to the
database.
Store and Forward
The Store and Forward feature is available for both Microsoft Access and SQL
Server databases. This feature lets you write records for Alarm Logging and Point
Logging to storage files whenever the Database Logger loses its connection to the
database.
When the Database Logger successfully reconnects to the database and Store and
Forward is enabled when the Database Logger starts, the Database Logger checks
for stored data files (that is, .SQL files) in the storage directory. If it finds files, it
generates a DB_START_FORWARD alarm then checks the files for stored data. If
there is no stored data in the files, the Database Logger logs the following message to
the Status Log:
No forward data found in <store_path>
and clears the DB_START_FORWARD alarm.
If there is data to forward, the Database Logger goes through each file and forwards
the data to the database. When all the data has been forwarded, or if the Database
Logger loses its connection to the database, it clears the DB_START_FORWARD
alarm and stops processing the storage files.
Note
Stored data and new logged data are sent in parallel to the database, and all
Maintenance actions are ignored while data is being stored.
After a file is forwarded to the database, the Database Logger sends the following
message to the Status Log:
Forward: <file_name> succ: <no_suc> fail <no_fail>
If there are failures, the following message will also be logged:
Forward: See log <filename> for errors.
Managing Database Logging 27-13
 If the Database Logger cannot process a SQL statement in a storage file, it generates
a log file with the same name as the storage file and the extension .LOG. The log file
contains the statement forwarded to the database and the error message returned by
the database.
If the Database Logger encounters no problems when forwarding data, no .LOG file
is generated.
Note
If you have Store and Forward enabled and storage files exist when you shut
down the Database Logger and you then disable Store and Forward, the Database
Logger will not forward records from the storage files when it restarts.
You can open a storage file and examine its contents in, for example, Notepad.

Enabling Store and Forward

When you enable this feature, you can choose to store an unlimited, or a maximum
number of records in the storage file for the database. You can define separate
storage options for Alarm Logging and Point Logging.
• If you choose to store unlimited records, the Database Logger continues
to save data records until it runs out of disk space. The following
message is then logged in the Status Log:
Unable to write to store and forward file, <filename>
and the Database Logger continues to try to save additional records.
• If you choose to store a maximum number of records, the Database
Logger saves the configured number of records then stops, and the
following message is logged to the Status Log
Number of stored records exceeded maximum <max_no>
The records are stored in one or more files in a storage directory. The number of
files depends on the maximum number of records you select and the maximum
number of records per file.

Store and Forward File Names

For Alarm Logging and Point Logging storage files, the default directory is
%SITE_ROOT%\arc, and the default maximum number of records per file is 100.
The filenames for the storage files have the following format:
<dbms_ID>_<date_stamp>_<time_stamp>.SQL

where <dbms_id> is the database’s DBMS ID, <date_stamp> is the date and
<time_stamp> is the time the file was created. For example:
POINT_960916_053151.SQL

27-14 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
 How Maximum Number of Records Works
Once the maximum number of records have been stored, the Database Logger will
not store any more records until it can forward some of the currently stored records.
For example, you configure Store and Forward for a maximum of five records.
• After the Database Logger loses its connection to the database, it stores
five records and logs the "Number of stored records exceeded" message
to the Status Log:
• The Database Logger then reconnects to the database and is able to
forward three of the stored records before it loses its connection again.
• The Database Logger will now store three records and log the "Number
of stored records exceeded" message to the Status Log:
If the Database Logger is shut down, and there are still records in the storage files,
when the Database logger restarts, these records are not counted against the
maximum. Under these conditions, you can have more than the maximum number of
records stored to disk.

Changing Directory and Record Defaults

The default directory for Store and Forward files is %SITE_ROOT%\arc, and
the default number of records per file is 100. You can change both of these defaults.
Important
Please consider carefully when changing the maximum number of
records per stored file. Setting too high a number will result in
unmanageable files, while setting too low a number will cause
excessive disk I/O.
1. In your project’s Configuration program group, select Command
Prompt… from the Tools menu.
2. At the command prompt type:
cd master
idtpop dbms_def
notepad dbms_def.idt
The file looks like this:
|-* IDT file generated by IDTPOP utility v1.0
* RECORD: DBMS_DEF ODBC Database Definitions
* 0 DBMS_ID Name of the database/service for logging
* 1 driver ODBC name of DMBS driver
* 2 connect_string Connection string for ODBC driver
* 3 wait_period reconnect wait period
* 4 wait_units reconnect wait period units
* 5 store_forward 0=off 1=on
* 6 store_path path of stored file
* 7 recs_per_file max recs per stored file
* 8 limited 0=unlimited store else max num of recs
*
$LOGGING|Microsoft Access Driver <*.mdb>|-
DSN=CIMPLICITY Alarm Logging;UID=admin;DBQ=BSM_ROOT:\arc\CIMPLOG.MDB|-1|0|0||100|0.000000
$LOGGING|Microsoft Access Driver <*.mdb>|-
DSN=CIMPLICITY Point Logging;UID=admin;DBQ=BSM_ROOT:\arc\POINTLOG.MDB|-1|0|0||100|0.000000

Note that the Alarm Logging and Point Logging databases have
separate records.

GFK-1180 Managing Database Logging 27-15

 3. To define a new path for the stored records for a database, enter the
pathname in the store_path field for the database. You can set a
different path for each database.
4. To define a new maximum number of records per stored file for a
database, enter the new maximum in the recs_per_file field for
the database. You can set a different maximum for each database.
5. Exit Notepad and save the updated file.
6. Enter the following commands to regenerate the data file and close the
command window:
scpop dbsm_def
exit
In order for this change to take effect, you must shut down your project, perform a
Configuration Update, and then restart the project.

Database Logger Global Parameters

The following global parameters are available for the Database Logger.
• DB_ENABLE_TRANSACTIONS
• DB_TIME_FORMAT
• DB_DEBUG
For detailed information on editing the global parameters file, see "Global
Parameters" under System Management.

DB_ENABLE_TRANSACTIONS
If specified, this global parameter overrides the default database functionality as
requested by ODBC.
The record format is:
DB_ENABLE_TRANSACTIONS|1|<flag>

where <flag> is Y if you want to force logging to use transactions, or N if you want
to force logging to not use them.
If you are using SQL Server and have configured an Insert Trigger on a database
table, you will need to set this value to N.

27-16 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
 DB_TIME_FORMAT
CIMPLICITY software uses the default Microsoft Access and SQL Server timestamp
format for your locale when it writes SQL statements.
If you are using Store and Forward and your database does not use the default
timestamp format, you need to define this global parameter. Enter the timestamp
format for your database so that time and date fields will be written correctly in the
Store and Forward files.
The record format is:
DB_TIME_FORMAT|1|<timestamp>

where <timestamp> is the timestamp format for your database. The format is case
sensitive:
• The year (Y), month (M) and hour (H) indicators must be in upper-case.
• The day (d), minutes (m), seconds (s) and ticks (t) indicators must be in
lower-case.
For example:
DB_TIME_FORMAT|1|dd\MMM\YYYY HHHH:mm:ss

To return to the default format, remove this record from the file.

DB_DEBUG
You can enable the dumping of diagnostic information for the Database Logger to the
MAC_DL.out and MAC_PTDL.out files in your project’s log directory.
The record format is:
DB_DEBUG|1|<value>

where <value> can be any combination of:

0 Stop dumping diagnostic information
1 Print full syntax of ODBC error messages (this is the default)
2 Print details of database connection when established
4 Print syntax of ODBC statements if they fail
8 Rename/keep Store and Forward files after loading them
4096 Print application-specific details
If you do not define DB_DEBUG, the default is to print the full syntax of ODBC
error messages. Since ODBC errors should happen infrequently, this is unlikely to
cause problems with disk space.
You must explicitly specify a value of 0 (zero) to stop dumping diagnostic
information to the log files.
If you need additional information, a value of 7 (1+2+4) is recommended.
If you also want to keep the Store and Forward files after loading them, a value of 15
(1+2+4+8) is recommended.

GFK-1180 Managing Database Logging 27-17

 There are additional undocumented values that should only be used by GE Fanuc
engineers as they send a great number of messages to the MAC_DL.out and
MAC_PTDL.out that could quickly fill your available disk space.

27-18 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
Security Features

About CIMPLICITY Security Features

CIMPLICITY HMI software lets you implement the following security features:
• Login Password
• Role Privileges
• Setpoint Security
• Setpoint Password
• Security Audit Trail

Login Password
When you configure a User in a CIMPLICITY HMI project, you can:
• Select whether the user needs to enter a password in the CIMPLICITY
Login dialog box.
Passwords are stored in an encoded format and are not directly readable
by users.
• Set the password to expire after a given number of days.
When the password expires, the user will be required to change the
password on the next login to CIMPLICITY HMI.
• Configure a number of consecutive login failures.
When this number is reached, the user’s account is disabled and a
$LOGIN_FAILURE alarm is generated.
For more information on User Configuration, see that chapter in the CIMPLICITY
HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Base System User’s Manual (GFK-1180).

GFK-1180 28-1
 Role Privileges
You can assign one Role to each User in a CIMPLICITY HMI project. When you
configure a Role in a CIMPLICITY HMI project, you can grant users assigned the
Role permission to:
• Perform setpoints on CimView or Point Control Panel screens.
• Enable Dynamic Configuration for functions in the Configuration
Cabinet.
• Delete alarms from the Alarm Viewer window.
• Access the CIMPLICITY Program Control utility.
• Modify alarm setups in the Alarm Viewer window.
• Log setpoint events to the Event Log.
• Create Point by Address points in CimEdit screens.
• Trigger events in the Basic Control Engine User Interface (BCEUI).
• Stop, pause or resume scripts in the BCEUI.
For more information on Role Configuration, see that chapter in the CIMPLICITY
HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Base System User’s Manual (GFK-1180).

Setpoint Security
You can use the Setpoint Security feature to enable or disable Setpoint Security for
all users that access your project. If you enable Setpoint Security, a user can perform
setpoints on only those points whose resources are in the user’s view.
For an Enterprise Server project, Setpoint Security is enforced against the rescue in
the Enterprise Server project if that project contains the same rescues as the provider
of the point. If the resource is not configured on the Enterprise Server project, then
Setpoint Security for the point is enforced against the remote project’s resource.
For more information on Point Configuration, see that chapter in the CIMPLICITY
HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Base System User’s Manual (GFK-1180).

Setpoint Password
By default, run-time users have unrestricted access to the setpoint functions used by
CIMPLICITY HMI software. If you enable the Setpoint Password option and enter
a password, run-time users will be prompted for this password whenever they invoke
a setpoint function.
Setpoint functions include:
• Setpoint entries from the Point Control Panel.
• Absolute, Ramp, Relative, Toggle and Variable setpoint actions on
CimView screens.
If you include Setpoint functions in Basic Control Engine scripts, and you enable the
Setpoint Password option, you must include the password in the function call.
For more information on Point Configuration, see that chapter in the CIMPLICITY
HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Base System User’s Manual (GFK-1180).

28-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Base System User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Security Audit Trail
The Security Audit Trail lets you monitor user actions in your project. It consists of
a set of standard alarms that report on the following types of events:
• Point Control Panel alarm changes
• Setpoint downloads
• Dynamic configuration changes
• Project logins and logouts
These alarms are included in your project configuration. They are all configured for:
• Delete on Acknowledge
• No Manual Clear
• Log on Generate
• Acknowledge immediately
• No stacking
You can reconfigure the alarm characteristics to suit your needs.
For more information on Alarm Configuration, see that chapter in the CIMPLICITY
HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Base System User’s Manual (GFK-1180).
By default, the Audit Trail alarms are logged in the Event Log table of the Database
Logger. You can choose whether you want to log each alarm. You can also choose
to log each alarm in the Event Log table or Alarm Log table. Finally, you can
generate a report of Audit Trail alarms from the Database Logger table.
For more information on Database Logger Configuration, see that chapter in the
CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Base System User’s Manual
(GFK-1180).

Point Control Panel Alarm Changes

The Point Control Panel alarm change alarms record the type of change, the Point ID
being changed, the CIMPICITY login user name of the user, the computer login user
name of the user and the computer name.
The $ALARM_DISABLED alarm is generated when a user disables alarming for a
point. The alarm message contains the following information:
Alarm detection disabled for: <point_id> by <user_id>
(<OS_user> @ <computer_name>)

The $ALARM_ENABLED alarm is generated when a user enables alarming for a

point. The alarm message contains the following information:
Alarm detection enabled for: <point_id> by <user_id>
(<OS_user> @ <computer_name>)

The $ALARM_MODIFIED alarm is generated when a user modifies the alarm

limits for a point. The alarm message contains the following information:
Alarm limits modified for: <point_id> by <user_id>
(<OS_user> @ <computer_name>)

The $ALARM_RESTORED alarm is generated when a user restores the alarm

limits for a point. The alarm message contains the following information:
Alarm limits restored for: <point_id> by <user_id>
(<OS_user> @ <computer_name>)

GFK-1180 Security Features 28-3

 Setpoint Downloads
A user can download setpoints from:
• CimView screens
• The Point Control Panel
• Recipes
Setpoints can also be downloaded from Basic Control Engine scripts
The $DOWNLOAD alarm is generated when a user downloads a setpoint or a
recipe. The alarm message contains the following information:
<point_id> <value> <user_id> (<OS_user> @ <computer_name>)

Dynamic Configuration Changes

A user can enable Dynamic Configuration only if the role the user is assigned has
been granted that privilege.
The $DYN_CFG alarm is generated each time a user makes a configuration change
while Dynamic Configuration enabled. The alarm message contains the following
information:
<type> <name> changed by <user_id> (<OS_user> @
<computer_name>)

The alarm records the entity type being changed, the entity name being changed, the
CIMPICITY login user name of the user and the computer login user name of the
user.

Project Login/Logout
The $LOGIN_FAILURE alarm is generated when a user fails to log in to a
CIMPLICITY HMI project correctly and the number of consecutive login errors has
been reached. The alarm message contains the following information:
User ID <user_id> disabled, computer <computer_name>

The $LOGIN alarm is generated when a user successfully logs in to a CIMPLICITY

HMI project. The alarm message contains the following information:
User ID <user_id> @ <computer_name> logged on

The $LOGOUT alarm is generated when a user logs out of a CIMPLICITY HMI
project. The alarm message contains the following information:
User ID <user_id> @ <computer_name> logged out

28-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Base System User’s Manual GFK-1180
Using the OEM Key

About OEM Key

The OEM Key is designed to allow OEMs and Integrators to maintain installed
CIMPLICITY HMI Runtime systems for their customers. It lets you temporarily
convert a CIMPLICITY HMI Runtime System License on a computer to a
CIMPLICITY HMI Development System License.
When you activate OEM Key on a computer, you must stop all projects that are
currently running on the computer.
While OEM Key is active on a computer:
• The Development System License only applies to projects running on
the computer.
• Projects that you start on the computer cannot access data from or
provide data to other CIMPLICITY HMI projects.
OEM Key terminates at the end of two hours. You can terminate it earlier by exiting
the OEM Key application. When OEM Key terminates, all running projects are
stopped.

Running OEM Key

To activate OEM Key:
1. Open the Explorer or a Command Prompt window
2. Locate the CIMPLICITY HMI exe directory.
(If you accepted the default location for CIMPLICITY HMI software
during installation, it is C:\CIMPLICITY\HMI\exe.)
3. Run oemkey.exe.
The CIMPLICITY License Agreement dialog box opens.

GFK-1180 29-1
 CIMPLICITY License Agreement
The License Agreement dialog box displays the end user license agreement for
CIMPLICITY HMI software and gives you a chance to accept or refuse it.

If you select No, OEM Key terminates.

To accept all the terms of the license agreement, select Yes. The next dialog box
that opens depends on your computer status:
• If any projects are running, the OEM Key dialog box opens.
• If no projects are running, the CIMPLICITY HMI OEM Key dialog box
opens.

29-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Base System User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Stopping Running Projects
If OEM Key finds that CIMPLICITY HMI projects are running on your computer,
the OEM Key dialog box opens. This dialog box gives you the opportunity to exit
OEM Key or terminate the projects and activate OEM Key.

Select Cancel to exit OEM Key without stopping the running projects.
Select Stop CIMPLICITY HMI to terminate your running projects.
When the Next> button activates, select it to continue activating OEM Key. The
CIMPLICITY HMI OEM Key dialog box opens.

GFK-1180 Using the OEM Key 29-3

 Starting OEM Key
The CIMPLICITY HMI OEM Key dialog box shows you the time left on OEM Key.

You can leave the dialog box open or minimize it while OEM Key is running.
You can select the Show status window check box to display the time left. This
status window displays on top of all the windows on your screen.

If you exit the dialog box or select Quit, the OEM Key terminates immediately.

Terminating OEM Key

OEM Key terminates at the end of two hours. You can terminate it earlier by exiting
the CIMPLICITY HMI OEM Key dialog box. When OEM Key terminates:
• It displays a dialog box warning you that it will stop all running
projects.
• It stops all running projects.
• It converts your temporary Development System License back to your
Runtime System License.
You can now restart your projects.

29-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Base System User’s Manual GFK-1180
Remote Projects, Enterprise
Server and Point Bridge

Remote Projects
If your computer is on a network with other CIMPLICITY computers, you can
retrieve point information from projects running on the other computers in a variety
of ways:
• You can display CimView screens for other projects.
• You can display points from other computers on CimView screens
running in your project.
• You can collect data from points in projects on other computers.
• If you are using the Database Logger option, you can log points from
projects on other computers.
You need to define Remote Projects under the following conditions:
• You have defined points in Point Configuration that use the Point
Bridge to get their values from points in projects on other computers.
• You are using the Database Logger option and you are logging points
from projects on other computers.
In other words, if, when the project starts, the Point Bridge or Point Data Logger
need to get points from projects on other computers running CIMPLICITY projects,
you need to define remote projects. This is especially important if you are
configuring a CIMPLICITY project to start at boot time.
To define a remote project, double-click the Remote Projects icon in the
Configuration cabinet for your project.
The Configuration - Projects window opens.

GFK-1180 30-1
 Creating A New Remote Project
To create a new remote project, you can do one of the following:
• Select New from the File menu.
• Click the New Item button on the Toolbar.
When you do, the New Project dialog box opens.

Enter the name of the remote project in the Project Name field and select OK. The
Remote Project dialog box opens. This dialog box consists of two pages.
• Use the General page to enter general information about the project.
• Use the Enterprise page to configure data and alarm collection for an
enterprise project.
When you are through, select OK to save the information, or select Cancel to close
the dialog box without making any changes.

30-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Base System User’s Manual GFK-1180
 General for Remote Project

Enter information in the following fields:

CIMPLICITY User Id Enter the CIMPLICITY User ID for the remote
project login.
Password Enter the password, if any, for the remote
project login.
Reenter Password If you are entering a password, re-enter it here
to confirm it.
Enable Set this check box to enable the login.
If you clear the check box, the login will not be
made.
Resident Process Use Only Set this check box if you only want resident
processes to automatically log in to remote
projects. Users will still have to log in at the
Application level.
If you clear this check box, users will not have
to log in at the Application level, and they are
automatically given the same privileges as the
CIMPLICITY User ID for the remote login.

GFK-1180 Remote Projects, Enterprise Server and Point Bridge 30-3

 Enterprise for Remote Project

If you want to use your current project as an Enterprise Server, you must define a
remote project for each project in your enterprise from when you want to concentrate
data or alarm information.
The Resource and Device are pre-configured. Users that want to view point and
alarm information from a remote project on an Enterprise Server must have the
remote projects Resource configured in their view.
Collect points Set this check box to collect point information from the
provider project. All points on the remote project that have
been configured as Enterprise Points are available to the
current project.
Points from remote projects are identified by Remote ID and
Point ID as \\<remote_id>\<point_id> for CimView
and Point Control Panel windows.
Collect alarms Set this check box to collect alarm information from the
provider project.
Only one level of concentration is supported. In other words, if you are connecting
to a remote project that has local and concentrated points, you will only be able to
collect local points from the remote project.

30-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Base System User’s Manual GFK-1180
Configuring Point Bridge Points
The Point Bridge is part of the Base System, and enables separate CIMPLICITY
systems to exchange point data. The system that is responsible for data collection of
the point data is called the source system. The system that runs the Point Bridge
process is called the destination system.
You should configure points that use the Point Bridge under the following
circumstances:
• You have a complex system architecture where users on Viewers need
to display points from Servers.
• You want to generate alarms on your Server for points on another
Server.
You will need to do the following to successfully use the Point Bridge:
1. Configure a Remote Project for the source system on the destination
system.
2. Configure the Point Bridge port.
3. Define a device for the Point Bridge port and make sure the Device
Name matches the Remote Project name.
4. Define the points you want to retrieve from the source system. Make
sure that the Point Address matches the source project’s point name.
The Point ID on the destination system does not have to match the Point ID on the
source system. The data types and number of elements of the two points do have to
match. When the source point changes value, the point value is updated on the local
system.
Both reading and writing of points are supported. If a point is configured for
WRITE access on both systems, a user on the Point Bridge system can set the value
of the Point Bridge point. The point on the source system is then updated.
Dynamic configuration of Point Bridge points is also supported.
Note

Diagnostic points are not available for the Point Bridge.

Point Bridge Point Configuration Details

The standard features of CIMPLICITY device points such as alarming and logging
apply to Point Bridge points.
Points configured incorrectly will remain in an unavailable state. The Point Bridge
Device Communications process will generate error messages regarding
configuration errors. These can be found in the project’s Status Log and the PB.ERR
file.
The local point and the associated remote (source) point must have identical Point
Class, Data Type, and number of Elements.

GFK-1180 Remote Projects, Enterprise Server and Point Bridge 30-5

 The fields described below have configuration values that are unique to or have
special meaning for Point Bridge communications:
Device For CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95
systems, enter the project name on the source system where
the Point Translation process is running.
For other CIMPLICITY systems, enter the node name of the
source system where the Point Translation process is running.
Point ID Enter the name by which the point will be referenced in this
system. This does not need to match the Point ID on the
source system, but it can if desired.
Access Specify if the Point Bridge process can set the value of a point
on a source system.
WRITE access is only valid if it is configured for the point on
the Point Bridge system and on the source system.
Update Criteria Only UNSOLICITED updates are supported.
Address Enter the Point ID of the point on the source system.
Poll After Set Clear this check box. Point Bridge does not support this
feature.

30-6 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Base System User’s Manual GFK-1180
Site Wide Installation

Introduction to Site Wide Installation

CIMPLICITY HMI Site Wide Installation is for Enterprise Network Architecture. It
takes advantage of the features of the Microsoft Systems Management Server (SMS)
You must know the following about the Microsoft Systems Management Server
before starting site wide installation:
• How to Install SMS Server and SMS Client
• How to create a Package
• How to Create a Job
• How to remove a Package
• SMS Software Management
This document has two sections.
• The first section is about the Microsoft Systems Management Server
(SMS). It briefly explains what SMS is and how it can be used for
software distribution.
For more information about SMS, please see the Microsoft Systems
Management Server documentation in the Microsoft Developer’s
Network Books Online.
• The second section of this document explains the procedure of site wide
installation. CIMPLICITY HMI software provides some tools for
making site wide installation procedure easier. This section gives step
by step instructions to use them.

GFK-1180 31-1
About Microsoft System Management Server (SMS)
The SMS system provides network administrators with a method for centrally
managing software and hardware for their corporate networks. The SMS system is
an easy-to-use, integrated system that:
• Maintains an inventory of the hardware, software and configuration of
computers across a corporate network.
• Distributes, installs, and updates software and files.
• Manages network applications (applications run over the network from
servers).
• Provides integrated support utilities that enable you to view diagnostic
information for remote clients and take direct control of clients.
• Provides an integrated network monitor utility that enables you to
monitor network data flow.
All these tasks can be done centrally with the SMS Administrator at a Microsoft
Windows NT-based client. The SMS system maintains a database containing system
information and inventory, carries out distribution and installation jobs, monitors the
progress of these jobs, and alerts you to important system events.
SMS lets you centrally manage your entire enterprise. Using SMS you can distribute
and install software on clients and servers across your corporate network, set up
network applications, automatically collect and maintain hardware and software
inventory, provide direct support to clients, and monitor your network.
When you distribute software to a site, the software is distributed to designated
servers at the site called distribution servers. From these distribution servers, users
can manually access and install the software on their clients. Or you can specify
commands to automatically run applications or install software from the distribution
servers to the clients.
When you set up a network application for shared use by groups of users, you
distribute software to the servers from which you want users to access the network
application. You also specify which groups of users have access to the network
application. When you set up the network application, the program item for the
application is automatically set up on the users’ computers. When users choose the
application, the network application is run from that server.
You can also specify scheduling times for distributing software to maximize the
efficiency of your system.
You can distribute software or set up network applications for the current site where
you have logged on with the SMS Administrator or for any site beneath the current
site. When you target other sites for software distribution or network application
setup, the SMS system can use NetBIOS transport protocols on a LAN, RAS (Async,
X.25, or ISDN communications link), or SNA LU 6.2 links (batch and interactive
mode) to transfer the software and instructions for installing that software to the
target sites. For fault tolerance and efficiency, you can also define alternate LAN,
RAS, or SNA addresses to other sites. You can also set scheduling and priority
management on each type of address.

31-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 How Client Package Distribution Works
In order to run a package command on target clients, SMS must perform three tasks:
• Send the package to the sites containing the target clients.
• Distribute the package to servers at those sites.
• Send the instructions for running the package command to the target
clients.
All of these tasks can be done with a single Run Command On Workstation job (as
described in this document). Alternatively, you can do each of these tasks
individually using separate Run Command On Workstation jobs.
When a job sends a package, SMS compresses all files and subdirectories in the
package’s source directory into a single compressed package file and transfers the
compressed file to the sites containing target clients. The compressed package file is
stored on the site server.

Once a package has been sent to a target site, the package is distributed to servers at
the target site. The SMS Despooler at the target site decompresses the compressed
package file into the package source directory’s original files and directory structure,
and places these files on the distribution servers in a subdirectory of the
SMS\LOGON.SRV\PCMPKG.SRC directory. The package source directory is
shared so that the client can have access to the directory.

GFK-1180 Site Wide Installation 31-3

 The server where the package directory is shared is called the distribution server
because it serves as a distribution point for the package source directory. When a
user selects a package command line using the Package Command Manager, the
Package Command Manager connects to the package share of the distribution server
for the package share. The Package Command Manager then runs the package
command using the package share as the current directory.
Once a package has been distributed to servers at a site, the package’s command can
be run at clients in the site. From the list of computers specified in the Job Target for
the job, the Despooler at the target site creates an instruction file for each target client
for running the package command. The SMS Maintenance Manager replicates these
instruction files to all logon servers at the site.
When the user at the client starts the Windows environment or explicitly starts the
Package Command Manager, the Package Command Manager checks a logon server
for package command instructions (the Package Command Manager checks for
incoming jobs at an interval specified in the Options dialog box.). The package
command is made available to the user according to the instructions specified by the
Run Workstation Command settings for the job.

31-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
CIMPLICITY HMI Site Wide Installation Procedure
Do the following to successfully perform a Site Wide Installation of CIMPLICITY
HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 software:
1. Create the Application Source Directory
2. Create SMS Package for CIMPLICITY HMI installation
3. Create Job for CIMPLICITY HMI installation

Creating the Application Source Directory

Note

If you have already created the Application Source Directory and copied the platform
files to it, and all you want to do is open the Select CIMPLICITY Options dialog box,
just run SMSSETUP.BAT in the Application Source Directory, and go to Step 4 of
these instructions.

To create the Application Source Directory on your SMS server:

1. Insert CIMPLICITY CD-ROM into CD-ROM drive of SMS server.
2. From File Manager/ Start Menu run SMSSETUP.BAT on the
CD-ROM. The Setup dialog box opens.

3. In the Setup dialog box:

• In Select platform, select the platforms on which CIMPLICITY
HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 is to be installed.
• In the Target Path, enter the name of the Application Source
Directory. The default directory is c:\cimpsms.
• Make sure that the system has enough disk space.
• Select OK to copy the files to the Application Source Directory.
After the files are copied, the Select CIMPLICITY Options dialog box
opens automatically.

GFK-1180 Site Wide Installation 31-5

 4. In the Select CIMPLICITY Options dialog box:
• Check the Upgrade box if you want to allow an upgrade during
installation.
Now do the following for each product you want to install:
• Select the product type in the Select Options for combo box.
All options for that product will be displayed.
• Select the CIMPLICITY options you want to install.
• Select Apply.
Note

Each product that has been modified will have an asterisk (*) in front of its name in
the Select Options for combo box.

• After you have selected all the product options to be updated,

select Close to close the dialog box.
5. Share the Application Source Directory with the same name (for
example, the share name for c:\cimpsms is CIMPSMS).

31-6 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Creating SMS Package for CIMPLICITY HMI
installation
To create the SMS package for CIMPLICITY HMI installation:
1. Start SMS Administrator.
2. Open the Packages window.
3. From the File menu, select New.
The Package Properties dialog box opens.

4. Select Import.
The File Browser dialog box opens.

5. In the File Browser dialog box:

• In the File Name box, select CIMPLCT.PDF.
• Select OK.
The File Browser dialog box closes and the Package Properties dialog
box redisplays.

GFK-1180 Site Wide Installation 31-7

 6. In the Package Properties dialog box, select Workstations.
The Setup Package for Workstations dialog box opens.

7. In the Setup Package for Workstations dialog box:

• In the Source Directory box, enter the location of the
Application Source Directory. You can use the Browser button to
the right of the box to find it.
• Select Close.

Creating Job for CIMPLICITY HMI Installation

To create the job for CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95
installation:
1. In the SMS Administrator, open the Job window.
2. From the File menu, select New.
The Job Properties dialog box opens.

3. In the Job Properties dialog box:

• Enter a meaningful comment in the Comment box (for example,
CIMPLICITY 3.1 Installation)

31-8 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 • Select Details.
The Job Details dialog box opens.

4. In the Job Details dialog box:

• In the Package box, select the CIMPLICITY 3.1 package.
• In the Job Target box, select an appropriate job target.
• In the Run Workstation Command, select the type of setup.
• Select all other applicable options.
• Select OK.
This will create a job for CIMPLICITY HMI Site wide installation
5. Once the job is executed, this package can be deleted.

GFK-1180 Site Wide Installation 31-9

Using CIMPLICITY HMI with
Remote Access

About Remote Access

You can use the Remote Access features of Windows NT and Windows 95 to let
users with CIMPLICITY HMI Viewer software on a Client computer access
CIMPLICITY HMI project data on a Server computer through modems.

This document shows you how to:

• Install and configure the Remote Access Service on Server computers
running Windows NT.
• Install and configure the Remote Access Service on Client computers
running Windows NT.
• Install and configure Dial-Up Networking on Client computers running
Windows 95.
• Configure the hosts files for the Server and Client computers.
• Test the connection between the Server and Client computers.
• Configure a CIMPLICITY HMI project for remote access.
• Access a CIMPLICITY HMI project from a Client computer.

GFK-1180 32-1
 About the Examples in this Document
The example in this document uses the following:
• A Server computer, named ALNT32, with:
• Microsoft Windows NT V4.0
• CIMPLICITY HMI Server software
• Modem
• Ethernet IP address of 3.26.5.134
• Two consecutive IP addresses - 3.26.5.143 and 3.26.5.144 - to be
used for the Remote Access Service configuration.
• A Client computer, named ALW085, with:
• Microsoft Windows 95
• CIMPLICITY HMI Viewer software
• Modem
Pictorially, the configuration looks like this:

32-2 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Before You Start
Before you configure your CIMPLICITY HMI Viewer and Server computers for
remote access, you need to have the following:
For the CIMPLICITY HMI Server (also referred to as the Server computer), you
need:
• Microsoft Windows NT version 4.0 (Workstation or Server) installed
• Ethernet installed
• A modem
• The Microsoft Windows NT operating system CD
For the CIMPLICITY HMI Viewer (also referred to as the Client computer), you
need:
• Microsoft Windows NT version 4.0 (Workstation or Server), or
Microsoft Windows 95 installed
• A modem
• The Microsoft Windows NT or Windows 95 operating system CD.
For both computers, you need to have the TCP/IP and NetBEUI protocols
configured. Both computers must also have the same version of CIMPLICITY HMI
software installed with valid licenses.
Finally, you will need to get two consecutive TCP/IP addresses from your Network
Administrator. You will be assigning these addresses to the Server and Client
modems when you configure the Remote Access Server.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY HMI with Remote Access 32-3

Server Setup (Windows NT)
For a Server computer running Windows NT and the CIMPLICITY HMI Server, you
need to install the Remote Access Service. After you install the service, you will
need to configure the Remote Access Server for automatic startup and grant users
logging in from Client computers dial-in privilege.

Installing the Remote Access Service

To install the Remote Access Service:
1. Open the Control Panel.
2. Double-click on the Network icon.
3. In the Network dialog box, select the Services property sheet.
4. In the Services property sheet, select Add.
5. In the Select Network Service dialog box, select Remote Access
Service from the list of services, then select OK.
The computer will start installing the Remote Access Service. If it
needs to use the Microsoft operating system CD, the installation
procedure will prompt you for it.
In addition, if you have not yet installed your modem driver, the
installation procedure will guide you through that installation.
After the software installation completes, the Remote Access Setup dialog box opens
automatically.

1. Select Configure....

32-4 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 The Configure Port Usage dialog box opens.

For the Server, the minimum selection for Port Usage is Receive
calls only.
• Select the port usage you want for the modem.
• Select OK to return to the Remote Access Setup dialog box.
2. Select Network. The Network Configuration dialog box opens.

Make sure that NetBEUI and TCP/IP are selected for Server
Settings.
Note
If you selected Dial out and Receive calls in the Configure Port Usage dialog
box, make sure that NetBEUI and TCP/IP are also selected for Dial out
Protocols.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY HMI with Remote Access 32-5

 3. Select Configure... for NetBEUI.

In the RAS Server NetBEUI Configuration dialog box:

• Select the type of client access you want.
• Select OK to close the dialog box and return to the Network
Configuration dialog box.
4. Select Configure... for TCP/IP.
The RAS Server TCP/IP Configuration dialog box opens.

In RAS Server TCP/IP Configuration dialog box:

• Under Allow remote TCP/IP clients to access, select the
access option you want.
• Select Use static address pool, and enter the two consecutive
IP addresses you requested from your Network Administrator in
the Begin and End fields. The Begin address is assigned to the
modem on the Server, and the End address is assigned to the
Client.
• Select Allow remote clients to request a predetermined IP
address.
• Select OK to close the dialog box and return to the Network
Configuration dialog box.

32-6 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 5. Select OK to close the Network Configuration dialog box and return to
the Remote Access Setup dialog box.
6. In the Remote Access Setup dialog box, select Continue... to return to
the Network dialog box.
7. Select OK to close the Network dialog box. The system will finish
configuring the Remote Access Server and reboot the computer.

Further Configuration for the Server

After you configure the Remote Access Server, you will need to configure it for
automatic startup, and grant users logging in from Client computers dial-in privilege.

Configuring Automatic Startup

The Remote Access Server is installed with Startup Type set to Manual. To
change to Automatic on the Windows NT computer that will act as the Server for
remote access:
1. Open the Control Panel.
2. Double-click on the Services icon.
3. In the Services dialog box:
• Double-click on the Remote Access Server service.
• In the Service dialog box, select Automatic for the Startup
Type.
• Select OK to close the dialog box and return to the Services dialog
box.
4. Select Close to close the Services dialog box.

Granting Client Dial-in Permission

To grant dial-in permission to users on Client computers:
1. From the Start menu, select Administrative Tools.
2. From Administrative Tools, open the Remote Access Admin
program. The Remote Access Admin window opens.
Note
If you see the message "Remote Access Service is not started on the selected server",
you need to start up the service.
3. From the Users menu, select Permissions.
The Remote Access Permissions dialog box opens.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY HMI with Remote Access 32-7

 4. In the Remote Access Permissions dialog box:
• Make sure that all the users who will be dialing in as clients have
Dialin permission.
• Select OK to return to the Remote Access Admin window.
Your Server is now set up.

32-8 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Client Setup (Windows NT)
For Client (CIMPLICITY HMI Viewer) computers running Windows NT, you need
to install the Remote Access Service. After you install the service, you will need to
configure Dial-Up Networking.

Installing the Remote Access Service

To install the Remote Access Service on a Windows NT computer:
1. Open the Control Panel.
2. Double-click on the Network icon.
3. In the Network dialog box, select the Services property sheet.
4. In the Services property sheet, select Add.
5. In the Select Network Service dialog box, select Remote Access
Service from the list of services, then select OK.
The computer will start installing the Remote Access Service. If it
needs to use the Microsoft operating system CD, the installation
procedure will prompt you for it.
In addition, if you have not yet installed your modem driver, the
installation procedure will guide you through that installation.
After the software installation completes, the Remote Access Setup dialog box opens
automatically.

1. Select Configure....

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY HMI with Remote Access 32-9

 The Configure Port Usage dialog box opens.

For the Client, the minimum selection for Port Usage is Dial out
only
• Select the port usage you want for the modem.
• Select OK to return to the Remote Access Setup dialog box.
2. Select Network. The Network Configuration dialog box opens.

Make sure that NetBEUI and TCP/IP are selected for Dial out
Protocols.
Note
If you selected Dial out and Receive calls in the Configure Port Usage dialog
box, make sure that NetBEUI and TCP/IP are also selected for Server Settings.
You will also need to configure the NetBEUI and TCP/IP configurations.
3. Select OK to close the Network Configuration dialog box and return to
the Remote Access Setup dialog box.
4. In the Remote Access Setup dialog box, select Continue... to return to
the Network dialog box.
5. Select OK to close the Network dialog box. The system will finish
configuring the Remote Access Server and reboot the computer.

Further Configuration for the Viewer

After you install the Remote Access Server, you will need to configure the Dial-Up
Networking option.
1. Open My Computer.
2. Double-click on the Dial-Up Networking icon.
3. Add an entry for the Remote Access Server you want to connect to.

32-10 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Client Setup (Windows 95)
For Client (CIMPLICITY HMI Viewer) computers running Windows 95, first make
sure that the TCP/IP and NetBEUI protocols are installed.
To do this:
1. Open the Control Panel.
2. Double-click on the Network icon.
3. Select the Protocols tab.
4. Make sure the two protocols are installed.
Next, you will need to configure Dial-Up Networking.
To do this:
1. Open the Control Panel.
2. Double-click on the Add/Remove Programs icon.
3. In the Add/Remove Program Properties dialog box:
• Select the Windows Setup tab.
• Select Communications.
• Select Details... .
• In the Communications dialog box, select Dial-Up Networking,
and then select OK.
4. Select OK in the Add/Remove Program Properties dialog box.
The computer will start installing the Dial-Up Networking option. If it
needs to use the Microsoft operating system CD, the installation
procedure will prompt you for it.
After the installation completes, the system reboots.
After you install the Dial-Up Networking option, you will need to configure its
properties.
1. Open My Computer.
2. Double-click on the Dial-Up Networking icon.
3. Add an entry for the Remote Access Server you want to connect to.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY HMI with Remote Access 32-11

 Lastly, you need to configure your network properties.
1. Open the Control Panel.
2. Double-click the Network icon. The Network dialog box opens.

3. Select the Configuration tab. Note that NetBEUI->Dial-Up Adapter

and TCP/IP->Dial-Up Adapter now appear in the list of network
components.
4. Select TCP/IP -> Dial-Up Adapter and display its properties. You
need to do the following:
• Disable DNS Configuration.
• Leave Gateway blank.
• For WINS Configuration, select DHCP for WINS
Resolution.
• Select Obtain and IP address Automatically.
• For Bindings, select Client for Microsoft Networks.
• For Advanced, select none.
5. Select the Identification tab and enter a name (9 characters or less) for
the computer.
6. Select OK to close the Network dialog box and save your changes.
Your Client is now set up for remote access.

32-12 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Configuring the HOSTS Files
The RAS connection does not support broadcast of CIMPLICITY HMI projects.
Therefore, the IP address and the node name of each computer (Server and Viewer)
must be configured in the hosts file of the other computer.
If you do not already have a hosts file configured on your computer, you can use
the hosts.sam sample file on your computer as a starting point.
• In Windows NT, you can find the hosts.sam file in
C:\WINNT35\system32\drivers\etc.
• In Windows 95, you can find the hosts.sam file in C:\WINDOWS.
Place the hosts file in the same directory as the hosts.sam file.
Note
Leave the localhost entry in the hosts file. The CIMPLICITY HMI Router
service needs this entry.

Server
The following is an example of a hosts file on a computer configured as a Remote
Access Server:
127.0.0.1 localhost
3.26.5.144 alw085 ALW085
3.26.4.37 albdv7 ALBDV7
148.93.40.68 oempm4 OEMPM4
192.35.39.34 ftp-gw
Use the TCP/IP address associated with the Client’s (in this case ALW085’s) modem
port.

Client
The following is an example of a hosts file on a computer configured as a Remote
Access Client:
127.0.0.1 localhost
3.26.5.134 alnt32 ALNT32
Note that there are only two entries, the one for localhost and the one for the
Remote Access Server computer. Use the TCP/IP address associated with the
Server’s Ethernet card, not the TCP/IP address associated with the Server’s RAS
connection.

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY HMI with Remote Access 32-13

Testing the Connection
You can use the ping utility on both the Server and Client computers to test the
connection after you dial in to the Server from the Client.

Ping
After dialing in to the Server from the Client and establishing the connection, you
should be able to perform the following tests successfully.

Client Tests
You should be able to ping the Server computer by name from the Client computer.
For example:
C:\WINDOWS>ping alnt32

Pinging alnt32 [3.26.5.134] with 32 bytes of data:

Reply from 3.26.5.134: bytes=32 time=103ms TTL=128

Reply from 3.26.5.134: bytes=32 time=101ms TTL=128
Reply from 3.26.5.134: bytes=32 time=101ms TTL=128
Reply from 3.26.5.134: bytes=32 time=99ms TTL=128

C:\WINDOWS>

Server Tests
You should be able to ping the Client computer by name from the Server computer.
For example:
C:\WINDOWS>ping alw085

Pinging alw085 [3.26.5.144] with 32 bytes of data:

Reply from 3.26.5.144: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

Reply from 3.26.5.144: bytes=32 time=1ms TTL=32
Reply from 3.26.5.144: bytes=32 time=1ms TTL=32
Reply from 3.26.5.144: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

C:\WINDOWS>

Configuring CIMPLICITY Options on the Server

In the CIMPLICITY Options dialog box under Startup Options, select the Accept
connections option.
The Project broadcast option is immaterial for the Remote Access Service.

32-14 CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Accessing a CIMPLICITY HMI Project from a Client
The following are some notes on accessing screens and points from a Client
computer.

Browsing for a Point

Whenever you open the Select a Point browser in CimEdit, the Project field will be
empty. To browse for points on the Server, enter <server> in the Project field,
where <server> is the computer name of the Server. For example:
alnt32

Opening a CimView Screen

If you open a CimView screen on the Client that has unqualified points, you can use
the /project command line option to identify the Server and the project running
on the Server that you want to use.
The command line format is:
cimview /project <server> <screen>
where <server> is the computer name of the Server and <screen> is the
pathname for the screen you want to display. For example:
cimview /project alnt32 C:\CIMPLICITY\HMI\SCREENS\S1.CIM

GFK-1180 Using CIMPLICITY HMI with Remote Access 32-15

CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway

About the CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway

You can use the CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway to let users access your
CIMPLICITY HMI data over the Internet. From the office, home or anywhere else
in the world, CIMPLICITY HMI data is only a phone call away.
This product option is configured to work with your Microsoft Internet Server. Users
gain access to data on CIMPLICITY HMI nodes through this gateway.
CIMPLICITY Web Gateway
Microsoft Internet Server
Microsoft Internet Explorer

Internet
Company Ethernet

Microsoft Internet Explorer

You can create Web documents containing textual CIMPLICITY HMI data values.
Users accessing these documents can view data and perform setpoints. The security
features of CIMPLICITY HMI restrict access to data and to the setpoint capabilities
of Internet connections as they do with standard multi-user systems.

Installing the CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway

The CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway consists of an extension module for your
Web Server and an ActiveX control for your Web Browser computers.
The installation program installs both of these modules on your Web Server
computer. The ActiveX control is automatically downloaded to Web Browser
computers as needed.

GFK-1180 33-1
 Web Server Requirements
Your Web Server computer must be an Intel Pentium PC and must have the
following installed:
• Microsoft Windows NT Server operating system, version 4.0 or later
• Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS), version 3.0 or later
• Microsoft Internet Explorer, version 3.0 or later
We strongly recommend that you install and configure the Microsoft Internet
Information Server before you install the CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway.

Installation Procedure
To install the CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway on your Web Server:
1. Shut down all active processes before starting.
2. Insert the CIMPLICITY HMI CD in your CD-ROM drive.
If you have AutoPlay configured, the CIMPLICITY HMI Installation
Setup screen opens automatically. When you are asked if you want to
continue or cancel the installation, select Cancel.
3. Open the Windows NT Explorer.
4. Open the main folder for the CD-ROM.
5. Double-click the websetup icon in the main CD-ROM folder. The
Setup screen for the CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway installation
opens with the Welcome dialog box.
6. Select Next to continue. The Software Evaluation License Agreement
dialog box opens.
7. Select Yes to accept the terms and conditions of the software license.
The Choose Destination Location dialog box opens.
8. Select the directory where you want to install the CIMPLICITY HMI
Web Gateway (IIS) software. You should accept the default directory.
Select Next.
9. If you have not installed CIMPLICITY HMI software, you will be
asked where you want to install your CIMPLICITY HMI Viewer
software.
10. In the Choose Program Group dialog box, select the program group for
the CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway software, and then select Next.
The software begins to load.
When installation is complete, you are given an opportunity to register your
CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway software.
For CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway software to function correctly, you will need
to reboot your computer. The last dialog box gives you the opportunity to reboot
your computer immediately.

33-2 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
 More about CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway
Components
When you install the CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway, the following components
are installed. (This assumes you have installed your Internet Information Server
published directories in C:\InetPub.)
• \InetPub\Scripts\CimGate.dll
This is the ISAPI extension for the Web Server. It processes requests
for CIMPLICITY point data. This file must exist in a directory to
which the browsing user has execute access.
Your HTML Web pages must refer to this directory, so it is
recommended that you leave the file in this default directory.
• \InetPub\wwwroot\CIMPLICITY\HMI\CimData.ocx
This is the CIMPLICITY Data ActiveX Control that makes it easy to
access CIMPLICITY point data from within an HTML Web page using
VBScript or JavaScript. This file must exist in a directory to which the
browsing user has read access.
Your HTML Web pages refer to this directory (using the CODEBASE
attribute of the OBJECT tag), so it is recommended that you leave the
file in this default directory.
• \InetPub\wwwroot\CIMPLICITY\HMI\*.html
These are sample Web pages you can use.
• \CIMPLICITY\HMI\...
This is a subset of the CIMPLICITY HMI Viewer installation.

Project Setup
Before the Web Gateway can communicate with a CIMPLICITY HMI project in
your enterprise, you must configure the project to permit access by the Web
Gateway. To do this:
1. Open the project’s Configuration cabinet.
2. Double-click on the Client icon.
3. Create a new client.
4. In the New Client dialog box, enter the name of the computer running
the Web Server, then select OK.
5. In the Client Properties dialog box,
• Select a default User ID that will give the Web Gateway
appropriate access to the project.
• Set the Trusted check box.
• Select OK.

GFK-1180 CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway 33-3

Testing the Connections
After you install the Web Gateway and configure clients for your projects, you need
to verify that:
• The Web Gateway can see project data.
• Web documents can read data from and write data to projects.

Validating Project Connections

To validate that the Web Gateway can read and write CIMPLICITY HMI project
data:
1. Open the Point Control Panel.
2. Display some points from projects where you have declared the Web
Gateway a client.
3. Verify that the points are updating correctly, and that you can perform
setpoints.
If you do this successfully, you know that the connections between the projects and
the Web Gateway are working correctly.

Validating Web Connections

To validate that Web documents can access the Web Gateway:
1. Open the
http://<mycomputer>/CIMPLICITY/HMI/Validate.html
URL, where <mycomputer> is the name of the Web Server
computer.
If you have trouble opening the HTTP URL, try opening the file from
the Web Server computer using the fully qualified path name (for
example,
C:\InetPub\wwwroot\CIMPLICITY\HMI\Validate.html).
The Validation document opens at the first set of tests.

33-4 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
 2. Follow the directions on the Web document to perform the first set of
tests.
3. After you verify that the first set of tests work, proceed to the second set
of tests.

GFK-1180 CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway 33-5

Troubleshooting and Error Messages
If you are encountering problems, first try using the
CIMPLICITY\HMI\Validate.html page that was installed on your Web
Server to diagnose problems.
If you encounter an error, an error string is returned. The first part of the string (up
to the first space) contains an error code. After the first space, there may be
additional information. You can use the following VBScript lines to remove the
additional information and simplify the error message:
If strResult <> "" Then
intPos = InStr(strResult, " ")
If intPos > 0 Then
strResult = Left(strResult, intPos-1)
End If
End If

Troubleshooting Custom HTML Pages

Q: I get the error "Object doesn’t support this property or method" when
looking at page in Internet Explorer.
A: The control may not been installed. If you wrote your own HTML file, the
method or property name for the control may be misspelled or the ID for the
control (in the <OBJECT> tag) does not match the ID used in your script.
Copy the TestObjects function from the Simple.html page and use it in
your page to test whether or not the object is loaded.

Error Messages
The first part of the error string contains one of the following error codes.

#ERROR!ARRAYNOTALLOWED
This error is returned if you try to use an element of an array point with the PointSet
method.

#ERROR!ARRAYOUTOFBOUNDS
This error usually indicates that the index specified for an array point was not valid.
It will also be returned if you specify an index for a non-array point or if you fail to
specify an index for an array point. In some cases, additional information will be
available following this message.

#ERROR!BADSERVERRESPONSE
This error is returned if the CimData control could not parse the response from the
CimGate extension. Examining the value of the DiagRawResponse property will
reveal the cause of the error.

#ERROR!CIMPLICITYNOTRUNNING
This error indicates that the CIMPLICITY HMI Viewer could not be started by the
CimGate extension.

33-6 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
 #ERROR!INVALIDPOINTID
This error is returned by the CimData control if you pass an empty string for the
point ID parameter to the PointSet method.

#ERROR!NOTIMPLEMENTED
This error is returned by CimGate server when the PointMonitor method (which is
not implemented) is called.

#ERROR!NOTLICENSED
This error is returned when the CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway is not licensed.
The CIMPLICITY HMI Gateway must be licensed to use it beyond the trial period.
Run the CIMPLICITY HMI Registration program.

#ERROR!POINTIDSYNTAX
This error is returned when the string passed to PointGet or PointSet could not be
properly parsed as a point ID.

#ERROR!POINTUNAVAILABLE
This error is returned when the point may be unavailable for any number of reasons.
Generally, there will be additional information following this message indicating why
the point is unavailable. You may also want to look at the CIMPLICITY HMI Status
Log on the Web Server computer to help understand why the point is unavailable

#ERROR!SERVERNEEDSRESTART
This error indicates a condition in the CimGate server that requires the Web Server to
be restarted. Typically this occurs when the CIMPLICITY HMI Viewer (or project)
on the Web Server computer is shut down.

GFK-1180 CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway 33-7

CIMPLICITY HMI Web Data Control
The CIMPLICITY HMI Web Data Control is generally invisible. During testing,
you may wish to make the size of the control big so that you can see the caption it
displays. For released pages you will want to set the size of the control to something
small (0 or 1 pixels). If the control is smaller than 10 pixels, it will not draw
anything.

Caption (Read/Write Property)

Syntax Caption
Description String. Value that displays when the control is visible.
Comments The caption is useful to display while testing pages.
Example Using VBScript:
MyControl.Caption = "Paint Shop Data"

DiagException (Read-Only Property)

Syntax DiagException
Description String. Value that contains diagnostic information.
Comments This property is provided for diagnostic purposes. If an error has occurred, the DiagException
string may contain additional information on the error.
See Also DiagRawRequest, DiagRawResponse

DiagRawRequest (Read-Only Property)

Syntax DiagRawRequest
Description String. Value that contains the last raw request sent to the Web Server.
Comments This property is provided for diagnostic purposes.
See Also DiagException, DiagRawResponse

DiagRawResponse (Read-Only Property)

Syntax DiagRawResponse
Description String. Value that contains the last raw response returned from the Web Server.
Comments This property is provided for diagnostic purposes.
See Also DiagException, DiagRawRequest

33-8 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180
 PointGet (Method)
Syntax PointGet ( strCimGateServer, arrPointID )
Description Returns an array of the values of the requested point IDs.
Parameters Parameter Description
strCimGateServer A String containing the location of the CimGate extension. The format of this
string is "computer/directory". For example, mycomputer/Scripts.
arrPointID A String or a one-dimensional array of Strings containing the Point IDs.
Comments You may not specify an array point, but you may specify an element of an array point (for example,
arrPointID(0) = "\\PROJ\ARRAYPT[2]"). Fully qualify the Point ID with a project. Do
not enclose the Point ID in single quotes.
The return value of the PointGet method is a two dimensional array.
• The first dimension has the same number of elements as the input array.
• The second dimension has two elements. Element 0 is a Boolean indicating the success
of the operation. Element 1 is either the point value or an error message.
To understand the format of the return value, assume arrPointID is the array of point IDs passed
in and arrResult is the return value. If arrResult(N,0) is True, then arrResult(N,1)
contains the value of the point specified by arrPointID(N). If arrResult(N,0) is False,
then arrResult(N,1) contains an error message.
If a point is configured with EU conversion, the converted value (not the raw value) of the point is
returned.
Example Using VBScript:
arrResult = ctrl.PointGet("mycomputer/Scripts", _
"\\proj\arraypt[2]")
If Not arrResult(0,0) Then
Alert arrResult(0,1)
End If

Dim arrPoints(1)
arrPoints(0) = "\\proj\temp"
arrPoints(1) = "\\proj\speed"
arrResult = ctrl.PointGet("mycomputer/Scripts", arrPoints)
If Not arrResult(0,0) Then
alert arrResult(0,1)
End If
If Not arrResult(1,0) Then
alert arrResult(1,1)
End If

See Also PointSet

GFK-1180 CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway 33-9

 PointSet (Method)
Syntax PointSet ( strCimGateServer, strPointID, strValue )
Description Sets the point to the given value. Returns a String that may contain an error message.
Parameters Parameter Description
strCimGateServer A String containing the location of the CimGate extension. The format of this
string is "computer/directory". For example, mycomputer/Scripts.
strPointID A String containing the point ID.
strValue A String containing the new value for the point.
Comments You may not specify an array point or an element of an array point. Fully qualify the Point ID with a
project name. Do not enclose the Point ID in single quotes.
The return value of the PointSet method is a string. If the point was set successfully, the string is
empty. Otherwise, the string contains an error message.
If the point is configured with EU conversion, the value is the converted value (not the raw value).
Example Using VBScript
Function SetSomePoint (strPointID, strValue)
strResult = ctrl.PointSet(strCimGateServer) _
"\\proj" & strPointID, strValue)
If strResult <> "" Then
intPos = InStr(strResult, " ")
If intPos > 0 Then
strResult = Left(strResult, intPos-1)
End If
PointSet = strResult
End If
End Function

See Also PointGet

33-10 CIMPLICITY® HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual GFK-1180

Index
# CimView command line option 21-20
#ERROR!ARRAYNOTALLOWED 33-6
#ERROR!ARRAYOUTOF BOUNDS 33-6
#ERROR!BADSERVERRESPONSE 33-6
#ERROR!CIMPLICITYNOTRUNNING 33-6
#ERROR!INVALIDPOINTID 33-7
#ERROR!NOTIMPLEMENTED 33-7
#ERROR!NOTLICENSED 33-7
#ERROR!POINTIDSYNTAX 33-7
#ERROR!POINTUNAVAILABLE 33-7
#ERROR!SERVERNEEDSRESTART 33-7
$ Alarm Viewer 20-1
$ALARM_DISABLED 10-2
$ALARM_ENABLED 10-2
$ALARM_MODIFIED 10-2
$ALARM_RAWLIM 10-2
$ALARM_RESTORED 10-2
$AM_STATUS 10-2
$DEV_DOWN 10-2
$DEVICE 10-2
$DEVICE_DOWN 10-2
$DEVICE_FAILOVER 10-2
$DL_FILE_FULL 10-2
$DOWNLOAD 10-2
$DYN_CFG 10-2
$GMR_POINT_DISCREPANCY 10-2
$LOGON 10-2, 10-3
$LOGOUT 10-3
$REDUND_DEV_DOWN 10-3
$RTR_LINK_DOWN 10-3
/ 1-1
/alwaysmaximized
CimView command line option 21-17
/geometry
CimView command line option 21-18
GFK-1180
/keypad
CimView command line option 21-18
/noconfig
Alarm Viewer command line options 20-58
/noexit
CimView command line option 21-18
/nomenutitle
CimView command line option 21-19
/noopen
Alarm Viewer command line options 20-58
CimView command line option 21-19
/noresize
CimView command line option 21-19
/project <name>
CimView command line option 21-19
/wait
/waitforproject
CimView command line option 21-20
/zoomtobestfit
CimView command line option 21-20
A
About
Alarm audio support 11-1
Alarm blocking 12-1
Alarm printer configuration 13-1
Alarm sound manager 11-5
Alarms 10-1
Browsers 3-1
CIMPLICITY HMI and Control 18-1
CIMPLICITY HMI log files 25-1
Client configuration 17-1
Database logger 16-1
Database logging, Managing 27-1
Devices 5-1
Microsoft System Management Server 31-2
Point control panel 22-1
Points 4-1
Ports 7-1
RAS 32-1
Resources 6-1
Roles 14-1
Security features 28-1
System Utilities 24-1
Web gateway 33-1
About Alarm Strings 9-1
About CIMPLICITY MMI and MES/SCADA Products
About CimView 21-1
About System management 26-1
About the CIMPLICITY To Windows Server 23-1
About Users 15-1
i
AboutBox About 12-1
Alarm viewer method 20-19 Alarm assignment 12-2
Absolute alarming 4-43 Alarm priorities 12-2
ACCESS 19-15 Blocking modes 12-2
Access filter 4-48 Configuring 12-4
ACCESS_FILTER 19-15 Modifying an alarm block group 12-7
Accessing a project from client Rules for 12-3
RAS 32-15 Alarm blocking group
ACK_TIMEOUT 19-15 Adding an alarm 12-6
ACK_TOUT 26-6 Creating 12-5
Acknowledging All Alarms 20-49 Modifying an alarm 12-6
Acknowledging an Alarm 20-48 Removing an alarm 12-6
Acknowledging and Resetting an Alarm 20-49 Alarm class configuration
Acknowledging the First Alarm 20-49 Audio support 8-4
Action Object Selected With the Mouse 21-12 Color assignments 8-5
Actions Creating a new alarm class 8-3
Device properties, CIMPLICITY HMI and Control Mapping colors in RGB.DAT 8-6
18-4 Alarm classes
Add project to list About 8-1
CIMPLICITY options 2-14 Configuring 8-1
Adding Alarm Configuration
Saved logins 24-14 Alarm Definition Properties - Non-Point Alarms 10-6
Adding A New Option 1-18 Alarm Configuration 10-1
Adding a new user to a resource 6-4 Alarm Definition Properties - Point Alarms 10-7
Adding a user to a resource 6-4 Creating A New Alarm Definition 10-5
Adding Alarm Comments 20-47 Alarm definition
Adding an alarm Alarm message variable run-time parameters 10-1
Alarm block group 12-6 Alarm Definition
Adding an Alarm printer 13-2 Alarm Options Properties 10-12
Adding the point to a logging table Alarm Definition Configuration
Database logger, from point configuration 16-8 Alarm Routing Properties 10-10
ADDR 19-15, 19-33 Alarm Definition Properties
ADDR_OFFSET 19-16 Absolute 10-8
ADDR_TYPE 19-16 Alarm Class 10-6, 10-7
Address 4-48, 4-50 Alarm Criteria 10-8
Address offset 4-48 Alarm Delay 10-9
Alarm 20-20 Alarm Message 10-6, 10-8
Point control panel, properties 22-4 Alarm Type 10-6
Alarm assignment Alarm Values 10-9
Alarm blocking 12-2 Deadband 10-9
Alarm Attributes Definition 10-7
Alarm Id 10-4 Description 10-6
Alarm Type 10-4 Deviation 10-9
Class Id 10-4 Help File 10-6, 10-10
Description 10-4 Logging 10-7
Message 10-4 Non-Point Alarms 10-6
Alarm audio support Point Alarms 10-7
About 11-1 Rate of Change 10-8
Beep configuration 11-4 String Index 10-8
Configuring 11-3 Alarm Definitions
Prioritizing alarms 11-1 Standard Alarms 10-2
Prioritizing alarms, examples 11-2 Alarm Filtering 20-46
Wave file configuration 11-4 Alarm functions
Alarm block group See Alarm blocking Expression editor 4-10
Alarm blocking Alarm high 4-48

ii CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180

Alarm list, Filtering Alarm Strings
Database logger 16-48 About 9-1
Alarm logging Configuring 9-2
Database logger properties 16-36 Alarm table point
Overview 16-2 Point properties 16-47
Alarm logging dialog box Alarm triggered logging
Database logger, From point configuration 16-9 Database logger, Logging conditions 16-20
Alarm low 4-48 Alarm Viewer
Alarm message About 20-1
Variable run-time parameters 10-1 ACK and RESET an alarm 20-49
Alarm Message Date/Time Format 20-40 Acknowledging all alarms 20-49
Alarm Options Properties 10-12 Acknowledging an alarm 20-48
Acknowledge Timeout 10-14 Acknowledging the first Alarm 20-49
Deletion Requirements 10-13 Adding alarm comments 20-47
Repeat Timeout 10-13 Alarm Message Date/Time Format 20-40
Reset Timeout 10-14 Changing setup parameters 20-46
Alarm printer configuration 13-1 Command line options 20-57
About 13-1 Command line options - /noconfig 20-58
Adding an alarm printer 13-2 Command line options - /noopen 20-58
Additional steps for serial printers 13-9 Configure Menu 20-26
Alarm printer properties 13-3 Configuring an Alarm View 20-28
Date/time format properties 13-6 Configuring OCX in CimEdit 20-2
Date/time formats 13-7 Configuring stand-alone 20-24
Delete and acknowledge times 13-10 Configuring the count color 20-29
General properties 13-3 Configuring the count font 20-30
Layout properties 13-5 Configuring the count layout 20-28
Modifying queue size 13-10 Creating a new filter 20-54
More about redundant alarm printers 13-8 Creating Custom Buttons 20-42
Alarm priorities Creating Custom Buttons - Example 20-43
Alarm blocking 12-2 Defining the alarm count layout 20-28
Alarm report Defining the alarm list layout 20-31
Database logger 16-51 Deleting an alarm 20-48
Database logger, Generating 16-53 Displaying user help 20-46
Database logger, setting parameters 16-52 Edit Menu 20-26
Alarm Report File Menu 20-25
Database logger, Clearing error log 16-53 Filtering alarms 20-50
Alarm Routing Properties 10-10 General Configuration Information 20-39
Adding a new Role 10-11 Help Menu 20-27
Adding a Role 10-10 Installing a screen 20-56
Modifying a Role 10-11 Installing a screen from Alarm Viewer 20-56
Removing a Role 10-11 Installing a screen from the File Manager 20-57
Alarm sound manager Logging in 20-44
About 11-5 Login Menu 20-26
Adding a project 11-7 Menus 20-25
Adding a project, Examples 11-8 Printing alarms 20-55
Deleting a project 11-8 Refreshing the Alarm List 20-46
Option properties 11-9 Saving the layout 20-41
Profile, saving and loading 11-6 Selecting alarm list color and font 20-34
Project properties 11-7 Selecting alarm list fields 20-31
Startup properties 11-10 Selecting alarms 20-18, 20-45
Turning sound on and off 11-6 Shortcut Keys 20-27
Using 11-5 Static alarm list button layout 20-35
Window buttons, using 11-6 Toggling between lists 20-46
Alarm String Configuration 9-1 Toolbar Buttons 20-27
Creating A New Alarm String 9-3 Using the alarm list buttons 20-45

GFK-1180 Index iii

 View Menu 20-26 AMLP_USE_GEN_TIME 13-10, 26-7
Viewing comments 20-47 AMSI_ALARM 10-3
Viewing the Alarm List 20-45 AMV See Alarm Viewer
Viewing the alarm stack 20-47 AMV OCX
Viewing the alarm’s CimView screen 20-47 Buttons properties 20-6
Alarm viewer methods Colors properties 20-17
AboutBox method 20-19 Configuring 20-2
Creating an Invoke Method action 20-23 Configuring control properties 20-3
DoAckAll method 20-19 Count layout properties 20-12
DoAckFirst method 20-19 Date format properties 20-14
DoAcknowledge method 20-19 Display/sort properties 20-10
DoAckReset method 20-20 Fields properties 20-4
DoCimviewScreen method 20-20 Fonts properties 20-16
DoComments method 20-20 Projects properties 20-9
DoDelete method 20-20 Viewing the Alarm List 20-18
DoHelp 20-20 Analog point types 4-3
DoRefresh 20-21 ANALOG_DEADBAND 19-19
DoReset 20-21 APPL point types 4-4
DoSetup 20-21 Application logging
DoToggle 20-21 Overview 16-3
DoViewStack 20-21 Application source directory, Creating
MoveDownOneAlarm 20-21 Site wide installation 31-5
MoveUpOneAlarm 20-22 Arithmetic operations
naming an alarm viewer control 20-23 Expression editor 4-8
PageDownAlarms 20-22 Array Point Example - CWSERV 23-11
PageUpAlarms 20-22 Array points
SelectAllAlarms 20-22 Calculating array limits 4-36
SelectPageAlarms 20-22 Numbering elements 4-35
SelectTopAlarm 20-22 Using 4-35
ALARM_ENABLED 23-6 Associating folders with devices
ALARM_HIGH 23-5 CIMPLICITY HMI and Control 18-5
ALARM_LOW 23-5 Association, Creating new
Alarming CIMPLICITY HMI and Control 18-5
Types of for points 4-43 Association, Deleting
Alarms CIMPLICITY HMI and Control 18-6
About 10-1 Association, Editing
Configuring 10-4 CIMPLICITY HMI and Control 18-6
ALM_CLASS 19-16 Authorization code, Entering
ALM_CRITERIA 19-16 Registration 1-17
ALM_DEADBAND 19-17 Auto browser, using
ALM_DELAY 19-17 Browser 3-4
ALM_HIGH_1 19-17 Average points 4-20
ALM_HIGH_2 19-17 Equation for 4-20
ALM_HLP_FILE 19-17 Reset point for 4-21
ALM_LOW_1 19-18 Startup conditions for 4-21
ALM_LOW_2 19-18 Trigger point for 4-20
ALM_MSG 19-18
ALM_ROUTE_OPER 19-18 B
ALM_ROUTE_SYSMGR 19-18
ALM_ROUTE_USER 19-19 Beep configuration
ALM_STR 19-19 Alarm audio support 11-4
ALM_TYPE 19-19 Before you start
am_colors.cfg 8-6 RAS 32-3
AM_RESET_ACK_STATE 26-7 BFR_COUNT 19-19
AMLP_MAX_QUEUE 13-10 BFR_DUR 19-20

iv CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180

BFR_EVENT_PERIOD 19-20 Associating folders and devices 18-5
BFR_EVENT_PT_ID 19-20 Creating a new association 18-5
BFR_EVENT_TYPE 19-20 Device properties, Control 18-2
BFR_EVENT_UNITS 19-20 Import process 18-7
BFR_GATE_COND 19-20 Import rules 18-7
BFR_SYNC_TIME 19-21 Point conflicts, Incorrect information 18-11
Bitwise operations Point conflicts, New point 18-10
Expression editor 4-9 Point conflicts, Resolving 18-9
Blocking modes Remote configuration 18-12
Alarm blocking 12-2 Remote configuration, Example 18-12
Blocking rules Supported device protocols 18-2
Alarm blocking 12-3 CIMPLICITY HMI and CONTROL
Boolean point types 4-4 Deleting an association 18-6
Browser CIMPLICITY HMI and Control, Editing an association
Adding an attribute to the display list 3-6 18-6
Configuring display attributes 3-5 CIMPLICITY HMI processes 24-19
File menu 3-3 CIMPLICITY HMI Software
Filtering the display list 3-3 Installing 1-6
Menu options 3-3 CIMPLICITY HMI web data control 33-8
Removing an attribute from the display list 3-6 CIMPLICITY HMI Web Gateway See Web gateway
Reordering attributes in the display list 3-6 CIMPLICITY options
Sorting the display list 3-4 Add project to list 2-14
Using the auto browser 3-4 Connecting to a computer 2-13
Using wildcards 3-4 Network options 2-15
View menu 3-3 Setting 2-12
Browsers Start as viewer 2-13
About 3-1 Start project in list 2-14
Browsing for a point Stop a project 2-13
RAS 32-15 System boot options 2-15
Buttons properties CIMPLICITY options, Server
AMV OCX 20-6 RAS 32-14
CIMPLICITY software
C About CIMPLICITY MMI and MES/SCADA
products 1-1
CALC_TYPE 19-21 Adding a new option 1-18
Calculating array limits 4-36 Creating a new project 1-22
Caption (read/write property) Creating and loading floppy disk installations 1-12
Web gateway, Web data control 33-8 Customer support 1-4
CE_MAX_DELAY 26-7 Diskette license transfer 1-20
CE_MAX_THREADS 26-7 Functional upgrades 1-18
CE_THREAD_TIMEOUT 26-7 Installing upgrade licenses 1-19
Changing font colors Introduction 1-1
Point control panel 22-5 Network license transfer 1-20
Changing the Alarm Viewer Setup Parameters 20-46 Placing programs or documents in the Start Menu
Changing the Alarm Viewer Sort Order 20-52 1-23
Changing view options Placing programs or documents on a Windows 95
Show Users 24-6 desktop 1-23
CIMPLCIITY HMI and Control Registering 1-15
Device properties, Actions 18-4 Removing 1-21
Device properties, Common point properties 18-4 Removing from Windows 95 1-21
Device properties, Import options 18-3 Removing from Windows NT 1-21
CIMPLICITY HMI Running the Demo project 1-22
Site wide installation procedure 31-5 Running without authorization 1-17
CIMPLICITY HMI and Control Starting a project 1-24
About 18-1 Stopping a project 1-25

GFK-1180 Index v
 System architecture 1-2 Displaying a screen 21-10
System recommendations 1-3 Displaying Help Information 21-15
Transferring Licenses 1-20 Displaying Object Help 21-16
Upgrading 1-18 Displaying Object Properties 21-17
Using a Viewer 1-26 Displaying Screen Help 21-15
Version upgrades 1-19 Displaying Screen Properties 21-16
What you receive 1-1 Docking the Toolbar 21-9
CIMPLICITY Software Executing in-place edit setpoint actions 21-13
Copying a project to diskette 2-25 Executing Slider Setpoints 21-12
Creating a new project 2-1 File Menu 21-4
Creating a remote project 30-2 Floating the Toolbar 21-9
Dynamic update 2-22 Getting Started 21-1
How configuration updates are handled 2-22 Help Menu 21-7
Installing a project 2-11 Menu Bar 21-3
Logging in 2-24 Menus 21-4
New project options 2-1 OLE Controls 21-20
Opening a project 2-3 Scroll bars 21-3
Remote projects 30-1 Selecting action object with mouse 21-12
Setting project properties 2-5 Selecting objects with procedures 21-11
Setting Startup Options 2-12 Selecting setpoint object with keyboard 21-13
Using 2-1 Selecting setpoint object with mouse 21-12
Using the Project Wizard 2-7 Setting Window Options 21-14
What’s Running 2-21 Shortcut Keys 21-9
CIMPLICITY to Windows Server 23-1 Status Bar 21-3
Displaying point data 23-6 Title Bar 21-3
Point Topic Attributes 23-3 Toolbar Buttons 21-8
CIMPLICITY To Windows Server Toolbars 21-3
About 23-1 View Menu 21-5
Command syntax for System topic 23-12 Window buttons 21-3
Creating A DDE Share 23-14 Window Components 21-2
CWSERV Command Syntax 23-1 Window Pop-up Menu 21-8
CWSERV Icon 23-7 CimView autostart
Error Messages 23-14 Windows 95 2-16
Formats command syntax 23-12 CimView autostart, Windows 95
Help command syntax 23-13 Disabling Microsoft network login prompt 2-16
Implementing a Setpoint macro 23-9 Setting CIMPLICITY startup options 2-18
Macro format for modifying point data 23-8 CimView command line options
Microsoft Excel Example 23-2 /alwaysmaximized 21-17
Modifying Point Data 23-8 /geometry 21-18
Performance considerations 23-8 /keypad 21-18
Referencing CWSERV from a Networked NT Client /noexit 21-18
23-15 /nomenutitle 21-19
Remote Access of CWSERV on Windows NT 23-14 /noopen 21-19
Sample CWSERV Commands 23-2 /noresize 21-19
Sample spreadsheets and macros 23-10 /project <name> 21-19
Starting CWSERV 23-7 /wait 21-20
System command syntax 23-12 /waitforproject 21-20
Topics command syntax 23-12 /zoomtobestfit 21-20
Using with Microsoft Excel 23-6 clie
CIMPLICTIY options export command 19-10
Startup options 2-14 import command 19-7
CimView 21-1 CLIE See Import/Export
About 21-1 CLIE_MAX_PTS 26-23
Command Line Options 21-17 Client configuration
Control Menu 21-7 About 17-1

vi CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180

 Client properties 17-3 Configuring diagnostic points 4-37
Creating a new client 17-2 Configuring point bridge points 30-5
Using 17-1 Configuring points 4-47
Client package distribution Configuring ports 7-1
How it works 31-3 Configuring Resources 6-1
Client properties Configuring roles 14-2
Client configuration 17-3 Configuring the Count Layout 20-28
Client setup Configuring users 15-1
RAS, Windows 95 32-11 Connect information
RAS, Windows NT 32-9 Database logger, Logging properties 16-28
Closing a project view Database logger, Properties 16-37
Show Users 24-8 CONNECT_DROP_PERIOD 26-4
CLR_TOUT 26-8 CONNECT_RETRY_PERIOD 26-4
Color assignments Connecting to a computer
Alarm class configuration 8-5 CIMPLICITY options 2-13
Colors properties Contacting your distributor 1-4
AMV OCX 20-17 Control Menu
Combining point triggers 16-45 CimView 21-7
Combining triggers Control properties
Database logger 16-20 Actions 18-4
Command actions Common point properties 18-4
Database logger, Maintenance actions 16-27 Device properties, CIMPLICITY HMI and Control
Command Format 18-2
DSK2FLPY 1-12 Import options 18-3
Command line options CONV_LIM_HIGH 19-21
Alarm Viewer 20-57 CONV_LIM_LOW 19-21
startup.exe 2-26 CONV_TYPE 19-22
Command Line Options Copying A Project to Diskette 2-25
CimView 21-17 Copying a table
Command Syntax for System Topic 23-12 Database logger 16-30
Formats 23-12 Count layout properties
Help 23-13 AMV OCX 20-12
System 23-12 Creating
Topics 23-12 Alarm block group 12-5
Common point properties Alarm class 8-3
Device properties, CIMPLICITY HMI and Control Port 7-3
18-4 Role 14-3
Components Creating a DDE Share 23-14
Web gateway 33-3 Creating a Floppy Disk Distribution
Configuration Cabinet Command Format 1-12
Shortcut Keys 2-4 Creating a floppy distribution 1-13
Toolbar Buttons 2-4 Creating A New Alarm Definition 10-5
Configuration Import/Export See Import/Export Creating A New Alarm String 9-3
Configure Menu Creating A New Alarm Viewer Filter 20-54
Alarm Viewer 20-26 Creating a new client 17-2
Configuring additional locks Creating a new device 5-3
SQL Server 27-9 Creating a new point 4-53
Configuring alarm audio support 11-3 Creating a New Project 2-1
Configuring alarm blocking 12-4 Options 2-1
Configuring Alarm Strings 9-2 Creating A New Project 1-22
Configuring Alarms 10-4 Creating A New Remote Project 30-2
Configuring an Alarm View 20-28 Creating a new table
Configuring automatic startup Database logger, from point configuration 16-11
RAS, Windows NT server 32-7 Creating a new user 15-4
Configuring devices 5-1 Creating a Replacement Floppy 1-13

GFK-1180 Index vii

Creating a resource 6-3 INIT_STATE 23-6
Creating a table LENGTH 23-4
Database logger 16-16 RAW_VALUE 23-3
Creating Alarm Viewer Custom Buttons SIZE 23-4
Example 20-43 STATE 23-3
Creating an Invoke Method action 20-23 TYPE 23-4
Creating and loading floppy disk installations VALUE 23-3
1-12, 1-13 WARN_ENABLED 23-6
Installing CIMPLICITY software from a floppy WARN_HIGH 23-5
distribution 1-14 WARN_LOW 23-5
Creating Custom Alarm Viewer Buttons 20-42
Creating tables D
Database logger 16-4, 27-11
Database logger, Column definitions 16-5, 27-11 Data conversion
Database logger, Key definitions 16-6, 27-12 Custom 4-46
CSV file format 19-2 Linear 4-45
Custom conversion 4-46 Types of 4-45
Integer vs. floating point engineering units 4-46 Data length 4-48
Custom HTML pages, Troubleshooting Data logging
Web gateway 33-6 Overview 16-3
Customer support 1-4 Data report
CWSERV Database logger 16-54
Command Syntax 23-1 Database logger, Clearing error log 16-56
Command syntax for System topic 23-12 Database logger, Generating 16-56
Creating a DDE Share 23-14 Database logger, Setting parameters 16-55
Displaying Point Data 23-6 Data table point
Error Messages 23-14 Point properties 16-44
Formats command syntax 23-12 Data triggered logging
Help command syntax 23-13 Database logger, Logging conditions 16-20
Icon 23-7 Data type ID 4-49
Implementing a Setpoint macro 23-9 Database disconnect recover
Macro format for modifying point data 23-8 Database logger 27-13
Microsoft Excel Example 23-2 Database disconnect recover, Enabling store and
Modifying Point Data 23-8 forward 27-14
Performance considerations 23-8 Database disconnect recover, Reconnect wait period
Point Topic Attributes 23-3 27-13
Referencing from a Networked NT Client 23-15 Database disconnect recover, Store and forward 27-13
Remote Access of CWSERV on Windows NT 23-14 Database disconnect recover, Store and forward -
Sample Commands 23-2 maximum records 27-15
Sample spreadsheets and macros 23-10 Database disconnect recover, Store and forward
Spreadsheet example with array point 23-11 filenames 27-14
Spreadsheet example with single point 23-10 Database disconnect recover, Store and forwared -
Starting 23-7 changing defaults 27-15
System command syntax 23-12 Database logger 16-1, 16-31
Topics command syntax 23-12 About 16-1
Using with Microsoft Excel 23-6 Adding points to a table 16-42
CWSERV Attributes Alarm list, Filtering 16-48
ALARM_ENABLED 23-6 Alarm logging, Overview 16-2
ALARM_HIGH 23-5 Alarm point, Modifying logging conditions 16-47
ALARM_LOW 23-5 Alarm point, Point properties 16-47
DISP_FORMAT 23-4 Alarm report 16-51
DISP_HIGH 23-5 Alarm report, Clearing error log 16-53
DISP_LOW 23-5 Alarm report, Generating 16-53
ELEMENTS 23-4 Alarm report, Setting parameters 16-52
EU_LABEL 23-5 Application logging, Overview 16-3

viii CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Copying a table 16-30
Creating tables 16-4, 27-11
Creating tables, Column definitions 16-5, 27-11
Creating tables, Key definitions 16-6, 27-12
Creating tables, Microsoft Access note 27-11
Data logging, Overview 16-3
Data point
Timed/gated logging 16-46
Data point, Alarm triggered logging 16-45
Data point, Combining triggers 16-45
Data point, Data tiggered logging 16-45
Data point, Point properties 16-44
Data report 16-54
Data report, Clearing error log 16-56
Data report, Generating 16-56
Data report, Setting parameters 16-55
Database disconnect recover, Enabling store and
forward 27-14
Database disconnect recover, Reconnect wait period
27-13
Database disconnect recover, Store and forward 27-13
Database disconnect recover, Store and forward -
changing defaults 27-15
Database disconnect recover, Store and forward -
maximum records 27-15
Database disconnect recover, Store and forward
filenames 27-14
Database disconnect recovery 27-13
Default logging conditions, Alarm log table 16-18
Deleting a table 16-31
Displaying a table 16-39
Edit menu, Main window 16-13
Edit menu, Table window 16-40
Entering from point configuration
Alarm logging 16-9
Table Browser 16-10
Entering from point configuration, Adding the point to
a logging table 16-8
Entering from point configuration, Creating a new
table 16-11
Entering from point configuration, Displaying a table
list 16-10
Entering from point configuration, Logging an alarm
16-9
Entering from point configuration, Modifying the
logging properties for the point 16-8
Entering from point configuration, Modifying the
properties of a table 16-11
Entering from point configuration, Point logging
dialog box 16-7
Entering from point configuration, Removing the
point from all logging tables 16-8
Entering from point configuration, Removing the
point from one or more logging tables 16-8
Event list, Filtering 16-48
GFK-1180
Event logging, Overview 16-2
File menu, Main window 16-13
File menu, Table window 16-40
Global parameters
DB_DEBUG 27-17
DB_ENABLE_TRANSACTIONS 27-16
DB_TIME_FORMAT 27-17
Global parameters’ 27-16
Group logging, Overview 16-3
Group point, Array attributes 16-44
Group point, Point attributes 16-43
Group point, Point properties 16-43
Help menu, Main window 16-14
Help menu, Table window 16-41
Install Microsoft Excel from Excel CD 16-49
Install Microsoft Excel from Microsoft Office for
Windows 95 CD 16-50
Install sample reports 16-50
Logging attributes for alarm event and application
tables 16-22
Logging attributes, Group and data tables 16-23
Logging attributes, Point attributes to be logged 16-23
Logging attributes, Table attributes to be logged
16-22, 16-24
Logging conditions, Alarm triggered logging 16-20
Logging conditions, Data triggered logging 16-20
Logging conditions, Group and data tables 16-19
Logging conditions, Modify logging conditions 16-18
Logging conditions, Timed/gated logging 16-21
Logging properties, All tables 16-28
Logging properties, Connect information 16-28
Logging properties, Store and forward 16-29
Maintenace actions, All tables 16-26
Maintenance actions, Command actions 16-27
Maintenance actions, Export actions 16-26
Maintenance actions, Purge actions 16-27
Maintenance events, All tables 16-24
Maintenance events, Timed/gated maintenance events
16-25
Maintenance events, Triggered maintenance events
16-25
Microsoft Access note 16-4
Notes on installing Microsoft Excel 16-49
ODBC configuration 27-2
ODBC configuration, Custom data sources 27-3
ODBC configuration, Data sources 27-2
ODBC configuration, Drivers 27-2
ODBC configuration, Microsoft Access data sources
27-4
ODBC configuration, Moving projects 27-3
ODBC configuration, Remote SQL Server data
sources 27-6, 27-7
ODBC configuration, SQL Server client utilities,
Installing 27-6
ODBC configuration, SQL Server configuration 27-5
Index ix
 ODBC configuration, SQL Server data source Window menu, Options 16-13
configuration 27-6 Window pop-up menu, Main window 16-14
ODBC configuration, SQL Server installation 27-4 Window pop-up menu, Table window 16-41
Oracle configuration 27-8 Database Logger 16-1
Oracle requirements 27-8 Entering from Point Configuration, Displaying table
Point list, Filtering 16-48 attributes 16-9
Point logging properties, Editing 16-42 Database logger, Combining triggers 16-20
Properties 16-34 Database logging, Managing
Properties, Alarm and point logging 16-36 About 27-1
Properties, Connect information 16-37 Database management
Properties, Database queue size 16-35 SQL server 27-9
Properties, Disk full scan rate 16-35 SQL server, Configuration additional locks 27-9
Properties, Maintenance action export path 16-36 SQL server, Handling transaction log 27-10
Properties, Parameters 16-34 SQL server, Truncating transaction log as
Properties, Point data logging scan rate 16-36 CIMPLICITY maintenance action 27-10
Properties, Store and forward 16-38 SQL server, Truncating transaction log as system
Reconciling a table 16-32 default 27-10
Reconciling a table, Creating database fields 16-33 Database queue size
Reconciling a table, Removing unused Microsoft Database logger, Properties 16-35
Access fields 16-33 Date format properties
Reconciling a table, Removing unused Oracle fields AMV OCX 20-14
16-33 Date/time format properties
Reconciling a table, Removing unused SQL Server Alarm printer configuration 13-6
fields 16-33 Date/time formats
Removing points from a table 16-42 Alarm printer configuration 13-7
Reporting 16-49 DB_CONN_DOWN 10-3
Reports, Automatic printing 16-60 DB_DEBUG 26-8, 27-17
Reports, Automatic printing, CimView triggers 16-62 DB_ENABLE_TRANSACTIONS 26-9, 27-16
Reports, Automatic printing, Maintenance action DB_QUEUE_OVERFLOW_DELAY 26-9
triggers 16-62 DB_QUEUE_SIZE 26-2
Reports, Automatic printing, Modifying DB_START_FORWARD 10-3
CIMPLCITIY service for 16-60 DB_TIME_FORMAT 27-17
Reports, Automatic printing, Script 16-61 DB_TIMESTAMP_PRECISION 26-9
Reports, Automatic printing, Triggering 16-62 DBDL_ABORT_TIMEOUT 26-8
Reports, Automatic printing,Event Manager triggers DBDL_DEVICE_CHECK_PERIOD 26-2
16-62 Declaring a Default Alarm Viewer Filter 20-54
Search string wildcards 16-4 Default logging conditions
Shortcut keys, Main window 16-15 Alarm log table 16-18
Starting from configuration cabinet 16-12 Default User 15-1
Starting from point configuration 16-7 Defining a resource
Table characteristics 16-5, 27-11 Properties 6-3
Table list, filtering 16-30 Defining point properties 4-54
Table menu, Options 16-40 Defining the Alarm Count Layout 20-28
Table properties 16-17 Defining the Alarm List Layout 20-31
Table, Creating 16-16 DEL_OPT 26-9
Toolbar buttons, Main window 16-15 Delete Alarm privilege 14-4
Toolbar buttons, Table window 16-42 Delete and acknowledge times, Modifying
Trend report 16-57 Alarm printer configuration 13-10
Trend report, Clearing error log 16-59 DELETE_REQ 19-22
Trend report, Generating 16-59 Deleting a table
Trend report, Setting parameters 16-58 Database logger 16-31
Types of log files available 16-1 Deleting a user from a resource 6-4
Using Oracle with 27-8 Deleting an Alarm 20-48
View menu, Main window 16-14 Deleting an Alarm Viewer Filter from the List 20-54
View menu, Table window 16-41 Deleting configuration data

x CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180

 Import/Export 19-12 Disk full scan rate
Deleting login information 26-23 Database logger, Properties 16-35
Delta accum arrays DISP_FORMAT 23-4
Using 4-15 DISP_HIGH 23-5
Delta accum points 4-15 DISP_LIM_HIGH 19-23
Equation for 4-16 DISP_LIM_LOW 19-23
Reset point for 4-17 DISP_LOW 23-5
Rollover for 4-17 DISP_WIDTH 19-23
Startup conditions 4-18 Display attributes
Trigger point for 4-16 Point 4-48. See also Point display attributes
Variance for 4-17 Display attributes, configuring
DESC 19-22, 19-33 Browser 3-5
Description 4-49 Display format 4-49
Details Display limits 4-49
Point control panel, properties 22-3 Display limits high 4-49
Deviation alarming 4-44 Display limits low 4-49
DEVIATION_PT 19-22 Display list, adding an attribute to
Device configuration Browser 3-6
Creating a new device 5-3 Display list, removing an attribute from
Device specific properties 5-5 Browser 3-6
General properties 5-4 Display list, reordering attributes
Modifying a device 5-5 Browser 3-6
Device Configuration 5-1 Display list, sorting
Device General Properties Browser 3-4
Description 5-4 Display/sort properties
Model Type 5-4 AMV OCX 20-10
Resource 5-4 Displaying a Screen
Device ID 4-49 CimView 21-10
Device point data collection 4-5 Displaying a table
On change 4-5 Database logger 16-39
On demand on change 4-5 Displaying a table list
On demand on scan 4-5 Database logger, from point configuration 16-10
Poll once 4-5 Displaying CimView Help Information 21-15
Unsolicited 4-5 Displaying CimView Object Help 21-16
Device point interval trigger 4-41 Displaying CimView Object Properties 21-17
Device point pata collection Displaying CimView Screen Help 21-15
On scan 4-5 Displaying CimView Screen Properties 21-16
Device properties Displaying Point Data with CWSERV 23-6
Control for CIMPLICITY HMI and Control 18-2 Displaying point properties
Device specific properties 5-5 Point control panel 22-3
DEVICE_ID 19-22 Displaying point properties, Alarm
Devices Point control panel 22-4
About 5-1 Displaying point properties, Details
Devices configuration 5-1 Point control panel 22-3
DiagException (read only property) Displaying points
Web gateway, Web data control 33-8 Point control panel 22-2
Diagnostic points Displaying status log message details 25-7
Configuring 4-37 Displaying table attributes
Creating 4-37 Database logger, from point configuration 16-9
DiagRawRequest (read only property) Displaying User Help 20-46
Web gateway, Web data control 33-8 Distributors
DiagRawResponse (read only property) Phone numbers 1-4
Web gateway, Web data control 33-8 DoAckAll
Disabling the Microsoft network login prompt Alarm viewer method 20-19
Windows 95, CimView autostart 2-16 DoAckFirst

GFK-1180 Index xi
 Alarm viewer method 20-19 EMEP_BUF_SIZE 26-10
DoAcknowledge ENG_UNITS 19-23
Alarm viewer method 20-19 Enterprise properties
DoAckReset Remote project 30-4
Alarm viewer method 20-20 Enterprise server
DoCimviewScreen Set point security 4-52
Alarm viewer method 20-20 Equation
Docking a Toolbar Average points 4-20
CimView 21-9 Delta accum points 4-16
DoComments Equation points 4-13
Alarm viewer method 20-20 Equation w/override points 4-33
DoCustom<n> Histogram points 4-29
Alarm viewer method 20-20 Max capture points 4-22
DoDelete Min capture points 4-24
Alarm viewer method 20-20 Timer/counter points 4-27
DoHelp Trans-high accum points 4-32
Alarm viewer method 20-20 Value accum points 4-18
DONT_VERIFY_ESPOINT_FRID 26-10 EQUATION 19-24
DoRefresh Equation point
Alarm viewer method 20-21 Start condition for 4-14
DoReset Equation points 4-13
Alarm viewer method 20-21 Equation for 4-13
DoSetup Reset point for 4-14
Alarm viewer method 20-21 Trigger point for 4-14
DoToggle Equation w/override points 4-33
Alarm viewer method 20-21 Equation for 4-33
DoViewStack Reset point for 4-34
Alarm viewer method 20-21 Startup condition for 4-34
DOWNLD_PASSWD 26-2 Trigger point for 4-34
DSK2FLPY Error log, Clearing
Command format 1-12 Database logger, Alarm report 16-53
Dynamic configuration changes Database logger, Data report 16-56
Security audit trail 28-4 Database logger, Trend report 16-59
Dynamic Configuration privilege 14-4 Error messages
Dynamic Update 2-22 Web gateway 33-6
Alarm Class configuration 2-23 Web gateway, #ERROR!ARRAYNOTALLOWED
Alarm Printer configuration 2-23 33-6
Alarm String configuration 2-23 Web gateway, #ERROR!ARRAYOUTOFBOUNDS
Database Logger configuration 2-23 33-6
Device configuration 2-23 Web gateway, #ERROR!BADSERVERRESPONSE
Point configuration 2-23 33-6
Port configuration 2-23 Web gateway,
Remote Projects configuration 2-23 #ERROR!CIMPLICITYNOTRUNNING 33-6
Resource configuration 2-23 Web gateway, #ERROR!INVALIDPOINTID 33-7
Role configuration 2-23 Web gateway, #ERROR!NOTIMPLEMENTED 33-7
Web gateway, #ERROR!NOTLICENSED 33-7
E Web gateway, #ERROR!POINTIDSYNTAX 33-7
Web gateway, #ERROR!POINTUNAVAILABLE
Edit menu 33-7
Login panel 24-10 Web gateway, #ERROR!SERVERNEEDSRESTART
Edit Menu 33-7
Alarm Viewer 20-26 Error Messages 23-14
Efficiency with trigger points 4-41 EU_CONV function
Elements 4-50 Expression editor 4-7
ELEMENTS 19-23, 19-33, 23-4 EU_LABEL 23-5

xii CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Event list, Filtering Modifying the current filter 20-51
Database logger 16-48 Modifying the resource list 20-52
Event logging Saving the current filter 20-54
Overview 16-2 Filtering Alarms by State 20-52
Example Filtering status log messages 25-11
Histogram points 4-29 Filtering the display list
Example, About Browser 3-3
RAS 32-2 Filtering the table list
Example, Remote configuration Database logger 16-30
CIMPLICITY HMI and Control 18-12 Finding status log messages 25-12
Examples, Adding a project Finding the next status log message 25-13
Alarm sound manager 11-8 Floating A Toolbar
Examples, Prioritizing alarms CimView 21-9
Alarm audio support 11-2 Fonts properties
Executing Actions AMV OCX 20-16
Object selected with the mouse 21-12 For Windows 95 on Intel processors
Executing Setpoints System requirements 1-4
In-place edit 21-13 For Windows NT on DEC Alpha
Object Selected with keyboard 21-13 System requirements 1-3
Object Selected With Mouse 21-12 Formats - CWSERV System Topic 23-12
Executing Slider Setpoints 21-12 Functional upgrades 1-18
Exiting program control 24-21 Further configuration
Export actions RAS, Windows NT server 32-7
Database logger, Maintenance actions 16-26 Windows NT client 32-10
Export procedure FW_CONV_EQ 19-24
Import/Export 19-10
Exporting configuration data 19-10 G
Expression editor, in point configuraiton
Scientific operations 4-11 GE Fanuc
Expression editor, in point configuration 4-6 Calling for authorization code 1-16
Alarm functions 4-10 General Configuration Information
Arithmetic operations 4-8 Alarm Viewer 20-39
Bitwise operations 4-9 General properties
EU_CONV_function 4-7 Alarm printer configuration 13-3
Logical operations 4-9 Device 5-4
Relation operations 4-10 Remote project 30-3
Getting started
Point control panel 22-1
F
Getting Started
Fields properties CimView 21-1
AMV OCX 20-4 Global parameters 26-1
File menu ACK_TOUT 26-6
Browser 3-3 AM_RESET_ACK_STATE 26-7
Login panel 24-10 AMLP_USE_GEN_TIME 26-7
File Menu CE_MAX_DELAY 26-7
Alarm Viewer 20-25 CE_MAX_THREADS 26-7
CimView 21-4 CE_THREAD_TIMEOUT 26-7
Filtering Alarm by Time 20-52 CLR_TOUT 26-8
Filtering alarms CONNECT_DROP_PERIOD 26-4
Loading a filter for display 20-51 CONNECT_RETRY_PERIOD 26-4
Filtering Alarms 20-50 Database logger 27-16
Creating a new filter 20-54 DB_DEBUG 26-8, 27-17
Declaring a default filter 20-54 DB_ENABLE_TRANSACTIONS 26-9, 27-16
Deleting a filter from the list 20-54 DB_QUEUE_OVERFLOW_DELAY 26-9
Modifying the class list 20-51 DB_QUEUE_SIZE 26-2

GFK-1180 Index xiii

 DB_TIME_FORMAT 27-17 GMR_HRTBT_TIMER 26-2
DB_TIMESTAMP_PRECISION 26-9 GMR_MODE_ADDR 26-2
DBDL_ABORT_TIMEOUT 26-8 GR_SCREEN 19-24
DBDL_DEVICE_CHECK_PERIOD 26-2 Granting client dial-in permission
DEL_OPT 26-9 RAS, Windows NT server 32-7
Device communications 26-19 Group logging
DONT_VERIFY_ESPOINT_FRID 26-10 Overview 16-3
DOWNLD_PASSWD 26-2 Group table point
Editing 26-1 Point properties 16-43
EMEP_BUF_SIZE 26-10 GSM_ANNUN_ALARM_H1 26-11
GMR_HRTBT_TIMER 26-2 GSM_ANNUN_ALARM_H2 26-11
GMR_MODE_ADDR 26-2 GSM_ANNUN_ALARM_L1 26-11
GSM_ANNUN_ALARM_H1 26-11 GSM_ANNUN_ALARM_L2 26-12
GSM_ANNUN_ALARM_H2 26-11 GSM_ANNUN_DIG_OFF 26-10
GSM_ANNUN_ALARM_L1 26-11 GSM_ANNUN_DIG_ON 26-11
GSM_ANNUN_ALARM_L2 26-12 GSM_ASC_FONT_NAME 26-12
GSM_ANNUN_DIG_OFF 26-10 GSM_ASC_FONT_SIZES 26-12
GSM_ANNUN_DIG_ON 26-11 GSM_ASC_SCALE 26-12
GSM_ASC_FONT_NAME 26-12 GSM_CACHE_SIZE 26-13
GSM_ASC_FONT_SIZES 26-12 GSM_EXPONENT_PRECISION 26-13
GSM_ASC_SCALE 26-12 GSM_SPCONFIRM_DEFAULT 26-13
GSM_CACHE_SIZE 26-13 GSM_STALE_COLOR_KEY 26-14
GSM_EXPONENT_PRECISION 26-13 GSM_UNAVAIL_COLOR_KEY 26-14
GSM_SPCONFIRM_DEFAULT 26-13
GSM_STALE_COLOR_KEY 26-14 H
GSM_UNAVAIL_COLOR_KEY 26-14
IPC_BCAST_INTERVAL 26-4 Handling transaction log
IPC_QUEUE_SIZE 26-5 SQL server 27-10
LOG_OPT 26-15 Has EU 4-50
LOGIN_RETRY_PERIOD 26-14 Help - CWSERV System Topic 23-13
MAX_STACKED 26-15 Help Menu
MAX_TREND_BUF 26-15 Alarm Viewer 20-27
Modified for all projects 26-4 CimView 21-7
Modified per project 26-6 Histogram points 4-28
Modified through configuration functions 26-2 Equation for 4-29
PROJECT_ID 26-16 Example for 4-29
PTDL_QUANTIZATION 26-2 Reset point for 4-30
PTMDP_DO_EU_CONV 26-17 Startup condition for 4-30
PTMRP 26-17 Trigger point for 4-30
RAW_LIMIT_ALARM 26-17 HOSTS file, configuring
REDUND_LINK_SLEEP 26-5 RAS 32-13
REPEAT_TOUT 26-17 HOSTS file, configuring on client, RAS 32-13
RTR_ACCEPT_CONN 26-3 HOSTS file, configuring on server, RAS 32-13
RTR_DISABLE_BCAST 26-3 Hotline
RTR_MAX_OUTMESSAGE_COUNT 26-5 Phone numbers 1-4
RTR_STANDALONE 26-3 How client package distribution works 31-3
Sample File 26-20 How Configuration Updates Are Handled 2-22
SETPOINT_SECURITY 26-3 Dynamic Update 2-22
SHORT_FILENAMES 26-18
STARTUP_TIMEOUT 26-3 I
SVC_RETRY_COUNT 26-18
SVC_RETRY_DELAY 26-18 ie_deflds.cfg 19-4
SYSNAME 26-3 Changing information in 19-5
Global points 4-12 ie_formats.cfg 19-5
Startup condition for 4-12 Changing information in 19-6

xiv CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Import options ALM_MSG 19-18
Device properties, CIMPLICITY HMI and Control ALM_ROUTE_OPER 19-18
18-3 ALM_ROUTE_SYSMGR 19-18
Import procedure ALM_ROUTE_USER 19-19
Import/Export 19-7 ALM_STR 19-19
Import, Process ALM_TYPE 19-19
CIMPLICITY HMI and Control 18-7 ANALOG_DEADBAND 19-19
Import, Rules BFR_COUNT 19-19
CIMPLCITIY HMI and Control 18-7 BFR_DUR 19-20
Import/Export 19-1 BFR_EVENT_PERIOD 19-20
Configuration Files 19-4 BFR_EVENT_PT_ID 19-20
Data file format 19-2 BFR_EVENT_TYPE 19-20
Deleting configuration data 19-12 BFR_EVENT_UNITS 19-20
Export field formats file 19-5 BFR_GATE_COND 19-20
Export procedure 19-10 BFR_SYNC_TIME 19-21
Exporting configuration data 19-10 CALC_TYPE 19-21
Field names 19-13 CONV_LIM_HIGH 19-21
Required 19-13 CONV_LIM_LOW 19-21
Field Names CONV_TYPE 19-22
Optional 19-13 DELETE_REQ 19-22
Import Field Defaults File 19-4 DESC 19-22
Importing additional roles 19-9 DEVIATION_PT 19-22
Importing configuration data 19-7 DEVICE_ID 19-22
Introduction 19-1 DISP_LIM_HIGH 19-23
Log file 19-6 DISP_LIM_LOW 19-23
Log file format 19-6 DISP_WIDTH 19-23
Log file name 19-6 ELEMENTS 19-23
Logicmaster 90 support 19-33 ENG_UNITS 19-23
Logicmaster Fields EQUATION 19-24
ADDR 19-33 FW_CONV_EQ 19-24
DESC 19-33 GR_SCREEN 19-24
ELEMENTS 19-33 INIT_VAL 19-24
PT_ID 19-33 JUSTIFICATION 19-25
PT_TYPE 19-33 LOCAL 19-25
Sample data file 19-2 MAX_STACKED 19-25
Sample Logicmaster File 19-33 POLL_AFTER_SET 19-25
Supported Logicmaster field names 19-33 PRECISION 19-26
Wildcards for delete 19-12 PROC_ID 19-26
Wildcards for export 19-11 PT_ENABLED 19-26
Import/Export Fields PT_ID 19-13
ACCESS 19-15 PT_ORIGIN 19-13, 19-27
ACCESS_FILTER 19-15 PT_SET_INTERVAL 19-27
ACK_TIMEOUT 19-15 PT_SET_TIME 19-27
ADDR 19-15 PT_TYPE 19-27
ADDR_OFFSET 19-16 PTMGMT_PROC_ID 19-26
ADDR_TYPE 19-16 RAW_LIM_HIGH 19-28
ALM_CLASS 19-16 RAW_LIM_LOW 19-28
ALM_CRITERIA 19-16 REP_TIMEOUT 19-28
ALM_DEADBAND 19-17 RESET_ALLOWED 19-28
ALM_DELAY 19-17 RESET_COND 19-29
ALM_HIGH_1 19-17 RESET_PT 19-29
ALM_HIGH_2 19-17 RESET_TIMEOUT 19-29
ALM_HLP_FILE 19-17 RESOURCE_ID 19-29
ALM_LOW_1 19-18 REV_CONV_EQ 19-30
ALM_LOW_2 19-18 ROLLOVER_VAL 19-30

GFK-1180 Index xv
 SAFETY_PT 19-30 IPC_QUEUE_SIZE 26-5
SAMPLE_INTV 19-30
SAMPLE_INTV_UNIT 19-30 J
SCAN_RATE 19-31
TRIG_CK_PT 19-31 Job, Creating for CIMPLICITY HMI installation
TRIG_PT 19-31 Site wide installation 31-8
TRIG_REL 19-32 JUSTIFICATION 19-25
TRIG_VAL 19-32
UPDATE_CRITERIA 19-32 L
VARIANCE_VAL 19-32
VARS 19-33 Layout properties
Importing additional roles 19-9 Alarm printer configuration 13-5
Importing configuration data 19-7 LENGTH 23-4
Incorrect information conflicts Licenses
CIMPLICITY HMI and Control 18-11 Adding a new option 1-18
InetPub\Scripts\CimGate.dll 33-3 Diskette transfer 1-20
InetPub\wwwroot\CIMPLICITY\HMI\*.html 33-3 Functional upgrades 1-18
InetPub\wwwroot\CIMPLICITY\HMI\CimData.ocx Installing upgrade licenses 1-19
33-3 Network Transfer 1-20
INIT_STATE 23-6 Registering 1-15
INIT_VAL 19-24 Running without authorization 1-17
In-place edit setpoint actions 21-13 Transferring 1-20
Install Microsoft Excel Upgrading CIMPLICITY software 1-18
Excel CD, Database logger 16-49 Version upgrades 1-19
Microsoft Office for Windows 95 CD 16-50 Limits
Microsoft Office for Windows 95 CD, Database Array points 4-36
logger 16-50 Linear conversion 4-45
Install sample reports Loading an Alarm Viewer Filter for Display 20-51
Database logger 16-50 LOCAL 19-25
Installation procedure Log and error files
Web gateway 33-2 Viewing 25-1
Installing Log file format
Web gateway 33-1 Import/Export 19-6
Installing a Project 2-11 Log file name
Installing an Alarm Viewer screen 20-56 Import/Export 19-6
From Alarm Viewer 20-56 Log files
From the File Manager 20-57 Types of 16-1
Installing CIMPLICITY HMI software 1-6 LOG_OPT 26-15
Installing CIMPLICITY software From a Floppy Logging See Database logger
Distribution 1-14 Logging an alarm
Installing Microsoft Excel Database logger, from point configuration 16-9
Notes on, Database logger 16-49 Logging attributes
Installing SQL Server client utilities 27-6 Alarm, event and application tables 16-22
Installing the RAS Group and data tables 16-23
Windows NT client 32-9 Logging conditions, Group and data tables 16-19
Windows NT server 32-4 Logging In 2-24
Installing upgrade licenses 1-19 Logging in to a project
Integer vs. floating point engineering units Login panel 24-12
Custom conversion 4-46 Logging out of a project
Interval Login panel 24-12
Timer/counter points 4-27 Logging properties
Introduction All tables 16-28
CIMPLICITY software 1-1 Logical names 26-21
Site wide installation 31-1 CLIE_MAX_PTS 26-23
IPC_BCAST_INTERVAL 26-4 Editing the file 26-22

xvi CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
Logical names, Base system Status log viewer 25-4
Descriptions 26-23 Menus
Logical operations Alarm Viewer 20-25
Expression editor 4-9 CimView 21-4
Logicmaster 90 support Microsoft Access
Import/Export 19-33 Note for Database logger 16-4
Login information Microsoft Access note
Deleting 26-23 Database logger’ 27-11
Help Menu 24-11 Microsoft Excel Example - CWSERV command 23-2
Login panel 24-9 Microsoft Excel, Install from Excel CD
Edit menu 24-10 Database logger 16-49
File menu 24-10 Microsoft Excel, Install from Windows 95 CD
Help Menu 24-11 Database logger 16-50
Logging in to a project 24-12 Microsoft Excel, Install from Windows 97 CD
Logging out of a project 24-12 Database logger 16-50
Managing saved logins 24-14 Microsoft System Management Server
Menu options 24-10 About 31-2
Password, changing 24-13 Min capture points 4-24
Project Menu 24-10 Equation for 4-24
Shortcut keys 24-11 Reset point for 4-24
Starting 24-9 Startup conditions for 4-25
Toolbar buttons 24-11 Trigger point for 4-24
View Menu 24-10 Modify Alarm Setups privilege 14-4
Login password Modify logging conditions
Security features 28-1 Database logger, Logging conditions 16-18
Login! Menu Modifying
Alarm Viewer 20-26 Alarm block group 12-7
LOGIN_RETRY_PERIOD 26-14 Modifying a device 5-5
Modifying an alarm
M Alarm block group 12-6
Modifying logging conditions for an alarm 16-47
Maintenance action export path Modifying Point Data in CWSERV 23-8
Database logger, Properties 16-36 Implementing a macro 23-9
Maintenance actions Macro Format 23-8
All tables 16-26 Performance considerations 23-8
Maintenance events Modifying table properties
All tables 16-24 Database logger, From point configuration 16-11
Managing saved logins 24-14 Modifying the Alarm Viewer Class List 20-51
Mapping colors in RGB.DAT Modifying the Alarm Viewer Resource List 20-52
Alarm class configuration 8-6 Modifying the Current Alarm Viewer Filter 20-51
Max capture points 4-22 Modifying the logging properties for the point
Equation for 4-22 Database logger, from point configuration 16-8
Reset point for 4-22 More about redundant alarm printers 13-8
Startup conditions for 4-23 MoveDownOneAlarm
Max caputre points Alarm viewer method 20-21
Trigger point for 4-22 MoveUpOneAlarm
MAX_STACKED 19-25, 26-15 Alarm viewer method 20-22
MAX_TREND_BUF 26-15 Mute sound
MCP_PROC_DOWN 10-3 Alarm sound manager 11-6
Menu Bar
CimView 21-3
N
Menu options
Browser 3-3 Naming an alarm viewer control 20-23
Login panel 24-10 Naming points 4-2
Show Users 24-3 Network options

GFK-1180 Index xvii

 CIMPLICITY options 2-15 Database logger, Alarm report 16-52
New point conflicts Database logger, Data report 16-55
CIMPLICITY HMI and Control 18-10 Database logger, Trend report 16-58
New Project Options 2-1 Password, Changing
Numbering elements Login panel 24-13
Array points 4-35 Phone numbers
Distributors 1-4
O Hotline 1-4
Ping
ODBC configuration 27-2 RAS, Testing the connection 32-14
Custom data sources 27-3 Ping, Client
Data sources 27-2 RAS, Testing the connection 32-14
Drivers 27-2 Ping, Server
Microsoft Access data sources 27-4 RAS, Testing the connection 32-14
Moving projects 27-3 Placing Programs or Documents in the Windows 95
Remote SQL Server data sources 27-6, 27-7 Start Menu 1-23
SQL Server client utilities, Installing 27-6 Placing Programs or Documents on a Windows 95
SQL Server data source, Configuring 27-6 Desktop 1-23
SQL Server, Configuring 27-5 Point alarm triggered logging 16-45
SQL Server, Installation 27-4 Point attributes to be logged 16-23
OLE Controls in CimView 21-20 Point bridge
On change Configuring points 30-5
Device point data collection 4-5 Point configuration details 30-5
On demand on change Point by Address privilege 14-4
Device point data collection 4-5 Point class 4-50
On demand on scan Selecting 4-3
Device point data collection 4-5 Point configuration 4-1
On scan Absolute alarming 4-43
Device point data collection 4-5 Alarm Option Properties 4-77
On update alarming 4-43 Alarm Properties 4-72
Opening a CimView screen Alarm Routing Properties 4-75
RAS 32-15 Analog point types 4-3
Opening a project 2-3 APPL point types 4-4
Show Users 24-6 Boolean point types 4-4
Option properties Configuring point bridge points 30-5
Alarm sound manager 11-9 Configuring points 4-47
Oracle Conversion properties 4-70
Using with database logger 27-8 Creating a new point 4-53
Oracle configuration Custom conversion 4-46
Database logger 27-8 Defining point properties 4-54
Oracle requirements Deviation alarming 4-44
Database logger 27-8 Device point data collection 4-5
Output and error files Device point data collection, on change 4-5
System, Checking 25-14 Device point data collection, on demand on change
Output and error files, Project 4-5
Checking 25-14 Device point data collection, on demand on scan 4-5
Device point data collection, on scan 4-5
P Device point data collection, poll once 4-5
Device point data collection, unsolicited 4-5
PageDownAlarms Device point interval trigger 4-41
Alarm viewer method 20-22 Device point trigger efficiency 4-41
PageUpAlarms Device properties 4-59
Alarm viewer method 20-22 Diagnostic points 4-37
Parameters Diagnostic points, Creating 4-37
Database logger properties 16-34 Display attributes 4-48

xviii CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Expression editor 4-6 Point configuration Properties - Device
General properties 4-55 Addressing 4-60
Integer vs. floating point engineering units for custom Analog Deadband 4-63
conversion 4-46 Device Id 4-59
Linear conversion 4-45 Domain Address 4-61
Naming points 4-2 Poll After Set 4-63
On update alarming 4-43 Scan Rate 4-63
Point bridge point configuration details 30-5 Trigger Settings 4-62
Rate of change alarming 4-44 Point configuration Properties - General
Reserved characters 4-2 Access 4-56
Reserved words 4-2 Availability trigger 4-57
Run-time notes for virtual points 4-35 Data Structure 4-55
Selecting a point class 4-3 Description 4-55
Set point password 4-52 Enable alarm 4-57
Set point security 4-51 Enable point 4-57
Setting run-time point properties 4-51 Enterprise point 4-57
Text point types 4-4 Logging 4-56
Trigger point update criteria 4-39 Point buffering 4-58
Types of alarming 4-43 Resource ID 4-55
Types of alarming - Absolute 4-43 Safety point 4-57
Types of alarming - Deviation 4-44 Point configuration Properties - View
Types of alarming - On update 4-43 Display Settings 4-69
Types of alarming - Rate of change 4-44 Format 4-68
Types of data conversion 4-45 Graphic Screen 4-70
Types of data conversion - Custom 4-46 Point configuration Properties - Virtual
Types of data conversion - Linear 4-45 Calculation Type 4-64
Using array points 4-35 Equation 4-65
Using the trigger functions 4-39 Interval 4-66
View Properties 4-68 Local 4-66
Virtual point calculation types 4-6 Point Manager 4-64
Virtual point interval trigger 4-42 Process Id 4-64
Virtual properties 4-64 Reset Point 4-65
Point configuration Properties - Alarm Rollover 4-66
Alarm Criteria 4-73 Start Time 4-66
Alarm Delay 4-74 Startup Conditions 4-66
Alarm Values 4-74 Trigger Point 4-65
Deadband 4-75 Variance 4-66
Definition 4-72 Point conflicts, Incorrect information
Help File 4-75 CIMPLICITY HMI and Control 18-11
Point configuration Properties - Alarm Option Point conflicts, New point
Acknowledge Timeout 4-78 CIMPLICITY HMI and Control 18-10
Deletion Requirements 4-78 Point conflicts, Resolving
Manual Reset Allowed 4-79 CIMPLICITY HMI and Control 18-9
Max Number Stacked 4-80 Point control panel
Repeat Timeout 4-77 About 22-1
Reset Timeout 4-79 Changing font colors 22-5
Point configuration Properties - Alarm Routing Displaying point properties 22-3
Adding A Role 4-76 Displaying point properties, Alarm 22-4
Creating A Role 4-77 Displaying point properties, Details 22-3
Displaying Role Attributes 4-76 Displaying points 22-2
Removing A Role 4-76 Getting started 22-1
Point configuration Properties - Conversion Saving the document 22-6
Conversion 4-70 Point control panel alarm changes
Custom Expressions 4-71 Security audit trail 28-3
Limits 4-71 Point data logging scan rate

GFK-1180 Index xix

 Database logger, Properties 16-36 WARN_ENABLED 23-6
Point data triggered logging 16-45 WARN_HIGH 23-5
Point definition properties WARN_LOW 23-5
Point class 4-53 Point type 4-50
Point ID 4-53 PointGet (method)
Point origin 4-53 Web gateway, Web data control 33-9
Point display attributes 4-48 Points
Access filter 4-48 About 4-1
Address 4-48, 4-50 Points, Adding to table
Address offset 4-48 Database loger 16-42
Alarm high 4-48 Points, Removing from table
Alarm low 4-48 Database logger 16-42
Data length 4-48 PointSet (method)
Data type ID 4-49 Web gateway, Web data control 33-10
Description 4-49 Poll once
Device ID 4-49 Device point data collection 4-5
Display format 4-49 POLL_AFTER_SET 19-25
Display limits 4-49 Port
Display limits high 4-49 General properties 7-4
Display limits low 4-49 Port specific properties 7-4
Elements 4-50 Port Attributes
Has EU 4-50 Description 7-2
Point class 4-50 Node 7-3
Point origin 4-50 Port Id 7-2, 7-3
Point type 4-50 Protocol 7-3
Resource 4-50 Protocol Id 7-2
Warning high 4-50 Port configuration
Point list, Filtering Changing protocols 7-5
Database logger 16-48 Creating a new port 7-3
Point logging Port Configuration 7-1
Database logger properties 16-36 Port General Properties
Point logging dialog box Description 7-4
Database logger, From point configuration 16-7 Enable 7-4
Point logging properties Retry Count 7-4
Editing 16-42 Scan Rate 7-4
Point origin 4-50 Ports
Point properties About 7-1
Run-time 4-51 Configuring 7-1
Point timed/gated logging’ 16-46 PRECISION 19-26
Point Topic Attributes 23-3 Printing Alarms 20-55
ALARM_ENABLED 23-6 Printing the status log file 25-9
ALARM_HIGH 23-5 Prioritizing alarms
ALARM_LOW 23-5 Alarm audio support 11-1
DISP_FORMAT 23-4 Prioritizing alarms, examples
DISP_HIGH 23-5 Alarm audio support 11-2
DISP_LOW 23-5 PROC_ID 19-26
ELEMENTS 23-4 Process Control privilege 14-4
EU_LABEL 23-5 Process log files
INIT_STATE 23-6 Backup files 25-15
LENGTH 23-4 Process names in status log 25-13
RAW_VALUE 23-3 Profile, saving and loading
SIZE 23-4 Alarm sound manager 11-6
STATE 23-3 Program control 24-16
TYPE 23-4 CIMPLICITY HMI processes 24-19
VALUE 23-3 exiting 24-21

xx CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180

 Getting started 24-16 PT_ORIGIN 19-13, 19-27
Orderly startup and shutdown 24-18 PT_SET_INTERVAL 19-27
Refreshing the process list 24-21 PT_SET_TIME 19-27
Releasing the connection 24-21 PT_TYPE 19-27, 19-33
Starting all halted processes 24-20 PTDL_QUANTIZATION 26-2
Stopping a running process 24-20 PTMDP_DO_EU_CONV 26-17
Stopping all running processes 24-21 PTMGMT_PROC_ID 19-26
Using 24-17 PTMRP 26-17
Program Control Purge actions
Starting A Halted Process 24-19 Database logger, Maintenance actions 16-27
Project 2-5
Opening 2-3 Q
Project log and error files 25-1
Project login/logout Queue size, Modifying
Security audit trail 28-4 Alarm printer configuration 13-10
Project Menu
Login panel 24-10 R
Show Users 24-3
Project properties RAS
Alarm sound manager 11-7 About 32-1
Project Properties About the example 32-2
Enable Project Broadcast 2-6 Accessing a project from client 32-15
General 2-5 Browsing for a point 32-15
Options 2-5, 2-6 CIMPLICITY options, Server 32-14
Protocols 2-5 Client setup, Windows 95 32-11
Setting 2-5 Client setup, Windows NT 32-9
Project setup Configuring automatic startup, Windows NT server
For web gateway 33-3 32-7
Project Wizard Further configuration, Windows NT client 32-10
Adding a new device 2-9 Further configuration, Windows NT server 32-7
Adding a new point 2-10 Granting client dial-in permission, Windows NT
Adding a new port 2-7 server 32-7
Devices 2-8 HOSTS file, configuring 32-13
Modifying a device 2-9 HOSTS file, configuring on client 32-13
Modifying a point 2-10 HOSTS file, configuring on server 32-13
Modifying a port 2-8 Installing, Windows NT client 32-9
Points 2-10 Installing, Windows NT server 32-4
Protocols and Ports 2-7 Opening a CimView screen 32-15
Removing a device 2-9 Requirements 32-3
Removing a point 2-10 Server setup, Windows NT 32-4
Step 1 of 3 2-7 Testing the connection 32-14
Step 2 of 3 2-8 Testing the connection, Ping 32-14
Step 3 of 3 2-10 Testing the connection, Ping on client 32-14
Using 2-7 Testing the connection, Ping on server 32-14
Project WIzard Rate of change alarming 4-44
Removing a port 2-8 RAW_LIM_HIGH 19-28
PROJECT_ID 26-16 RAW_LIM_LOW 19-28
Projects properties RAW_LIMIT_ALARM 26-17
AMV OCX 20-9 RAW_VALUE 23-3
Properties Reconciling a table
Database logger 16-34 Database logger 16-32
Protocol Reconciling a table, Creating database fields
Changing for port 7-5 Database logger 16-33
PT_ENABLED 19-26 Reconciling a table, Removing unused Microsoft
PT_ID 19-13, 19-33 Access fields

GFK-1180 Index xxi

 Database logger 16-33 Removing point for all logging tables, from point
Reconciling a table, Removing unused Oracle fields configuration 16-8
Database logger 16-33 Removing point from one or more tables
Reconciling a table, Removing unused SQL Server Database logger, from point configuration 16-8
fields Removing Registry Information 26-24
Database logger 16-33 Removing Windows 95 Registry Information 26-24
Reconnect wait period Removing Windows NT Registry Information 26-25
Database logger, Database disconnect recover 27-13 Renaming a table
REDUND_LINK_SLEEP 26-5 Database logger 16-31
Redundant alarm printers REP_TIMEOUT 19-28
More about 13-8 REPEAT_TOUT 26-17
Referencing CWSERV from a Networked NT Client Reporting
23-15 Database logger 16-49
Refreshing the Alarm List 20-46 Reports, Automatic printing
Refreshing the process list 24-21 Database logger 16-60
Registering CIMPLICITY software 1-15 Reports, Automatic printing, CimView triggers
Adding a new option 1-18 Database logger 16-62
Diskette license transfer 1-20 Reports, Automatic printing, Event Manager triggers
Functional upgrades 1-18 Database logger 16-62
Installing upgrade licenses 1-19 Reports, Automatic printing, Maintenance action
Network license transfer 1-20 triggers
Running without authorization 1-17 Database logger 16-62
Transferring Licenses 1-20 Reports, Automatic printing, Modifying CIMPLICITY
Upgrading CIMPLICITY software 1-18 service for
Version upgrades 1-19 Database logger 16-60
Registration Reports, Automatic printing, Script
Calling GE Fanuc 1-16 Database logger 16-61
Entering the authorization code 1-17 Reports, Automatic printing, Triggering
Registering user information and serial numbers 1-15 Database logger 16-62
Relational operations Requirements
Expression editor 4-10 RAS 32-3
Releasing the program control connection 24-21 Reserved characters 4-2
Remote Access of CWSERV on Windows NT 23-14 Reserved words 4-2
Remote Access Server See RAS Reset point
Remote configuration Average points 4-21
CIMPLICITY HMI and Control 18-12 Delta accum points 4-17
Remote configuration, Example Equation point 4-14
CIMPLICITY HMI and Control 18-12 Equation w/override points 4-34
Remote project Histogram points 4-30
Enterprise projects’ 30-4 Max capture points 4-22
General properties 30-3 Min capture points 4-24
Remote Projects 30-1 Timer/counter points 4-27
Creating 30-2 Trans-high accum points 4-31
Remote SQL Server data sources 27-6, 27-7 Value accum points 4-19
Removing RESET_ALLOWED 19-28
Saved logins 24-15 RESET_COND 19-29
Removing an alarm RESET_PT 19-29
Alarm block group 12-6 RESET_TIMEOUT 19-29
Removing CIMPLICITY software 1-21 Resolving point conflicts
From Windows 95 1-21 CIMPLICITY HMI and Control 18-9
From Windows NT 1-21 Resolving problems See also Log files, Status log and
Removing CIMPLICITY Software Status log viewer
Removing Windows 95 Registry Information 26-24 About CIMPLICITY HMI log files 25-1
Removing Windows NT Registry Information 26-25 Backup process log files 25-15
Checking project output and error files 25-14

xxii CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Checking system output and error files 25-14 S
Project log files 25-1
System log files 25-1 SAFETY_PT 19-30
Viewing log files 25-1 Sample CWSERV Commands 23-2
Resource 4-50 Sample reports, Install
Resource Attributes Database logger 16-50
Alarm Mgr 6-2 Sample Spreadsheets and Macros for CWSERV 23-10
Description 6-2 Array point example 23-11
Resource ID 6-2 Single point example 23-10
Resource Type 6-2 SAMPLE_INTV 19-30
Resource configuration SAMPLE_INTV_UNIT 19-30
Adding a new user 6-4 Saved logins
Adding a user 6-4 Adding 24-14
Deleting a user 6-4 Managing 24-14
Resource definition 6-3 Removing 24-15
Viewing user properties 6-4 Saving the Alarm List Layout 20-41
Resource Configuration 6-1 Saving the Current Alarm Viewer Filter 20-54
Creating a resource 6-3 Saving the document
RESOURCE_ID 19-29 Point control panel 22-6
Resources Saving the status log as a text file 25-8
About 6-1 SCAN_RATE 19-31
Configuring 6-1 Scientific operations
REV_CONV_EQ 19-30 Expression editor 4-11
Role Attributes Screen Properties
Role Id 14-2 CimView 21-16
Role configuration Script control privilege 14-4
Creating a new role 14-3 Script, Creating for automatic report 16-61
Role properties 14-3 Scroll bars
Role Configuration 14-1 CimView 21-3
Role privileges Search string wildcards
Delete Alarm 14-4 Database logger 16-4
Dynamic Configuration 14-4 Searching for user information
Modify Alarm Setups 14-4 Show Users 24-8
Point by Address 14-4 Security audit trail
Process Control 14-4 Dynamic configuration changes 28-4
Script control 14-4 Point control panel alarm changes 28-3
Security features 28-2 Project login/logout 28-4
Set Point 14-4 Security features 28-3
Setpoint Audit Trail 14-4 Setpoint downloads 28-4
Trigger event 14-4 Security features
Role properties 14-3 About 28-1
Roles Login password 28-1
About 14-1 Role privileges 28-2
Configuring 14-2 Security audit trail 28-3
Rollover Security audit trail, Dynamic configuration changes
Delta accum points 4-17 28-4
ROLLOVER_VAL 19-30 Security audit trail, Point control panel alarm changes
RTR_ACCEPT_CONN 26-3 28-3
RTR_DISABLE_BCAST 26-3 Security audit trail, Project login/logout 28-4
RTR_MAX_OUTMESSAGE_COUNT 26-5 Security audit trail, Setpoint downloads 28-4
RTR_STANDALONE 26-3 Setpoint password 28-2
Running the Demo Project 1-22 Setpoint security 28-2
Running Without Authorization 1-17 SelectAllAlarms
Alarm viewer method 20-22
Selecting a point class 4-3

GFK-1180 Index xxiii

 Analog point types 4-3 Login panel 24-11
APPL point types 4-4 Show Users 24-5
Boolean point types 4-4 Help Menu 24-3
Text point types 4-4 Search Menu 24-4
Selecting a status log printer 25-10 Show Users 24-2
Selecting a status log to view 25-6 Changing view options 24-6
Selecting Alarm List Color and Font 20-34 Closing a project view 24-8
Selecting Alarm List Fields 20-31 Help Menu 24-3
Selecting Alarms 20-18, 20-45 Menu options 24-3
Selecting Objects With Procedures 21-11 Opening a project 24-6
Selecting Static Alarm List Button Layout 20-35 Project Menu 24-3
SelectPageAlarms Search Menu 24-4
Alarm viewer method 20-22 Searching for user information 24-8
SelectTopAlarm Shortcut keys 24-5
Alarm viewer method 20-22 Starting 24-2
Serial alarm printers Toolbar buttons 24-5
Additional configuration 13-9 View Menu 24-3
Serial numbers Window Menu 24-4
Registering 1-15 Window Menu 24-4
Server setup Single Point Example - CWSERV 23-10
RAS, Windows NT 32-4 Site wide installation
Set point password 4-52 Creating application source directory 31-5
Set Point privilege 14-4 Creating job for CIMPLICITY HMI installation 31-8
Set point security 4-51 Creating SMS package for CIMPLICITY HMI
Enterprise server 4-52 installation 31-7
Setpoint audit trail privilege Introduction 31-1
More about 14-4 Site wide installation procedure
Setpoint Audit Trail privilege 14-4 CIMPLICITY HMI 31-5
Setpoint downloads SIZE 23-4
Security audit trail 28-4 SMS package
Setpoint Object Selected with keyboard 21-13 Creating for CIMPLICITY HMI site wide installation
Setpoint Object Selected With the Mouse 21-12 31-7
Setpoint password SNF file format 19-2
Security features 28-2 SQL server
Setpoint security Configuring additional locks 27-9
Security features 28-2 Database management 27-9
SETPOINT_SECURITY 26-3 Handling transaction log 27-10
Setting CIMPLICITY startup options Truncating transaction log as CIMPLICITY
Windows 95, CimView autostart 2-18 maintenance action 27-10
Setting CimView Window Options 21-14 Truncating transaction log as system default 27-10
Setting project options 2-12 SQL Server configuration 27-5
Setting Project Properties 2-5 SQL Server data source configuration 27-6
Setting run-time point properties 4-51 SQL Server installation 27-4
Set point password 4-52 Standard Alarms 10-2
Set point security 4-51 $ALARM_DISABLED 10-2
Setting run-time user properties 15-3 $ALARM_ENABLED 10-2
Setting Startup Options 2-12 $ALARM_MODIFIED 10-2
SHORT_FILENAMES 26-18 $ALARM_RAWLIM 10-2
Shortcut keys $ALARM_RESTORED 10-2
Database logger, Main window 16-15 $AM_STATUS 10-2
Status log viewer 25-5 $DEVICE 10-2
Shortcut Keys $DEVICE_DOWN 10-2
Alarm Viewer 20-27 $DEVICE_FAILOVER 10-2
CimView 21-9 $DL_FILE_FULL 10-2
Configuration Cabinet 2-4 $DOWNLOAD 10-2

xxiv CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 $DYN_CFG 10-2 Process names 25-13
$GMR_DEV_DOWN 10-2 Saving status log as a text file 25-8
$GMR_POINT_DISCREPANCY 10-2 Selecting a log to view 25-6
$LOGON 10-2, 10-3 Selecting a printer 25-10
$LOGOUT 10-3 Shortcut keys 25-5
$REDUND_DEV_DOWN 10-3 Toolbar buttons 25-5
$RTR_LINK_DOWN 10-3 Using 25-2
AMSI_ALARM 10-3 View menu 25-4
DB_CONN_DOWN 10-3 Which status log file gets displayed 25-3
DB_START_FORWARD 10-3 Stop a project
MCP_PROC_DOWN 10-3 CIMPLICITY options 2-13
Start as a viewer Stopping a Project 1-25
CIMPLICITY options 2-13 Stopping a running process 24-20
Start project in list Stopping all running processes 24-21
CIMPLICITY options 2-14 Store and forward
Start time Database logger, Database disconnect recovery 27-13
Timer/counter points 4-27 Database logger, Logging properties 16-29
Starting A Halted Process 24-19 Database logger, Properties 16-38
Starting a project 1-24 Store and forward, Changing defaults, Database
Starting all halted processes 24-20 disconnect recovery 27-15
Starting CimView screens automatically at boot Store and forward, Enabling
Windows 95 2-16 Database logger, Database disconnect recovery 27-14
Starting CWSERV 23-7 Store and forward, Filenames
Starting the login panel 24-9 Database logger, Database disconnect recovery 27-14
Startup condition Store and forward, Maximum records
Delta accum points 4-18 Database logger, Database disconnect recovery 27-15
Equation point 4-14 Supported device protocols
Equation w/override points 4-34 CIMPLICITY HMI and Control 18-2
Global points 4-12 SVC_RETRY_COUNT 26-18
Histogram points 4-30 SVC_RETRY_DELAY 26-18
Trans-high accum points 4-32 SYSNAME 26-3
Startup conditions System - CWSERV System Topic 23-12
Average points 4-21 System Architecture 1-2
Max capture points 4-23 System boot options
Min capture points 4-25 CIMPLICITY options 2-15
Timer/counter points 4-28 System log and error files 25-1
Value accum points 4-19 System management 26-1
Startup options About 26-1
CIMPLICITY options 2-14 Deleting login information 26-23
Startup properites Global parameters See also Global parameters
Alarm sound manager 11-10 Device communications 26-19
startup.exe 2-26 Modified for all projects 26-4
STARTUP_TIMEOUT 26-3 Modified per project 26-6
STATE 23-3 Modified through configuration functions 26-2
Status Bar Global parameters, Editing 26-1
CimView 21-3 Global parameters, Sample File 26-20
Status log viewer Logical names, Descriptions 26-23
Displaying message details 25-7 Removing CIMPLICITY Software, Removing
Filtering messages 25-11 Windows 95 Registry Information 26-24
Finding messages 25-12 Removing CIMPLICITY Software, Removing
Finding the next message 25-13 Windows NT Registry Information 26-25
Help menu 25-5 Removing Registry Information 26-24
Log menu 25-4 System parameters
Menu options 25-4 Logical names See also Logical names
Printing the log file 25-9 Logical names, Editing the file 26-22

GFK-1180 Index xxv

System Recommendations 1-3 Start time for 4-27
System requirements Startup conditions for 4-28
Windows 95 on an Intel platform 1-4 Title Bar
Windows NT on DEC Alpha 1-3 CimView 21-3
Windows NT on Intel processors 1-3 Toggling Between Lists 20-46
System utilities Toolbar buttons
Using Program Control See Program control Database logger, Main window 16-15
System Utilities Status log viewer 25-5
About 24-1 Toolbar Buttons
Login panel See Login panel Alarm Viewer 20-27
Show Users See Show Users CimView 21-8
Configuration Cabinet 2-4
T Login panel 24-11
Show Users 24-5
Table attributes to be logged 16-22, 16-24 Toolbar buttons, Database logger, Table window 16-42
Table browser Toolbars
Database logger, From point configuration 16-10 CimView 21-3
Table characteristics Topics - CWSERV System Topic 23-12
Database logger 16-5, 27-11 Transaction log
Table list, Filtering Truncating as CIMPLICITY maintenance action
Database logger 16-30 27-10
Table properties Truncating as system default 27-10
Database logger 16-17 Transferring Licenses 1-20
Table, Adding points Diskette transfer 1-20
Database logger 16-42 Network Transfer 1-20
Table, Copying Trans-high accum points 4-31
Database logger 16-30 Equation for 4-32
Table, Creating Reset point for 4-31
Database loger 16-16 Startup condition for 4-32
Table, Deleting Trigger point for 4-32
Database logger 16-31 Trend report
Table, Reconciling Database logger 16-57
Database logger 16-32 Database logger, Clearing error log 16-59
Table, Removing points Database logger, Generating 16-59
Database loggger 16-42 Database logger, Setting parameters 16-58
Table, Renaming TRIG_CK_PT 19-31
Database logger 16-31 TRIG_PT 19-31
Testing the connection TRIG_REL 19-32
RAS 32-14 TRIG_VAL 19-32
Testing the connection, Ping Trigger an automatic report 16-62
RAS 32-14 Trigger event privilege 14-4
Testing the connection, Ping on client Trigger function
RAS 32-14 Device point interval trigger 4-41
Testing the connection, Ping on server Efficiency 4-41
RAS 32-14 Point update criteria 4-39
Testing the connections Using 4-39
Web gateway 33-4 Virtual point interval trigger 4-42
Text point types 4-4 Trigger point
Timed/gated logging Average points 4-20
Database logger, Logging conditions 16-21 Delta accum points 4-16
Timed/gated maintenance events 16-25 Equation point 4-14
Timer/counter points 4-26 Equation w/override points 4-34
Equation for 4-27 Histogram points 4-30
Interval for 4-27 Max capture points 4-22
Reset point for 4-27 Min capture points 4-24

xxvi CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180
 Trans-high accum points 4-32 Using array points 4-35
Value accum points 4-18 Using CIMPLICITY Software 2-1
Trigger point update criteria 4-39 Using CimView See CimView
Triggered maintenance events 16-25 Using client configuration 17-1
Troubleshooting Using CWSERV With Microsoft Excel 23-6
Web gateway 33-6 Using delta accum arrays 4-15
TYPE 23-4 Using the Alarm List Buttons 20-45
Types of alarming 4-43 Using the CIMPLICITY To Windows Server 23-1
Absolute alarming 4-43 Using the Project Wizard 2-7
Deviation alarming 4-44 Adding a new device 2-9
On update alarming 4-43 Adding a new point 2-10
Rate of change alarming 4-44 Adding a new port 2-7
Types of data conversion 4-45 Devices 2-8
Custom conversion 4-46 Modifying a device 2-9
Types of data Conversion Modifying a point 2-10
Integer vs. floating point engineering units for custom Modifying a port 2-8
conversion 4-46 Points 2-10
Linear conversion 4-45 Removing a device 2-9
Removing a point 2-10
U Removing a port 2-8
Step 1 of 3 2-7
Uninstall 1-21 Step 2 of 3 2-8
Unsolicited Step 3 of 3 2-10
Device point data collection 4-5 Using the Project WIzard
UPDATE_CRITERIA 19-32 Protocols and Ports 2-7
Upgrading CIMPLICITY software 1-18 Using the trigger functions 4-39
User Attributes Example 1 - device point interval trigger 4-41
Role Id 15-2 Example 2 - Efficiency 4-41
User Id 15-2 Example 3 - Virtual point interval trigger 4-42
User Name 15-2
User configuration 15-1
V
Creating a new user 15-4
Run-time login failures 15-3 validating project connections
Setting run-time user properties 15-3 Web gateway 33-4
User General Properties 15-5 Validating web connections
Password 15-5 Web gateway. 33-4
Password Needed 15-5 VALUE 23-3
Role 15-5 Value accum points 4-18
User Name 15-6 Equation for 4-18
User information Reset point for 4-19
Registering 1-15 Startup conditions for 4-19
User properties Trigger point for 4-18
Run-time 15-3 Variance
User Resource Properties 15-7 Delta accum points 4-17
Adding a single Resource 15-7 VARIANCE_VAL 19-32
Adding all Resource 15-7 VARS 19-33
Deleting a Resource 15-8 Version upgrades 1-19
Users View Alarms
About 15-1 Configuring the count color 20-29
Configuring 15-1 Configuring the count font 20-30
Default User 15-1 View menu
Roles and Privileges 15-1 Browser 3-3
Security 15-1 View Menu
View of Resources 15-1 Alarm Viewer 20-26
Using a Viewer 1-26 CimView 21-5

GFK-1180 Index xxvii

 Login panel 24-10 Error messages,
Show Users 24-3 #ERROR!SERVERNEEDSRESTART 33-7
Viewing Alarm Comments 20-47 Installation procedure 33-2
Viewing Alarms See Alarm Viewer Installing 33-1
Viewing log and error files 25-1 Project setup for 33-3
Viewing the Alarm Stack 20-47 Testing the connections 33-4
Viewing the Alarm’s CimView Screen 20-47 Troubleshooting and error messages 33-6
Viewing user properties for a resource 6-4 Troubleshoting custom HTML pages 33-6
Virtual point calculation types 4-6 Validating project connections 33-4
Average points 4-20 Validating web connections 33-4
Delta accum points 4-15 Web data control 33-8
Equation points 4-13 Web data control, Caption (read/write property) 33-8
Equation w/override points 4-33 Web data control, DiagException (read only property)
Global points 4-12 33-8
Histogram points 4-28 Web data control, DiagRawRequest (read only
Max Capture Points 4-22 property) 33-8
Min capture points 4-24 Web data control, DiagRawResponse (read only
Run-time notes 4-35 property) 33-8
Timer/counter points 4-26 Web data control, PointGet (method) 33-9
Trans-high accum points 4-31 Web data control, PointSet (method) 33-10
Value accum points 4-18 Web server requirements 33-2
Virtual point interval trigger 4-42 Web server requirements,
Virtual points Web gateway 33-2
Run-time notes 4-35 What You Receive 1-1
What’s Running 2-21
W Which status log file gets displayed 25-3
Wildcards
WARN_ENABLED 23-6 Database logger 16-4
WARN_HIGH 23-5 Wildcards, using
WARN_LOW 23-5 Browser 3-4
Warning high 4-50 Window buttons
Wave file configuration CimView 21-3
Alarm audio support 11-4 Window buttons, using
Alarm sound manager 11-6
W Window Components
CimView 21-2
Web gateway Window Pop-up Menu
About 33-1 CimView 21-8
Components 33-3 Windows 95
Error messages 33-6 Placing programs or documents in the Start Menu
Error messages, #ERROR!ARAYNOTALLOWED 1-23
33-6 Placing programs or documents on a desktop 1-23
Error messages, #ERROR!ARRAYOUTOFBOUNDS Removing CIMPLICITY software from 1-21
33-6 Windows NT
Error messages, #ERROR!BADSERVERRESPONSE Removing CIMPLICITY software from 1-21
33-6 Windows NT on Intel processors
Error messages, System requirements 1-3
#ERROR!CIMPLICITYNOTRUNNING 33-6
Error messages, #ERROR!INVALIDPOINTID 33-7
Error messages, #ERROR!NOTIMPLEMENTED
33-7
Error messages, #ERROR!NOTLICENSED 33-7
Error messages, #ERROR!POINTIDSYNTAX 33-7
Error messages, #ERROR!POINTUNAVAILABLE
33-7

xxviii CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User’s Manual GFK-1180